diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'docs/htmldocs')
45 files changed, 11780 insertions, 15391 deletions
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/ENCRYPTION.html b/docs/htmldocs/ENCRYPTION.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e4d3ef5fed --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/ENCRYPTION.html @@ -0,0 +1,656 @@ +<HTML +><HEAD +><TITLE +>LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba 2.x</TITLE +><META +NAME="GENERATOR" +CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.57"></HEAD +><BODY +CLASS="ARTICLE" +BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" +TEXT="#000000" +LINK="#0000FF" +VLINK="#840084" +ALINK="#0000FF" +><DIV +CLASS="ARTICLE" +><DIV +CLASS="TITLEPAGE" +><H1 +CLASS="TITLE" +><A +NAME="PWENCRYPT" +>LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba 2.x</A +></H1 +><HR></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN3" +>Introduction</A +></H1 +><P +>With the development of LanManager and Windows NT + compatible password encryption for Samba, it is now able + to validate user connections in exactly the same way as + a LanManager or Windows NT server.</P +><P +>This document describes how the SMB password encryption + algorithm works and what issues there are in choosing whether + you want to use it. You should read it carefully, especially + the part about security and the "PROS and CONS" section.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN7" +>How does it work?</A +></H1 +><P +>LanManager encryption is somewhat similar to UNIX + password encryption. The server uses a file containing a + hashed value of a user's password. This is created by taking + the user's plaintext password, capitalising it, and either + truncating to 14 bytes or padding to 14 bytes with null bytes. + This 14 byte value is used as two 56 bit DES keys to encrypt + a 'magic' eight byte value, forming a 16 byte value which is + stored by the server and client. Let this value be known as + the "hashed password".</P +><P +>Windows NT encryption is a higher quality mechanism, + consisting of doing an MD4 hash on a Unicode version of the user's + password. This also produces a 16 byte hash value that is + non-reversible.</P +><P +>When a client (LanManager, Windows for WorkGroups, Windows + 95 or Windows NT) wishes to mount a Samba drive (or use a Samba + resource), it first requests a connection and negotiates the + protocol that the client and server will use. In the reply to this + request the Samba server generates and appends an 8 byte, random + value - this is stored in the Samba server after the reply is sent + and is known as the "challenge". The challenge is different for + every client connection.</P +><P +>The client then uses the hashed password (16 byte values + described above), appended with 5 null bytes, as three 56 bit + DES keys, each of which is used to encrypt the challenge 8 byte + value, forming a 24 byte value known as the "response".</P +><P +>In the SMB call SMBsessionsetupX (when user level security + is selected) or the call SMBtconX (when share level security is + selected), the 24 byte response is returned by the client to the + Samba server. For Windows NT protocol levels the above calculation + is done on both hashes of the user's password and both responses are + returned in the SMB call, giving two 24 byte values.</P +><P +>The Samba server then reproduces the above calculation, using + its own stored value of the 16 byte hashed password (read from the + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smbpasswd</TT +> file - described later) and the challenge + value that it kept from the negotiate protocol reply. It then checks + to see if the 24 byte value it calculates matches the 24 byte value + returned to it from the client.</P +><P +>If these values match exactly, then the client knew the + correct password (or the 16 byte hashed value - see security note + below) and is thus allowed access. If not, then the client did not + know the correct password and is denied access.</P +><P +>Note that the Samba server never knows or stores the cleartext + of the user's password - just the 16 byte hashed values derived from + it. Also note that the cleartext password or 16 byte hashed values + are never transmitted over the network - thus increasing security.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN18" +>Important Notes About Security</A +></H1 +><P +>The unix and SMB password encryption techniques seem similar + on the surface. This similarity is, however, only skin deep. The unix + scheme typically sends clear text passwords over the network when + logging in. This is bad. The SMB encryption scheme never sends the + cleartext password over the network but it does store the 16 byte + hashed values on disk. This is also bad. Why? Because the 16 byte hashed + values are a "password equivalent". You cannot derive the user's + password from them, but they could potentially be used in a modified + client to gain access to a server. This would require considerable + technical knowledge on behalf of the attacker but is perfectly possible. + You should thus treat the smbpasswd file as though it contained the + cleartext passwords of all your users. Its contents must be kept + secret, and the file should be protected accordingly.</P +><P +>Ideally we would like a password scheme which neither requires + plain text passwords on the net or on disk. Unfortunately this + is not available as Samba is stuck with being compatible with + other SMB systems (WinNT, WfWg, Win95 etc). </P +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +BORDER="1" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>Warning</B +></TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +><P +>Note that Windows NT 4.0 Service pack 3 changed the + default for permissible authentication so that plaintext + passwords are <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>never</I +> sent over the wire. + The solution to this is either to switch to encrypted passwords + with Samba or edit the Windows NT registry to re-enable plaintext + passwords. See the document WinNT.txt for details on how to do + this.</P +><P +>Other Microsoft operating systems which also exhibit + this behavior includes</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>MS DOS Network client 3.0 with + the basic network redirector installed</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Windows 95 with the network redirector + update installed</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Windows 98 [se]</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Windows 2000</P +></LI +></UL +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note :</I +>All current release of + Microsoft SMB/CIFS clients support authentication via the + SMB Challenge/Response mechanism described here. Enabling + clear text authentication does not disable the ability + of the client to participate in encrypted authentication.</P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN37" +>Advantages of SMB Encryption</A +></H2 +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>plain text passwords are not passed across + the network. Someone using a network sniffer cannot just + record passwords going to the SMB server.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>WinNT doesn't like talking to a server + that isn't using SMB encrypted passwords. It will refuse + to browse the server if the server is also in user level + security mode. It will insist on prompting the user for the + password on each connection, which is very annoying. The + only things you can do to stop this is to use SMB encryption. + </P +></LI +></UL +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN44" +>Advantages of non-encrypted passwords</A +></H2 +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>plain text passwords are not kept + on disk. </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>uses same password file as other unix + services such as login and ftp</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>you are probably already using other + services (such as telnet and ftp) which send plain text + passwords over the net, so sending them for SMB isn't + such a big deal.</P +></LI +></UL +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN53" +><A +NAME="SMBPASSWDFILEFORMAT" +></A +>The smbpasswd file</A +></H1 +><P +>In order for Samba to participate in the above protocol + it must be able to look up the 16 byte hashed values given a user name. + Unfortunately, as the UNIX password value is also a one way hash + function (ie. it is impossible to retrieve the cleartext of the user's + password given the UNIX hash of it), a separate password file + containing this 16 byte value must be kept. To minimise problems with + these two password files, getting out of sync, the UNIX <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +> /etc/passwd</TT +> and the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smbpasswd</TT +> file, + a utility, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>mksmbpasswd.sh</B +>, is provided to generate + a smbpasswd file from a UNIX <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +> file. + </P +><P +>To generate the smbpasswd file from your <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd + </TT +> file use the following command :</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>$ </TT +><TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +>cat /etc/passwd | mksmbpasswd.sh + > /usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd</B +></TT +></P +><P +>If you are running on a system that uses NIS, use</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>$ </TT +><TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +>ypcat passwd | mksmbpasswd.sh + > /usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd</B +></TT +></P +><P +>The <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>mksmbpasswd.sh</B +> program is found in + the Samba source directory. By default, the smbpasswd file is + stored in :</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd</TT +></P +><P +>The owner of the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/usr/local/samba/private/</TT +> + directory should be set to root, and the permissions on it should + be set to 0500 (<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>chmod 500 /usr/local/samba/private</B +>). + </P +><P +>Likewise, the smbpasswd file inside the private directory should + be owned by root and the permissions on is should be set to 0600 + (<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>chmod 600 smbpasswd</B +>).</P +><P +>The format of the smbpasswd file is (The line has been + wrapped here. It should appear as one entry per line in + your smbpasswd file.)</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>username:uid:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX: + [Account type]:LCT-<last-change-time>:Long name + </PRE +></P +><P +>Although only the <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>username</I +></TT +>, + <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>uid</I +></TT +>, <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX</I +></TT +>, + [<TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>Account type</I +></TT +>] and <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +> last-change-time</I +></TT +> sections are significant + and are looked at in the Samba code.</P +><P +>It is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>VITALLY</I +> important that there by 32 + 'X' characters between the two ':' characters in the XXX sections - + the smbpasswd and Samba code will fail to validate any entries that + do not have 32 characters between ':' characters. The first XXX + section is for the Lanman password hash, the second is for the + Windows NT version.</P +><P +>When the password file is created all users have password entries + consisting of 32 'X' characters. By default this disallows any access + as this user. When a user has a password set, the 'X' characters change + to 32 ascii hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F). These are an ascii + representation of the 16 byte hashed value of a user's password.</P +><P +>To set a user to have no password (not recommended), edit the file + using vi, and replace the first 11 characters with the ascii text + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>"NO PASSWORD"</TT +> (minus the quotes).</P +><P +>For example, to clear the password for user bob, his smbpasswd file + entry would look like :</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> bob:100:NO PASSWORDXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX:[U ]:LCT-00000000:Bob's full name:/bobhome:/bobshell + </PRE +></P +><P +>If you are allowing users to use the smbpasswd command to set + their own passwords, you may want to give users NO PASSWORD initially + so they do not have to enter a previous password when changing to their + new password (not recommended). In order for you to allow this the + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd</B +> program must be able to connect to the + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> daemon as that user with no password. Enable this + by adding the line :</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>null passwords = yes</B +></P +><P +>to the [global] section of the smb.conf file (this is why + the above scenario is not recommended). Preferably, allocate your + users a default password to begin with, so you do not have + to enable this on your server.</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Note : </I +>This file should be protected very + carefully. Anyone with access to this file can (with enough knowledge of + the protocols) gain access to your SMB server. The file is thus more + sensitive than a normal unix <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +> file.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN105" +>The smbpasswd Command</A +></H1 +><P +>The smbpasswd command maintains the two 32 byte password fields + in the smbpasswd file. If you wish to make it similar to the unix + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passwd</B +> or <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>yppasswd</B +> programs, + install it in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/usr/local/samba/bin/</TT +> (or your + main Samba binary directory).</P +><P +>Note that as of Samba 1.9.18p4 this program <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>MUST NOT + BE INSTALLED</I +> setuid root (the new <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd</B +> + code enforces this restriction so it cannot be run this way by + accident).</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd</B +> now works in a client-server mode + where it contacts the local smbd to change the user's password on its + behalf. This has enormous benefits - as follows.</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>smbpasswd no longer has to be setuid root - + an enormous range of potential security problems is + eliminated.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd</B +> now has the capability + to change passwords on Windows NT servers (this only works when + the request is sent to the NT Primary Domain Controller if you + are changing an NT Domain user's password).</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>To run smbpasswd as a normal user just type :</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>$ </TT +><TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +>smbpasswd</B +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>Old SMB password: </TT +><TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +><type old value here - + or hit return if there was no old password></B +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>New SMB Password: </TT +><TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +><type new value> + </B +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>Repeat New SMB Password: </TT +><TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +><re-type new value + </B +></TT +></P +><P +>If the old value does not match the current value stored for + that user, or the two new values do not match each other, then the + password will not be changed.</P +><P +>If invoked by an ordinary user it will only allow the user + to change his or her own Samba password.</P +><P +>If run by the root user smbpasswd may take an optional + argument, specifying the user name whose SMB password you wish to + change. Note that when run as root smbpasswd does not prompt for + or check the old password value, thus allowing root to set passwords + for users who have forgotten their passwords.</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd</B +> is designed to work in the same way + and be familiar to UNIX users who use the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passwd</B +> or + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>yppasswd</B +> commands.</P +><P +>For more details on using <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd</B +> refer + to the man page which will always be the definitive reference.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN144" +>Setting up Samba to support LanManager Encryption</A +></H1 +><P +>This is a very brief description on how to setup samba to + support password encryption. </P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +>compile and install samba as usual</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>enable encrypted passwords in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +> smb.conf</TT +> by adding the line <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>encrypt + passwords = yes</B +> in the [global] section</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>create the initial <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smbpasswd</TT +> + password file in the place you specified in the Makefile + (--prefix=<dir>). See the notes under the <A +HREF="#SMBPASSWDFILEFORMAT" +>The smbpasswd File</A +> + section earlier in the document for details.</P +></LI +></OL +><P +>Note that you can test things using smbclient.</P +></DIV +></DIV +></BODY +></HTML +>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/NT_Security.html b/docs/htmldocs/NT_Security.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ab8797563e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/NT_Security.html @@ -0,0 +1,783 @@ +<HTML +><HEAD +><TITLE +>UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</TITLE +><META +NAME="GENERATOR" +CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.57"></HEAD +><BODY +CLASS="ARTICLE" +BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" +TEXT="#000000" +LINK="#0000FF" +VLINK="#840084" +ALINK="#0000FF" +><DIV +CLASS="ARTICLE" +><DIV +CLASS="TITLEPAGE" +><H1 +CLASS="TITLE" +><A +NAME="UNIX-PERMISSIONS" +>UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</A +></H1 +><HR></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN3" +>Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT + security dialogs</A +></H1 +><P +>New in the Samba 2.0.4 release is the ability for Windows + NT clients to use their native security settings dialog box to + view and modify the underlying UNIX permissions.</P +><P +>Note that this ability is careful not to compromise + the security of the UNIX host Samba is running on, and + still obeys all the file permission rules that a Samba + administrator can set.</P +><P +>In Samba 2.0.4 and above the default value of the + parameter <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#NTACLSUPPORT" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> nt acl support</I +></TT +></A +> has been changed from + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>, so + manipulation of permissions is turned on by default.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN12" +>How to view file security on a Samba share</A +></H1 +><P +>From an NT 4.0 client, single-click with the right + mouse button on any file or directory in a Samba mounted + drive letter or UNC path. When the menu pops-up, click + on the <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Properties</I +> entry at the bottom of + the menu. This brings up the normal file properties dialog + box, but with Samba 2.0.4 this will have a new tab along the top + marked <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Security</I +>. Click on this tab and you + will see three buttons, <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Permissions</I +>, + <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Auditing</I +>, and <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Ownership</I +>. + The <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Auditing</I +> button will cause either + an error message <SPAN +CLASS="ERRORNAME" +>A requested privilege is not held + by the client</SPAN +> to appear if the user is not the + NT Administrator, or a dialog which is intended to allow an + Administrator to add auditing requirements to a file if the + user is logged on as the NT Administrator. This dialog is + non-functional with a Samba share at this time, as the only + useful button, the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>Add</B +> button will not currently + allow a list of users to be seen.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN23" +>Viewing file ownership</A +></H1 +><P +>Clicking on the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Ownership"</B +> button + brings up a dialog box telling you who owns the given file. The + owner name will be of the form :</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"SERVER\user (Long name)"</B +></P +><P +>Where <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>SERVER</I +></TT +> is the NetBIOS name of + the Samba server, <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>user</I +></TT +> is the user name of + the UNIX user who owns the file, and <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>(Long name)</I +></TT +> + is the descriptive string identifying the user (normally found in the + GECOS field of the UNIX password database). Click on the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>Close + </B +> button to remove this dialog.</P +><P +>If the parameter <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>nt acl support</I +></TT +> + is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> then the file owner will + be shown as the NT user <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Everyone"</B +>.</P +><P +>The <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>Take Ownership</B +> button will not allow + you to change the ownership of this file to yourself (clicking on + it will display a dialog box complaining that the user you are + currently logged onto the NT client cannot be found). The reason + for this is that changing the ownership of a file is a privileged + operation in UNIX, available only to the <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>root</I +> + user. As clicking on this button causes NT to attempt to change + the ownership of a file to the current user logged into the NT + client this will not work with Samba at this time.</P +><P +>There is an NT chown command that will work with Samba + and allow a user with Administrator privilege connected + to a Samba 2.0.4 server as root to change the ownership of + files on both a local NTFS filesystem or remote mounted NTFS + or Samba drive. This is available as part of the <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Seclib + </I +> NT security library written by Jeremy Allison of + the Samba Team, available from the main Samba ftp site.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN43" +>Viewing file or directory permissions</A +></H1 +><P +>The third button is the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Permissions"</B +> + button. Clicking on this brings up a dialog box that shows both + the permissions and the UNIX owner of the file or directory. + The owner is displayed in the form :</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"SERVER\user (Long name)"</B +></P +><P +>Where <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>SERVER</I +></TT +> is the NetBIOS name of + the Samba server, <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>user</I +></TT +> is the user name of + the UNIX user who owns the file, and <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>(Long name)</I +></TT +> + is the descriptive string identifying the user (normally found in the + GECOS field of the UNIX password database).</P +><P +>If the parameter <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>nt acl support</I +></TT +> + is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> then the file owner will + be shown as the NT user <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Everyone"</B +> and the + permissions will be shown as NT "Full Control".</P +><P +>The permissions field is displayed differently for files + and directories, so I'll describe the way file permissions + are displayed first.</P +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN58" +>File Permissions</A +></H2 +><P +>The standard UNIX user/group/world triple and + the corresponding "read", "write", "execute" permissions + triples are mapped by Samba into a three element NT ACL + with the 'r', 'w', and 'x' bits mapped into the corresponding + NT permissions. The UNIX world permissions are mapped into + the global NT group <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>Everyone</B +>, followed + by the list of permissions allowed for UNIX world. The UNIX + owner and group permissions are displayed as an NT + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>user</B +> icon and an NT <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>local + group</B +> icon respectively followed by the list + of permissions allowed for the UNIX user and group.</P +><P +>As many UNIX permission sets don't map into common + NT names such as <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"read"</B +>, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> "change"</B +> or <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"full control"</B +> then + usually the permissions will be prefixed by the words <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> "Special Access"</B +> in the NT display list.</P +><P +>But what happens if the file has no permissions allowed + for a particular UNIX user group or world component ? In order + to allow "no permissions" to be seen and modified then Samba + overloads the NT <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Take Ownership"</B +> ACL attribute + (which has no meaning in UNIX) and reports a component with + no permissions as having the NT <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"O"</B +> bit set. + This was chosen of course to make it look like a zero, meaning + zero permissions. More details on the decision behind this will + be given below.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN72" +>Directory Permissions</A +></H2 +><P +>Directories on an NT NTFS file system have two + different sets of permissions. The first set of permissions + is the ACL set on the directory itself, this is usually displayed + in the first set of parentheses in the normal <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"RW"</B +> + NT style. This first set of permissions is created by Samba in + exactly the same way as normal file permissions are, described + above, and is displayed in the same way.</P +><P +>The second set of directory permissions has no real meaning + in the UNIX permissions world and represents the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> "inherited"</B +> permissions that any file created within + this directory would inherit.</P +><P +>Samba synthesises these inherited permissions for NT by + returning as an NT ACL the UNIX permission mode that a new file + created by Samba on this share would receive.</P +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN79" +>Modifying file or directory permissions</A +></H1 +><P +>Modifying file and directory permissions is as simple + as changing the displayed permissions in the dialog box, and + clicking the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>OK</B +> button. However, there are + limitations that a user needs to be aware of, and also interactions + with the standard Samba permission masks and mapping of DOS + attributes that need to also be taken into account.</P +><P +>If the parameter <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>nt acl support</I +></TT +> + is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> then any attempt to set + security permissions will fail with an <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Access Denied" + </B +> message.</P +><P +>The first thing to note is that the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Add"</B +> + button will not return a list of users in Samba 2.0.4 (it will give + an error message of <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"The remote procedure call failed + and did not execute"</B +>). This means that you can only + manipulate the current user/group/world permissions listed in + the dialog box. This actually works quite well as these are the + only permissions that UNIX actually has.</P +><P +>If a permission triple (either user, group, or world) + is removed from the list of permissions in the NT dialog box, + then when the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"OK"</B +> button is pressed it will + be applied as "no permissions" on the UNIX side. If you then + view the permissions again the "no permissions" entry will appear + as the NT <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"O"</B +> flag, as described above. This + allows you to add permissions back to a file or directory once + you have removed them from a triple component.</P +><P +>As UNIX supports only the "r", "w" and "x" bits of + an NT ACL then if other NT security attributes such as "Delete + access" are selected then they will be ignored when applied on + the Samba server.</P +><P +>When setting permissions on a directory the second + set of permissions (in the second set of parentheses) is + by default applied to all files within that directory. If this + is not what you want you must uncheck the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Replace + permissions on existing files"</B +> checkbox in the NT + dialog before clicking <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"OK"</B +>.</P +><P +>If you wish to remove all permissions from a + user/group/world component then you may either highlight the + component and click the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Remove"</B +> button, + or set the component to only have the special <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Take + Ownership"</B +> permission (displayed as <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"O" + </B +>) highlighted.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN101" +>Interaction with the standard Samba create mask + parameters</A +></H1 +><P +>Note that with Samba 2.0.5 there are four new parameters + to control this interaction. These are :</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security mask</I +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force security mode</I +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory security mask</I +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory security mode</I +></TT +></P +><P +>Once a user clicks <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"OK"</B +> to apply the + permissions Samba maps the given permissions into a user/group/world + r/w/x triple set, and then will check the changed permissions for a + file against the bits set in the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITYMASK" +TARGET="_top" +> + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security mask</I +></TT +></A +> parameter. Any bits that + were changed that are not set to '1' in this parameter are left alone + in the file permissions.</P +><P +>Essentially, zero bits in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security mask</I +></TT +> + mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>not</I +> + allowed to change, and one bits are those the user is allowed to change. + </P +><P +>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same value as + the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter to provide compatibility with Samba 2.0.4 + where this permission change facility was introduced. To allow a user to + modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file, set this parameter + to 0777.</P +><P +>Next Samba checks the changed permissions for a file against + the bits set in the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#FORCESECURITYMODE" +TARGET="_top" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force security mode</I +></TT +></A +> parameter. Any bits + that were changed that correspond to bits set to '1' in this parameter + are forced to be set.</P +><P +>Essentially, bits set in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force security mode + </I +></TT +> parameter may be treated as a set of bits that, when + modifying security on a file, the user has always set to be 'on'.</P +><P +>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same value + as the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#FORCECREATEMODE" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force + create mode</I +></TT +></A +> parameter to provide compatibility + with Samba 2.0.4 where the permission change facility was introduced. + To allow a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file + with no restrictions set this parameter to 000.</P +><P +>The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security mask</I +></TT +> and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force + security mode</I +></TT +> parameters are applied to the change + request in that order.</P +><P +>For a directory Samba will perform the same operations as + described above for a file except using the parameter <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> directory security mask</I +></TT +> instead of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security + mask</I +></TT +>, and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory security mode + </I +></TT +> parameter instead of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force security mode + </I +></TT +>.</P +><P +>The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory security mask</I +></TT +> parameter + by default is set to the same value as the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory mask + </I +></TT +> parameter and the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory security + mode</I +></TT +> parameter by default is set to the same value as + the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory mode</I +></TT +> parameter to provide + compatibility with Samba 2.0.4 where the permission change facility + was introduced.</P +><P +>In this way Samba enforces the permission restrictions that + an administrator can set on a Samba share, whilst still allowing users + to modify the permission bits within that restriction.</P +><P +>If you want to set up a share that allows users full control + in modifying the permission bits on their files and directories and + doesn't force any particular bits to be set 'on', then set the following + parameters in the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf(5) + </TT +></A +> file in that share specific section :</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security mask = 0777</I +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force security mode = 0</I +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory security mask = 0777</I +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory security mode = 0</I +></TT +></P +><P +>As described, in Samba 2.0.4 the parameters :</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force create mode</I +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory mask</I +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory mode</I +></TT +></P +><P +>were used instead of the parameters discussed here.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN165" +>Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute + mapping</A +></H1 +><P +>Samba maps some of the DOS attribute bits (such as "read + only") into the UNIX permissions of a file. This means there can + be a conflict between the permission bits set via the security + dialog and the permission bits set by the file attribute mapping. + </P +><P +>One way this can show up is if a file has no UNIX read access + for the owner it will show up as "read only" in the standard + file attributes tabbed dialog. Unfortunately this dialog is + the same one that contains the security info in another tab.</P +><P +>What this can mean is that if the owner changes the permissions + to allow themselves read access using the security dialog, clicks + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"OK"</B +> to get back to the standard attributes tab + dialog, and then clicks <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"OK"</B +> on that dialog, then + NT will set the file permissions back to read-only (as that is what + the attributes still say in the dialog). This means that after setting + permissions and clicking <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"OK"</B +> to get back to the + attributes dialog you should always hit <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Cancel"</B +> + rather than <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"OK"</B +> to ensure that your changes + are not overridden.</P +></DIV +></DIV +></BODY +></HTML +>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/Samba-Developers-Guide.html b/docs/htmldocs/Samba-Developers-Guide.html index b90d99bf66..7c008667af 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/Samba-Developers-Guide.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/Samba-Developers-Guide.html @@ -1,11 +1,12 @@ -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN"> <HTML ><HEAD ><TITLE >SAMBA Developers Guide</TITLE ><META NAME="GENERATOR" -CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"></HEAD +CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.76b+ +"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="BOOK" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -16,35 +17,24 @@ ALINK="#0000FF" ><DIV CLASS="BOOK" ><A -NAME="SAMBA-DEVELOPERS-GUIDE" -></A -><DIV +NAME="SAMBA-DEVELOPER-DOCUMENTATION"><DIV CLASS="TITLEPAGE" ><H1 CLASS="TITLE" ><A -NAME="SAMBA-DEVELOPERS-GUIDE" -></A ->SAMBA Developers Guide</H1 +NAME="SAMBA-DEVELOPER-DOCUMENTATION">SAMBA Developers Guide</H1 ><H3 CLASS="AUTHOR" ><A -NAME="AEN4" -></A ->SAMBA Team</H3 +NAME="AEN4">SAMBA Team</H3 ><HR></DIV ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="AEN8" -></A ->Abstract</H1 +NAME="AEN8">Abstract</H1 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Last Update</I -></SPAN > : Mon Sep 30 15:23:53 CDT 2002</P ><P >This book is a collection of documents that might be useful for @@ -78,109 +68,109 @@ CLASS="TOC" >Table of Contents</B ></DT ><DT ->1. <A +><A HREF="#NETBIOS" >Definition of NetBIOS Protocol and Name Resolution Modes</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->1.1. <A +><A HREF="#AEN24" >NETBIOS</A ></DT ><DT ->1.2. <A +><A HREF="#AEN35" >BROADCAST NetBIOS</A ></DT ><DT ->1.3. <A +><A HREF="#AEN39" >NBNS NetBIOS</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->2. <A +><A HREF="#ARCHITECTURE" >Samba Architecture</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->2.1. <A +><A HREF="#AEN54" >Introduction</A ></DT ><DT ->2.2. <A +><A HREF="#AEN65" >Multithreading and Samba</A ></DT ><DT ->2.3. <A +><A HREF="#AEN70" >Threading smbd</A ></DT ><DT ->2.4. <A +><A HREF="#AEN86" >Threading nmbd</A ></DT ><DT ->2.5. <A +><A HREF="#AEN92" >nbmd Design</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->3. <A +><A HREF="#DEBUG" >The samba DEBUG system</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->3.1. <A +><A HREF="#AEN103" >New Output Syntax</A ></DT ><DT ->3.2. <A +><A HREF="#AEN128" >The DEBUG() Macro</A ></DT ><DT ->3.3. <A +><A HREF="#AEN151" >The DEBUGADD() Macro</A ></DT ><DT ->3.4. <A +><A HREF="#AEN159" >The DEBUGLVL() Macro</A ></DT ><DT ->3.5. <A +><A HREF="#AEN179" >New Functions</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->3.5.1. <A +><A HREF="#AEN181" >dbgtext()</A ></DT ><DT ->3.5.2. <A +><A HREF="#AEN184" >dbghdr()</A ></DT ><DT ->3.5.3. <A +><A HREF="#AEN188" >format_debug_text()</A ></DT @@ -189,177 +179,177 @@ HREF="#AEN188" ></DL ></DD ><DT ->4. <A +><A HREF="#CODINGSUGGESTIONS" >Coding Suggestions</A ></DT ><DT ->5. <A +><A HREF="#INTERNALS" >Samba Internals</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->5.1. <A +><A HREF="#AEN284" >Character Handling</A ></DT ><DT ->5.2. <A +><A HREF="#AEN288" >The new functions</A ></DT ><DT ->5.3. <A +><A HREF="#AEN317" >Macros in byteorder.h</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->5.3.1. <A +><A HREF="#AEN320" >CVAL(buf,pos)</A ></DT ><DT ->5.3.2. <A +><A HREF="#AEN323" >PVAL(buf,pos)</A ></DT ><DT ->5.3.3. <A +><A HREF="#AEN326" >SCVAL(buf,pos,val)</A ></DT ><DT ->5.3.4. <A +><A HREF="#AEN329" >SVAL(buf,pos)</A ></DT ><DT ->5.3.5. <A +><A HREF="#AEN332" >IVAL(buf,pos)</A ></DT ><DT ->5.3.6. <A +><A HREF="#AEN335" >SVALS(buf,pos)</A ></DT ><DT ->5.3.7. <A +><A HREF="#AEN338" >IVALS(buf,pos)</A ></DT ><DT ->5.3.8. <A +><A HREF="#AEN341" >SSVAL(buf,pos,val)</A ></DT ><DT ->5.3.9. <A +><A HREF="#AEN344" >SIVAL(buf,pos,val)</A ></DT ><DT ->5.3.10. <A +><A HREF="#AEN347" >SSVALS(buf,pos,val)</A ></DT ><DT ->5.3.11. <A +><A HREF="#AEN350" >SIVALS(buf,pos,val)</A ></DT ><DT ->5.3.12. <A +><A HREF="#AEN353" >RSVAL(buf,pos)</A ></DT ><DT ->5.3.13. <A +><A HREF="#AEN356" >RIVAL(buf,pos)</A ></DT ><DT ->5.3.14. <A +><A HREF="#AEN359" >RSSVAL(buf,pos,val)</A ></DT ><DT ->5.3.15. <A +><A HREF="#AEN362" >RSIVAL(buf,pos,val)</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->5.4. <A +><A HREF="#AEN365" >LAN Manager Samba API</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->5.4.1. <A +><A HREF="#AEN371" >Parameters</A ></DT ><DT ->5.4.2. <A +><A HREF="#AEN406" >Return value</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->5.5. <A +><A HREF="#AEN420" >Code character table</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->6. <A +><A HREF="#PARSING" >The smb.conf file</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->6.1. <A +><A HREF="#AEN451" >Lexical Analysis</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->6.1.1. <A +><A HREF="#AEN472" >Handling of Whitespace</A ></DT ><DT ->6.1.2. <A +><A HREF="#AEN484" >Handling of Line Continuation</A ></DT ><DT ->6.1.3. <A +><A HREF="#AEN495" >Line Continuation Quirks</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->6.2. <A +><A HREF="#AEN515" >Syntax</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->6.2.1. <A +><A HREF="#AEN530" >About params.c</A ></DT @@ -368,294 +358,294 @@ HREF="#AEN530" ></DL ></DD ><DT ->7. <A +><A HREF="#UNIX-SMB" >NetBIOS in a Unix World</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->7.1. <A +><A HREF="#AEN540" >Introduction</A ></DT ><DT ->7.2. <A +><A HREF="#AEN544" >Usernames</A ></DT ><DT ->7.3. <A +><A HREF="#AEN552" >File Ownership</A ></DT ><DT ->7.4. <A +><A HREF="#AEN557" >Passwords</A ></DT ><DT ->7.5. <A +><A HREF="#AEN563" >Locking</A ></DT ><DT ->7.6. <A -HREF="#AEN571" +><A +HREF="#AEN570" >Deny Modes</A ></DT ><DT ->7.7. <A -HREF="#AEN575" +><A +HREF="#AEN574" >Trapdoor UIDs</A ></DT ><DT ->7.8. <A -HREF="#AEN579" +><A +HREF="#AEN578" >Port numbers</A ></DT ><DT ->7.9. <A -HREF="#AEN584" +><A +HREF="#AEN583" >Protocol Complexity</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->8. <A +><A HREF="#TRACING" >Tracing samba system calls</A ></DT ><DT ->9. <A +><A HREF="#NTDOMAIN" >NT Domain RPC's</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->9.1. <A -HREF="#AEN652" +><A +HREF="#AEN651" >Introduction</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->9.1.1. <A -HREF="#AEN688" +><A +HREF="#AEN687" >Sources</A ></DT ><DT ->9.1.2. <A -HREF="#AEN695" +><A +HREF="#AEN694" >Credits</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->9.2. <A -HREF="#AEN702" +><A +HREF="#AEN701" >Notes and Structures</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->9.2.1. <A -HREF="#AEN704" +><A +HREF="#AEN703" >Notes</A ></DT ><DT ->9.2.2. <A -HREF="#AEN717" +><A +HREF="#AEN716" >Enumerations</A ></DT ><DT ->9.2.3. <A -HREF="#AEN775" +><A +HREF="#AEN774" >Structures</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->9.3. <A -HREF="#AEN1571" +><A +HREF="#AEN1570" >MSRPC over Transact Named Pipe</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->9.3.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1574" +><A +HREF="#AEN1573" >MSRPC Pipes</A ></DT ><DT ->9.3.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1588" +><A +HREF="#AEN1587" >Header</A ></DT ><DT ->9.3.3. <A -HREF="#AEN1842" +><A +HREF="#AEN1841" >Tail</A ></DT ><DT ->9.3.4. <A -HREF="#AEN1854" +><A +HREF="#AEN1853" >RPC Bind / Bind Ack</A ></DT ><DT ->9.3.5. <A -HREF="#AEN1898" +><A +HREF="#AEN1897" >NTLSA Transact Named Pipe</A ></DT ><DT ->9.3.6. <A -HREF="#AEN1939" +><A +HREF="#AEN1938" >LSA Open Policy</A ></DT ><DT ->9.3.7. <A -HREF="#AEN1973" +><A +HREF="#AEN1972" >LSA Query Info Policy</A ></DT ><DT ->9.3.8. <A -HREF="#AEN2001" +><A +HREF="#AEN2000" >LSA Enumerate Trusted Domains</A ></DT ><DT ->9.3.9. <A -HREF="#AEN2025" +><A +HREF="#AEN2024" >LSA Open Secret</A ></DT ><DT ->9.3.10. <A -HREF="#AEN2054" +><A +HREF="#AEN2053" >LSA Close</A ></DT ><DT ->9.3.11. <A -HREF="#AEN2071" +><A +HREF="#AEN2070" >LSA Lookup SIDS</A ></DT ><DT ->9.3.12. <A -HREF="#AEN2130" +><A +HREF="#AEN2129" >LSA Lookup Names</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->9.4. <A -HREF="#AEN2193" +><A +HREF="#AEN2192" >NETLOGON rpc Transact Named Pipe</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->9.4.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2232" +><A +HREF="#AEN2231" >LSA Request Challenge</A ></DT ><DT ->9.4.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2267" +><A +HREF="#AEN2266" >LSA Authenticate 2</A ></DT ><DT ->9.4.3. <A -HREF="#AEN2306" +><A +HREF="#AEN2305" >LSA Server Password Set</A ></DT ><DT ->9.4.4. <A -HREF="#AEN2335" +><A +HREF="#AEN2334" >LSA SAM Logon</A ></DT ><DT ->9.4.5. <A -HREF="#AEN2359" +><A +HREF="#AEN2358" >LSA SAM Logoff</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->9.5. <A -HREF="#AEN2382" +><A +HREF="#AEN2381" >\\MAILSLOT\NET\NTLOGON</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->9.5.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2386" +><A +HREF="#AEN2385" >Query for PDC</A ></DT ><DT ->9.5.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2460" +><A +HREF="#AEN2459" >SAM Logon</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->9.6. <A -HREF="#AEN2550" +><A +HREF="#AEN2549" >SRVSVC Transact Named Pipe</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->9.6.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2562" +><A +HREF="#AEN2561" >Net Share Enum</A ></DT ><DT ->9.6.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2623" +><A +HREF="#AEN2622" >Net Server Get Info</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->9.7. <A -HREF="#AEN2654" +><A +HREF="#AEN2653" >Cryptographic side of NT Domain Authentication</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->9.7.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2656" +><A +HREF="#AEN2655" >Definitions</A ></DT ><DT ->9.7.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2699" +><A +HREF="#AEN2698" >Protocol</A ></DT ><DT ->9.7.3. <A -HREF="#AEN2709" +><A +HREF="#AEN2708" >Comments</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->9.8. <A -HREF="#AEN2716" +><A +HREF="#AEN2715" >SIDs and RIDs</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->9.8.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2724" +><A +HREF="#AEN2723" >Well-known SIDs</A ></DT ><DT ->9.8.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2812" +><A +HREF="#AEN2811" >Well-known RIDS</A ></DT ></DL @@ -663,154 +653,50 @@ HREF="#AEN2812" ></DL ></DD ><DT ->10. <A +><A HREF="#PRINTING" >Samba Printing Internals</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->10.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2896" +><A +HREF="#AEN2895" >Abstract</A ></DT ><DT ->10.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2899" +><A +HREF="#AEN2898" >Printing Interface to Various Back ends</A ></DT ><DT ->10.3. <A -HREF="#AEN2925" +><A +HREF="#AEN2924" >Print Queue TDB's</A ></DT ><DT ->10.4. <A -HREF="#AEN2959" +><A +HREF="#AEN2958" >ChangeID & Client Caching of Printer Information</A ></DT ><DT ->10.5. <A -HREF="#AEN2962" +><A +HREF="#AEN2961" >Windows NT/2K Printer Change Notify</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->11. <A +><A HREF="#WINS" >Samba WINS Internals</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->11.1. <A -HREF="#AEN3033" ->WINS Failover</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->12. <A -HREF="#SAM" ->The Upcoming SAM System</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->12.1. <A -HREF="#AEN3054" ->Security in the 'new SAM'</A -></DT -><DT ->12.2. <A -HREF="#AEN3071" ->Standalone from UNIX</A -></DT -><DT ->12.3. <A -HREF="#AEN3075" ->Handles and Races in the new SAM</A -></DT -><DT ->12.4. <A -HREF="#AEN3086" ->Layers</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->12.4.1. <A -HREF="#AEN3088" ->Application</A -></DT -><DT ->12.4.2. <A -HREF="#AEN3091" ->SAM Interface</A -></DT -><DT ->12.4.3. <A -HREF="#AEN3095" ->SAM Modules</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->12.5. <A -HREF="#AEN3098" ->SAM Modules</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->12.5.1. <A -HREF="#AEN3100" ->Special Module: sam_passdb</A -></DT -><DT ->12.5.2. <A -HREF="#AEN3103" ->sam_ads</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->12.6. <A -HREF="#AEN3107" ->Memory Management</A -></DT -><DT ->12.7. <A -HREF="#AEN3121" ->Testing</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->13. <A -HREF="#PWENCRYPT" ->LanMan and NT Password Encryption</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->13.1. <A -HREF="#AEN3147" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->13.2. <A -HREF="#AEN3151" ->How does it work?</A -></DT -><DT ->13.3. <A -HREF="#AEN3162" ><A -NAME="SMBPASSWDFILEFORMAT" -></A ->The smbpasswd file</A +HREF="#AEN3032" +>WINS Failover</A ></DT ></DL ></DD @@ -820,17 +706,13 @@ NAME="SMBPASSWDFILEFORMAT" CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="NETBIOS" -></A ->Chapter 1. Definition of NetBIOS Protocol and Name Resolution Modes</H1 +NAME="NETBIOS">Definition of NetBIOS Protocol and Name Resolution Modes</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN24" -></A ->1.1. NETBIOS</H2 +NAME="AEN24">NETBIOS</H2 ><P >NetBIOS runs over the following tranports: TCP/IP; NetBEUI and IPX/SPX. Samba only uses NetBIOS over TCP/IP. For details on the TCP/IP NetBIOS @@ -884,9 +766,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN35" -></A ->1.2. BROADCAST NetBIOS</H2 +NAME="AEN35">BROADCAST NetBIOS</H2 ><P > Clients can claim names, and therefore offer services on successfully claimed @@ -907,9 +787,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN39" -></A ->1.3. NBNS NetBIOS</H2 +NAME="AEN39">NBNS NetBIOS</H2 ><P >rfc1001.txt describes, amongst other things, the implementation and use of, a 'NetBIOS Name Service'. NT/AS offers 'Windows Internet Name Service' @@ -959,17 +837,13 @@ contact the WINS server to resolve a NetBIOS name.</P CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="ARCHITECTURE" -></A ->Chapter 2. Samba Architecture</H1 +NAME="ARCHITECTURE">Samba Architecture</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN54" -></A ->2.1. Introduction</H2 +NAME="AEN54">Introduction</H2 ><P >This document gives a general overview of how Samba works internally. The Samba Team has tried to come up with a model which is @@ -1002,9 +876,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN65" -></A ->2.2. Multithreading and Samba</H2 +NAME="AEN65">Multithreading and Samba</H2 ><P >People sometimes tout threads as a uniformly good thing. They are very nice in their place but are quite inappropriate for smbd. nmbd is @@ -1028,9 +900,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN70" -></A ->2.3. Threading smbd</H2 +NAME="AEN70">Threading smbd</H2 ><P >A few problems that would arise from a threaded smbd are:</P ><P @@ -1079,9 +949,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN86" -></A ->2.4. Threading nmbd</H2 +NAME="AEN86">Threading nmbd</H2 ><P >This would be ideal, but gets sunk by portability requirements.</P ><P @@ -1115,9 +983,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN92" -></A ->2.5. nbmd Design</H2 +NAME="AEN92">nbmd Design</H2 ><P >Originally Andrew used recursion to simulate a multi-threaded environment, which use the stack enormously and made for really @@ -1145,31 +1011,36 @@ for browsing and WINS support. </P CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="DEBUG" -></A ->Chapter 3. The samba DEBUG system</H1 +NAME="DEBUG">The samba DEBUG system</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN103" -></A ->3.1. New Output Syntax</H2 +NAME="AEN103">New Output Syntax</H2 ><P > The syntax of a debugging log file is represented as:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> >debugfile< :== { >debugmsg< } +> >debugfile< :== { >debugmsg< } - >debugmsg< :== >debughdr< '\n' >debugtext< + >debugmsg< :== >debughdr< '\n' >debugtext< - >debughdr< :== '[' TIME ',' LEVEL ']' FILE ':' [FUNCTION] '(' LINE ')' + >debughdr< :== '[' TIME ',' LEVEL ']' FILE ':' [FUNCTION] '(' LINE ')' - >debugtext< :== { >debugline< } + >debugtext< :== { >debugline< } - >debugline< :== TEXT '\n'</PRE + >debugline< :== TEXT '\n'</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >TEXT is a string of characters excluding the newline character.</P @@ -1220,6 +1091,12 @@ by a newline.</P ><P >Here's some example output:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > [1998/08/03 12:55:25, 1] nmbd.c:(659) @@ -1227,6 +1104,9 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" Copyright Andrew Tridgell 1994-1997 [1998/08/03 12:55:25, 3] loadparm.c:(763) Initializing global parameters</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >Note that in the above example the function names are not listed on @@ -1238,9 +1118,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN128" -></A ->3.2. The DEBUG() Macro</H2 +NAME="AEN128">The DEBUG() Macro</H2 ><P >Use of the DEBUG() macro is unchanged. DEBUG() takes two parameters. The first is the message level, the second is the body of a function @@ -1250,16 +1128,34 @@ call to the Debug1() function.</P ><P >Here's an example which may help a bit. If you would write</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >printf( "This is a %s message.\n", "debug" );</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >to send the output to stdout, then you would write</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >DEBUG( 0, ( "This is a %s message.\n", "debug" ) );</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >to send the output to the debug file. All of the normal printf() @@ -1272,10 +1168,19 @@ statement is processed.</P ><P >The output of the above example would be something like:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > [1998/07/30 16:00:51, 0] file.c:function(128) This is a debug message.</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >Each call to DEBUG() creates a new header *unless* the output produced @@ -1288,6 +1193,12 @@ DEBUG() is called, the new input is simply appended.</P DEBUG() has been used to write partial lines. Here's a simple (dumb) example of the kind of thing I'm talking about:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > DEBUG( 0, ("The test returned " ) ); @@ -1296,11 +1207,20 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" else DEBUG(0, ("False") ); DEBUG(0, (".\n") );</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >Without the format buffer, the output (assuming test() returned true) would look like this:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > [1998/07/30 16:00:51, 0] file.c:function(256) @@ -1309,6 +1229,9 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" True [1998/07/30 16:00:51, 0] file.c:function(261) .</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >Which isn't much use. The format buffer kludge fixes this problem.</P @@ -1318,9 +1241,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN151" -></A ->3.3. The DEBUGADD() Macro</H2 +NAME="AEN151">The DEBUGADD() Macro</H2 ><P >In addition to the kludgey solution to the broken line problem described above, there is a clean solution. The DEBUGADD() macro never @@ -1328,20 +1249,38 @@ generates a header. It will append new text to the current debug message even if the format buffer is empty. The syntax of the DEBUGADD() macro is the same as that of the DEBUG() macro.</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > DEBUG( 0, ("This is the first line.\n" ) ); DEBUGADD( 0, ("This is the second line.\nThis is the third line.\n" ) );</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >Produces</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > [1998/07/30 16:00:51, 0] file.c:function(512) This is the first line. This is the second line. This is the third line.</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ></DIV ><DIV @@ -1349,35 +1288,57 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN159" -></A ->3.4. The DEBUGLVL() Macro</H2 +NAME="AEN159">The DEBUGLVL() Macro</H2 ><P >One of the problems with the DEBUG() macro was that DEBUG() lines tended to get a bit long. Consider this example from nmbd_sendannounce.c:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > DEBUG(3,("send_local_master_announcement: type %x for name %s on subnet %s for workgroup %s\n", type, global_myname, subrec->subnet_name, work->work_group));</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >One solution to this is to break it down using DEBUG() and DEBUGADD(), as follows:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > DEBUG( 3, ( "send_local_master_announcement: " ) ); DEBUGADD( 3, ( "type %x for name %s ", type, global_myname ) ); DEBUGADD( 3, ( "on subnet %s ", subrec->subnet_name ) ); DEBUGADD( 3, ( "for workgroup %s\n", work->work_group ) );</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >A similar, but arguably nicer approach is to use the DEBUGLVL() macro. This macro returns True if the message level is less than or equal to the global DEBUGLEVEL value, so:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > if( DEBUGLVL( 3 ) ) @@ -1387,6 +1348,9 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" dbgtext( "on subnet %s ", subrec->subnet_name ); dbgtext( "for workgroup %s\n", work->work_group ); }</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >(The dbgtext() function is explained below.)</P @@ -1417,17 +1381,13 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN179" -></A ->3.5. New Functions</H2 +NAME="AEN179">New Functions</H2 ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN181" -></A ->3.5.1. dbgtext()</H3 +NAME="AEN181">dbgtext()</H3 ><P >This function prints debug message text to the debug file (and possibly to syslog) via the format buffer. The function uses a @@ -1443,9 +1403,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN184" -></A ->3.5.2. dbghdr()</H3 +NAME="AEN184">dbghdr()</H3 ><P >This is the function that writes a debug message header. Headers are not processed via the format buffer. Also note that @@ -1460,9 +1418,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN188" -></A ->3.5.3. format_debug_text()</H3 +NAME="AEN188">format_debug_text()</H3 ><P >This is a static function in debug.c. It stores the output text for the body of the message in a buffer until it encounters a @@ -1479,9 +1435,7 @@ syslog output).</P CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="CODINGSUGGESTIONS" -></A ->Chapter 4. Coding Suggestions</H1 +NAME="CODINGSUGGESTIONS">Coding Suggestions</H1 ><P >So you want to add code to Samba ...</P ><P @@ -1698,17 +1652,13 @@ added.</P CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="INTERNALS" -></A ->Chapter 5. Samba Internals</H1 +NAME="INTERNALS">Samba Internals</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN284" -></A ->5.1. Character Handling</H2 +NAME="AEN284">Character Handling</H2 ><P >This section describes character set handling in Samba, as implemented in Samba 3.0 and above</P @@ -1725,9 +1675,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN288" -></A ->5.2. The new functions</H2 +NAME="AEN288">The new functions</H2 ><P >The new system works like this:</P ><P @@ -1836,9 +1784,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN317" -></A ->5.3. Macros in byteorder.h</H2 +NAME="AEN317">Macros in byteorder.h</H2 ><P >This section describes the macros defined in byteorder.h. These macros are used extensively in the Samba code.</P @@ -1847,9 +1793,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN320" -></A ->5.3.1. CVAL(buf,pos)</H3 +NAME="AEN320">CVAL(buf,pos)</H3 ><P >returns the byte at offset pos within buffer buf as an unsigned character.</P ></DIV @@ -1858,9 +1802,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN323" -></A ->5.3.2. PVAL(buf,pos)</H3 +NAME="AEN323">PVAL(buf,pos)</H3 ><P >returns the value of CVAL(buf,pos) cast to type unsigned integer.</P ></DIV @@ -1869,9 +1811,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN326" -></A ->5.3.3. SCVAL(buf,pos,val)</H3 +NAME="AEN326">SCVAL(buf,pos,val)</H3 ><P >sets the byte at offset pos within buffer buf to value val.</P ></DIV @@ -1880,9 +1820,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN329" -></A ->5.3.4. SVAL(buf,pos)</H3 +NAME="AEN329">SVAL(buf,pos)</H3 ><P > returns the value of the unsigned short (16 bit) little-endian integer at offset pos within buffer buf. An integer of this type is sometimes @@ -1893,9 +1831,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN332" -></A ->5.3.5. IVAL(buf,pos)</H3 +NAME="AEN332">IVAL(buf,pos)</H3 ><P >returns the value of the unsigned 32 bit little-endian integer at offset pos within buffer buf.</P @@ -1905,9 +1841,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN335" -></A ->5.3.6. SVALS(buf,pos)</H3 +NAME="AEN335">SVALS(buf,pos)</H3 ><P >returns the value of the signed short (16 bit) little-endian integer at offset pos within buffer buf.</P @@ -1917,9 +1851,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN338" -></A ->5.3.7. IVALS(buf,pos)</H3 +NAME="AEN338">IVALS(buf,pos)</H3 ><P >returns the value of the signed 32 bit little-endian integer at offset pos within buffer buf.</P @@ -1929,9 +1861,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN341" -></A ->5.3.8. SSVAL(buf,pos,val)</H3 +NAME="AEN341">SSVAL(buf,pos,val)</H3 ><P >sets the unsigned short (16 bit) little-endian integer at offset pos within buffer buf to value val.</P @@ -1941,9 +1871,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN344" -></A ->5.3.9. SIVAL(buf,pos,val)</H3 +NAME="AEN344">SIVAL(buf,pos,val)</H3 ><P >sets the unsigned 32 bit little-endian integer at offset pos within buffer buf to the value val.</P @@ -1953,9 +1881,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN347" -></A ->5.3.10. SSVALS(buf,pos,val)</H3 +NAME="AEN347">SSVALS(buf,pos,val)</H3 ><P >sets the short (16 bit) signed little-endian integer at offset pos within buffer buf to the value val.</P @@ -1965,9 +1891,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN350" -></A ->5.3.11. SIVALS(buf,pos,val)</H3 +NAME="AEN350">SIVALS(buf,pos,val)</H3 ><P >sets the signed 32 bit little-endian integer at offset pos withing buffer buf to the value val.</P @@ -1977,9 +1901,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN353" -></A ->5.3.12. RSVAL(buf,pos)</H3 +NAME="AEN353">RSVAL(buf,pos)</H3 ><P >returns the value of the unsigned short (16 bit) big-endian integer at offset pos within buffer buf.</P @@ -1989,9 +1911,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN356" -></A ->5.3.13. RIVAL(buf,pos)</H3 +NAME="AEN356">RIVAL(buf,pos)</H3 ><P >returns the value of the unsigned 32 bit big-endian integer at offset pos within buffer buf.</P @@ -2001,9 +1921,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN359" -></A ->5.3.14. RSSVAL(buf,pos,val)</H3 +NAME="AEN359">RSSVAL(buf,pos,val)</H3 ><P >sets the value of the unsigned short (16 bit) big-endian integer at offset pos within buffer buf to value val. @@ -2014,9 +1932,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN362" -></A ->5.3.15. RSIVAL(buf,pos,val)</H3 +NAME="AEN362">RSIVAL(buf,pos,val)</H3 ><P >sets the value of the unsigned 32 bit big-endian integer at offset pos within buffer buf to value val.</P @@ -2027,19 +1943,26 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN365" -></A ->5.4. LAN Manager Samba API</H2 +NAME="AEN365">LAN Manager Samba API</H2 ><P >This section describes the functions need to make a LAN Manager RPC call. This information had been obtained by examining the Samba code and the LAN Manager 2.0 API documentation. It should not be considered entirely reliable.</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >call_api(int prcnt, int drcnt, int mprcnt, int mdrcnt, char *param, char *data, char **rparam, char **rdata);</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >This function is defined in client.c. It uses an SMB transaction to call a @@ -2049,9 +1972,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN371" -></A ->5.4.1. Parameters</H3 +NAME="AEN371">Parameters</H3 ><P >The parameters are as follows:</P ><P @@ -2143,9 +2064,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN406" -></A ->5.4.2. Return value</H3 +NAME="AEN406">Return value</H3 ><P >The returned parameters (pointed to by rparam), in their order of appearance are:</P @@ -2196,9 +2115,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN420" -></A ->5.5. Code character table</H2 +NAME="AEN420">Code character table</H2 ><P >Certain data structures are described by means of ASCIIz strings containing code characters. These are the code characters:</P @@ -2253,17 +2170,13 @@ TYPE="1" CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="PARSING" -></A ->Chapter 6. The smb.conf file</H1 +NAME="PARSING">The smb.conf file</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN451" -></A ->6.1. Lexical Analysis</H2 +NAME="AEN451">Lexical Analysis</H2 ><P >Basically, the file is processed on a line by line basis. There are four types of lines that are recognized by the lexical analyzer @@ -2320,9 +2233,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN472" -></A ->6.1.1. Handling of Whitespace</H3 +NAME="AEN472">Handling of Whitespace</H3 ><P >Whitespace is defined as all characters recognized by the isspace() function (see ctype(3C)) except for the newline character ('\n') @@ -2357,9 +2268,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN484" -></A ->6.1.2. Handling of Line Continuation</H3 +NAME="AEN484">Handling of Line Continuation</H3 ><P >Long section header and parameter lines may be extended across multiple lines by use of the backslash character ('\\'). Line @@ -2370,17 +2279,35 @@ a parameter line is a backslash, then the next line will be (logically) concatonated with the current line by the lexical analyzer. For example:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > param name = parameter value string \ with line continuation.</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >Would be read as</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > param name = parameter value string with line continuation.</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >Note that there are five spaces following the word 'string', @@ -2397,58 +2324,110 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN495" -></A ->6.1.3. Line Continuation Quirks</H3 +NAME="AEN495">Line Continuation Quirks</H3 ><P >Note the following example:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > param name = parameter value string \ \ with line continuation.</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >The middle line is *not* parsed as a blank line because it is first concatonated with the top line. The result is</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >param name = parameter value string with line continuation.</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >The same is true for comment lines.</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > param name = parameter value string \ ; comment \ with a comment.</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >This becomes:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >param name = parameter value string ; comment with a comment.</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >On a section header line, the closing bracket (']') is considered a terminating character, and the rest of the line is ignored. The lines</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > [ section name ] garbage \ param name = value</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >are read as</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > [section name] param name = value</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ></DIV ></DIV @@ -2457,18 +2436,25 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN515" -></A ->6.2. Syntax</H2 +NAME="AEN515">Syntax</H2 ><P >The syntax of the smb.conf file is as follows:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> <file> :== { <section> } EOF - <section> :== <section header> { <parameter line> } - <section header> :== '[' NAME ']' - <parameter line> :== NAME '=' VALUE NL</PRE +> <file> :== { <section> } EOF + <section> :== <section header> { <parameter line> } + <section header> :== '[' NAME ']' + <parameter line> :== NAME '=' VALUE NL</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >Basically, this means that</P @@ -2504,9 +2490,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN530" -></A ->6.2.1. About params.c</H3 +NAME="AEN530">About params.c</H3 ><P >The parsing of the config file is a bit unusual if you are used to lex, yacc, bison, etc. Both lexical analysis (scanning) and parsing @@ -2519,17 +2503,13 @@ loadparm.c.</P CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="UNIX-SMB" -></A ->Chapter 7. NetBIOS in a Unix World</H1 +NAME="UNIX-SMB">NetBIOS in a Unix World</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN540" -></A ->7.1. Introduction</H2 +NAME="AEN540">Introduction</H2 ><P >This is a short document that describes some of the issues that confront a SMB implementation on unix, and how Samba copes with @@ -2544,9 +2524,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN544" -></A ->7.2. Usernames</H2 +NAME="AEN544">Usernames</H2 ><P >The SMB protocol has only a loose username concept. Early SMB protocols (such as CORE and COREPLUS) have no username concept at @@ -2590,9 +2568,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN552" -></A ->7.3. File Ownership</H2 +NAME="AEN552">File Ownership</H2 ><P >The commonly used SMB protocols have no way of saying "you can't do that because you don't own the file". They have, in fact, no concept @@ -2617,9 +2593,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN557" -></A ->7.4. Passwords</H2 +NAME="AEN557">Passwords</H2 ><P >Many SMB clients uppercase passwords before sending them. I have no idea why they do this. Interestingly WfWg uppercases the password only @@ -2648,12 +2622,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN563" -></A ->7.5. Locking</H2 -><P ->Since samba 2.2, samba supports other types of locking as well. This -section is outdated.</P +NAME="AEN563">Locking</H2 ><P >The locking calls available under a DOS/Windows environment are much richer than those available in unix. This means a unix server (like @@ -2688,9 +2657,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN571" -></A ->7.6. Deny Modes</H2 +NAME="AEN570">Deny Modes</H2 ><P >When a SMB client opens a file it asks for a particular "deny mode" to be placed on the file. These modes (DENY_NONE, DENY_READ, DENY_WRITE, @@ -2711,9 +2678,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN575" -></A ->7.7. Trapdoor UIDs</H2 +NAME="AEN574">Trapdoor UIDs</H2 ><P >A SMB session can run with several uids on the one socket. This happens when a user connects to two shares with different @@ -2730,9 +2695,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN579" -></A ->7.8. Port numbers</H2 +NAME="AEN578">Port numbers</H2 ><P >There is a convention that clients on sockets use high "unprivilaged" port numbers (>1000) and connect to servers on low "privilaged" port @@ -2762,9 +2725,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN584" -></A ->7.9. Protocol Complexity</H2 +NAME="AEN583">Protocol Complexity</H2 ><P >There are many "protocol levels" in the SMB protocol. It seems that each time new functionality was added to a Microsoft operating system, @@ -2809,9 +2770,7 @@ mailing list hosted by Microsft.</P CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="TRACING" -></A ->Chapter 8. Tracing samba system calls</H1 +NAME="TRACING">Tracing samba system calls</H1 ><P >This file describes how to do a system call trace on Samba to work out what its doing wrong. This is not for the faint of heart, but if you @@ -2861,9 +2820,18 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" hello</B > output is:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >write(1, "hello\n", 6) = 6</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >all the rest is just setting up to run the program.</P @@ -2915,10 +2883,19 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" > is not world writeable, which causes printing to fail with Samba:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >[pid 28268] open("/dev/null", O_RDWR) = -1 EACCES (Permission denied) [pid 28268] open("/dev/null", O_WRONLY) = -1 EACCES (Permission denied)</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >The process is trying to first open <TT @@ -2935,17 +2912,13 @@ incorrect permissions.</P CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="NTDOMAIN" -></A ->Chapter 9. NT Domain RPC's</H1 +NAME="NTDOMAIN">NT Domain RPC's</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN652" -></A ->9.1. Introduction</H2 +NAME="AEN651">Introduction</H2 ><P >This document contains information to provide an NT workstation with login services, without the need for an NT server. It is the sgml version of <A @@ -3015,14 +2988,11 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" >HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\Netlogon\Parameters</TT ></P ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Incorrect direct editing of the registry can cause your machine to fail. Then again, so can incorrect implementation of this protocol. See "Liability:" above.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P >Bear in mind that each packet over-the-wire will have its origin in an @@ -3067,9 +3037,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN688" -></A ->9.1.1. Sources</H3 +NAME="AEN687">Sources</H3 ><P ></P ><TABLE @@ -3101,9 +3069,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN695" -></A ->9.1.2. Credits</H3 +NAME="AEN694">Credits</H3 ><P ></P ><TABLE @@ -3136,17 +3102,13 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN702" -></A ->9.2. Notes and Structures</H2 +NAME="AEN701">Notes and Structures</H2 ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN704" -></A ->9.2.1. Notes</H3 +NAME="AEN703">Notes</H3 ><P ></P ><OL @@ -3196,17 +3158,13 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN717" -></A ->9.2.2. Enumerations</H3 +NAME="AEN716">Enumerations</H3 ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN719" -></A ->9.2.2.1. MSRPC Header type</H4 +NAME="AEN718">MSRPC Header type</H4 ><P >command number in the msrpc packet header</P ><P @@ -3246,9 +3204,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN739" -></A ->9.2.2.2. MSRPC Packet info</H4 +NAME="AEN738">MSRPC Packet info</H4 ><P >The meaning of these flags is undocumented</P ><P @@ -3313,17 +3269,13 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN775" -></A ->9.2.3. Structures</H3 +NAME="AEN774">Structures</H3 ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN777" -></A ->9.2.3.1. VOID *</H4 +NAME="AEN776">VOID *</H4 ><P >sizeof VOID* is 32 bits.</P ></DIV @@ -3332,9 +3284,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN780" -></A ->9.2.3.2. char</H4 +NAME="AEN779">char</H4 ><P >sizeof char is 8 bits.</P ></DIV @@ -3343,9 +3293,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN783" -></A ->9.2.3.3. UTIME</H4 +NAME="AEN782">UTIME</H4 ><P >UTIME is 32 bits, indicating time in seconds since 01jan1970. documented in cifs6.txt (section 3.5 page, page 30).</P ></DIV @@ -3354,9 +3302,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN786" -></A ->9.2.3.4. NTTIME</H4 +NAME="AEN785">NTTIME</H4 ><P >NTTIME is 64 bits. documented in cifs6.txt (section 3.5 page, page 30).</P ></DIV @@ -3365,9 +3311,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN789" -></A ->9.2.3.5. DOM_SID (domain SID structure)</H4 +NAME="AEN788">DOM_SID (domain SID structure)</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -3406,12 +3350,9 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" ></DL ></DIV ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: the domain SID is documented elsewhere.</I -></SPAN ></P ></DIV ><DIV @@ -3419,9 +3360,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN814" -></A ->9.2.3.6. STR (string)</H4 +NAME="AEN813">STR (string)</H4 ><P >STR (string) is a char[] : a null-terminated string of ascii characters.</P ></DIV @@ -3430,9 +3369,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN817" -></A ->9.2.3.7. UNIHDR (unicode string header)</H4 +NAME="AEN816">UNIHDR (unicode string header)</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -3464,9 +3401,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN832" -></A ->9.2.3.8. UNIHDR2 (unicode string header plus buffer pointer)</H4 +NAME="AEN831">UNIHDR2 (unicode string header plus buffer pointer)</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -3492,9 +3427,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN843" -></A ->9.2.3.9. UNISTR (unicode string)</H4 +NAME="AEN842">UNISTR (unicode string)</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -3514,9 +3447,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN850" -></A ->9.2.3.10. NAME (length-indicated unicode string)</H4 +NAME="AEN849">NAME (length-indicated unicode string)</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -3542,9 +3473,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN861" -></A ->9.2.3.11. UNISTR2 (aligned unicode string)</H4 +NAME="AEN860">UNISTR2 (aligned unicode string)</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -3588,9 +3517,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN884" -></A ->9.2.3.12. OBJ_ATTR (object attributes)</H4 +NAME="AEN883">OBJ_ATTR (object attributes)</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -3640,9 +3567,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN911" -></A ->9.2.3.13. POL_HND (LSA policy handle)</H4 +NAME="AEN910">POL_HND (LSA policy handle)</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -3662,9 +3587,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN918" -></A ->9.2.3.14. DOM_SID2 (domain SID structure, SIDS stored in unicode)</H4 +NAME="AEN917">DOM_SID2 (domain SID structure, SIDS stored in unicode)</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -3697,20 +3620,14 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" ></DL ></DIV ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: there is a conflict between the unicode string header and the unicode string itself as to which to use to indicate string length. this will need to be resolved.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: the SID type indicates, for example, an alias; a well-known group etc. this is documented somewhere.</I -></SPAN ></P ></DIV ><DIV @@ -3718,9 +3635,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN941" -></A ->9.2.3.15. DOM_RID (domain RID structure)</H4 +NAME="AEN940">DOM_RID (domain RID structure)</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -3758,24 +3673,16 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN960" -></A ->9.2.3.16. LOG_INFO (server, account, client structure)</H4 +NAME="AEN959">LOG_INFO (server, account, client structure)</H4 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: logon server name starts with two '\' characters and is upper case.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: account name is the logon client name from the LSA Request Challenge, with a $ on the end of it, in upper case.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P ></P @@ -3820,16 +3727,11 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN987" -></A ->9.2.3.17. CLNT_SRV (server, client names structure)</H4 +NAME="AEN986">CLNT_SRV (server, client names structure)</H4 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: logon server name starts with two '\' characters and is upper case.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P ></P @@ -3868,9 +3770,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1008" -></A ->9.2.3.18. CREDS (credentials + time stamp)</H4 +NAME="AEN1007">CREDS (credentials + time stamp)</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -3896,17 +3796,12 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1019" -></A ->9.2.3.19. CLNT_INFO2 (server, client structure, client credentials)</H4 +NAME="AEN1018">CLNT_INFO2 (server, client structure, client credentials)</H4 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: whenever this structure appears in a request, you must take a copy of the client-calculated credentials received, because they will beused in subsequent credential checks. the presumed intention is to maintain an authenticated request/response trail.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P ></P @@ -3945,16 +3840,11 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1040" -></A ->9.2.3.20. CLNT_INFO (server, account, client structure, client credentials)</H4 +NAME="AEN1039">CLNT_INFO (server, account, client structure, client credentials)</H4 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: whenever this structure appears in a request, you must take a copy of the client-calculated credentials received, because they will be used in subsequent credential checks. the presumed intention is to maintain an authenticated request/response trail.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P ></P @@ -3981,9 +3871,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1053" -></A ->9.2.3.21. ID_INFO_1 (id info structure, auth level 1)</H4 +NAME="AEN1052">ID_INFO_1 (id info structure, auth level 1)</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -4063,16 +3951,11 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1100" -></A ->9.2.3.22. SAM_INFO (sam logon/logoff id info structure)</H4 +NAME="AEN1099">SAM_INFO (sam logon/logoff id info structure)</H4 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: presumably, the return credentials is supposedly for the server to verify that the credential chain hasn't been compromised.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P ></P @@ -4112,6 +3995,12 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" ></DL ></DIV ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > switch (switch_value) @@ -4119,6 +4008,9 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" { ID_INFO_1 id_info_1; }</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ></DIV ><DIV @@ -4126,9 +4018,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1127" -></A ->9.2.3.23. GID (group id info)</H4 +NAME="AEN1126">GID (group id info)</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -4154,9 +4044,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1138" -></A ->9.2.3.24. DOM_REF (domain reference info)</H4 +NAME="AEN1137">DOM_REF (domain reference info)</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -4224,9 +4112,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1177" -></A ->9.2.3.25. DOM_INFO (domain info, levels 3 and 5 are the same))</H4 +NAME="AEN1176">DOM_INFO (domain info, levels 3 and 5 are the same))</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -4282,16 +4168,11 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1208" -></A ->9.2.3.26. USER_INFO (user logon info)</H4 +NAME="AEN1207">USER_INFO (user logon info)</H4 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: it would be nice to know what the 16 byte user session key is for.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P ></P @@ -4534,16 +4415,11 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1365" -></A ->9.2.3.27. SH_INFO_1_PTR (pointers to level 1 share info strings)</H4 +NAME="AEN1364">SH_INFO_1_PTR (pointers to level 1 share info strings)</H4 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: see cifsrap2.txt section5, page 10.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P ></P @@ -4605,9 +4481,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1388" -></A ->9.2.3.28. SH_INFO_1_STR (level 1 share info strings)</H4 +NAME="AEN1387">SH_INFO_1_STR (level 1 share info strings)</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -4633,9 +4507,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1399" -></A ->9.2.3.29. SHARE_INFO_1_CTR</H4 +NAME="AEN1398">SHARE_INFO_1_CTR</H4 ><P >share container with 0 entries:</P ><P @@ -4720,16 +4592,11 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1445" -></A ->9.2.3.30. SERVER_INFO_101</H4 +NAME="AEN1444">SERVER_INFO_101</H4 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: see cifs6.txt section 6.4 - the fields described therein will be of assistance here. for example, the type listed below is the same as fServerType, which is described in 6.4.1. </I -></SPAN ></P ><P ></P @@ -4933,9 +4800,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1571" -></A ->9.3. MSRPC over Transact Named Pipe</H2 +NAME="AEN1570">MSRPC over Transact Named Pipe</H2 ><P >For details on the SMB Transact Named Pipe, see cifs6.txt</P ><DIV @@ -4943,9 +4808,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1574" -></A ->9.3.1. MSRPC Pipes</H3 +NAME="AEN1573">MSRPC Pipes</H3 ><P >The MSRPC is conducted over an SMB Transact Pipe with a name of <TT @@ -4991,11 +4854,20 @@ is sent.</P >lkcl/01nov97 there appear to be two additional bytes after the null-terminated \PIPE\ name for the RPC pipe. Values seen so far are listed below:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > initial SMBopenX request: RPC API command 0x26 params: "\\PIPE\\lsarpc" 0x65 0x63; 0x72 0x70; 0x44 0x65; "\\PIPE\\srvsvc" 0x73 0x76; 0x4E 0x00; 0x5C 0x43;</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ></DIV ><DIV @@ -5003,9 +4875,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1588" -></A ->9.3.2. Header</H3 +NAME="AEN1587">Header</H3 ><P >[section to be rewritten, following receipt of work by Duncan Stansfield]</P ><P @@ -5174,9 +5044,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1649" -></A ->9.3.2.1. RPC_Packet for request, response, bind and bind acknowledgement</H4 +NAME="AEN1648">RPC_Packet for request, response, bind and bind acknowledgement</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -5244,16 +5112,23 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1688" -></A ->9.3.2.2. Interface identification</H4 +NAME="AEN1687">Interface identification</H4 ><P >the interfaces are numbered. as yet I haven't seen more than one interface used on the same pipe name srvsvc</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >abstract (0x4B324FC8, 0x01D31670, 0x475A7812, 0x88E16EBF, 0x00000003) transfer (0x8A885D04, 0x11C91CEB, 0x0008E89F, 0x6048102B, 0x00000002)</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ></DIV ><DIV @@ -5261,9 +5136,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1693" -></A ->9.3.2.3. RPC_Iface RW</H4 +NAME="AEN1692">RPC_Iface RW</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -5289,9 +5162,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1704" -></A ->9.3.2.4. RPC_ReqBind RW</H4 +NAME="AEN1703">RPC_ReqBind RW</H4 ><P >the remainder of the packet after the header if "type" was Bind in the response header, "type" should be BindAck</P ><P @@ -5361,9 +5232,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1744" -></A ->9.3.2.5. RPC_Address RW</H4 +NAME="AEN1743">RPC_Address RW</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -5389,9 +5258,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1755" -></A ->9.3.2.6. RPC_ResBind RW</H4 +NAME="AEN1754">RPC_ResBind RW</H4 ><P >the response to place after the header in the reply packet</P ><P @@ -5467,9 +5334,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1799" -></A ->9.3.2.7. RPC_ReqNorm RW</H4 +NAME="AEN1798">RPC_ReqNorm RW</H4 ><P >the remainder of the packet after the header for every other other request</P ><P @@ -5509,9 +5374,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1819" -></A ->9.3.2.8. RPC_ResNorm RW</H4 +NAME="AEN1818">RPC_ResNorm RW</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -5556,9 +5419,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1842" -></A ->9.3.3. Tail</H3 +NAME="AEN1841">Tail</H3 ><P >The end of each of the NTLSA and NETLOGON named pipes ends with:</P ><P @@ -5586,40 +5447,29 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1854" -></A ->9.3.4. RPC Bind / Bind Ack</H3 +NAME="AEN1853">RPC Bind / Bind Ack</H3 ><P >RPC Binds are the process of associating an RPC pipe (e.g \PIPE\lsarpc) with a "transfer syntax" (see RPC_Iface structure). The purpose for doing this is unknown.</P ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: The RPC_ResBind SMB Transact request is sent with two uint16 setup parameters. The first is 0x0026; the second is the file handle returned by the SMBopenX Transact response.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: The RPC_ResBind members maxtsize, maxrsize and assocgid are the same in the response as the same members in the RPC_ReqBind. The RPC_ResBind member transfersyntax is the same in the response as the</I -></SPAN ></P ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: The RPC_ResBind response member secondaddr contains the name of what is presumed to be the service behind the RPC pipe. The mapping identified so far is:</I -></SPAN ></P ><P ></P @@ -5665,12 +5515,9 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" ></DL ></DIV ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: The RPC_Packet fraglength member in both the Bind Request and Bind Acknowledgment must contain the length of the entire RPC data, including the RPC_Packet header.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P >Request:</P @@ -5716,9 +5563,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1898" -></A ->9.3.5. NTLSA Transact Named Pipe</H3 +NAME="AEN1897">NTLSA Transact Named Pipe</H3 ><P >The sequence of actions taken on this pipe are:</P ><P @@ -5815,25 +5660,18 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1939" -></A ->9.3.6. LSA Open Policy</H3 +NAME="AEN1938">LSA Open Policy</H3 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: The policy handle can be anything you like.</I -></SPAN ></P ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1943" -></A ->9.3.6.1. Request</H4 +NAME="AEN1942">Request</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -5871,9 +5709,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1962" -></A ->9.3.6.2. Response</H4 +NAME="AEN1961">Response</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -5900,25 +5736,18 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1973" -></A ->9.3.7. LSA Query Info Policy</H3 +NAME="AEN1972">LSA Query Info Policy</H3 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: The info class in response must be the same as that in the request.</I -></SPAN ></P ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1977" -></A ->9.3.7.1. Request</H4 +NAME="AEN1976">Request</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -5944,9 +5773,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1988" -></A ->9.3.7.2. Response</H4 +NAME="AEN1987">Response</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -5967,6 +5794,12 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" ></DL ></DIV ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >switch (info class) @@ -5977,6 +5810,9 @@ DOM_INFO domain info, levels 3 and 5 (are the same). } return 0 - indicates success</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ></DIV ></DIV @@ -5985,17 +5821,13 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2001" -></A ->9.3.8. LSA Enumerate Trusted Domains</H3 +NAME="AEN2000">LSA Enumerate Trusted Domains</H3 ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2003" -></A ->9.3.8.1. Request</H4 +NAME="AEN2002">Request</H4 ><P >no extra data</P ></DIV @@ -6004,9 +5836,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2006" -></A ->9.3.8.2. Response</H4 +NAME="AEN2005">Response</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -6045,17 +5875,13 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2025" -></A ->9.3.9. LSA Open Secret</H3 +NAME="AEN2024">LSA Open Secret</H3 ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2027" -></A ->9.3.9.1. Request</H4 +NAME="AEN2026">Request</H4 ><P >no extra data</P ></DIV @@ -6064,9 +5890,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2030" -></A ->9.3.9.2. Response</H4 +NAME="AEN2029">Response</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -6113,17 +5937,13 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2054" -></A ->9.3.10. LSA Close</H3 +NAME="AEN2053">LSA Close</H3 ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2056" -></A ->9.3.10.1. Request</H4 +NAME="AEN2055">Request</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -6143,9 +5963,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2063" -></A ->9.3.10.2. Response</H4 +NAME="AEN2062">Response</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -6168,25 +5986,18 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2071" -></A ->9.3.11. LSA Lookup SIDS</H3 +NAME="AEN2070">LSA Lookup SIDS</H3 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: num_entries in response must be same as num_entries in request.</I -></SPAN ></P ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2075" -></A ->9.3.11.1. Request</H4 +NAME="AEN2074">Request</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -6236,9 +6047,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2102" -></A ->9.3.11.2. Response</H4 +NAME="AEN2101">Response</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -6291,25 +6100,18 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2130" -></A ->9.3.12. LSA Lookup Names</H3 +NAME="AEN2129">LSA Lookup Names</H3 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: num_entries in response must be same as num_entries in request.</I -></SPAN ></P ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2134" -></A ->9.3.12.1. Request</H4 +NAME="AEN2133">Request</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -6365,9 +6167,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2165" -></A ->9.3.12.2. Response</H4 +NAME="AEN2164">Response</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -6421,9 +6221,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2193" -></A ->9.4. NETLOGON rpc Transact Named Pipe</H2 +NAME="AEN2192">NETLOGON rpc Transact Named Pipe</H2 ><P >The sequence of actions taken on this pipe are:</P ><P @@ -6521,41 +6319,28 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2232" -></A ->9.4.1. LSA Request Challenge</H3 +NAME="AEN2231">LSA Request Challenge</H3 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: logon server name starts with two '\' characters and is upper case.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: logon client is the machine, not the user.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: the initial LanManager password hash, against which the challenge is issued, is the machine name itself (lower case). there will becalls issued (LSA Server Password Set) which will change this, later. refusing these calls allows you to always deal with the same password (i.e the LM# of the machine name in lower case).</I -></SPAN ></P ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2240" -></A ->9.4.1.1. Request</H4 +NAME="AEN2239">Request</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -6593,9 +6378,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2259" -></A ->9.4.1.2. Response</H4 +NAME="AEN2258">Response</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -6618,41 +6401,28 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2267" -></A ->9.4.2. LSA Authenticate 2</H3 +NAME="AEN2266">LSA Authenticate 2</H3 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: in between request and response, calculate the client credentials, and check them against the client-calculated credentials (this process uses the previously received client credentials).</I -></SPAN ></P ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: neg_flags in the response is the same as that in the request.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: you must take a copy of the client-calculated credentials received here, because they will be used in subsequent authentication packets.</I -></SPAN ></P ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2275" -></A ->9.4.2.1. Request</H4 +NAME="AEN2274">Request</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -6690,9 +6460,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2294" -></A ->9.4.2.2. Response</H4 +NAME="AEN2293">Response</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -6721,49 +6489,33 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2306" -></A ->9.4.3. LSA Server Password Set</H3 +NAME="AEN2305">LSA Server Password Set</H3 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: the new password is suspected to be a DES encryption using the old password to generate the key.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: in between request and response, calculate the client credentials, and check them against the client-calculated credentials (this process uses the previously received client credentials).</I -></SPAN ></P ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: the server credentials are constructed from the client-calculated credentials and the client time + 1 second.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: you must take a copy of the client-calculated credentials received here, because they will be used in subsequent authentication packets.</I -></SPAN ></P ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2316" -></A ->9.4.3.1. Request</H4 +NAME="AEN2315">Request</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -6789,9 +6541,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2327" -></A ->9.4.3.2. Response</H4 +NAME="AEN2326">Response</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -6814,26 +6564,19 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2335" -></A ->9.4.4. LSA SAM Logon</H3 +NAME="AEN2334">LSA SAM Logon</H3 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: valid_user is True iff the username and password hash are valid for the requested domain.</I -></SPAN ></P ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2339" -></A ->9.4.4.1. Request</H4 +NAME="AEN2338">Request</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -6853,9 +6596,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2346" -></A ->9.4.4.2. Response</H4 +NAME="AEN2345">Response</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -6876,6 +6617,12 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" ></DL ></DIV ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >if (valid_user) @@ -6897,6 +6644,9 @@ else return 0xC000 0064 - NT_STATUS_NO_SUCH_USER. }</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ></DIV ></DIV @@ -6905,26 +6655,19 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2359" -></A ->9.4.5. LSA SAM Logoff</H3 +NAME="AEN2358">LSA SAM Logoff</H3 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: presumably, the SAM_INFO structure is validated, and a (currently undocumented) error code returned if the Logoff is invalid.</I -></SPAN ></P ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2363" -></A ->9.4.5.1. Request</H4 +NAME="AEN2362">Request</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -6944,9 +6687,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2370" -></A ->9.4.5.2. Response</H4 +NAME="AEN2369">Response</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -6976,43 +6717,31 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2382" -></A ->9.5. \\MAILSLOT\NET\NTLOGON</H2 +NAME="AEN2381">\\MAILSLOT\NET\NTLOGON</H2 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: mailslots will contain a response mailslot, to which the response should be sent. the target NetBIOS name is REQUEST_NAME<20>, where REQUEST_NAME is the name of the machine that sent the request.</I -></SPAN ></P ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2386" -></A ->9.5.1. Query for PDC</H3 +NAME="AEN2385">Query for PDC</H3 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: NTversion, LMNTtoken, LM20token in response are the same as those given in the request.</I -></SPAN ></P ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2390" -></A ->9.5.1.1. Request</H4 +NAME="AEN2389">Request</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -7074,9 +6803,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2425" -></A ->9.5.1.2. Response</H4 +NAME="AEN2424">Response</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -7139,41 +6866,28 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2460" -></A ->9.5.2. SAM Logon</H3 +NAME="AEN2459">SAM Logon</H3 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: machine name in response is preceded by two '\' characters.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: NTversion, LMNTtoken, LM20token in response are the same as those given in the request.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: user name in the response is presumably the same as that in the request.</I -></SPAN ></P ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2468" -></A ->9.5.2.1. Request</H4 +NAME="AEN2467">Request</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -7259,9 +6973,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2519" -></A ->9.5.2.2. Response</H4 +NAME="AEN2518">Response</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -7319,9 +7031,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2550" -></A ->9.6. SRVSVC Transact Named Pipe</H2 +NAME="AEN2549">SRVSVC Transact Named Pipe</H2 ><P >Defines for this pipe, identifying the query are:</P ><P @@ -7348,33 +7058,23 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2562" -></A ->9.6.1. Net Share Enum</H3 +NAME="AEN2561">Net Share Enum</H3 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: share level and switch value in the response are presumably the same as those in the request.</I -></SPAN ></P ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: cifsrap2.txt (section 5) may be of limited assistance here.</I -></SPAN ></P ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2568" -></A ->9.6.1.1. Request</H4 +NAME="AEN2567">Request</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -7436,9 +7136,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2603" -></A ->9.6.1.2. Response</H4 +NAME="AEN2602">Response</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -7479,25 +7177,18 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2623" -></A ->9.6.2. Net Server Get Info</H3 +NAME="AEN2622">Net Server Get Info</H3 ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Note: level is the same value as in the request.</I -></SPAN ></P ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2627" -></A ->9.6.2.1. Request</H4 +NAME="AEN2626">Request</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -7523,9 +7214,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2638" -></A ->9.6.2.2. Response</H4 +NAME="AEN2637">Response</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -7561,17 +7250,13 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2654" -></A ->9.7. Cryptographic side of NT Domain Authentication</H2 +NAME="AEN2653">Cryptographic side of NT Domain Authentication</H2 ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2656" -></A ->9.7.1. Definitions</H3 +NAME="AEN2655">Definitions</H3 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -7646,9 +7331,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2699" -></A ->9.7.2. Protocol</H3 +NAME="AEN2698">Protocol</H3 ><P >C->S ReqChal,Cc S->C Cs</P ><P @@ -7682,9 +7365,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2709" -></A ->9.7.3. Comments</H3 +NAME="AEN2708">Comments</H3 ><P >On first joining the domain the session key could be computed by anyone listening in on the network as the machine password has a well @@ -7713,9 +7394,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2716" -></A ->9.8. SIDs and RIDs</H2 +NAME="AEN2715">SIDs and RIDs</H2 ><P >SIDs and RIDs are well documented elsewhere.</P ><P @@ -7745,17 +7424,13 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2724" -></A ->9.8.1. Well-known SIDs</H3 +NAME="AEN2723">Well-known SIDs</H3 ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" ><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2726" -></A ->9.8.1.1. Universal well-known SIDs</H4 +NAME="AEN2725">Universal well-known SIDs</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -7817,9 +7492,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2761" -></A ->9.8.1.2. NT well-known SIDs</H4 +NAME="AEN2760">NT well-known SIDs</H4 ><P ></P ><DIV @@ -7906,9 +7579,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2812" -></A ->9.8.2. Well-known RIDS</H3 +NAME="AEN2811">Well-known RIDS</H3 ><P >A RID is a sub-authority value, as part of either a SID, or in the case of Group RIDs, part of the DOM_GID structure, in the USER_INFO_1 @@ -7918,9 +7589,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2815" -></A ->9.8.2.1. Well-known RID users</H4 +NAME="AEN2814">Well-known RID users</H4 ><P ><B >Groupname: </B @@ -7951,9 +7620,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2829" -></A ->9.8.2.2. Well-known RID groups</H4 +NAME="AEN2828">Well-known RID groups</H4 ><P ><B >Groupname: </B @@ -7996,9 +7663,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2847" -></A ->9.8.2.3. Well-known RID aliases</H4 +NAME="AEN2846">Well-known RID aliases</H4 ><P ><B >Groupname: </B @@ -8115,17 +7780,13 @@ NAME="AEN2847" CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="PRINTING" -></A ->Chapter 10. Samba Printing Internals</H1 +NAME="PRINTING">Samba Printing Internals</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2896" -></A ->10.1. Abstract</H2 +NAME="AEN2895">Abstract</H2 ><P >The purpose of this document is to provide some insight into Samba's printing functionality and also to describe the semantics @@ -8136,9 +7797,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2899" -></A ->10.2. Printing Interface to Various Back ends</H2 +NAME="AEN2898">Printing Interface to Various Back ends</H2 ><P >Samba uses a table of function pointers to seven functions. The function prototypes are defined in the <TT @@ -8204,9 +7863,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2925" -></A ->10.3. Print Queue TDB's</H2 +NAME="AEN2924">Print Queue TDB's</H2 ><P >Samba provides periodic caching of the output from the "lpq command" for performance reasons. This cache time is configurable in seconds. @@ -8230,6 +7887,12 @@ client which will insert the job information directly into the TDB. The second method is to have the print job picked up by executing the "lpq command".</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >/* included from printing.h */ @@ -8249,13 +7912,16 @@ struct printjob { fstring queuename; /* service number of printer for this job */ NT_DEVICEMODE *nt_devmode; };</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >The current manifestation of the printjob structure contains a field for the UNIX job id returned from the "lpq command" and a Windows job ID (32-bit bounded by PRINT_MAX_JOBID). When a print job is returned by the "lpq command" that does not match an existing job in the queue's -TDB, a 32-bit job ID above the <*vance doesn't know what word is missing here*> is generating by adding UNIX_JOB_START to +TDB, a 32-bit job ID above the <*vance doesn't know what word is missing here*> is generating by adding UNIX_JOB_START to the id reported by lpq.</P ><P >In order to match a 32-bit Windows jobid onto a 16-bit lanman print job @@ -8302,6 +7968,12 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE" ></LI ><LI ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > foreach job in the queue @@ -8316,6 +7988,9 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" update the job status only } }</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ></LI ><LI @@ -8353,9 +8028,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2959" -></A ->10.4. ChangeID & Client Caching of Printer Information</H2 +NAME="AEN2958">ChangeID & Client Caching of Printer Information</H2 ><P >[To be filled in later]</P ></DIV @@ -8364,9 +8037,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2962" -></A ->10.5. Windows NT/2K Printer Change Notify</H2 +NAME="AEN2961">Windows NT/2K Printer Change Notify</H2 ><P >When working with Windows NT+ clients, it is possible for a print server to use RPC to send asynchronous change notification @@ -8425,6 +8096,12 @@ notification event to clients. The process of registering a new change notification handle is as follows. The 'C' is for client and the 'S' is for server. All error conditions have been eliminated.</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >C: Obtain handle to printer or to the printer @@ -8436,7 +8113,7 @@ C: Send a RFFPCN request with the previously obtained to monitor, or (b) a PRINTER_NOTIFY_OPTIONS structure containing the event information to monitor. The windows spooler has only been observed to use (b). -S: The <* another missing word*> opens a new TCP session to the client (thus requiring +S: The <* another missing word*> opens a new TCP session to the client (thus requiring all print clients to be CIFS servers as well) and sends a ReplyOpenPrinter() request to the client. C: The client responds with a printer handle that can be used to @@ -8458,6 +8135,9 @@ C: If the change notification handle is ever released by the S: The server closes the internal change notification handle (POLICY_HND) and does not send any further change notification events to the client for that printer or job.</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >The current list of notification events supported by Samba can be @@ -8582,57 +8262,80 @@ data values.</P CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="WINS" -></A ->Chapter 11. Samba WINS Internals</H1 +NAME="WINS">Samba WINS Internals</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3033" -></A ->11.1. WINS Failover</H2 +NAME="AEN3032">WINS Failover</H2 ><P >The current Samba codebase possesses the capability to use groups of WINS servers that share a common namespace for NetBIOS name registration and resolution. The formal parameter syntax is</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > WINS_SERVER_PARAM = SERVER [ SEPARATOR SERVER_LIST ] - WINS_SERVER_PARAM = "wins server" + WINS_SERVER_PARAM = "wins server" SERVER = ADDR[:TAG] ADDR = ip_addr | fqdn TAG = string SEPARATOR = comma | \s+ SERVER_LIST = SERVER [ SEPARATOR SERVER_LIST ]</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >A simple example of a valid wins server setting is</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >[global] wins server = 192.168.1.2 192.168.1.3</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >In the event that no TAG is defined in for a SERVER in the list, smbd assigns a default -TAG of "*". A TAG is used to group servers of a shared NetBIOS namespace together. Upon +TAG of "*". A TAG is used to group servers of a shared NetBIOS namespace together. Upon startup, nmbd will attempt to register the netbios name value with one server in each tagged group.</P ><P >An example using tags to group WINS servers together is show here. Note that the use of interface names in the tags is only by convention and is not a technical requirement.</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >[global] wins server = 192.168.1.2:eth0 192.168.1.3:eth0 192.168.2.2:eth1</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >Using this configuration, nmbd would attempt to register the server's NetBIOS name -with one WINS server in each group. Because the "eth0" group has two servers, the +with one WINS server in each group. Because the "eth0" group has two servers, the second server would only be used when a registration (or resolution) request to the first server in that group timed out.</P ><P @@ -8646,662 +8349,6 @@ dead, Samba will not attempt to contact that server for name registration/resolu for a period of 10 minutes.</P ></DIV ></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><HR><H1 -><A -NAME="SAM" -></A ->Chapter 12. The Upcoming SAM System</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN3054" -></A ->12.1. Security in the 'new SAM'</H2 -><P ->One of the biggest problems with passdb is it's implementation of -'security'. Access control is on a 'are you root at the moment' basis, -and it has no concept of NT ACLs. Things like ldapsam had to add -'magic' 'are you root' checks.</P -><P ->We took this very seriously when we started work, and the new structure -is designed with this in mind, from the ground up. Each call to the SAM -has a NT_TOKEN and (if relevant) an 'access desired'. This is either -provided as a parameter, or implicitly supplied by the object being -accessed.</P -><P ->For example, when you call </P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->< -NTSTATUS sam_get_account_by_name(const SAM_CONTEXT *context, const -NT_USER_TOKEN *access_token, uint32 access_desired, const char *domain, -const char *name, SAM_ACCOUNT_HANDLE **account)</PRE -><P ->The context can be NULL (and is used to allow import/export by setting -up 2 contexts, and allowing calls on both simultaneously)</P -><P ->The access token *must* be specified. Normally the user's token out of -current_user, this can also be a global 'system' context.</P -><P ->The access desired is as per the ACL, for passing to the seaccess stuff.</P -><P ->The domain/username are standard. Even if we only have one domain, -keeping this ensures that we don't get 'unqualified' usernames (same -problem as we had with unqualified SIDs).</P -><P ->We return a 'handle'. This is opaque to the rest of Samba, but is -operated on by get/set routines, all of which return NTSTATUS.</P -><P ->The access checking is done by the SAM module. The reason it is not -done 'above' the interface is to ensure a 'choke point'. I put a lot of -effort into the auth subsystem to ensure we never 'accidentally' forgot -to check for null passwords, missed a restriction etc. I intend the SAM -to be written with the same caution.</P -><P ->The reason the access checking is not handled by the interface itself is -due to the different implementations it make take on. For example, on -ADS, you cannot set a password over a non-SSL connection. Other -backends may have similar requirements - we need to leave this policy up -to the modules. They will naturally have access to 'helper' procedures -and good examples to avoid mishaps.</P -><P ->(Furthermore, some backends my actually chose to push the whole ACL -issue to the remote server, and - assuming ldap for this example - bind -as the user directly)</P -><P ->Each returned handle has an internal 'access permitted', which allows -the 'get' and 'set' routines to return 'ACCESS_DENIED' for things that -were not able to be retrieved from the backend. This removes the need -to specify the NT_TOKEN on every operation, and allows for 'object not -present' to be easily distinguished from 'access denied'.</P -><P ->When you 'set' an object (calling sam_update_account) the internal -details are again used. Each change that has been made to the object -has been flagged, so as to avoid race conditions (on unmodified -components) and to avoid violating any extra ACL requirements on the -actual data store (like the LDAP server).</P -><P ->Finally, we have generic get_sec_desc() and set_sec_desc() routines to -allow external ACL manipulation. These do lookups based on SID.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN3071" -></A ->12.2. Standalone from UNIX</H2 -><P ->One of the primary tenants of the 'new SAM' is that it would not attempt -to deal with 'what unix id for that'. This would be left to the 'SMS' -(Sid Mapping System') or SID farm, and probably administered via -winbind. We have had constructive discussion on how 'basic' unix -accounts like 'root' would be handled, and we think this can work. -Accounts not preexisting in unix would be served up via winbind.</P -><P ->This is an *optional* part, and my preferred end-game. We have a fare -way to go before things like winbind up to it however.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN3075" -></A ->12.3. Handles and Races in the new SAM</H2 -><P ->One of the things that the 'new SAM' work has tried to face is both -compatibility with existing code, and a closer alignment to the SAMR -interface. I consider SAMR to be a 'primary customer' to the this work, -because if we get alignment with that wrong, things get more, rather -than less complex. Also, most other parts of Samba are much more -flexible with what they can allow.</P -><P ->In any case, that was a decision taken as to how the general design -would progress. BTW, my understanding of SAMR may be completely flawed.</P -><P ->One of the most race-prone areas of the new code is the conflicting -update problem. We have taken two approaches: </P -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P ->'Not conflicting' conflicts. Due to the way usrmgr operates, it will -open a user, display all the properties and *save* them all, even if you -don't change any.</P -><P ->For this, see what I've done in rpc_server/srv_samr_util.c. I intend -to take this one step further, and operate on the 'handle' that the -values were read from. This should mean that we only update things that -have *really* changed.</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->'conflicting' updates: Currently we don't deal with this (in passdb -or the new sam stuff), but the design is sufficiently flexible to 'deny' -a second update. I don't foresee locking records however.</P -></LI -></UL -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN3086" -></A ->12.4. Layers</H2 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN3088" -></A ->12.4.1. Application</H3 -><P ->This is where smbd, samtest and whatever end-user replacement we have -for pdbedit sits. They use only the SAM interface, and do not get -'special knowledge' of what is below them.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN3091" -></A ->12.4.2. SAM Interface</H3 -><P ->This level 'owns' the various handle structures, the get/set routines on -those structures and provides the public interface. The application -layer may initialize a 'context' to be passed to all interface routines, -else a default, self-initialising context will be supplied. This layser -finds the appropriate backend module for the task, and tries very hard -not to need to much 'knowledge'. It should just provide the required -abstraction to the modules below, and arrange for their initial loading.</P -><P ->We could possibly add ACL checking at this layer, to avoid discrepancies -in implementation modules.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN3095" -></A ->12.4.3. SAM Modules</H3 -><P ->These do not communicate with the application directly, only by setting -values in the handles, and receiving requests from the interface. These -modules are responsible for translating values from the handle's -.private into (say) an LDAP modification list. The module is expected -to 'know' things like it's own domain SID, domain name, and any other -state attached to the SAM. Simpler modules may call back to some helper -routine.</P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN3098" -></A ->12.5. SAM Modules</H2 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN3100" -></A ->12.5.1. Special Module: sam_passdb</H3 -><P ->In order for there to be a smooth transition, kai is writing a module -that reads existing passdb backends, and translates them into SAM -replies. (Also pulling data from the account policy DB etc). We also -intend to write a module that does the reverse - gives the SAM a passdb -interface.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN3103" -></A ->12.5.2. sam_ads</H3 -><P ->This is the first of the SAM modules to be committed to the tree - -mainly because I needed to coordinate work with metze (who authored most -of it). This module aims to use Samba's libads code to provide an -Active Directory LDAP client, suitable for use on a mixed-mode DC. -While it is currently being tested against Win2k servers (with a -password in the smb.conf file) it is expected to eventually use a -(possibly modified) OpenLDAP server. We hope that this will assist in -the construction of an Samba AD DC.</P -><P ->We also intend to construct a Samba 2.2/3.0 compatible ldap module, -again using libads code.</P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN3107" -></A ->12.6. Memory Management</H2 -><P -> -The 'new SAM' development effort also concerned itself with getting a -sane implementation of memory management. It was decided that we would -be (as much as possible) talloc based, using an 'internal talloc -context' on many objects. That is, the creation of an object would -initiate it's own internal talloc context, and this would be used for -all operations on that object. Much of this is already implemented in -passdb. Also, like passdb, it will be possible to specify that some -object actually be created on a specified context. </P -><P ->Memory management is important here because the APIs in the 'new SAM' do -not use 'pdb_init()' or an equivalent. They always allocate new -objects. Enumeration's are slightly different, and occur on a supplied -context that 'owns' the entire list, rather than per-element. (the -enumeration functions return an array of all elements - not full handles -just basic (and public) info) Likewise for things that fill in a char -**.</P -><P ->For example:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->NTSTATUS sam_lookup_sid(const SAM_CONTEXT *context, const NT_USER_TOKEN -*access_token, TALLOC_CTX *mem_ctx, const DOM_SID *sid, char **name, -uint32 *type)</PRE -></P -><P ->Takes a context to allocate the 'name' on, while:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->NTSTATUS sam_get_account_by_sid(const SAM_CONTEXT *context, const -NT_USER_TOKEN *access_token, uint32 access_desired, const DOM_SID -*accountsid, SAM_ACCOUNT_HANDLE **account)</PRE -></P -><P ->Allocates a handle and stores the allocation context on that handle.</P -><P ->I think that the following:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->NTSTATUS sam_enum_accounts(const SAM_CONTEXT *context, const -NT_USER_TOKEN *access_token, const DOM_SID *domainsid, uint16 acct_ctrl, -int32 *account_count, SAM_ACCOUNT_ENUM **accounts)</PRE -></P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN3121" -></A ->12.7. Testing</H2 -><P ->Testing is vital in any piece of software, and Samba is certainly no -exception. In designing this new subsystem, we have taken care to ensure -it is easily tested, independent of outside protocols.</P -><P ->To this end, Jelmer has constructed 'samtest'. </P -><P ->This utility (see torture/samtest.c) is structured like rpcclient, but -instead operates on the SAM subsystem. It creates a 'custom' SAM -context, that may be distinct from the default values used by the rest -of the system, and can load a separate configuration file. </P -><P ->A small number of commands are currently implemented, but these have -already proved vital in testing. I expect SAM module authors will find -it particularly valuable.</P -><P ->Example useage:</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->$</TT -> <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->bin/samtest</B -></P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->> context ads:ldap://192.168.1.96</PRE -> -(this loads a new context, using the new ADS module. The parameter is -the 'location' of the ldap server)</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->> lookup_name DOMAIN abartlet</PRE -> -(returns a sid).</P -><P ->Because the 'new SAM' is NT ACL based, there will be a command to -specify an arbitrary NT ACL, but for now it uses 'system' by default.</P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><HR><H1 -><A -NAME="PWENCRYPT" -></A ->Chapter 13. LanMan and NT Password Encryption</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN3147" -></A ->13.1. Introduction</H2 -><P ->With the development of LanManager and Windows NT - compatible password encryption for Samba, it is now able - to validate user connections in exactly the same way as - a LanManager or Windows NT server.</P -><P ->This document describes how the SMB password encryption - algorithm works and what issues there are in choosing whether - you want to use it. You should read it carefully, especially - the part about security and the "PROS and CONS" section.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN3151" -></A ->13.2. How does it work?</H2 -><P ->LanManager encryption is somewhat similar to UNIX - password encryption. The server uses a file containing a - hashed value of a user's password. This is created by taking - the user's plaintext password, capitalising it, and either - truncating to 14 bytes or padding to 14 bytes with null bytes. - This 14 byte value is used as two 56 bit DES keys to encrypt - a 'magic' eight byte value, forming a 16 byte value which is - stored by the server and client. Let this value be known as - the "hashed password".</P -><P ->Windows NT encryption is a higher quality mechanism, - consisting of doing an MD4 hash on a Unicode version of the user's - password. This also produces a 16 byte hash value that is - non-reversible.</P -><P ->When a client (LanManager, Windows for WorkGroups, Windows - 95 or Windows NT) wishes to mount a Samba drive (or use a Samba - resource), it first requests a connection and negotiates the - protocol that the client and server will use. In the reply to this - request the Samba server generates and appends an 8 byte, random - value - this is stored in the Samba server after the reply is sent - and is known as the "challenge". The challenge is different for - every client connection.</P -><P ->The client then uses the hashed password (16 byte values - described above), appended with 5 null bytes, as three 56 bit - DES keys, each of which is used to encrypt the challenge 8 byte - value, forming a 24 byte value known as the "response".</P -><P ->In the SMB call SMBsessionsetupX (when user level security - is selected) or the call SMBtconX (when share level security is - selected), the 24 byte response is returned by the client to the - Samba server. For Windows NT protocol levels the above calculation - is done on both hashes of the user's password and both responses are - returned in the SMB call, giving two 24 byte values.</P -><P ->The Samba server then reproduces the above calculation, using - its own stored value of the 16 byte hashed password (read from the - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smbpasswd</TT -> file - described later) and the challenge - value that it kept from the negotiate protocol reply. It then checks - to see if the 24 byte value it calculates matches the 24 byte value - returned to it from the client.</P -><P ->If these values match exactly, then the client knew the - correct password (or the 16 byte hashed value - see security note - below) and is thus allowed access. If not, then the client did not - know the correct password and is denied access.</P -><P ->Note that the Samba server never knows or stores the cleartext - of the user's password - just the 16 byte hashed values derived from - it. Also note that the cleartext password or 16 byte hashed values - are never transmitted over the network - thus increasing security.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN3162" -></A ->13.3. <A -NAME="SMBPASSWDFILEFORMAT" -></A ->The smbpasswd file</H2 -><P ->In order for Samba to participate in the above protocol - it must be able to look up the 16 byte hashed values given a user name. - Unfortunately, as the UNIX password value is also a one way hash - function (ie. it is impossible to retrieve the cleartext of the user's - password given the UNIX hash of it), a separate password file - containing this 16 byte value must be kept. To minimise problems with - these two password files, getting out of sync, the UNIX <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" -> /etc/passwd</TT -> and the <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smbpasswd</TT -> file, - a utility, <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->mksmbpasswd.sh</B ->, is provided to generate - a smbpasswd file from a UNIX <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd</TT -> file. - </P -><P ->To generate the smbpasswd file from your <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd - </TT -> file use the following command :</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->$ </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B ->cat /etc/passwd | mksmbpasswd.sh - > /usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd</B -></TT -></P -><P ->If you are running on a system that uses NIS, use</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->$ </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B ->ypcat passwd | mksmbpasswd.sh - > /usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd</B -></TT -></P -><P ->The <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->mksmbpasswd.sh</B -> program is found in - the Samba source directory. By default, the smbpasswd file is - stored in :</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd</TT -></P -><P ->The owner of the <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/usr/local/samba/private/</TT -> - directory should be set to root, and the permissions on it should - be set to 0500 (<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->chmod 500 /usr/local/samba/private</B ->). - </P -><P ->Likewise, the smbpasswd file inside the private directory should - be owned by root and the permissions on is should be set to 0600 - (<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->chmod 600 smbpasswd</B ->).</P -><P ->The format of the smbpasswd file is (The line has been - wrapped here. It should appear as one entry per line in - your smbpasswd file.)</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->username:uid:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX: - [Account type]:LCT-<last-change-time>:Long name - </PRE -></P -><P ->Although only the <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->username</I -></TT ->, - <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->uid</I -></TT ->, <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I -> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX</I -></TT ->, - [<TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->Account type</I -></TT ->] and <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I -> last-change-time</I -></TT -> sections are significant - and are looked at in the Samba code.</P -><P ->It is <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->VITALLY</I -></SPAN -> important that there by 32 - 'X' characters between the two ':' characters in the XXX sections - - the smbpasswd and Samba code will fail to validate any entries that - do not have 32 characters between ':' characters. The first XXX - section is for the Lanman password hash, the second is for the - Windows NT version.</P -><P ->When the password file is created all users have password entries - consisting of 32 'X' characters. By default this disallows any access - as this user. When a user has a password set, the 'X' characters change - to 32 ascii hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F). These are an ascii - representation of the 16 byte hashed value of a user's password.</P -><P ->To set a user to have no password (not recommended), edit the file - using vi, and replace the first 11 characters with the ascii text - <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->"NO PASSWORD"</TT -> (minus the quotes).</P -><P ->For example, to clear the password for user bob, his smbpasswd file - entry would look like :</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> bob:100:NO PASSWORDXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX:[U ]:LCT-00000000:Bob's full name:/bobhome:/bobshell - </PRE -></P -><P ->If you are allowing users to use the smbpasswd command to set - their own passwords, you may want to give users NO PASSWORD initially - so they do not have to enter a previous password when changing to their - new password (not recommended). In order for you to allow this the - <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbpasswd</B -> program must be able to connect to the - <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbd</B -> daemon as that user with no password. Enable this - by adding the line :</P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->null passwords = yes</B -></P -><P ->to the [global] section of the smb.conf file (this is why - the above scenario is not recommended). Preferably, allocate your - users a default password to begin with, so you do not have - to enable this on your server.</P -><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note : </I -></SPAN ->This file should be protected very - carefully. Anyone with access to this file can (with enough knowledge of - the protocols) gain access to your SMB server. The file is thus more - sensitive than a normal unix <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd</TT -> file.</P -></DIV -></DIV ></DIV ></BODY ></HTML diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.html b/docs/htmldocs/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.html index 2bb324d9f3..e5240ba658 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.html @@ -16,14 +16,14 @@ ALINK="#0000FF" ><DIV CLASS="BOOK" ><A -NAME="SAMBA-HOWTO-COLLECTION" +NAME="SAMBA-PROJECT-DOCUMENTATION" ></A ><DIV CLASS="TITLEPAGE" ><H1 CLASS="TITLE" ><A -NAME="SAMBA-HOWTO-COLLECTION" +NAME="SAMBA-PROJECT-DOCUMENTATION" ></A >SAMBA Project Documentation</H1 ><H3 @@ -78,13 +78,6 @@ CLASS="TOC" >Table of Contents</B ></DT ><DT ->I. <A -HREF="#AEN18" ->General installation</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT >1. <A HREF="#INSTALL" >How to Install and Test SAMBA</A @@ -93,28 +86,28 @@ HREF="#INSTALL" ><DL ><DT >1.1. <A -HREF="#AEN25" ->Read the man pages</A +HREF="#AEN20" +>Step 0: Read the man pages</A ></DT ><DT >1.2. <A -HREF="#AEN35" ->Building the Binaries</A +HREF="#AEN28" +>Step 1: Building the Binaries</A ></DT ><DT >1.3. <A -HREF="#AEN63" ->The all important step</A +HREF="#AEN56" +>Step 2: The all important step</A ></DT ><DT >1.4. <A -HREF="#AEN67" ->Create the smb configuration file.</A +HREF="#AEN60" +>Step 3: Create the smb configuration file.</A ></DT ><DT >1.5. <A -HREF="#AEN81" ->Test your config file with +HREF="#AEN74" +>Step 4: Test your config file with <B CLASS="COMMAND" >testparm</B @@ -122,1251 +115,1337 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></DT ><DT >1.6. <A -HREF="#AEN89" ->Starting the smbd and nmbd</A +HREF="#AEN80" +>Step 5: Starting the smbd and nmbd</A ></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>1.6.1. <A +HREF="#AEN90" +>Step 5a: Starting from inetd.conf</A +></DT +><DT +>1.6.2. <A +HREF="#AEN119" +>Step 5b. Alternative: starting it as a daemon</A +></DT +></DL +></DD ><DT >1.7. <A -HREF="#AEN144" ->Try listing the shares available on your +HREF="#AEN135" +>Step 6: Try listing the shares available on your server</A ></DT ><DT >1.8. <A -HREF="#AEN153" ->Try connecting with the unix client</A +HREF="#AEN144" +>Step 7: Try connecting with the unix client</A ></DT ><DT >1.9. <A -HREF="#AEN169" ->Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT, +HREF="#AEN160" +>Step 8: Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT, Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</A ></DT ><DT >1.10. <A -HREF="#AEN183" +HREF="#AEN174" >What If Things Don't Work?</A ></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>1.10.1. <A +HREF="#AEN179" +>Diagnosing Problems</A +></DT +><DT +>1.10.2. <A +HREF="#AEN183" +>Scope IDs</A +></DT +><DT +>1.10.3. <A +HREF="#AEN186" +>Choosing the Protocol Level</A +></DT +><DT +>1.10.4. <A +HREF="#AEN195" +>Printing from UNIX to a Client PC</A +></DT +><DT +>1.10.5. <A +HREF="#AEN200" +>Locking</A +></DT +><DT +>1.10.6. <A +HREF="#AEN209" +>Mapping Usernames</A +></DT +></DL +></DD ></DL ></DD ><DT >2. <A -HREF="#IMPROVED-BROWSING" ->Improved browsing in samba</A +HREF="#DIAGNOSIS" +>Diagnosing your samba server</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT >2.1. <A -HREF="#AEN228" ->Overview of browsing</A +HREF="#AEN223" +>Introduction</A ></DT ><DT >2.2. <A -HREF="#AEN232" ->Browsing support in samba</A +HREF="#AEN228" +>Assumptions</A ></DT ><DT >2.3. <A -HREF="#AEN241" ->Problem resolution</A +HREF="#AEN238" +>Tests</A ></DT +><DD +><DL ><DT ->2.4. <A -HREF="#AEN248" ->Browsing across subnets</A +>2.3.1. <A +HREF="#AEN240" +>Test 1</A ></DT ><DT ->2.5. <A -HREF="#AEN288" ->Setting up a WINS server</A +>2.3.2. <A +HREF="#AEN246" +>Test 2</A ></DT ><DT ->2.6. <A -HREF="#AEN307" ->Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</A +>2.3.3. <A +HREF="#AEN252" +>Test 3</A ></DT ><DT ->2.7. <A -HREF="#AEN325" ->Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</A +>2.3.4. <A +HREF="#AEN267" +>Test 4</A ></DT ><DT ->2.8. <A -HREF="#AEN335" ->Forcing samba to be the master</A +>2.3.5. <A +HREF="#AEN272" +>Test 5</A ></DT ><DT ->2.9. <A -HREF="#AEN344" ->Making samba the domain master</A +>2.3.6. <A +HREF="#AEN278" +>Test 6</A ></DT ><DT ->2.10. <A -HREF="#AEN362" ->Note about broadcast addresses</A +>2.3.7. <A +HREF="#AEN286" +>Test 7</A ></DT ><DT ->2.11. <A -HREF="#AEN365" ->Multiple interfaces</A +>2.3.8. <A +HREF="#AEN312" +>Test 8</A +></DT +><DT +>2.3.9. <A +HREF="#AEN329" +>Test 9</A +></DT +><DT +>2.3.10. <A +HREF="#AEN337" +>Test 10</A +></DT +><DT +>2.3.11. <A +HREF="#AEN343" +>Test 11</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>2.4. <A +HREF="#AEN348" +>Still having troubles?</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT >3. <A -HREF="#OPLOCKS" ->Oplocks</A +HREF="#INTEGRATE-MS-NETWORKS" +>Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT >3.1. <A -HREF="#AEN377" ->What are oplocks?</A +HREF="#AEN365" +>Agenda</A ></DT -></DL -></DD ><DT ->4. <A -HREF="#BROWSING-QUICK" ->Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</A +>3.2. <A +HREF="#AEN387" +>Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->4.1. <A -HREF="#AEN392" ->Discussion</A +>3.2.1. <A +HREF="#AEN403" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/hosts</TT +></A ></DT ><DT ->4.2. <A -HREF="#AEN400" ->Use of the "Remote Announce" parameter</A +>3.2.2. <A +HREF="#AEN419" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/resolv.conf</TT +></A ></DT ><DT ->4.3. <A -HREF="#AEN414" ->Use of the "Remote Browse Sync" parameter</A +>3.2.3. <A +HREF="#AEN430" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/host.conf</TT +></A ></DT ><DT ->4.4. <A -HREF="#AEN419" ->Use of WINS</A +>3.2.4. <A +HREF="#AEN438" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT +></A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>3.3. <A +HREF="#AEN450" +>Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</A ></DT +><DD +><DL ><DT ->4.5. <A -HREF="#AEN430" ->Do NOT use more than one (1) protocol on MS Windows machines</A +>3.3.1. <A +HREF="#AEN462" +>The NetBIOS Name Cache</A +></DT +><DT +>3.3.2. <A +HREF="#AEN467" +>The LMHOSTS file</A +></DT +><DT +>3.3.3. <A +HREF="#AEN475" +>HOSTS file</A +></DT +><DT +>3.3.4. <A +HREF="#AEN480" +>DNS Lookup</A ></DT ><DT ->4.6. <A -HREF="#AEN436" ->Name Resolution Order</A +>3.3.5. <A +HREF="#AEN483" +>WINS Lookup</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->5. <A -HREF="#PWENCRYPT" ->LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba</A +>3.4. <A +HREF="#AEN495" +>How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and +dependable browsing using Samba</A +></DT +><DT +>3.5. <A +HREF="#AEN505" +>MS Windows security options and how to configure +Samba for seemless integration</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->5.1. <A -HREF="#AEN472" ->Introduction</A +>3.5.1. <A +HREF="#AEN533" +>Use MS Windows NT as an authentication server</A +></DT +><DT +>3.5.2. <A +HREF="#AEN541" +>Make Samba a member of an MS Windows NT security domain</A ></DT ><DT ->5.2. <A -HREF="#AEN477" ->Important Notes About Security</A +>3.5.3. <A +HREF="#AEN558" +>Configure Samba as an authentication server</A ></DT +></DL +></DD ><DT ->5.3. <A -HREF="#AEN512" ->The smbpasswd Command</A +>3.6. <A +HREF="#AEN575" +>Conclusions</A ></DT ></DL ></DD +><DT +>4. <A +HREF="#PAM" +>Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally +managed authentication</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>4.1. <A +HREF="#AEN596" +>Samba and PAM</A +></DT +><DT +>4.2. <A +HREF="#AEN640" +>Distributed Authentication</A +></DT +><DT +>4.3. <A +HREF="#AEN647" +>PAM Configuration in smb.conf</A +></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->II. <A -HREF="#AEN544" ->Type of installation</A +>5. <A +HREF="#MSDFS" +>Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>5.1. <A +HREF="#AEN667" +>Instructions</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT +>5.1.1. <A +HREF="#AEN702" +>Notes</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +></DL +></DD +><DT >6. <A -HREF="#SAMBA-PDC" ->How to Configure Samba as a NT4 Primary Domain Controller</A +HREF="#UNIX-PERMISSIONS" +>UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT >6.1. <A -HREF="#AEN566" ->Prerequisite Reading</A +HREF="#AEN722" +>Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT + security dialogs</A ></DT ><DT >6.2. <A -HREF="#AEN572" ->Background</A +HREF="#AEN731" +>How to view file security on a Samba share</A ></DT ><DT >6.3. <A -HREF="#AEN611" ->Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</A +HREF="#AEN742" +>Viewing file ownership</A ></DT ><DT >6.4. <A -HREF="#AEN654" ->Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients to the -Domain</A +HREF="#AEN762" +>Viewing file or directory permissions</A ></DT +><DD +><DL ><DT ->6.5. <A -HREF="#AEN738" ->Common Problems and Errors</A +>6.4.1. <A +HREF="#AEN777" +>File Permissions</A ></DT ><DT ->6.6. <A -HREF="#AEN786" ->System Policies and Profiles</A +>6.4.2. <A +HREF="#AEN791" +>Directory Permissions</A ></DT +></DL +></DD ><DT ->6.7. <A -HREF="#AEN830" ->What other help can I get?</A +>6.5. <A +HREF="#AEN798" +>Modifying file or directory permissions</A ></DT ><DT ->6.8. <A -HREF="#AEN944" ->Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</A +>6.6. <A +HREF="#AEN820" +>Interaction with the standard Samba create mask + parameters</A ></DT ><DT ->6.9. <A -HREF="#AEN1082" ->DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control & Samba</A +>6.7. <A +HREF="#AEN884" +>Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute + mapping</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT >7. <A -HREF="#SAMBA-BDC" ->How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain</A +HREF="#PRINTING" +>Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT >7.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1118" ->Prerequisite Reading</A +HREF="#AEN905" +>Introduction</A ></DT ><DT >7.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1122" ->Background</A +HREF="#AEN927" +>Configuration</A ></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>7.2.1. <A +HREF="#AEN938" +>Creating [print$]</A +></DT +><DT +>7.2.2. <A +HREF="#AEN973" +>Setting Drivers for Existing Printers</A +></DT +><DT +>7.2.3. <A +HREF="#AEN990" +>Support a large number of printers</A +></DT +><DT +>7.2.4. <A +HREF="#AEN1001" +>Adding New Printers via the Windows NT APW</A +></DT +><DT +>7.2.5. <A +HREF="#AEN1031" +>Samba and Printer Ports</A +></DT +></DL +></DD ><DT >7.3. <A -HREF="#AEN1130" ->What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?</A +HREF="#AEN1039" +>The Imprints Toolset</A ></DT +><DD +><DL ><DT ->7.4. <A -HREF="#AEN1139" ->Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller?</A +>7.3.1. <A +HREF="#AEN1043" +>What is Imprints?</A ></DT ><DT ->7.5. <A -HREF="#AEN1143" ->How do I set up a Samba BDC?</A +>7.3.2. <A +HREF="#AEN1053" +>Creating Printer Driver Packages</A +></DT +><DT +>7.3.3. <A +HREF="#AEN1056" +>The Imprints server</A +></DT +><DT +>7.3.4. <A +HREF="#AEN1060" +>The Installation Client</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>7.4. <A +HREF="#AEN1082" +><A +NAME="MIGRATION" +></A +>Migration to from Samba 2.0.x to 2.2.x</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT >8. <A -HREF="#ADS" ->Samba as a ADS domain member</A +HREF="#PRINTINGDEBUG" +>Debugging Printing Problems</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT >8.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1178" ->Installing the required packages for Debian</A +HREF="#AEN1128" +>Introduction</A ></DT ><DT >8.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1184" ->Installing the required packages for RedHat</A +HREF="#AEN1144" +>Debugging printer problems</A ></DT ><DT >8.3. <A -HREF="#AEN1193" ->Compile Samba</A +HREF="#AEN1153" +>What printers do I have?</A ></DT ><DT >8.4. <A -HREF="#AEN1205" ->Setup your /etc/krb5.conf</A +HREF="#AEN1161" +>Setting up printcap and print servers</A ></DT ><DT >8.5. <A -HREF="#AEN1215" ->Create the computer account</A +HREF="#AEN1189" +>Job sent, no output</A ></DT ><DT >8.6. <A -HREF="#AEN1231" ->Test your server setup</A +HREF="#AEN1200" +>Job sent, strange output</A ></DT ><DT >8.7. <A -HREF="#AEN1236" ->Testing with smbclient</A +HREF="#AEN1212" +>Raw PostScript printed</A ></DT ><DT >8.8. <A -HREF="#AEN1239" ->Notes</A +HREF="#AEN1215" +>Advanced Printing</A +></DT +><DT +>8.9. <A +HREF="#AEN1218" +>Real debugging</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT >9. <A -HREF="#DOMAIN-SECURITY" ->Samba as a NT4 domain member</A +HREF="#SECURITYLEVELS" +>Security levels</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT >9.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1261" ->Joining an NT Domain with Samba 2.2</A +HREF="#AEN1231" +>Introduction</A ></DT ><DT >9.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1325" ->Samba and Windows 2000 Domains</A -></DT -><DT ->9.3. <A -HREF="#AEN1330" ->Why is this better than security = server?</A +HREF="#AEN1242" +>More complete description of security levels</A ></DT ></DL ></DD -></DL -></DD -><DT ->III. <A -HREF="#AEN1346" ->Optional configuration</A -></DT -><DD -><DL ><DT >10. <A -HREF="#INTEGRATE-MS-NETWORKS" ->Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</A +HREF="#DOMAIN-SECURITY" +>security = domain in Samba 2.x</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT >10.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1362" ->Agenda</A +HREF="#AEN1275" +>Joining an NT Domain with Samba 2.2</A ></DT ><DT >10.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1384" ->Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</A +HREF="#AEN1339" +>Samba and Windows 2000 Domains</A ></DT ><DT >10.3. <A -HREF="#AEN1447" ->Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</A -></DT -><DT ->10.4. <A -HREF="#AEN1492" ->How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and -dependable browsing using Samba</A -></DT -><DT ->10.5. <A -HREF="#AEN1502" ->MS Windows security options and how to configure -Samba for seemless integration</A -></DT -><DT ->10.6. <A -HREF="#AEN1572" ->Conclusions</A +HREF="#AEN1344" +>Why is this better than security = server?</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT >11. <A -HREF="#UNIX-PERMISSIONS" ->UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</A +HREF="#WINBIND" +>Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT >11.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1593" ->Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT - security dialogs</A +HREF="#AEN1397" +>Abstract</A ></DT ><DT >11.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1602" ->How to view file security on a Samba share</A +HREF="#AEN1401" +>Introduction</A ></DT ><DT >11.3. <A -HREF="#AEN1613" ->Viewing file ownership</A +HREF="#AEN1414" +>What Winbind Provides</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>11.3.1. <A +HREF="#AEN1421" +>Target Uses</A ></DT +></DL +></DD ><DT >11.4. <A -HREF="#AEN1633" ->Viewing file or directory permissions</A +HREF="#AEN1425" +>How Winbind Works</A ></DT +><DD +><DL ><DT ->11.5. <A -HREF="#AEN1669" ->Modifying file or directory permissions</A +>11.4.1. <A +HREF="#AEN1430" +>Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</A ></DT ><DT ->11.6. <A -HREF="#AEN1691" ->Interaction with the standard Samba create mask - parameters</A +>11.4.2. <A +HREF="#AEN1434" +>Name Service Switch</A ></DT ><DT ->11.7. <A -HREF="#AEN1755" ->Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute - mapping</A +>11.4.3. <A +HREF="#AEN1450" +>Pluggable Authentication Modules</A +></DT +><DT +>11.4.4. <A +HREF="#AEN1458" +>User and Group ID Allocation</A +></DT +><DT +>11.4.5. <A +HREF="#AEN1462" +>Result Caching</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->12. <A -HREF="#PAM" ->Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally -managed authentication</A +>11.5. <A +HREF="#AEN1465" +>Installation and Configuration</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->12.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1776" ->Samba and PAM</A +>11.5.1. <A +HREF="#AEN1472" +>Introduction</A ></DT ><DT ->12.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1820" ->Distributed Authentication</A +>11.5.2. <A +HREF="#AEN1485" +>Requirements</A ></DT ><DT ->12.3. <A -HREF="#AEN1827" ->PAM Configuration in smb.conf</A +>11.5.3. <A +HREF="#AEN1499" +>Testing Things Out</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->13. <A -HREF="#MSDFS" ->Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</A +>11.6. <A +HREF="#AEN1714" +>Limitations</A ></DT -><DD -><DL ><DT ->13.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1847" ->Instructions</A +>11.7. <A +HREF="#AEN1724" +>Conclusion</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->14. <A -HREF="#PRINTING" ->Printing Support</A +>12. <A +HREF="#SAMBA-PDC" +>How to Configure Samba 2.2 as a Primary Domain Controller</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->14.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1908" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->14.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1930" ->Configuration</A +>12.1. <A +HREF="#AEN1744" +>Prerequisite Reading</A ></DT ><DT ->14.3. <A -HREF="#AEN2038" ->The Imprints Toolset</A +>12.2. <A +HREF="#AEN1750" +>Background</A ></DT ><DT ->14.4. <A -HREF="#AEN2081" ->Diagnosis</A +>12.3. <A +HREF="#AEN1789" +>Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</A ></DT -></DL -></DD ><DT ->15. <A -HREF="#SECURITYLEVELS" ->Security levels</A +>12.4. <A +HREF="#AEN1832" +>Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients to the +Domain</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->15.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2186" ->Introduction</A +>12.4.1. <A +HREF="#AEN1851" +>Manual Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</A ></DT ><DT ->15.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2197" ->More complete description of security levels</A +>12.4.2. <A +HREF="#AEN1886" +>"On-the-Fly" Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</A ></DT -></DL -></DD ><DT ->16. <A -HREF="#WINBIND" ->Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</A +>12.4.3. <A +HREF="#AEN1895" +>Joining the Client to the Domain</A ></DT -><DD -><DL +></DL +></DD ><DT ->16.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2249" ->Abstract</A +>12.5. <A +HREF="#AEN1910" +>Common Problems and Errors</A ></DT ><DT ->16.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2253" ->Introduction</A +>12.6. <A +HREF="#AEN1958" +>System Policies and Profiles</A ></DT ><DT ->16.3. <A -HREF="#AEN2266" ->What Winbind Provides</A +>12.7. <A +HREF="#AEN2002" +>What other help can I get?</A ></DT ><DT ->16.4. <A -HREF="#AEN2277" ->How Winbind Works</A +>12.8. <A +HREF="#AEN2116" +>Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</A ></DT +><DD +><DL ><DT ->16.5. <A -HREF="#AEN2317" ->Installation and Configuration</A +>12.8.1. <A +HREF="#AEN2142" +>Configuration Instructions: Network Logons</A ></DT ><DT ->16.6. <A -HREF="#AEN2566" ->Limitations</A +>12.8.2. <A +HREF="#AEN2161" +>Configuration Instructions: Setting up Roaming User Profiles</A ></DT +></DL +></DD ><DT ->16.7. <A -HREF="#AEN2576" ->Conclusion</A +>12.9. <A +HREF="#AEN2254" +>DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control & Samba</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->17. <A -HREF="#PDB-MYSQL" ->Passdb MySQL plugin</A +>13. <A +HREF="#SAMBA-BDC" +>How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->17.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2590" ->Building</A +>13.1. <A +HREF="#AEN2290" +>Prerequisite Reading</A ></DT ><DT ->17.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2596" ->Configuring</A +>13.2. <A +HREF="#AEN2294" +>Background</A ></DT ><DT ->17.3. <A -HREF="#AEN2611" ->Using plaintext passwords or encrypted password</A +>13.3. <A +HREF="#AEN2302" +>What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?</A ></DT +><DD +><DL ><DT ->17.4. <A -HREF="#AEN2616" ->Getting non-column data from the table</A +>13.3.1. <A +HREF="#AEN2305" +>How does a Workstation find its domain controller?</A +></DT +><DT +>13.3.2. <A +HREF="#AEN2308" +>When is the PDC needed?</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->18. <A -HREF="#PDB-XML" ->Passdb XML plugin</A +>13.4. <A +HREF="#AEN2311" +>Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller?</A ></DT -><DD -><DL ><DT ->18.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2635" ->Building</A +>13.5. <A +HREF="#AEN2315" +>How do I set up a Samba BDC?</A ></DT +><DD +><DL ><DT ->18.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2641" ->Usage</A +>13.5.1. <A +HREF="#AEN2332" +>How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?</A ></DT ></DL ></DD +></DL +></DD ><DT ->19. <A +>14. <A HREF="#SAMBA-LDAP-HOWTO" >Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->19.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2664" +>14.1. <A +HREF="#AEN2353" >Purpose</A ></DT ><DT ->19.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2684" +>14.2. <A +HREF="#AEN2373" >Introduction</A ></DT ><DT ->19.3. <A -HREF="#AEN2713" +>14.3. <A +HREF="#AEN2402" >Supported LDAP Servers</A ></DT ><DT ->19.4. <A -HREF="#AEN2718" +>14.4. <A +HREF="#AEN2407" >Schema and Relationship to the RFC 2307 posixAccount</A ></DT ><DT ->19.5. <A -HREF="#AEN2730" +>14.5. <A +HREF="#AEN2419" >Configuring Samba with LDAP</A ></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>14.5.1. <A +HREF="#AEN2421" +>OpenLDAP configuration</A +></DT +><DT +>14.5.2. <A +HREF="#AEN2438" +>Configuring Samba</A +></DT +></DL +></DD ><DT ->19.6. <A -HREF="#AEN2777" +>14.6. <A +HREF="#AEN2466" >Accounts and Groups management</A ></DT ><DT ->19.7. <A -HREF="#AEN2782" +>14.7. <A +HREF="#AEN2471" >Security and sambaAccount</A ></DT ><DT ->19.8. <A -HREF="#AEN2802" +>14.8. <A +HREF="#AEN2491" >LDAP specials attributes for sambaAccounts</A ></DT ><DT ->19.9. <A -HREF="#AEN2872" +>14.9. <A +HREF="#AEN2561" >Example LDIF Entries for a sambaAccount</A ></DT ><DT ->19.10. <A -HREF="#AEN2880" +>14.10. <A +HREF="#AEN2569" >Comments</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->20. <A -HREF="#CVS-ACCESS" ->HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->20.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2891" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->20.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2896" ->CVS Access to samba.org</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->21. <A -HREF="#GROUPMAPPING" ->Group mapping HOWTO</A -></DT -><DT ->22. <A -HREF="#SPEED" ->Samba performance issues</A +>15. <A +HREF="#ADS" +>Using samba 3.0 with ActiveDirectory support</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->22.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2982" ->Comparisons</A -></DT -><DT ->22.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2988" ->Oplocks</A -></DT -><DT ->22.3. <A -HREF="#AEN3008" ->Socket options</A -></DT -><DT ->22.4. <A -HREF="#AEN3015" ->Read size</A -></DT -><DT ->22.5. <A -HREF="#AEN3020" ->Max xmit</A -></DT -><DT ->22.6. <A -HREF="#AEN3025" ->Locking</A -></DT -><DT ->22.7. <A -HREF="#AEN3029" ->Share modes</A -></DT -><DT ->22.8. <A -HREF="#AEN3034" ->Log level</A -></DT -><DT ->22.9. <A -HREF="#AEN3037" ->Wide lines</A +>15.1. <A +HREF="#AEN2587" +>Installing the required packages for Debian</A ></DT ><DT ->22.10. <A -HREF="#AEN3040" ->Read raw</A +>15.2. <A +HREF="#AEN2593" +>Installing the required packages for RedHat</A ></DT ><DT ->22.11. <A -HREF="#AEN3045" ->Write raw</A +>15.3. <A +HREF="#AEN2602" +>Compile Samba</A ></DT ><DT ->22.12. <A -HREF="#AEN3049" ->Read prediction</A +>15.4. <A +HREF="#AEN2614" +>Setup your /etc/krb5.conf</A ></DT ><DT ->22.13. <A -HREF="#AEN3056" ->Memory mapping</A +>15.5. <A +HREF="#AEN2624" +>Create the computer account</A ></DT +><DD +><DL ><DT ->22.14. <A -HREF="#AEN3061" ->Slow Clients</A +>15.5.1. <A +HREF="#AEN2628" +>Possible errors</A ></DT +></DL +></DD ><DT ->22.15. <A -HREF="#AEN3065" ->Slow Logins</A +>15.6. <A +HREF="#AEN2640" +>Test your server setup</A ></DT ><DT ->22.16. <A -HREF="#AEN3068" ->Client tuning</A +>15.7. <A +HREF="#AEN2645" +>Testing with smbclient</A ></DT ><DT ->22.17. <A -HREF="#AEN3100" ->My Results</A +>15.8. <A +HREF="#AEN2648" +>Notes</A ></DT ></DL ></DD -></DL -></DD ><DT ->IV. <A -HREF="#AEN3106" ->Appendixes</A +>16. <A +HREF="#IMPROVED-BROWSING" +>Improved browsing in samba</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->23. <A -HREF="#PORTABILITY" ->Portability</A +>16.1. <A +HREF="#AEN2659" +>Overview of browsing</A ></DT -><DD -><DL ><DT ->23.1. <A -HREF="#AEN3115" ->HPUX</A +>16.2. <A +HREF="#AEN2663" +>Browsing support in samba</A ></DT ><DT ->23.2. <A -HREF="#AEN3121" ->SCO Unix</A +>16.3. <A +HREF="#AEN2672" +>Problem resolution</A ></DT ><DT ->23.3. <A -HREF="#AEN3125" ->DNIX</A +>16.4. <A +HREF="#AEN2679" +>Browsing across subnets</A ></DT +><DD +><DL ><DT ->23.4. <A -HREF="#AEN3154" ->RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II</A +>16.4.1. <A +HREF="#AEN2684" +>How does cross subnet browsing work ?</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->24. <A -HREF="#OTHER-CLIENTS" ->Samba and other CIFS clients</A +>16.5. <A +HREF="#AEN2719" +>Setting up a WINS server</A ></DT -><DD -><DL ><DT ->24.1. <A -HREF="#AEN3175" ->Macintosh clients?</A +>16.6. <A +HREF="#AEN2738" +>Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</A ></DT ><DT ->24.2. <A -HREF="#AEN3184" ->OS2 Client</A +>16.7. <A +HREF="#AEN2756" +>Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</A ></DT ><DT ->24.3. <A -HREF="#AEN3224" ->Windows for Workgroups</A +>16.8. <A +HREF="#AEN2766" +>Forcing samba to be the master</A ></DT ><DT ->24.4. <A -HREF="#AEN3245" ->Windows '95/'98</A +>16.9. <A +HREF="#AEN2775" +>Making samba the domain master</A ></DT ><DT ->24.5. <A -HREF="#AEN3261" ->Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</A +>16.10. <A +HREF="#AEN2793" +>Note about broadcast addresses</A +></DT +><DT +>16.11. <A +HREF="#AEN2796" +>Multiple interfaces</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->25. <A -HREF="#BUGREPORT" ->Reporting Bugs</A +>17. <A +HREF="#SPEED" +>Samba performance issues</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->25.1. <A -HREF="#AEN3285" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->25.2. <A -HREF="#AEN3295" ->General info</A +>17.1. <A +HREF="#AEN2814" +>Comparisons</A ></DT ><DT ->25.3. <A -HREF="#AEN3301" ->Debug levels</A +>17.2. <A +HREF="#AEN2820" +>Oplocks</A ></DT +><DD +><DL ><DT ->25.4. <A -HREF="#AEN3318" ->Internal errors</A +>17.2.1. <A +HREF="#AEN2822" +>Overview</A ></DT ><DT ->25.5. <A -HREF="#AEN3328" ->Attaching to a running process</A +>17.2.2. <A +HREF="#AEN2830" +>Level2 Oplocks</A ></DT ><DT ->25.6. <A -HREF="#AEN3331" ->Patches</A +>17.2.3. <A +HREF="#AEN2836" +>Old 'fake oplocks' option - deprecated</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->26. <A -HREF="#DIAGNOSIS" ->Diagnosing your samba server</A +>17.3. <A +HREF="#AEN2840" +>Socket options</A ></DT -><DD -><DL ><DT ->26.1. <A -HREF="#AEN3354" ->Introduction</A +>17.4. <A +HREF="#AEN2847" +>Read size</A ></DT ><DT ->26.2. <A -HREF="#AEN3359" ->Assumptions</A +>17.5. <A +HREF="#AEN2852" +>Max xmit</A ></DT ><DT ->26.3. <A -HREF="#AEN3369" ->Tests</A +>17.6. <A +HREF="#AEN2857" +>Locking</A ></DT ><DT ->26.4. <A -HREF="#AEN3479" ->Still having troubles?</A +>17.7. <A +HREF="#AEN2861" +>Share modes</A ></DT -></DL -></DD -></DL -></DD -></DL -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="PART" -><A -NAME="AEN18" -></A -><DIV -CLASS="TITLEPAGE" -><H1 -CLASS="TITLE" ->I. General installation</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="PARTINTRO" -><A -NAME="AEN20" -></A -><H1 ->Introduction</H1 -><P ->This part contains general info on how to install samba -and how to configure the parts of samba you will most likely need. -PLEASE read this.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="TOC" -><DL ><DT -><B ->Table of Contents</B +>17.8. <A +HREF="#AEN2866" +>Log level</A ></DT ><DT ->1. <A -HREF="#INSTALL" ->How to Install and Test SAMBA</A +>17.9. <A +HREF="#AEN2869" +>Wide lines</A ></DT -><DD -><DL ><DT ->1.1. <A -HREF="#AEN25" ->Read the man pages</A +>17.10. <A +HREF="#AEN2872" +>Read raw</A ></DT ><DT ->1.2. <A -HREF="#AEN35" ->Building the Binaries</A +>17.11. <A +HREF="#AEN2877" +>Write raw</A ></DT ><DT ->1.3. <A -HREF="#AEN63" ->The all important step</A +>17.12. <A +HREF="#AEN2881" +>Read prediction</A ></DT ><DT ->1.4. <A -HREF="#AEN67" ->Create the smb configuration file.</A +>17.13. <A +HREF="#AEN2888" +>Memory mapping</A ></DT ><DT ->1.5. <A -HREF="#AEN81" ->Test your config file with - <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->testparm</B -></A +>17.14. <A +HREF="#AEN2893" +>Slow Clients</A ></DT ><DT ->1.6. <A -HREF="#AEN89" ->Starting the smbd and nmbd</A +>17.15. <A +HREF="#AEN2897" +>Slow Logins</A ></DT -><DD -><DL ><DT ->1.6.1. <A -HREF="#AEN99" ->Starting from inetd.conf</A +>17.16. <A +HREF="#AEN2900" +>Client tuning</A ></DT ><DT ->1.6.2. <A -HREF="#AEN128" ->Alternative: starting it as a daemon</A +>17.17. <A +HREF="#AEN2932" +>My Results</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->1.7. <A -HREF="#AEN144" ->Try listing the shares available on your - server</A -></DT -><DT ->1.8. <A -HREF="#AEN153" ->Try connecting with the unix client</A -></DT -><DT ->1.9. <A -HREF="#AEN169" ->Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT, - Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</A -></DT -><DT ->1.10. <A -HREF="#AEN183" ->What If Things Don't Work?</A +>18. <A +HREF="#OTHER-CLIENTS" +>Samba and other CIFS clients</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->1.10.1. <A -HREF="#AEN188" ->Diagnosing Problems</A +>18.1. <A +HREF="#AEN2953" +>Macintosh clients?</A ></DT ><DT ->1.10.2. <A -HREF="#AEN192" ->Scope IDs</A +>18.2. <A +HREF="#AEN2962" +>OS2 Client</A ></DT +><DD +><DL ><DT ->1.10.3. <A -HREF="#AEN195" ->Choosing the Protocol Level</A +>18.2.1. <A +HREF="#AEN2964" +>How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or + OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba?</A ></DT ><DT ->1.10.4. <A -HREF="#AEN204" ->Printing from UNIX to a Client PC</A +>18.2.2. <A +HREF="#AEN2979" +>How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect), + OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba?</A ></DT ><DT ->1.10.5. <A -HREF="#AEN209" ->Locking</A +>18.2.3. <A +HREF="#AEN2988" +>Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version) + is used as a client?</A ></DT ><DT ->1.10.6. <A -HREF="#AEN218" ->Mapping Usernames</A +>18.2.4. <A +HREF="#AEN2992" +>How do I get printer driver download working + for OS/2 clients?</A ></DT ></DL ></DD -></DL -></DD ><DT ->2. <A -HREF="#IMPROVED-BROWSING" ->Improved browsing in samba</A +>18.3. <A +HREF="#AEN3002" +>Windows for Workgroups</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->2.1. <A -HREF="#AEN228" ->Overview of browsing</A -></DT -><DT ->2.2. <A -HREF="#AEN232" ->Browsing support in samba</A +>18.3.1. <A +HREF="#AEN3004" +>Use latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft</A ></DT ><DT ->2.3. <A -HREF="#AEN241" ->Problem resolution</A +>18.3.2. <A +HREF="#AEN3009" +>Delete .pwl files after password change</A ></DT ><DT ->2.4. <A -HREF="#AEN248" ->Browsing across subnets</A +>18.3.3. <A +HREF="#AEN3014" +>Configure WfW password handling</A ></DT -><DD -><DL ><DT ->2.4.1. <A -HREF="#AEN253" ->How does cross subnet browsing work ?</A +>18.3.4. <A +HREF="#AEN3018" +>Case handling of passwords</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->2.5. <A -HREF="#AEN288" ->Setting up a WINS server</A +>18.4. <A +HREF="#AEN3023" +>Windows '95/'98</A ></DT ><DT ->2.6. <A -HREF="#AEN307" ->Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</A +>18.5. <A +HREF="#AEN3039" +>Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</A ></DT +></DL +></DD ><DT ->2.7. <A -HREF="#AEN325" ->Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</A +>19. <A +HREF="#CVS-ACCESS" +>HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</A ></DT +><DD +><DL ><DT ->2.8. <A -HREF="#AEN335" ->Forcing samba to be the master</A +>19.1. <A +HREF="#AEN3063" +>Introduction</A ></DT ><DT ->2.9. <A -HREF="#AEN344" ->Making samba the domain master</A +>19.2. <A +HREF="#AEN3068" +>CVS Access to samba.org</A ></DT +><DD +><DL ><DT ->2.10. <A -HREF="#AEN362" ->Note about broadcast addresses</A +>19.2.1. <A +HREF="#AEN3071" +>Access via CVSweb</A ></DT ><DT ->2.11. <A -HREF="#AEN365" ->Multiple interfaces</A +>19.2.2. <A +HREF="#AEN3076" +>Access via cvs</A ></DT ></DL ></DD -><DT ->3. <A -HREF="#OPLOCKS" ->Oplocks</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->3.1. <A -HREF="#AEN377" ->What are oplocks?</A -></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->4. <A -HREF="#BROWSING-QUICK" ->Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</A +>20. <A +HREF="#BUGREPORT" +>Reporting Bugs</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->4.1. <A -HREF="#AEN392" ->Discussion</A +>20.1. <A +HREF="#AEN3111" +>Introduction</A ></DT ><DT ->4.2. <A -HREF="#AEN400" ->Use of the "Remote Announce" parameter</A +>20.2. <A +HREF="#AEN3118" +>General info</A ></DT ><DT ->4.3. <A -HREF="#AEN414" ->Use of the "Remote Browse Sync" parameter</A +>20.3. <A +HREF="#AEN3124" +>Debug levels</A ></DT ><DT ->4.4. <A -HREF="#AEN419" ->Use of WINS</A +>20.4. <A +HREF="#AEN3141" +>Internal errors</A ></DT ><DT ->4.5. <A -HREF="#AEN430" ->Do NOT use more than one (1) protocol on MS Windows machines</A +>20.5. <A +HREF="#AEN3151" +>Attaching to a running process</A ></DT ><DT ->4.6. <A -HREF="#AEN436" ->Name Resolution Order</A +>20.6. <A +HREF="#AEN3154" +>Patches</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->5. <A -HREF="#PWENCRYPT" ->LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->5.1. <A -HREF="#AEN472" ->Introduction</A +>21. <A +HREF="#GROUPMAPPING" +>Group mapping HOWTO</A ></DT ><DT ->5.2. <A -HREF="#AEN477" ->Important Notes About Security</A +>22. <A +HREF="#PORTABILITY" +>Portability</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT ->5.2.1. <A -HREF="#AEN496" ->Advantages of SMB Encryption</A +>22.1. <A +HREF="#AEN3201" +>HPUX</A ></DT ><DT ->5.2.2. <A -HREF="#AEN503" ->Advantages of non-encrypted passwords</A +>22.2. <A +HREF="#AEN3206" +>SCO Unix</A ></DT -></DL -></DD ><DT ->5.3. <A -HREF="#AEN512" ->The smbpasswd Command</A +>22.3. <A +HREF="#AEN3210" +>DNIX</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ></DL ></DIV -></DIV ><DIV CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 @@ -1379,9 +1458,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN25" +NAME="AEN20" ></A ->1.1. Read the man pages</H2 +>1.1. Step 0: Read the man pages</H2 ><P >The man pages distributed with SAMBA contain lots of useful info that will help to get you started. @@ -1394,20 +1473,10 @@ CLASS="PROMPT" ><TT CLASS="USERINPUT" ><B ->man smbd.8</B -></TT -> - or - <TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->$ </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B >nroff -man smbd.8 | more </B ></TT -> on older unixes.</P +></P ><P >Other sources of information are pointed to by the Samba web site,<A @@ -1421,9 +1490,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN35" +NAME="AEN28" ></A ->1.2. Building the Binaries</H2 +>1.2. Step 1: Building the Binaries</H2 ><P >To do this, first run the program <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -1520,9 +1589,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN63" +NAME="AEN56" ></A ->1.3. The all important step</H2 +>1.3. Step 2: The all important step</H2 ><P >At this stage you must fetch yourself a coffee or other drink you find stimulating. Getting the rest @@ -1537,9 +1606,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN67" +NAME="AEN60" ></A ->1.4. Create the smb configuration file.</H2 +>1.4. Step 3: Create the smb configuration file.</H2 ><P >There are sample configuration files in the examples subdirectory in the distribution. I suggest you read them @@ -1593,9 +1662,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN81" +NAME="AEN74" ></A ->1.5. Test your config file with +>1.5. Step 4: Test your config file with <B CLASS="COMMAND" >testparm</B @@ -1611,21 +1680,15 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><P >Make sure it runs OK and that the services look reasonable before proceeding. </P -><P ->Always run testparm again when you change - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf</TT ->!</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN89" +NAME="AEN80" ></A ->1.6. Starting the smbd and nmbd</H2 +>1.6. Step 5: Starting the smbd and nmbd</H2 ><P >You must choose to start smbd and nmbd either as daemons or from <B @@ -1663,9 +1726,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN99" +NAME="AEN90" ></A ->1.6.1. Starting from inetd.conf</H3 +>1.6.1. Step 5a: Starting from inetd.conf</H3 ><P >NOTE; The following will be different if you use NIS or NIS+ to distributed services maps.</P @@ -1767,9 +1830,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN128" +NAME="AEN119" ></A ->1.6.2. Alternative: starting it as a daemon</H3 +>1.6.2. Step 5b. Alternative: starting it as a daemon</H3 ><P >To start the server as a daemon you should create a script something like this one, perhaps calling @@ -1824,9 +1887,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN144" +NAME="AEN135" ></A ->1.7. Try listing the shares available on your +>1.7. Step 6: Try listing the shares available on your server</H2 ><P ><TT @@ -1865,9 +1928,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN153" +NAME="AEN144" ></A ->1.8. Try connecting with the unix client</H2 +>1.8. Step 7: Try connecting with the unix client</H2 ><P ><TT CLASS="PROMPT" @@ -1928,9 +1991,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN169" +NAME="AEN160" ></A ->1.9. Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT, +>1.9. Step 8: Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT, Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</H2 ><P >Try mounting disks. eg:</P @@ -1977,7 +2040,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN183" +NAME="AEN174" ></A >1.10. What If Things Don't Work?</H2 ><P @@ -2000,16 +2063,15 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN188" +NAME="AEN179" ></A >1.10.1. Diagnosing Problems</H3 ><P ->If you have installation problems then go to the - <A -HREF="Diagnosis.html" -TARGET="_top" ->Diagnosis</A -> chapter to try to find the +>If you have installation problems then go to + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>DIAGNOSIS.txt</TT +> to try to find the problem.</P ></DIV ><DIV @@ -2017,7 +2079,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN192" +NAME="AEN183" ></A >1.10.2. Scope IDs</H3 ><P @@ -2033,7 +2095,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN195" +NAME="AEN186" ></A >1.10.3. Choosing the Protocol Level</H3 ><P @@ -2074,7 +2136,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN204" +NAME="AEN195" ></A >1.10.4. Printing from UNIX to a Client PC</H3 ><P @@ -2095,7 +2157,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN209" +NAME="AEN200" ></A >1.10.5. Locking</H3 ><P @@ -2155,7 +2217,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN218" +NAME="AEN209" ></A >1.10.6. Mapping Usernames</H3 ><P @@ -2169,5855 +2231,537 @@ NAME="AEN218" CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="IMPROVED-BROWSING" +NAME="DIAGNOSIS" ></A ->Chapter 2. Improved browsing in samba</H1 +>Chapter 2. Diagnosing your samba server</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN228" -></A ->2.1. Overview of browsing</H2 -><P ->SMB networking provides a mechanism by which clients can access a list -of machines in a network, a so-called "browse list". This list -contains machines that are ready to offer file and/or print services -to other machines within the network. Thus it does not include -machines which aren't currently able to do server tasks. The browse -list is heavily used by all SMB clients. Configuration of SMB -browsing has been problematic for some Samba users, hence this -document.</P -><P ->Browsing will NOT work if name resolution from NetBIOS names to IP -addresses does not function correctly. Use of a WINS server is highly -recommended to aid the resolution of NetBIOS (SMB) names to IP addresses. -WINS allows remote segment clients to obtain NetBIOS name_type information -that can NOT be provided by any other means of name resolution.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN232" +NAME="AEN223" ></A ->2.2. Browsing support in samba</H2 -><P ->Samba now fully supports browsing. The browsing is supported by nmbd -and is also controlled by options in the smb.conf file (see smb.conf(5)).</P -><P ->Samba can act as a local browse master for a workgroup and the ability -for samba to support domain logons and scripts is now available. See -DOMAIN.txt for more information on domain logons.</P -><P ->Samba can also act as a domain master browser for a workgroup. This -means that it will collate lists from local browse masters into a -wide area network server list. In order for browse clients to -resolve the names they may find in this list, it is recommended that -both samba and your clients use a WINS server.</P +>2.1. Introduction</H2 ><P ->Note that you should NOT set Samba to be the domain master for a -workgroup that has the same name as an NT Domain: on each wide area -network, you must only ever have one domain master browser per workgroup, -regardless of whether it is NT, Samba or any other type of domain master -that is providing this service.</P -><P ->[Note that nmbd can be configured as a WINS server, but it is not -necessary to specifically use samba as your WINS server. NTAS can -be configured as your WINS server. In a mixed NT server and -samba environment on a Wide Area Network, it is recommended that -you use the NT server's WINS server capabilities. In a samba-only -environment, it is recommended that you use one and only one nmbd -as your WINS server].</P -><P ->To get browsing to work you need to run nmbd as usual, but will need -to use the "workgroup" option in smb.conf to control what workgroup -Samba becomes a part of.</P -><P ->Samba also has a useful option for a Samba server to offer itself for -browsing on another subnet. It is recommended that this option is only -used for 'unusual' purposes: announcements over the internet, for -example. See "remote announce" in the smb.conf man page. </P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN241" -></A ->2.3. Problem resolution</H2 -><P ->If something doesn't work then hopefully the log.nmb file will help -you track down the problem. Try a debug level of 2 or 3 for finding -problems. Also note that the current browse list usually gets stored -in text form in a file called browse.dat.</P -><P ->Note that if it doesn't work for you, then you should still be able to -type the server name as \\SERVER in filemanager then hit enter and -filemanager should display the list of available shares.</P -><P ->Some people find browsing fails because they don't have the global -"guest account" set to a valid account. Remember that the IPC$ -connection that lists the shares is done as guest, and thus you must -have a valid guest account.</P -><P ->Also, a lot of people are getting bitten by the problem of too many -parameters on the command line of nmbd in inetd.conf. This trick is to -not use spaces between the option and the parameter (eg: -d2 instead -of -d 2), and to not use the -B and -N options. New versions of nmbd -are now far more likely to correctly find your broadcast and network -address, so in most cases these aren't needed.</P -><P ->The other big problem people have is that their broadcast address, -netmask or IP address is wrong (specified with the "interfaces" option -in smb.conf)</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN248" -></A ->2.4. Browsing across subnets</H2 -><P ->With the release of Samba 1.9.17(alpha1 and above) Samba has been -updated to enable it to support the replication of browse lists -across subnet boundaries. New code and options have been added to -achieve this. This section describes how to set this feature up -in different settings.</P -><P ->To see browse lists that span TCP/IP subnets (ie. networks separated -by routers that don't pass broadcast traffic) you must set up at least -one WINS server. The WINS server acts as a DNS for NetBIOS names, allowing -NetBIOS name to IP address translation to be done by doing a direct -query of the WINS server. This is done via a directed UDP packet on -port 137 to the WINS server machine. The reason for a WINS server is -that by default, all NetBIOS name to IP address translation is done -by broadcasts from the querying machine. This means that machines -on one subnet will not be able to resolve the names of machines on -another subnet without using a WINS server.</P -><P ->Remember, for browsing across subnets to work correctly, all machines, -be they Windows 95, Windows NT, or Samba servers must have the IP address -of a WINS server given to them by a DHCP server, or by manual configuration -(for Win95 and WinNT, this is in the TCP/IP Properties, under Network -settings) for Samba this is in the smb.conf file.</P -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN253" -></A ->2.4.1. How does cross subnet browsing work ?</H3 -><P ->Cross subnet browsing is a complicated dance, containing multiple -moving parts. It has taken Microsoft several years to get the code -that achieves this correct, and Samba lags behind in some areas. -However, with the 1.9.17 release, Samba is capable of cross subnet -browsing when configured correctly.</P -><P ->Consider a network set up as follows :</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> (DMB) - N1_A N1_B N1_C N1_D N1_E - | | | | | - ------------------------------------------------------- - | subnet 1 | - +---+ +---+ - |R1 | Router 1 Router 2 |R2 | - +---+ +---+ - | | - | subnet 2 subnet 3 | - -------------------------- ------------------------------------ - | | | | | | | | - N2_A N2_B N2_C N2_D N3_A N3_B N3_C N3_D - (WINS)</PRE -></P -><P ->Consisting of 3 subnets (1, 2, 3) connected by two routers -(R1, R2) - these do not pass broadcasts. Subnet 1 has 5 machines -on it, subnet 2 has 4 machines, subnet 3 has 4 machines. Assume -for the moment that all these machines are configured to be in the -same workgroup (for simplicities sake). Machine N1_C on subnet 1 -is configured as Domain Master Browser (ie. it will collate the -browse lists for the workgroup). Machine N2_D is configured as -WINS server and all the other machines are configured to register -their NetBIOS names with it.</P -><P ->As all these machines are booted up, elections for master browsers -will take place on each of the three subnets. Assume that machine -N1_C wins on subnet 1, N2_B wins on subnet 2, and N3_D wins on -subnet 3 - these machines are known as local master browsers for -their particular subnet. N1_C has an advantage in winning as the -local master browser on subnet 1 as it is set up as Domain Master -Browser.</P -><P ->On each of the three networks, machines that are configured to -offer sharing services will broadcast that they are offering -these services. The local master browser on each subnet will -receive these broadcasts and keep a record of the fact that -the machine is offering a service. This list of records is -the basis of the browse list. For this case, assume that -all the machines are configured to offer services so all machines -will be on the browse list.</P -><P ->For each network, the local master browser on that network is -considered 'authoritative' for all the names it receives via -local broadcast. This is because a machine seen by the local -master browser via a local broadcast must be on the same -network as the local master browser and thus is a 'trusted' -and 'verifiable' resource. Machines on other networks that -the local master browsers learn about when collating their -browse lists have not been directly seen - these records are -called 'non-authoritative'.</P -><P ->At this point the browse lists look as follows (these are -the machines you would see in your network neighborhood if -you looked in it on a particular network right now).</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->Subnet Browse Master List ------- ------------- ---- -Subnet1 N1_C N1_A, N1_B, N1_C, N1_D, N1_E - -Subnet2 N2_B N2_A, N2_B, N2_C, N2_D - -Subnet3 N3_D N3_A, N3_B, N3_C, N3_D</PRE -></P -><P ->Note that at this point all the subnets are separate, no -machine is seen across any of the subnets.</P -><P ->Now examine subnet 2. As soon as N2_B has become the local -master browser it looks for a Domain master browser to synchronize -its browse list with. It does this by querying the WINS server -(N2_D) for the IP address associated with the NetBIOS name -WORKGROUP>1B<. This name was registerd by the Domain master -browser (N1_C) with the WINS server as soon as it was booted.</P -><P ->Once N2_B knows the address of the Domain master browser it -tells it that is the local master browser for subnet 2 by -sending a MasterAnnouncement packet as a UDP port 138 packet. -It then synchronizes with it by doing a NetServerEnum2 call. This -tells the Domain Master Browser to send it all the server -names it knows about. Once the domain master browser receives -the MasterAnnouncement packet it schedules a synchronization -request to the sender of that packet. After both synchronizations -are done the browse lists look like :</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->Subnet Browse Master List ------- ------------- ---- -Subnet1 N1_C N1_A, N1_B, N1_C, N1_D, N1_E, - N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*) - -Subnet2 N2_B N2_A, N2_B, N2_C, N2_D - N1_A(*), N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*) - -Subnet3 N3_D N3_A, N3_B, N3_C, N3_D - -Servers with a (*) after them are non-authoritative names.</PRE -></P -><P ->At this point users looking in their network neighborhood on -subnets 1 or 2 will see all the servers on both, users on -subnet 3 will still only see the servers on their own subnet.</P -><P ->The same sequence of events that occured for N2_B now occurs -for the local master browser on subnet 3 (N3_D). When it -synchronizes browse lists with the domain master browser (N1_A) -it gets both the server entries on subnet 1, and those on -subnet 2. After N3_D has synchronized with N1_C and vica-versa -the browse lists look like.</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->Subnet Browse Master List ------- ------------- ---- -Subnet1 N1_C N1_A, N1_B, N1_C, N1_D, N1_E, - N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*), - N3_A(*), N3_B(*), N3_C(*), N3_D(*) - -Subnet2 N2_B N2_A, N2_B, N2_C, N2_D - N1_A(*), N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*) - -Subnet3 N3_D N3_A, N3_B, N3_C, N3_D - N1_A(*), N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*), - N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*) - -Servers with a (*) after them are non-authoritative names.</PRE -></P -><P ->At this point users looking in their network neighborhood on -subnets 1 or 3 will see all the servers on all sunbets, users on -subnet 2 will still only see the servers on subnets 1 and 2, but not 3.</P -><P ->Finally, the local master browser for subnet 2 (N2_B) will sync again -with the domain master browser (N1_C) and will recieve the missing -server entries. Finally - and as a steady state (if no machines -are removed or shut off) the browse lists will look like :</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->Subnet Browse Master List ------- ------------- ---- -Subnet1 N1_C N1_A, N1_B, N1_C, N1_D, N1_E, - N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*), - N3_A(*), N3_B(*), N3_C(*), N3_D(*) - -Subnet2 N2_B N2_A, N2_B, N2_C, N2_D - N1_A(*), N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*) - N3_A(*), N3_B(*), N3_C(*), N3_D(*) - -Subnet3 N3_D N3_A, N3_B, N3_C, N3_D - N1_A(*), N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*), - N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*) - -Servers with a (*) after them are non-authoritative names.</PRE -></P -><P ->Synchronizations between the domain master browser and local -master browsers will continue to occur, but this should be a -steady state situation.</P -><P ->If either router R1 or R2 fails the following will occur:</P -><P -></P -><OL -TYPE="1" -><LI -><P -> Names of computers on each side of the inaccessible network fragments - will be maintained for as long as 36 minutes, in the network neighbourhood - lists. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> Attempts to connect to these inaccessible computers will fail, but the - names will not be removed from the network neighbourhood lists. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> If one of the fragments is cut off from the WINS server, it will only - be able to access servers on its local subnet, by using subnet-isolated - broadcast NetBIOS name resolution. The effects are similar to that of - losing access to a DNS server. - </P -></LI -></OL -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN288" -></A ->2.5. Setting up a WINS server</H2 -><P ->Either a Samba machine or a Windows NT Server machine may be set up -as a WINS server. To set a Samba machine to be a WINS server you must -add the following option to the smb.conf file on the selected machine : -in the [globals] section add the line </P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" -> wins support = yes</B -></P -><P ->Versions of Samba previous to 1.9.17 had this parameter default to -yes. If you have any older versions of Samba on your network it is -strongly suggested you upgrade to 1.9.17 or above, or at the very -least set the parameter to 'no' on all these machines.</P -><P ->Machines with "<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->wins support = yes</B ->" will keep a list of -all NetBIOS names registered with them, acting as a DNS for NetBIOS names.</P -><P ->You should set up only ONE wins server. Do NOT set the -"<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->wins support = yes</B ->" option on more than one Samba -server.</P -><P ->To set up a Windows NT Server as a WINS server you need to set up -the WINS service - see your NT documentation for details. Note that -Windows NT WINS Servers can replicate to each other, allowing more -than one to be set up in a complex subnet environment. As Microsoft -refuse to document these replication protocols Samba cannot currently -participate in these replications. It is possible in the future that -a Samba->Samba WINS replication protocol may be defined, in which -case more than one Samba machine could be set up as a WINS server -but currently only one Samba server should have the "wins support = yes" -parameter set.</P -><P ->After the WINS server has been configured you must ensure that all -machines participating on the network are configured with the address -of this WINS server. If your WINS server is a Samba machine, fill in -the Samba machine IP address in the "Primary WINS Server" field of -the "Control Panel->Network->Protocols->TCP->WINS Server" dialogs -in Windows 95 or Windows NT. To tell a Samba server the IP address -of the WINS server add the following line to the [global] section of -all smb.conf files :</P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->wins server = >name or IP address<</B -></P -><P ->where >name or IP address< is either the DNS name of the WINS server -machine or its IP address.</P +>This file contains a list of tests you can perform to validate your +Samba server. It also tells you what the likely cause of the problem +is if it fails any one of these steps. If it passes all these tests +then it is probably working fine.</P ><P ->Note that this line MUST NOT BE SET in the smb.conf file of the Samba -server acting as the WINS server itself. If you set both the -"<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->wins support = yes</B ->" option and the -"<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->wins server = >name<</B ->" option then -nmbd will fail to start.</P +>You should do ALL the tests, in the order shown. I have tried to +carefully choose them so later tests only use capabilities verified in +the earlier tests.</P ><P ->There are two possible scenarios for setting up cross subnet browsing. -The first details setting up cross subnet browsing on a network containing -Windows 95, Samba and Windows NT machines that are not configured as -part of a Windows NT Domain. The second details setting up cross subnet -browsing on networks that contain NT Domains.</P +>If you send me an email saying "it doesn't work" and you have not +followed this test procedure then you should not be surprised if I +ignore your email.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN307" +NAME="AEN228" ></A ->2.6. Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</H2 -><P ->To set up cross subnet browsing on a network containing machines -in up to be in a WORKGROUP, not an NT Domain you need to set up one -Samba server to be the Domain Master Browser (note that this is *NOT* -the same as a Primary Domain Controller, although in an NT Domain the -same machine plays both roles). The role of a Domain master browser is -to collate the browse lists from local master browsers on all the -subnets that have a machine participating in the workgroup. Without -one machine configured as a domain master browser each subnet would -be an isolated workgroup, unable to see any machines on any other -subnet. It is the presense of a domain master browser that makes -cross subnet browsing possible for a workgroup.</P +>2.2. Assumptions</H2 ><P ->In an WORKGROUP environment the domain master browser must be a -Samba server, and there must only be one domain master browser per -workgroup name. To set up a Samba server as a domain master browser, -set the following option in the [global] section of the smb.conf file :</P +>In all of the tests I assume you have a Samba server called BIGSERVER +and a PC called ACLIENT both in workgroup TESTGROUP. I also assume the +PC is running windows for workgroups with a recent copy of the +microsoft tcp/ip stack. Alternatively, your PC may be running Windows +95 or Windows NT (Workstation or Server).</P ><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->domain master = yes</B -></P -><P ->The domain master browser should also preferrably be the local master -browser for its own subnet. In order to achieve this set the following -options in the [global] section of the smb.conf file :</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> domain master = yes - local master = yes - preferred master = yes - os level = 65</PRE -></P -><P ->The domain master browser may be the same machine as the WINS -server, if you require.</P -><P ->Next, you should ensure that each of the subnets contains a -machine that can act as a local master browser for the -workgroup. Any NT machine should be able to do this, as will -Windows 95 machines (although these tend to get rebooted more -often, so it's not such a good idea to use these). To make a -Samba server a local master browser set the following -options in the [global] section of the smb.conf file :</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> domain master = no - local master = yes - preferred master = yes - os level = 65</PRE -></P -><P ->Do not do this for more than one Samba server on each subnet, -or they will war with each other over which is to be the local -master browser.</P -><P ->The "local master" parameter allows Samba to act as a local master -browser. The "preferred master" causes nmbd to force a browser -election on startup and the "os level" parameter sets Samba high -enough so that it should win any browser elections.</P -><P ->If you have an NT machine on the subnet that you wish to -be the local master browser then you can disable Samba from -becoming a local master browser by setting the following -options in the [global] section of the smb.conf file :</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> domain master = no - local master = no - preferred master = no - os level = 0</PRE -></P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN325" -></A ->2.7. Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</H2 -><P ->If you are adding Samba servers to a Windows NT Domain then -you must not set up a Samba server as a domain master browser. -By default, a Windows NT Primary Domain Controller for a Domain -name is also the Domain master browser for that name, and many -things will break if a Samba server registers the Domain master -browser NetBIOS name (DOMAIN>1B<) with WINS instead of the PDC.</P +>The procedure is similar for other types of clients.</P ><P ->For subnets other than the one containing the Windows NT PDC -you may set up Samba servers as local master browsers as -described. To make a Samba server a local master browser set -the following options in the [global] section of the smb.conf -file :</P +>I also assume you know the name of an available share in your +smb.conf. I will assume this share is called "tmp". You can add a +"tmp" share like by adding the following to smb.conf:</P ><P ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> domain master = no - local master = yes - preferred master = yes - os level = 65</PRE -></P -><P ->If you wish to have a Samba server fight the election with machines -on the same subnet you may set the "os level" parameter to lower -levels. By doing this you can tune the order of machines that -will become local master browsers if they are running. For -more details on this see the section "FORCING SAMBA TO BE THE MASTER" -below.</P -><P ->If you have Windows NT machines that are members of the domain -on all subnets, and you are sure they will always be running then -you can disable Samba from taking part in browser elections and -ever becoming a local master browser by setting following options -in the [global] section of the smb.conf file :</P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" -> domain master = no - local master = no - preferred master = no - os level = 0</B -></P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN335" -></A ->2.8. Forcing samba to be the master</H2 -><P ->Who becomes the "master browser" is determined by an election process -using broadcasts. Each election packet contains a number of parameters -which determine what precedence (bias) a host should have in the -election. By default Samba uses a very low precedence and thus loses -elections to just about anyone else.</P -><P ->If you want Samba to win elections then just set the "os level" global -option in smb.conf to a higher number. It defaults to 0. Using 34 -would make it win all elections over every other system (except other -samba systems!)</P -><P ->A "os level" of 2 would make it beat WfWg and Win95, but not NTAS. A -NTAS domain controller uses level 32.</P -><P ->The maximum os level is 255</P -><P ->If you want samba to force an election on startup, then set the -"preferred master" global option in smb.conf to "yes". Samba will -then have a slight advantage over other potential master browsers -that are not preferred master browsers. Use this parameter with -care, as if you have two hosts (whether they are windows 95 or NT or -samba) on the same local subnet both set with "preferred master" to -"yes", then periodically and continually they will force an election -in order to become the local master browser.</P -><P ->If you want samba to be a "domain master browser", then it is -recommended that you also set "preferred master" to "yes", because -samba will not become a domain master browser for the whole of your -LAN or WAN if it is not also a local master browser on its own -broadcast isolated subnet.</P -><P ->It is possible to configure two samba servers to attempt to become -the domain master browser for a domain. The first server that comes -up will be the domain master browser. All other samba servers will -attempt to become the domain master browser every 5 minutes. They -will find that another samba server is already the domain master -browser and will fail. This provides automatic redundancy, should -the current domain master browser fail.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN344" -></A ->2.9. Making samba the domain master</H2 -><P ->The domain master is responsible for collating the browse lists of -multiple subnets so that browsing can occur between subnets. You can -make samba act as the domain master by setting "domain master = yes" -in smb.conf. By default it will not be a domain master.</P -><P ->Note that you should NOT set Samba to be the domain master for a -workgroup that has the same name as an NT Domain.</P -><P ->When samba is the domain master and the master browser it will listen -for master announcements (made roughly every twelve minutes) from local -master browsers on other subnets and then contact them to synchronise -browse lists.</P -><P ->If you want samba to be the domain master then I suggest you also set -the "os level" high enough to make sure it wins elections, and set -"preferred master" to "yes", to get samba to force an election on -startup.</P -><P ->Note that all your servers (including samba) and clients should be -using a WINS server to resolve NetBIOS names. If your clients are only -using broadcasting to resolve NetBIOS names, then two things will occur:</P -><P -></P -><OL -TYPE="1" -><LI -><P -> your local master browsers will be unable to find a domain master - browser, as it will only be looking on the local subnet. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> if a client happens to get hold of a domain-wide browse list, and - a user attempts to access a host in that list, it will be unable to - resolve the NetBIOS name of that host. - </P -></LI -></OL -><P ->If, however, both samba and your clients are using a WINS server, then:</P -><P -></P -><OL -TYPE="1" -><LI -><P -> your local master browsers will contact the WINS server and, as long as - samba has registered that it is a domain master browser with the WINS - server, your local master browser will receive samba's ip address - as its domain master browser. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> when a client receives a domain-wide browse list, and a user attempts - to access a host in that list, it will contact the WINS server to - resolve the NetBIOS name of that host. as long as that host has - registered its NetBIOS name with the same WINS server, the user will - be able to see that host. - </P -></LI -></OL -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN362" -></A ->2.10. Note about broadcast addresses</H2 -><P ->If your network uses a "0" based broadcast address (for example if it -ends in a 0) then you will strike problems. Windows for Workgroups -does not seem to support a 0's broadcast and you will probably find -that browsing and name lookups won't work.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN365" -></A ->2.11. Multiple interfaces</H2 -><P ->Samba now supports machines with multiple network interfaces. If you -have multiple interfaces then you will need to use the "interfaces" -option in smb.conf to configure them. See smb.conf(5) for details.</P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><HR><H1 -><A -NAME="OPLOCKS" -></A ->Chapter 3. Oplocks</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN377" -></A ->3.1. What are oplocks?</H2 -><P ->When a client opens a file it can request an "oplock" or file -lease. This is (to simplify a bit) a guarentee that no one else -has the file open simultaneously. It allows the client to not -send any updates on the file to the server, thus reducing a -network file access to local access (once the file is in -client cache). An "oplock break" is when the server sends -a request to the client to flush all its changes back to -the server, so the file is in a consistent state for other -opens to succeed. If a client fails to respond to this -asynchronous request then the file can be corrupted. Hence -the "turn off oplocks" answer if people are having multi-user -file access problems.</P -><P ->Unless the kernel is "oplock aware" (SGI IRIX and Linux are -the only two UNIXes that are at the moment) then if a local -UNIX process accesses the file simultaneously then Samba -has no way of telling this is occuring, so the guarentee -to the client is broken. This can corrupt the file. Short -answer - it you have UNIX clients accessing the same file -as smbd locally or via NFS and you're not running Linux or -IRIX then turn off oplocks for that file or share.</P -><P ->"Share modes". These are modes of opening a file, that -guarentee an invarient - such as DENY_WRITE - which means -that if any other opens are requested with write access after -this current open has succeeded then they should be denied -with a "sharing violation" error message. Samba handles these -internally inside smbd. UNIX clients accessing the same file -ignore these invarients. Just proving that if you need simultaneous -file access from a Windows and UNIX client you *must* have an -application that is written to lock records correctly on both -sides. Few applications are written like this, and even fewer -are cross platform (UNIX and Windows) so in practice this isn't -much of a problem.</P -><P ->"Locking". This really means "byte range locking" - such as -lock 10 bytes at file offset 24 for write access. This is the -area in which well written UNIX and Windows apps will cooperate. -Windows locks (at least from NT or above) are 64-bit unsigned -offsets. UNIX locks are either 31 bit or 63 bit and are signed -(the top bit is used for the sign). Samba handles these by -first ensuring that all the Windows locks don't conflict (ie. -if other Windows clients have competing locks then just reject -immediately) - this allows us to support 64-bit Windows locks -on 32-bit filesystems. Secondly any locks that are valid are -then mapped onto UNIX fcntl byte range locks. These are the -locks that will be seen by UNIX processes. If there is a conflict -here the lock is rejected.</P -><P ->Note that if a client has an oplock then it "knows" that no -other client can have the file open so usually doesn't bother -to send to lock request to the server - this means once again -if you need to share files between UNIX and Windows processes -either use IRIX or Linux, or turn off oplocks for these -files/shares.</P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><HR><H1 -><A -NAME="BROWSING-QUICK" -></A ->Chapter 4. Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</H1 -><P ->This document should be read in conjunction with Browsing and may -be taken as the fast track guide to implementing browsing across subnets -and / or across workgroups (or domains). WINS is the best tool for resolution -of NetBIOS names to IP addesses. WINS is NOT involved in browse list handling -except by way of name to address mapping.</P -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN392" -></A ->4.1. Discussion</H2 -><P ->Firstly, all MS Windows networking is based on SMB (Server Message -Block) based messaging. SMB messaging is implemented using NetBIOS. Samba -implements NetBIOS by encapsulating it over TCP/IP. MS Windows products can -do likewise. NetBIOS based networking uses broadcast messaging to affect -browse list management. When running NetBIOS over TCP/IP this uses UDP -based messaging. UDP messages can be broadcast or unicast.</P -><P ->Normally, only unicast UDP messaging can be forwarded by routers. The -"remote announce" parameter to smb.conf helps to project browse announcements -to remote network segments via unicast UDP. Similarly, the "remote browse sync" -parameter of smb.conf implements browse list collation using unicast UDP.</P -><P ->Secondly, in those networks where Samba is the only SMB server technology -wherever possible nmbd should be configured on one (1) machine as the WINS -server. This makes it easy to manage the browsing environment. If each network -segment is configured with it's own Samba WINS server, then the only way to -get cross segment browsing to work is by using the "remote announce" and -the "remote browse sync" parameters to your smb.conf file.</P -><P ->If only one WINS server is used then the use of the "remote announce" and the -"remote browse sync" parameters should NOT be necessary.</P -><P ->Samba WINS does not support MS-WINS replication. This means that when setting up -Samba as a WINS server there must only be one nmbd configured as a WINS server -on the network. Some sites have used multiple Samba WINS servers for redundancy -(one server per subnet) and then used "remote browse sync" and "remote announce" -to affect browse list collation across all segments. Note that this means -clients will only resolve local names, and must be configured to use DNS to -resolve names on other subnets in order to resolve the IP addresses of the -servers they can see on other subnets. This setup is not recommended, but is -mentioned as a practical consideration (ie: an 'if all else fails' scenario).</P -><P ->Lastly, take note that browse lists are a collection of unreliable broadcast -messages that are repeated at intervals of not more than 15 minutes. This means -that it will take time to establish a browse list and it can take up to 45 -minutes to stabilise, particularly across network segments.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN400" -></A ->4.2. Use of the "Remote Announce" parameter</H2 -><P ->The "remote announce" parameter of smb.conf can be used to forcibly ensure -that all the NetBIOS names on a network get announced to a remote network. -The syntax of the "remote announce" parameter is: -<PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> remote announce = a.b.c.d [e.f.g.h] ...</PRE -> -_or_ -<PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> remote announce = a.b.c.d/WORKGROUP [e.f.g.h/WORKGROUP] ...</PRE -> - -where: -<P +> [tmp] + comment = temporary files + path = /tmp + read only = yes </PRE ></P -><DIV -CLASS="VARIABLELIST" -><DL -><DT ->a.b.c.d and e.f.g.h</DT -><DD -><P ->is either the LMB (Local Master Browser) IP address -or the broadcst address of the remote network. -ie: the LMB is at 192.168.1.10, or the address -could be given as 192.168.1.255 where the netmask -is assumed to be 24 bits (255.255.255.0). -When the remote announcement is made to the broadcast -address of the remote network every host will receive -our announcements. This is noisy and therefore -undesirable but may be necessary if we do NOT know -the IP address of the remote LMB.</P -></DD -><DT ->WORKGROUP</DT -><DD ><P ->is optional and can be either our own workgroup -or that of the remote network. If you use the -workgroup name of the remote network then our -NetBIOS machine names will end up looking like -they belong to that workgroup, this may cause -name resolution problems and should be avoided.</P -></DD -></DL -></DIV -> </P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN414" -></A ->4.3. Use of the "Remote Browse Sync" parameter</H2 -><P ->The "remote browse sync" parameter of smb.conf is used to announce to -another LMB that it must synchronise it's NetBIOS name list with our -Samba LMB. It works ONLY if the Samba server that has this option is -simultaneously the LMB on it's network segment.</P +>THESE TESTS ASSUME VERSION 2.0.6 OR LATER OF THE SAMBA SUITE. SOME +COMMANDS SHOWN DID NOT EXIST IN EARLIER VERSIONS</P ><P ->The syntax of the "remote browse sync" parameter is: -<PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> remote browse sync = a.b.c.d</PRE -> - -where a.b.c.d is either the IP address of the remote LMB or else is the network broadcast address of the remote segment.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN419" -></A ->4.4. Use of WINS</H2 -><P ->Use of WINS (either Samba WINS _or_ MS Windows NT Server WINS) is highly -recommended. Every NetBIOS machine registers it's name together with a -name_type value for each of of several types of service it has available. -eg: It registers it's name directly as a unique (the type 0x03) name. -It also registers it's name if it is running the lanmanager compatible -server service (used to make shares and printers available to other users) -by registering the server (the type 0x20) name.</P -><P ->All NetBIOS names are up to 15 characters in length. The name_type variable -is added to the end of the name - thus creating a 16 character name. Any -name that is shorter than 15 characters is padded with spaces to the 15th -character. ie: All NetBIOS names are 16 characters long (including the -name_type information).</P -><P ->WINS can store these 16 character names as they get registered. A client -that wants to log onto the network can ask the WINS server for a list -of all names that have registered the NetLogon service name_type. This saves -broadcast traffic and greatly expedites logon processing. Since broadcast -name resolution can not be used across network segments this type of -information can only be provided via WINS _or_ via statically configured -"lmhosts" files that must reside on all clients in the absence of WINS.</P -><P ->WINS also serves the purpose of forcing browse list synchronisation by all -LMB's. LMB's must synchronise their browse list with the DMB (domain master -browser) and WINS helps the LMB to identify it's DMB. By definition this -will work only within a single workgroup. Note that the domain master browser -has NOTHING to do with what is referred to as an MS Windows NT Domain. The -later is a reference to a security environment while the DMB refers to the -master controller for browse list information only.</P -><P ->Use of WINS will work correctly only if EVERY client TCP/IP protocol stack -has been configured to use the WINS server/s. Any client that has not been -configured to use the WINS server will continue to use only broadcast based -name registration so that WINS may NEVER get to know about it. In any case, -machines that have not registered with a WINS server will fail name to address -lookup attempts by other clients and will therefore cause workstation access -errors.</P -><P ->To configure Samba as a WINS server just add "wins support = yes" to the -smb.conf file [globals] section.</P -><P ->To configure Samba to register with a WINS server just add -"wins server = a.b.c.d" to your smb.conf file [globals] section.</P +>Please pay attention to the error messages you receive. If any error message +reports that your server is being unfriendly you should first check that you +IP name resolution is correctly set up. eg: Make sure your /etc/resolv.conf +file points to name servers that really do exist.</P ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->DO NOT EVER</I -></SPAN -> use both "wins support = yes" together with "wins server = a.b.c.d" -particularly not using it's own IP address.</P +>Also, if you do not have DNS server access for name resolution please check +that the settings for your smb.conf file results in "dns proxy = no". The +best way to check this is with "testparm smb.conf"</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN430" +NAME="AEN238" ></A ->4.5. Do NOT use more than one (1) protocol on MS Windows machines</H2 -><P ->A very common cause of browsing problems results from installing more than -one protocol on an MS Windows machine.</P -><P ->Every NetBIOS machine take part in a process of electing the LMB (and DMB) -every 15 minutes. A set of election criteria is used to determine the order -of precidence for winning this election process. A machine running Samba or -Windows NT will be biased so that the most suitable machine will predictably -win and thus retain it's role.</P -><P ->The election process is "fought out" so to speak over every NetBIOS network -interface. In the case of a Windows 9x machine that has both TCP/IP and IPX -installed and has NetBIOS enabled over both protocols the election will be -decided over both protocols. As often happens, if the Windows 9x machine is -the only one with both protocols then the LMB may be won on the NetBIOS -interface over the IPX protocol. Samba will then lose the LMB role as Windows -9x will insist it knows who the LMB is. Samba will then cease to function -as an LMB and thus browse list operation on all TCP/IP only machines will -fail.</P -><P ->The safest rule of all to follow it this - USE ONLY ONE PROTOCOL!</P -></DIV +>2.3. Tests</H2 ><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" +CLASS="SECT2" +><H3 +CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN436" +NAME="AEN240" ></A ->4.6. Name Resolution Order</H2 -><P ->Resolution of NetBIOS names to IP addresses can take place using a number -of methods. The only ones that can provide NetBIOS name_type information -are: -<P -></P -><TABLE -BORDER="0" -><TBODY -><TR -><TD ->WINS: the best tool!</TD -></TR -><TR -><TD ->LMHOSTS: is static and hard to maintain.</TD -></TR -><TR -><TD ->Broadcast: uses UDP and can not resolve names across remote segments.</TD -></TR -></TBODY -></TABLE +>2.3.1. Test 1</H3 ><P -></P -></P -><P ->Alternative means of name resolution includes: -<P -></P -><TABLE -BORDER="0" -><TBODY -><TR -><TD ->/etc/hosts: is static, hard to maintain, and lacks name_type info</TD -></TR -><TR -><TD ->DNS: is a good choice but lacks essential name_type info.</TD -></TR -></TBODY -></TABLE -><P -></P -></P +>In the directory in which you store your smb.conf file, run the command +"testparm smb.conf". If it reports any errors then your smb.conf +configuration file is faulty.</P ><P ->Many sites want to restrict DNS lookups and want to avoid broadcast name -resolution traffic. The "name resolve order" parameter is of great help here. -The syntax of the "name resolve order" parameter is: -<PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> name resolve order = wins lmhosts bcast host</PRE -> -_or_ -<PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> name resolve order = wins lmhosts (eliminates bcast and host)</PRE -> -The default is: -<PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> name resolve order = host lmhost wins bcast</PRE ->. -where "host" refers the the native methods used by the Unix system -to implement the gethostbyname() function call. This is normally -controlled by <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/host.conf</TT ->, <TT +>Note: Your smb.conf file may be located in: <TT CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT -> and <TT +>/etc</TT +> + Or in: <TT CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/resolv.conf</TT ->.</P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><HR><H1 -><A -NAME="PWENCRYPT" -></A ->Chapter 5. LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN472" -></A ->5.1. Introduction</H2 -><P ->Newer windows clients send encrypted passwords over - the wire, instead of plain text passwords. The newest clients - will only send encrypted passwords and refuse to send plain text - passwords, unless their registry is tweaked.</P -><P ->These passwords can't be converted to unix style encrypted - passwords. Because of that you can't use the standard unix - user database, and you have to store the Lanman and NT hashes - somewhere else. For more information, see the documentation - about the <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->passdb backend = </B -> parameter. - </P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN477" -></A ->5.2. Important Notes About Security</H2 -><P ->The unix and SMB password encryption techniques seem similar - on the surface. This similarity is, however, only skin deep. The unix - scheme typically sends clear text passwords over the network when - logging in. This is bad. The SMB encryption scheme never sends the - cleartext password over the network but it does store the 16 byte - hashed values on disk. This is also bad. Why? Because the 16 byte hashed - values are a "password equivalent". You cannot derive the user's - password from them, but they could potentially be used in a modified - client to gain access to a server. This would require considerable - technical knowledge on behalf of the attacker but is perfectly possible. - You should thus treat the smbpasswd file as though it contained the - cleartext passwords of all your users. Its contents must be kept - secret, and the file should be protected accordingly.</P -><P ->Ideally we would like a password scheme which neither requires - plain text passwords on the net or on disk. Unfortunately this - is not available as Samba is stuck with being compatible with - other SMB systems (WinNT, WfWg, Win95 etc). </P -><DIV -CLASS="WARNING" -><P -></P -><TABLE -CLASS="WARNING" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Warning"></TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" -><P ->Note that Windows NT 4.0 Service pack 3 changed the - default for permissible authentication so that plaintext - passwords are <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->never</I -></SPAN -> sent over the wire. - The solution to this is either to switch to encrypted passwords - with Samba or edit the Windows NT registry to re-enable plaintext - passwords. See the document WinNT.txt for details on how to do - this.</P -><P ->Other Microsoft operating systems which also exhibit - this behavior includes</P -><P +>/usr/local/samba/lib</TT ></P -><UL -><LI -><P ->MS DOS Network client 3.0 with - the basic network redirector installed</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->Windows 95 with the network redirector - update installed</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->Windows 98 [se]</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->Windows 2000</P -></LI -></UL -><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note :</I -></SPAN ->All current release of - Microsoft SMB/CIFS clients support authentication via the - SMB Challenge/Response mechanism described here. Enabling - clear text authentication does not disable the ability - of the client to participate in encrypted authentication.</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN496" +NAME="AEN246" ></A ->5.2.1. Advantages of SMB Encryption</H3 +>2.3.2. Test 2</H3 ><P -></P -><UL -><LI +>Run the command "ping BIGSERVER" from the PC and "ping ACLIENT" from +the unix box. If you don't get a valid response then your TCP/IP +software is not correctly installed. </P ><P ->plain text passwords are not passed across - the network. Someone using a network sniffer cannot just - record passwords going to the SMB server.</P -></LI -><LI +>Note that you will need to start a "dos prompt" window on the PC to +run ping.</P ><P ->WinNT doesn't like talking to a server - that isn't using SMB encrypted passwords. It will refuse - to browse the server if the server is also in user level - security mode. It will insist on prompting the user for the - password on each connection, which is very annoying. The - only things you can do to stop this is to use SMB encryption. - </P -></LI -></UL +>If you get a message saying "host not found" or similar then your DNS +software or /etc/hosts file is not correctly setup. It is possible to +run samba without DNS entries for the server and client, but I assume +you do have correct entries for the remainder of these tests. </P +><P +>Another reason why ping might fail is if your host is running firewall +software. You will need to relax the rules to let in the workstation +in question, perhaps by allowing access from another subnet (on Linux +this is done via the ipfwadm program.)</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN503" -></A ->5.2.2. Advantages of non-encrypted passwords</H3 -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P ->plain text passwords are not kept - on disk. </P -></LI -><LI -><P ->uses same password file as other unix - services such as login and ftp</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->you are probably already using other - services (such as telnet and ftp) which send plain text - passwords over the net, so sending them for SMB isn't - such a big deal.</P -></LI -></UL -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN512" -></A ->5.3. The smbpasswd Command</H2 -><P ->The smbpasswd command maintains the two 32 byte password fields - in the smbpasswd file. If you wish to make it similar to the unix - <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->passwd</B -> or <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->yppasswd</B -> programs, - install it in <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/usr/local/samba/bin/</TT -> (or your - main Samba binary directory).</P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbpasswd</B -> now works in a client-server mode - where it contacts the local smbd to change the user's password on its - behalf. This has enormous benefits - as follows.</P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbpasswd</B -> now has the capability - to change passwords on Windows NT servers (this only works when - the request is sent to the NT Primary Domain Controller if you - are changing an NT Domain user's password).</P -><P ->To run smbpasswd as a normal user just type :</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->$ </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B ->smbpasswd</B -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->Old SMB password: </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B -><type old value here - - or hit return if there was no old password></B -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->New SMB Password: </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B -><type new value> - </B -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->Repeat New SMB Password: </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B -><re-type new value - </B -></TT -></P -><P ->If the old value does not match the current value stored for - that user, or the two new values do not match each other, then the - password will not be changed.</P -><P ->If invoked by an ordinary user it will only allow the user - to change his or her own Samba password.</P -><P ->If run by the root user smbpasswd may take an optional - argument, specifying the user name whose SMB password you wish to - change. Note that when run as root smbpasswd does not prompt for - or check the old password value, thus allowing root to set passwords - for users who have forgotten their passwords.</P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbpasswd</B -> is designed to work in the same way - and be familiar to UNIX users who use the <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->passwd</B -> or - <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->yppasswd</B -> commands.</P -><P ->For more details on using <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbpasswd</B -> refer - to the man page which will always be the definitive reference.</P -></DIV -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="PART" -><A -NAME="AEN544" +NAME="AEN252" ></A -><DIV -CLASS="TITLEPAGE" -><H1 -CLASS="TITLE" ->II. Type of installation</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="PARTINTRO" -><A -NAME="AEN546" -></A -><H1 ->Introduction</H1 +>2.3.3. Test 3</H3 ><P ->This part contains information on using samba in a (NT 4 or ADS) domain. -If you wish to run samba as a domain member or DC, read the appropriate chapter in -this part.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="TOC" -><DL -><DT -><B ->Table of Contents</B -></DT -><DT ->6. <A -HREF="#SAMBA-PDC" ->How to Configure Samba as a NT4 Primary Domain Controller</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->6.1. <A -HREF="#AEN566" ->Prerequisite Reading</A -></DT -><DT ->6.2. <A -HREF="#AEN572" ->Background</A -></DT -><DT ->6.3. <A -HREF="#AEN611" ->Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</A -></DT -><DT ->6.4. <A -HREF="#AEN654" ->Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients to the -Domain</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->6.4.1. <A -HREF="#AEN673" ->Manual Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</A -></DT -><DT ->6.4.2. <A -HREF="#AEN714" ->"On-the-Fly" Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</A -></DT -><DT ->6.4.3. <A -HREF="#AEN723" ->Joining the Client to the Domain</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->6.5. <A -HREF="#AEN738" ->Common Problems and Errors</A -></DT -><DT ->6.6. <A -HREF="#AEN786" ->System Policies and Profiles</A -></DT -><DT ->6.7. <A -HREF="#AEN830" ->What other help can I get?</A -></DT -><DT ->6.8. <A -HREF="#AEN944" ->Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->6.8.1. <A -HREF="#AEN970" ->Configuration Instructions: Network Logons</A -></DT -><DT ->6.8.2. <A -HREF="#AEN989" ->Configuration Instructions: Setting up Roaming User Profiles</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->6.9. <A -HREF="#AEN1082" ->DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control & Samba</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->7. <A -HREF="#SAMBA-BDC" ->How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->7.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1118" ->Prerequisite Reading</A -></DT -><DT ->7.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1122" ->Background</A -></DT -><DT ->7.3. <A -HREF="#AEN1130" ->What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->7.3.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1133" ->How does a Workstation find its domain controller?</A -></DT -><DT ->7.3.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1136" ->When is the PDC needed?</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->7.4. <A -HREF="#AEN1139" ->Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller?</A -></DT -><DT ->7.5. <A -HREF="#AEN1143" ->How do I set up a Samba BDC?</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->7.5.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1160" ->How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -></DL -></DD -><DT ->8. <A -HREF="#ADS" ->Samba as a ADS domain member</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->8.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1178" ->Installing the required packages for Debian</A -></DT -><DT ->8.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1184" ->Installing the required packages for RedHat</A -></DT -><DT ->8.3. <A -HREF="#AEN1193" ->Compile Samba</A -></DT -><DT ->8.4. <A -HREF="#AEN1205" ->Setup your /etc/krb5.conf</A -></DT -><DT ->8.5. <A -HREF="#AEN1215" ->Create the computer account</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->8.5.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1219" ->Possible errors</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->8.6. <A -HREF="#AEN1231" ->Test your server setup</A -></DT -><DT ->8.7. <A -HREF="#AEN1236" ->Testing with smbclient</A -></DT -><DT ->8.8. <A -HREF="#AEN1239" ->Notes</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->9. <A -HREF="#DOMAIN-SECURITY" ->Samba as a NT4 domain member</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->9.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1261" ->Joining an NT Domain with Samba 2.2</A -></DT -><DT ->9.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1325" ->Samba and Windows 2000 Domains</A -></DT -><DT ->9.3. <A -HREF="#AEN1330" ->Why is this better than security = server?</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -></DL -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><HR><H1 -><A -NAME="SAMBA-PDC" -></A ->Chapter 6. How to Configure Samba as a NT4 Primary Domain Controller</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN566" -></A ->6.1. Prerequisite Reading</H2 -><P ->Before you continue reading in this chapter, please make sure -that you are comfortable with configuring basic files services -in smb.conf and how to enable and administer password -encryption in Samba. Theses two topics are covered in the -<A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html" -TARGET="_top" -><TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf(5)</TT -></A -> -manpage and the <A -HREF="ENCRYPTION.html" -TARGET="_top" ->Encryption chapter</A -> -of this HOWTO Collection.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN572" -></A ->6.2. Background</H2 -><DIV -CLASS="NOTE" -><P -></P -><TABLE -CLASS="NOTE" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Note"></TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" -><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Author's Note:</I -></SPAN -> This document is a combination -of David Bannon's "Samba 2.2 PDC HOWTO" and "Samba NT Domain FAQ". -Both documents are superseded by this one.</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV -><P ->Versions of Samba prior to release 2.2 had marginal capabilities to act -as a Windows NT 4.0 Primary Domain Controller - -(PDC). With Samba 2.2.0, we are proud to announce official support for -Windows NT 4.0-style domain logons from Windows NT 4.0 and Windows -2000 clients. This article outlines the steps -necessary for configuring Samba as a PDC. It is necessary to have a -working Samba server prior to implementing the PDC functionality. If -you have not followed the steps outlined in <A -HREF="UNIX_INSTALL.html" -TARGET="_top" -> UNIX_INSTALL.html</A ->, please make sure -that your server is configured correctly before proceeding. Another -good resource in the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html" -TARGET="_top" ->smb.conf(5) man -page</A ->. The following functionality should work in 2.2:</P -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P -> domain logons for Windows NT 4.0/2000 clients. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> placing a Windows 9x client in user level security - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> retrieving a list of users and groups from a Samba PDC to - Windows 9x/NT/2000 clients - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> roving (roaming) user profiles - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> Windows NT 4.0-style system policies - </P -></LI -></UL -><P ->The following pieces of functionality are not included in the 2.2 release:</P -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P -> Windows NT 4 domain trusts - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> SAM replication with Windows NT 4.0 Domain Controllers - (i.e. a Samba PDC and a Windows NT BDC or vice versa) - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> Adding users via the User Manager for Domains - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> Acting as a Windows 2000 Domain Controller (i.e. Kerberos and - Active Directory) - </P -></LI -></UL -><P ->Please note that Windows 9x clients are not true members of a domain -for reasons outlined in this article. Therefore the protocol for -support Windows 9x-style domain logons is completely different -from NT4 domain logons and has been officially supported for some -time.</P -><P ->Implementing a Samba PDC can basically be divided into 2 broad -steps.</P -><P -></P -><OL -TYPE="1" -><LI -><P -> Configuring the Samba PDC - </P -></LI -><LI +>Run the command "smbclient -L BIGSERVER" on the unix box. You +should get a list of available shares back. </P ><P -> Creating machine trust accounts and joining clients - to the domain - </P -></LI -></OL +>If you get a error message containing the string "Bad password" then +you probably have either an incorrect "hosts allow", "hosts deny" or +"valid users" line in your smb.conf, or your guest account is not +valid. Check what your guest account is using "testparm" and +temporarily remove any "hosts allow", "hosts deny", "valid users" or +"invalid users" lines.</P ><P ->There are other minor details such as user profiles, system -policies, etc... However, these are not necessarily specific -to a Samba PDC as much as they are related to Windows NT networking -concepts. They will be mentioned only briefly here.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN611" -></A ->6.3. Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</H2 +>If you get a "connection refused" response then the smbd server may +not be running. If you installed it in inetd.conf then you probably edited +that file incorrectly. If you installed it as a daemon then check that +it is running, and check that the netbios-ssn port is in a LISTEN +state using "netstat -a".</P ><P ->The first step in creating a working Samba PDC is to -understand the parameters necessary in smb.conf. I will not -attempt to re-explain the parameters here as they are more that -adequately covered in <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html" -TARGET="_top" -> the smb.conf -man page</A ->. For convenience, the parameters have been -linked with the actual smb.conf description.</P +>If you get a "session request failed" then the server refused the +connection. If it says "Your server software is being unfriendly" then +its probably because you have invalid command line parameters to smbd, +or a similar fatal problem with the initial startup of smbd. Also +check your config file (smb.conf) for syntax errors with "testparm" +and that the various directories where samba keeps its log and lock +files exist.</P ><P ->Here is an example <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf</TT -> for acting as a PDC:</P +>There are a number of reasons for which smbd may refuse or decline +a session request. The most common of these involve one or more of +the following smb.conf file entries:</P ><P ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->[global] - ; Basic server settings - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#NETBIOSNAME" -TARGET="_top" ->netbios name</A -> = <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->POGO</I -></TT -> - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" -TARGET="_top" ->workgroup</A -> = <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->NARNIA</I -></TT -> - - ; we should act as the domain and local master browser - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#OSLEVEL" -TARGET="_top" ->os level</A -> = 64 - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#PERFERREDMASTER" -TARGET="_top" ->preferred master</A -> = yes - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINMASTER" -TARGET="_top" ->domain master</A -> = yes - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#LOCALMASTER" -TARGET="_top" ->local master</A -> = yes - - ; security settings (must user security = user) - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITYEQUALSUSER" -TARGET="_top" ->security</A -> = user - - ; encrypted passwords are a requirement for a PDC - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" -TARGET="_top" ->encrypt passwords</A -> = yes - - ; support domain logons - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINLOGONS" -TARGET="_top" ->domain logons</A -> = yes - - ; where to store user profiles? - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONPATH" -TARGET="_top" ->logon path</A -> = \\%N\profiles\%u - - ; where is a user's home directory and where should it - ; be mounted at? - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONDRIVE" -TARGET="_top" ->logon drive</A -> = H: - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONHOME" -TARGET="_top" ->logon home</A -> = \\homeserver\%u - - ; specify a generic logon script for all users - ; this is a relative **DOS** path to the [netlogon] share - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONSCRIPT" -TARGET="_top" ->logon script</A -> = logon.cmd - -; necessary share for domain controller -[netlogon] - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" -TARGET="_top" ->path</A -> = /usr/local/samba/lib/netlogon - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" -TARGET="_top" ->read only</A -> = yes - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WRITELIST" -TARGET="_top" ->write list</A -> = <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->ntadmin</I -></TT -> - -; share for storing user profiles -[profiles] - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" -TARGET="_top" ->path</A -> = /export/smb/ntprofile - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" -TARGET="_top" ->read only</A -> = no - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" -TARGET="_top" ->create mask</A -> = 0600 - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#DIRECTORYMASK" -TARGET="_top" ->directory mask</A -> = 0700</PRE -></P -><P ->There are a couple of points to emphasize in the above configuration.</P -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P -> Encrypted passwords must be enabled. For more details on how - to do this, refer to <A -HREF="ENCRYPTION.html" -TARGET="_top" ->ENCRYPTION.html</A ->. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> The server must support domain logons and a - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->[netlogon]</TT -> share - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> The server must be the domain master browser in order for Windows - client to locate the server as a DC. Please refer to the various - Network Browsing documentation included with this distribution for - details. - </P -></LI -></UL -><P ->As Samba 2.2 does not offer a complete implementation of group mapping -between Windows NT groups and Unix groups (this is really quite -complicated to explain in a short space), you should refer to the -<A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINADMINGROUP" -TARGET="_top" ->domain admin -group</A -> smb.conf parameter for information of creating "Domain -Admins" style accounts.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN654" -></A ->6.4. Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients to the -Domain</H2 -><P ->A machine trust account is a Samba account that is used to -authenticate a client machine (rather than a user) to the Samba -server. In Windows terminology, this is known as a "Computer -Account."</P -><P ->The password of a machine trust account acts as the shared secret for -secure communication with the Domain Controller. This is a security -feature to prevent an unauthorized machine with the same NetBIOS name -from joining the domain and gaining access to domain user/group -accounts. Windows NT and 2000 clients use machine trust accounts, but -Windows 9x clients do not. Hence, a Windows 9x client is never a true -member of a domain because it does not possess a machine trust -account, and thus has no shared secret with the domain controller.</P -><P ->A Windows PDC stores each machine trust account in the Windows -Registry. A Samba PDC, however, stores each machine trust account -in two parts, as follows: - -<P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P ->A Samba account, stored in the same location as user - LanMan and NT password hashes (currently - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smbpasswd</TT ->). The Samba account - possesses and uses only the NT password hash.</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->A corresponding Unix account, typically stored in - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd</TT ->. (Future releases will alleviate the need to - create <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd</TT -> entries.) </P -></LI -></UL -></P -><P ->There are two ways to create machine trust accounts:</P -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P -> Manual creation. Both the Samba and corresponding - Unix account are created by hand.</P -></LI -><LI -><P -> "On-the-fly" creation. The Samba machine trust - account is automatically created by Samba at the time the client - is joined to the domain. (For security, this is the - recommended method.) The corresponding Unix account may be - created automatically or manually. </P -></LI -></UL -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN673" -></A ->6.4.1. Manual Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</H3 -><P ->The first step in manually creating a machine trust account is to -manually create the corresponding Unix account in -<TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd</TT ->. This can be done using -<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->vipw</B -> or other 'add user' command that is normally -used to create new Unix accounts. The following is an example for a -Linux based Samba server:</P -><P -> <TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->root# </TT -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->/usr/sbin/useradd -g 100 -d /dev/null -c <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->"machine -nickname"</I -></TT -> -s /bin/false <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->machine_name</I -></TT ->$ </B -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->root# </TT -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->passwd -l <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->machine_name</I -></TT ->$</B -></P -><P ->On *BSD systems, this can be done using the 'chpass' utility:</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->root# </TT -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->chpass -a "<TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->machine_name</I -></TT ->$:*:101:100::0:0:Workstation <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->machine_name</I -></TT ->:/dev/null:/sbin/nologin"</B +> hosts deny = ALL + hosts allow = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/yy + bind interfaces only = Yes</PRE ></P ><P ->The <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd</TT -> entry will list the machine name -with a "$" appended, won't have a password, will have a null shell and no -home directory. For example a machine named 'doppy' would have an -<TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd</TT -> entry like this:</P +>In the above, no allowance has been made for any session requests that +will automatically translate to the loopback adaptor address 127.0.0.1. +To solve this problem change these lines to:</P ><P ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->doppy$:x:505:501:<TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->machine_nickname</I -></TT ->:/dev/null:/bin/false</PRE -></P -><P ->Above, <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->machine_nickname</I -></TT -> can be any -descriptive name for the client, i.e., BasementComputer. -<TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->machine_name</I -></TT -> absolutely must be the NetBIOS -name of the client to be joined to the domain. The "$" must be -appended to the NetBIOS name of the client or Samba will not recognize -this as a machine trust account.</P -><P ->Now that the corresponding Unix account has been created, the next step is to create -the Samba account for the client containing the well-known initial -machine trust account password. This can be done using the <A -HREF="smbpasswd.8.html" -TARGET="_top" -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbpasswd(8)</B -></A -> command -as shown here:</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->root# </TT -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbpasswd -a -m <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->machine_name</I -></TT -></B +> hosts deny = ALL + hosts allow = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/yy 127.</PRE ></P ><P ->where <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->machine_name</I -></TT -> is the machine's NetBIOS -name. The RID of the new machine account is generated from the UID of -the corresponding Unix account.</P -><DIV -CLASS="WARNING" +>Do NOT use the "bind interfaces only" parameter where you may wish to +use the samba password change facility, or where smbclient may need to +access local service for name resolution or for local resource +connections. (Note: the "bind interfaces only" parameter deficiency +where it will not allow connections to the loopback address will be +fixed soon).</P ><P -></P -><TABLE -CLASS="WARNING" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Warning"></TD -><TH -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="CENTER" -><B ->Join the client to the domain immediately</B -></TH -></TR -><TR -><TD -> </TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" +>Another common cause of these two errors is having something already running +on port 139, such as Samba (ie: smbd is running from inetd already) or +something like Digital's Pathworks. Check your inetd.conf file before trying +to start smbd as a daemon, it can avoid a lot of frustration!</P ><P -> Manually creating a machine trust account using this method is the - equivalent of creating a machine trust account on a Windows NT PDC using - the "Server Manager". From the time at which the account is created - to the time which the client joins the domain and changes the password, - your domain is vulnerable to an intruder joining your domain using a - a machine with the same NetBIOS name. A PDC inherently trusts - members of the domain and will serve out a large degree of user - information to such clients. You have been warned! - </P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV +>And yet another possible cause for failure of TEST 3 is when the subnet mask +and / or broadcast address settings are incorrect. Please check that the +network interface IP Address / Broadcast Address / Subnet Mask settings are +correct and that Samba has correctly noted these in the log.nmb file.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN714" +NAME="AEN267" ></A ->6.4.2. "On-the-Fly" Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</H3 -><P ->The second (and recommended) way of creating machine trust accounts is -simply to allow the Samba server to create them as needed when the client -is joined to the domain. </P +>2.3.4. Test 4</H3 ><P ->Since each Samba machine trust account requires a corresponding -Unix account, a method for automatically creating the -Unix account is usually supplied; this requires configuration of the -<A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ADDUSERSCRIPT" -TARGET="_top" ->add user script</A -> -option in <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf</TT ->. This -method is not required, however; corresponding Unix accounts may also -be created manually.</P +>Run the command "nmblookup -B BIGSERVER __SAMBA__". You should get the +IP address of your Samba server back.</P ><P ->Below is an example for a RedHat 6.2 Linux system.</P +>If you don't then nmbd is incorrectly installed. Check your inetd.conf +if you run it from there, or that the daemon is running and listening +to udp port 137.</P ><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->[global] - # <...remainder of parameters...> - add user script = /usr/sbin/useradd -d /dev/null -g 100 -s /bin/false -M %u </PRE -></P +>One common problem is that many inetd implementations can't take many +parameters on the command line. If this is the case then create a +one-line script that contains the right parameters and run that from +inetd.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN723" -></A ->6.4.3. Joining the Client to the Domain</H3 -><P ->The procedure for joining a client to the domain varies with the -version of Windows.</P -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Windows 2000</I -></SPAN -></P -><P -> When the user elects to join the client to a domain, Windows prompts for - an account and password that is privileged to join the domain. A - Samba administrative account (i.e., a Samba account that has root - privileges on the Samba server) must be entered here; the - operation will fail if an ordinary user account is given. - The password for this account should be - set to a different password than the associated - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd</TT -> entry, for security - reasons. </P -><P ->The session key of the Samba administrative account acts as an - encryption key for setting the password of the machine trust - account. The machine trust account will be created on-the-fly, or - updated if it already exists.</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Windows NT</I -></SPAN -></P -><P -> If the machine trust account was created manually, on the - Identification Changes menu enter the domain name, but do not - check the box "Create a Computer Account in the Domain." In this case, - the existing machine trust account is used to join the machine to - the domain.</P -><P -> If the machine trust account is to be created - on-the-fly, on the Identification Changes menu enter the domain - name, and check the box "Create a Computer Account in the Domain." In - this case, joining the domain proceeds as above for Windows 2000 - (i.e., you must supply a Samba administrative account when - prompted).</P -></LI -></UL -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN738" +NAME="AEN272" ></A ->6.5. Common Problems and Errors</H2 -><P -></P -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->I cannot include a '$' in a machine name.</I -></SPAN -> - </P +>2.3.5. Test 5</H3 ><P -> A 'machine name' in (typically) <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd</TT -> - of the machine name with a '$' appended. FreeBSD (and other BSD - systems?) won't create a user with a '$' in their name. - </P -><P -> The problem is only in the program used to make the entry, once - made, it works perfectly. So create a user without the '$' and - use <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->vipw</B -> to edit the entry, adding the '$'. Or create - the whole entry with vipw if you like, make sure you use a - unique User ID ! - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->I get told "You already have a connection to the Domain...." - or "Cannot join domain, the credentials supplied conflict with an - existing set.." when creating a machine trust account.</I -></SPAN -> - </P -><P -> This happens if you try to create a machine trust account from the - machine itself and already have a connection (e.g. mapped drive) - to a share (or IPC$) on the Samba PDC. The following command - will remove all network drive connections: - </P -><P -> <TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->C:\WINNT\></TT -> <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->net use * /d</B -> - </P -><P -> Further, if the machine is a already a 'member of a workgroup' that - is the same name as the domain you are joining (bad idea) you will - get this message. Change the workgroup name to something else, it - does not matter what, reboot, and try again. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->The system can not log you on (C000019B)....</I -></SPAN -> - </P -><P ->I joined the domain successfully but after upgrading - to a newer version of the Samba code I get the message, "The system - can not log you on (C000019B), Please try a gain or consult your - system administrator" when attempting to logon. - </P -><P -> This occurs when the domain SID stored in - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->private/WORKGROUP.SID</TT -> is - changed. For example, you remove the file and <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbd</B -> automatically - creates a new one. Or you are swapping back and forth between - versions 2.0.7, TNG and the HEAD branch code (not recommended). The - only way to correct the problem is to restore the original domain - SID or remove the domain client from the domain and rejoin. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->The machine trust account for this computer either does not - exist or is not accessible.</I -></SPAN -> - </P -><P -> When I try to join the domain I get the message "The machine account - for this computer either does not exist or is not accessible". What's - wrong? - </P -><P -> This problem is caused by the PDC not having a suitable machine trust account. - If you are using the <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->add user script</I -></TT -> method to create - accounts then this would indicate that it has not worked. Ensure the domain - admin user system is working. - </P -><P -> Alternatively if you are creating account entries manually then they - have not been created correctly. Make sure that you have the entry - correct for the machine trust account in smbpasswd file on the Samba PDC. - If you added the account using an editor rather than using the smbpasswd - utility, make sure that the account name is the machine NetBIOS name - with a '$' appended to it ( i.e. computer_name$ ). There must be an entry - in both /etc/passwd and the smbpasswd file. Some people have reported - that inconsistent subnet masks between the Samba server and the NT - client have caused this problem. Make sure that these are consistent - for both client and server. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->When I attempt to login to a Samba Domain from a NT4/W2K workstation, - I get a message about my account being disabled.</I -></SPAN -> - </P -><P -> This problem is caused by a PAM related bug in Samba 2.2.0. This bug is - fixed in 2.2.1. Other symptoms could be unaccessible shares on - NT/W2K member servers in the domain or the following error in your smbd.log: - passdb/pampass.c:pam_account(268) PAM: UNKNOWN ERROR for User: %user% - </P -><P -> At first be ensure to enable the useraccounts with <B +>run the command <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbpasswd -e - %user%</B ->, this is normally done, when you create an account. - </P -><P -> In order to work around this problem in 2.2.0, configure the - <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->account</I -></TT -> control flag in - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/pam.d/samba</TT -> file as follows: - </P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> account required pam_permit.so - </PRE +>nmblookup -B ACLIENT '*'</B ></P ><P -> If you want to remain backward compatibility to samba 2.0.x use - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->pam_permit.so</TT ->, it's also possible to use - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->pam_pwdb.so</TT ->. There are some bugs if you try to - use <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->pam_unix.so</TT ->, if you need this, be ensure to use - the most recent version of this file. - </P -></LI -></UL +>You should get the PCs IP address back. If you don't then the client +software on the PC isn't installed correctly, or isn't started, or you +got the name of the PC wrong. </P +><P +>If ACLIENT doesn't resolve via DNS then use the IP address of the +client in the above test.</P ></DIV ><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN786" +NAME="AEN278" ></A ->6.6. System Policies and Profiles</H2 -><P ->Much of the information necessary to implement System Policies and -Roving User Profiles in a Samba domain is the same as that for -implementing these same items in a Windows NT 4.0 domain. -You should read the white paper <A -HREF="http://www.microsoft.com/ntserver/management/deployment/planguide/prof_policies.asp" -TARGET="_top" ->Implementing -Profiles and Policies in Windows NT 4.0</A -> available from Microsoft.</P -><P ->Here are some additional details:</P -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->What about Windows NT Policy Editor?</I -></SPAN -> - </P -><P -> To create or edit <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->ntconfig.pol</TT -> you must use - the NT Server Policy Editor, <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->poledit.exe</B -> which - is included with NT Server but <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->not NT Workstation</I -></SPAN ->. - There is a Policy Editor on a NTws - but it is not suitable for creating <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Domain Policies</I -></SPAN ->. - Further, although the Windows 95 - Policy Editor can be installed on an NT Workstation/Server, it will not - work with NT policies because the registry key that are set by the policy templates. - However, the files from the NT Server will run happily enough on an NTws. - You need <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->poledit.exe, common.adm</TT -> and <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->winnt.adm</TT ->. It is convenient - to put the two *.adm files in <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->c:\winnt\inf</TT -> which is where - the binary will look for them unless told otherwise. Note also that that - directory is 'hidden'. - </P +>2.3.6. Test 6</H3 ><P -> The Windows NT policy editor is also included with the Service Pack 3 (and - later) for Windows NT 4.0. Extract the files using <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->servicepackname /x</B ->, - i.e. that's <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->Nt4sp6ai.exe /x</B -> for service pack 6a. The policy editor, - <B +>Run the command <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->poledit.exe</B -> and the associated template files (*.adm) should - be extracted as well. It is also possible to downloaded the policy template - files for Office97 and get a copy of the policy editor. Another possible - location is with the Zero Administration Kit available for download from Microsoft. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Can Win95 do Policies?</I -></SPAN -> - </P -><P -> Install the group policy handler for Win9x to pick up group - policies. Look on the Win98 CD in <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->\tools\reskit\netadmin\poledit</TT ->. - Install group policies on a Win9x client by double-clicking - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->grouppol.inf</TT ->. Log off and on again a couple of - times and see if Win98 picks up group policies. Unfortunately this needs - to be done on every Win9x machine that uses group policies.... - </P -><P -> If group policies don't work one reports suggests getting the updated - (read: working) grouppol.dll for Windows 9x. The group list is grabbed - from /etc/group. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->How do I get 'User Manager' and 'Server Manager'</I -></SPAN -> - </P -><P -> Since I don't need to buy an NT Server CD now, how do I get - the 'User Manager for Domains', the 'Server Manager'? - </P -><P -> Microsoft distributes a version of these tools called nexus for - installation on Windows 95 systems. The tools set includes - </P -><P +>nmblookup -d 2 '*'</B ></P -><UL -><LI -><P ->Server Manager</P -></LI -><LI ><P ->User Manager for Domains</P -></LI -><LI +>This time we are trying the same as the previous test but are trying +it via a broadcast to the default broadcast address. A number of +Netbios/TCPIP hosts on the network should respond, although Samba may +not catch all of the responses in the short time it listens. You +should see "got a positive name query response" messages from several +hosts.</P ><P ->Event Viewer</P -></LI -></UL +>If this doesn't give a similar result to the previous test then +nmblookup isn't correctly getting your broadcast address through its +automatic mechanism. In this case you should experiment use the +"interfaces" option in smb.conf to manually configure your IP +address, broadcast and netmask. </P ><P -> Click here to download the archived file <A -HREF="ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/Softlib/MSLFILES/NEXUS.EXE" -TARGET="_top" ->ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/Softlib/MSLFILES/NEXUS.EXE</A -> - </P +>If your PC and server aren't on the same subnet then you will need to +use the -B option to set the broadcast address to the that of the PCs +subnet.</P ><P -> The Windows NT 4.0 version of the 'User Manager for - Domains' and 'Server Manager' are available from Microsoft via ftp - from <A -HREF="ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/Softlib/MSLFILES/SRVTOOLS.EXE" -TARGET="_top" ->ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/Softlib/MSLFILES/SRVTOOLS.EXE</A -> - </P -></LI -></UL +>This test will probably fail if your subnet mask and broadcast address are +not correct. (Refer to TEST 3 notes above).</P ></DIV ><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN830" +NAME="AEN286" ></A ->6.7. What other help can I get?</H2 -><P ->There are many sources of information available in the form -of mailing lists, RFC's and documentation. The docs that come -with the samba distribution contain very good explanations of -general SMB topics such as browsing.</P -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->What are some diagnostics tools I can use to debug the domain logon - process and where can I find them?</I -></SPAN -> - </P -><P -> One of the best diagnostic tools for debugging problems is Samba itself. - You can use the -d option for both smbd and nmbd to specify what - 'debug level' at which to run. See the man pages on smbd, nmbd and - smb.conf for more information on debugging options. The debug - level can range from 1 (the default) to 10 (100 for debugging passwords). - </P -><P -> Another helpful method of debugging is to compile samba using the - <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->gcc -g </B -> flag. This will include debug - information in the binaries and allow you to attach gdb to the - running smbd / nmbd process. In order to attach gdb to an smbd - process for an NT workstation, first get the workstation to make the - connection. Pressing ctrl-alt-delete and going down to the domain box - is sufficient (at least, on the first time you join the domain) to - generate a 'LsaEnumTrustedDomains'. Thereafter, the workstation - maintains an open connection, and therefore there will be an smbd - process running (assuming that you haven't set a really short smbd - idle timeout) So, in between pressing ctrl alt delete, and actually - typing in your password, you can gdb attach and continue. - </P -><P -> Some useful samba commands worth investigating: - </P -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P ->testparam | more</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->smbclient -L //{netbios name of server}</P -></LI -></UL -><P -> An SMB enabled version of tcpdump is available from - <A -HREF="http://www.tcpdump.org/" -TARGET="_top" ->http://www.tcpdup.org/</A ->. - Ethereal, another good packet sniffer for Unix and Win32 - hosts, can be downloaded from <A -HREF="http://www.ethereal.com/" -TARGET="_top" ->http://www.ethereal.com</A ->. - </P -><P -> For tracing things on the Microsoft Windows NT, Network Monitor - (aka. netmon) is available on the Microsoft Developer Network CD's, - the Windows NT Server install CD and the SMS CD's. The version of - netmon that ships with SMS allows for dumping packets between any two - computers (i.e. placing the network interface in promiscuous mode). - The version on the NT Server install CD will only allow monitoring - of network traffic directed to the local NT box and broadcasts on the - local subnet. Be aware that Ethereal can read and write netmon - formatted files. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->How do I install 'Network Monitor' on an NT Workstation - or a Windows 9x box?</I -></SPAN -> - </P -><P -> Installing netmon on an NT workstation requires a couple - of steps. The following are for installing Netmon V4.00.349, which comes - with Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0, on Microsoft Windows NT - Workstation 4.0. The process should be similar for other version of - Windows NT / Netmon. You will need both the Microsoft Windows - NT Server 4.0 Install CD and the Workstation 4.0 Install CD. - </P -><P -> Initially you will need to install 'Network Monitor Tools and Agent' - on the NT Server. To do this - </P -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P ->Goto Start - Settings - Control Panel - - Network - Services - Add </P -></LI -><LI -><P ->Select the 'Network Monitor Tools and Agent' and - click on 'OK'.</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->Click 'OK' on the Network Control Panel. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P ->Insert the Windows NT Server 4.0 install CD - when prompted.</P -></LI -></UL -><P -> At this point the Netmon files should exist in - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->%SYSTEMROOT%\System32\netmon\*.*</TT ->. - Two subdirectories exist as well, <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->parsers\</TT -> - which contains the necessary DLL's for parsing the netmon packet - dump, and <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->captures\</TT ->. - </P -><P -> In order to install the Netmon tools on an NT Workstation, you will - first need to install the 'Network Monitor Agent' from the Workstation - install CD. - </P +>2.3.7. Test 7</H3 ><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P ->Goto Start - Settings - Control Panel - - Network - Services - Add</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->Select the 'Network Monitor Agent' and click - on 'OK'.</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->Click 'OK' on the Network Control Panel. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P ->Insert the Windows NT Workstation 4.0 install - CD when prompted.</P -></LI -></UL -><P -> Now copy the files from the NT Server in %SYSTEMROOT%\System32\netmon\*.* - to %SYSTEMROOT%\System32\netmon\*.* on the Workstation and set - permissions as you deem appropriate for your site. You will need - administrative rights on the NT box to run netmon. - </P -><P -> To install Netmon on a Windows 9x box install the network monitor agent - from the Windows 9x CD (\admin\nettools\netmon). There is a readme - file located with the netmon driver files on the CD if you need - information on how to do this. Copy the files from a working - Netmon installation. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> The following is a list if helpful URLs and other links: - </P -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P ->Home of Samba site <A -HREF="http://samba.org" -TARGET="_top" -> http://samba.org</A ->. We have a mirror near you !</P -></LI -><LI -><P -> The <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Development</I -></SPAN -> document - on the Samba mirrors might mention your problem. If so, - it might mean that the developers are working on it.</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->See how Scott Merrill simulates a BDC behavior at - <A -HREF="http://www.skippy.net/linux/smb-howto.html" -TARGET="_top" -> http://www.skippy.net/linux/smb-howto.html</A ->. </P -></LI -><LI -><P ->Although 2.0.7 has almost had its day as a PDC, David Bannon will - keep the 2.0.7 PDC pages at <A -HREF="http://bioserve.latrobe.edu.au/samba" -TARGET="_top" -> http://bioserve.latrobe.edu.au/samba</A -> going for a while yet.</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->Misc links to CIFS information - <A -HREF="http://samba.org/cifs/" -TARGET="_top" ->http://samba.org/cifs/</A -></P -></LI -><LI -><P ->NT Domains for Unix <A -HREF="http://mailhost.cb1.com/~lkcl/ntdom/" -TARGET="_top" -> http://mailhost.cb1.com/~lkcl/ntdom/</A -></P -></LI -><LI -><P ->FTP site for older SMB specs: - <A -HREF="ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/developr/drg/CIFS/" -TARGET="_top" -> ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/developr/drg/CIFS/</A -></P -></LI -></UL -></LI -></UL -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->How do I get help from the mailing lists?</I -></SPAN -> - </P -><P -> There are a number of Samba related mailing lists. Go to <A -HREF="http://samba.org" -TARGET="_top" ->http://samba.org</A ->, click on your nearest mirror - and then click on <B +>Run the command <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->Support</B -> and then click on <B +>smbclient //BIGSERVER/TMP</B +>. You should +then be prompted for a password. You should use the password of the account +you are logged into the unix box with. If you want to test with +another account then add the -U >accountname< option to the end of +the command line. eg: +<B CLASS="COMMAND" -> Samba related mailing lists</B ->. - </P -><P -> For questions relating to Samba TNG go to - <A -HREF="http://www.samba-tng.org/" -TARGET="_top" ->http://www.samba-tng.org/</A -> - It has been requested that you don't post questions about Samba-TNG to the - main stream Samba lists.</P -><P -> If you post a message to one of the lists please observe the following guide lines : - </P -><P +>smbclient //bigserver/tmp -Ujohndoe</B ></P -><UL -><LI -><P -> Always remember that the developers are volunteers, they are - not paid and they never guarantee to produce a particular feature at - a particular time. Any time lines are 'best guess' and nothing more. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> Always mention what version of samba you are using and what - operating system its running under. You should probably list the - relevant sections of your smb.conf file, at least the options - in [global] that affect PDC support.</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->In addition to the version, if you obtained Samba via - CVS mention the date when you last checked it out.</P -></LI -><LI -><P -> Try and make your question clear and brief, lots of long, - convoluted questions get deleted before they are completely read ! - Don't post html encoded messages (if you can select colour or font - size its html).</P -></LI -><LI -><P -> If you run one of those nifty 'I'm on holidays' things when - you are away, make sure its configured to not answer mailing lists. - </P -></LI -><LI ><P -> Don't cross post. Work out which is the best list to post to - and see what happens, i.e. don't post to both samba-ntdom and samba-technical. - Many people active on the lists subscribe to more - than one list and get annoyed to see the same message two or more times. - Often someone will see a message and thinking it would be better dealt - with on another, will forward it on for you.</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->You might include <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->partial</I -></SPAN -> - log files written at a debug level set to as much as 20. - Please don't send the entire log but enough to give the context of the - error messages.</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->(Possibly) If you have a complete netmon trace ( from the opening of - the pipe to the error ) you can send the *.CAP file as well.</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->Please think carefully before attaching a document to an email. - Consider pasting the relevant parts into the body of the message. The samba - mailing lists go to a huge number of people, do they all need a copy of your - smb.conf in their attach directory?</P -></LI -></UL -></LI -><LI -><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->How do I get off the mailing lists?</I -></SPAN -> - </P -><P ->To have your name removed from a samba mailing list, go to the - same place you went to to get on it. Go to <A -HREF="http://lists.samba.org/" -TARGET="_top" ->http://lists.samba.org</A ->, - click on your nearest mirror and then click on <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->Support</B -> and - then click on <B +>Note: It is possible to specify the password along with the username +as follows: +<B CLASS="COMMAND" -> Samba related mailing lists</B ->. Or perhaps see - <A -HREF="http://lists.samba.org/mailman/roster/samba-ntdom" -TARGET="_top" ->here</A -> - </P -><P -> Please don't post messages to the list asking to be removed, you will just - be referred to the above address (unless that process failed in some way...) - </P -></LI -></UL -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN944" -></A ->6.8. Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</H2 -><DIV -CLASS="NOTE" -><P +>smbclient //bigserver/tmp -Ujohndoe%secret</B ></P -><TABLE -CLASS="NOTE" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Note"></TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" -><P ->The following section contains much of the original -DOMAIN.txt file previously included with Samba. Much of -the material is based on what went into the book <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Special -Edition, Using Samba</I -></SPAN ->, by Richard Sharpe.</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV -><P ->A domain and a workgroup are exactly the same thing in terms of network -browsing. The difference is that a distributable authentication -database is associated with a domain, for secure login access to a -network. Also, different access rights can be granted to users if they -successfully authenticate against a domain logon server (NT server and -other systems based on NT server support this, as does at least Samba TNG now).</P -><P ->The SMB client logging on to a domain has an expectation that every other -server in the domain should accept the same authentication information. -Network browsing functionality of domains and workgroups is -identical and is explained in BROWSING.txt. It should be noted, that browsing -is totally orthogonal to logon support.</P -><P ->Issues related to the single-logon network model are discussed in this -section. Samba supports domain logons, network logon scripts, and user -profiles for MS Windows for workgroups and MS Windows 9X/ME clients -which will be the focus of this section.</P -><P ->When an SMB client in a domain wishes to logon it broadcast requests for a -logon server. The first one to reply gets the job, and validates its -password using whatever mechanism the Samba administrator has installed. -It is possible (but very stupid) to create a domain where the user -database is not shared between servers, i.e. they are effectively workgroup -servers advertising themselves as participating in a domain. This -demonstrates how authentication is quite different from but closely -involved with domains.</P ><P ->Using these features you can make your clients verify their logon via -the Samba server; make clients run a batch file when they logon to -the network and download their preferences, desktop and start menu.</P +>Once you enter the password you should get the "smb>" prompt. If you +don't then look at the error message. If it says "invalid network +name" then the service "tmp" is not correctly setup in your smb.conf.</P ><P ->Before launching into the configuration instructions, it is -worthwhile lookingat how a Windows 9x/ME client performs a logon:</P +>If it says "bad password" then the likely causes are:</P ><P ></P ><OL TYPE="1" ><LI ><P -> The client broadcasts (to the IP broadcast address of the subnet it is in) - a NetLogon request. This is sent to the NetBIOS name DOMAIN<1c> at the - NetBIOS layer. The client chooses the first response it receives, which - contains the NetBIOS name of the logon server to use in the format of - \\SERVER. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> The client then connects to that server, logs on (does an SMBsessetupX) and - then connects to the IPC$ share (using an SMBtconX). - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> The client then does a NetWkstaUserLogon request, which retrieves the name - of the user's logon script. +> you have shadow passords (or some other password system) but didn't + compile in support for them in smbd </P ></LI ><LI ><P -> The client then connects to the NetLogon share and searches for this - and if it is found and can be read, is retrieved and executed by the client. - After this, the client disconnects from the NetLogon share. +> your "valid users" configuration is incorrect </P ></LI ><LI ><P -> The client then sends a NetUserGetInfo request to the server, to retrieve - the user's home share, which is used to search for profiles. Since the - response to the NetUserGetInfo request does not contain much more - the user's home share, profiles for Win9X clients MUST reside in the user - home directory. +> you have a mixed case password and you haven't enabled the "password + level" option at a high enough level </P ></LI ><LI ><P -> The client then connects to the user's home share and searches for the - user's profile. As it turns out, you can specify the user's home share as - a sharename and path. For example, \\server\fred\.profile. - If the profiles are found, they are implemented. +> the "path =" line in smb.conf is incorrect. Check it with testparm </P ></LI ><LI ><P -> The client then disconnects from the user's home share, and reconnects to - the NetLogon share and looks for CONFIG.POL, the policies file. If this is - found, it is read and implemented. +> you enabled password encryption but didn't create the SMB encrypted + password file </P ></LI ></OL -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN970" -></A ->6.8.1. Configuration Instructions: Network Logons</H3 -><P ->The main difference between a PDC and a Windows 9x logon -server configuration is that</P -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P ->Password encryption is not required for a Windows 9x logon server.</P -></LI -><LI ><P ->Windows 9x/ME clients do not possess machine trust accounts.</P -></LI -></UL -><P ->Therefore, a Samba PDC will also act as a Windows 9x logon -server.</P -><DIV -CLASS="WARNING" -><P -></P -><TABLE -CLASS="WARNING" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Warning"></TD -><TH -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="CENTER" -><B ->security mode and master browsers</B -></TH -></TR -><TR -><TD -> </TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" -><P ->There are a few comments to make in order to tie up some -loose ends. There has been much debate over the issue of whether -or not it is ok to configure Samba as a Domain Controller in security -modes other than <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->USER</TT ->. The only security mode -which will not work due to technical reasons is <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->SHARE</TT -> -mode security. <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->DOMAIN</TT -> and <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->SERVER</TT -> -mode security is really just a variation on SMB user level security.</P -><P ->Actually, this issue is also closely tied to the debate on whether -or not Samba must be the domain master browser for its workgroup -when operating as a DC. While it may technically be possible -to configure a server as such (after all, browsing and domain logons -are two distinctly different functions), it is not a good idea to -so. You should remember that the DC must register the DOMAIN#1b NetBIOS -name. This is the name used by Windows clients to locate the DC. -Windows clients do not distinguish between the DC and the DMB. -For this reason, it is very wise to configure the Samba DC as the DMB.</P -><P ->Now back to the issue of configuring a Samba DC to use a mode other -than "security = user". If a Samba host is configured to use -another SMB server or DC in order to validate user connection -requests, then it is a fact that some other machine on the network -(the "password server") knows more about user than the Samba host. -99% of the time, this other host is a domain controller. Now -in order to operate in domain mode security, the "workgroup" parameter -must be set to the name of the Windows NT domain (which already -has a domain controller, right?)</P -><P ->Therefore configuring a Samba box as a DC for a domain that -already by definition has a PDC is asking for trouble. -Therefore, you should always configure the Samba DC to be the DMB -for its domain.</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV +>Once connected you should be able to use the commands +<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>dir</B +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>get</B +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>put</B +> etc. +Type <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>help >command<</B +> for instructions. You should +especially check that the amount of free disk space shown is correct +when you type <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>dir</B +>.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN989" +NAME="AEN312" ></A ->6.8.2. Configuration Instructions: Setting up Roaming User Profiles</H3 -><DIV -CLASS="WARNING" +>2.3.8. Test 8</H3 ><P -></P -><TABLE -CLASS="WARNING" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Warning"></TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" -><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE!</I -></SPAN -> Roaming profiles support is different -for Win9X and WinNT.</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV -><P ->Before discussing how to configure roaming profiles, it is useful to see how -Win9X and WinNT clients implement these features.</P -><P ->Win9X clients send a NetUserGetInfo request to the server to get the user's -profiles location. However, the response does not have room for a separate -profiles location field, only the user's home share. This means that Win9X -profiles are restricted to being in the user's home directory.</P -><P ->WinNT clients send a NetSAMLogon RPC request, which contains many fields, -including a separate field for the location of the user's profiles. -This means that support for profiles is different for Win9X and WinNT.</P -><DIV -CLASS="SECT3" -><HR><H4 -CLASS="SECT3" -><A -NAME="AEN997" -></A ->6.8.2.1. Windows NT Configuration</H4 -><P ->To support WinNT clients, in the [global] section of smb.conf set the -following (for example):</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->logon path = \\profileserver\profileshare\profilepath\%U\moreprofilepath</PRE -></P -><P ->The default for this option is \\%N\%U\profile, namely -\\sambaserver\username\profile. The \\N%\%U service is created -automatically by the [homes] service. -If you are using a samba server for the profiles, you _must_ make the -share specified in the logon path browseable. </P -><DIV -CLASS="NOTE" -><P -></P -><TABLE -CLASS="NOTE" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Note"></TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" -><P ->[lkcl 26aug96 - we have discovered a problem where Windows clients can -maintain a connection to the [homes] share in between logins. The -[homes] share must NOT therefore be used in a profile path.]</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT3" -><HR><H4 -CLASS="SECT3" -><A -NAME="AEN1005" -></A ->6.8.2.2. Windows 9X Configuration</H4 -><P ->To support Win9X clients, you must use the "logon home" parameter. Samba has -now been fixed so that "net use/home" now works as well, and it, too, relies -on the "logon home" parameter.</P -><P ->By using the logon home parameter, you are restricted to putting Win9X -profiles in the user's home directory. But wait! There is a trick you -can use. If you set the following in the [global] section of your -smb.conf file:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->logon home = \\%L\%U\.profiles</PRE -></P -><P ->then your Win9X clients will dutifully put their clients in a subdirectory -of your home directory called .profiles (thus making them hidden).</P -><P ->Not only that, but 'net use/home' will also work, because of a feature in -Win9X. It removes any directory stuff off the end of the home directory area -and only uses the server and share portion. That is, it looks like you -specified \\%L\%U for "logon home".</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT3" -><HR><H4 -CLASS="SECT3" -><A -NAME="AEN1013" -></A ->6.8.2.3. Win9X and WinNT Configuration</H4 -><P ->You can support profiles for both Win9X and WinNT clients by setting both the -"logon home" and "logon path" parameters. For example:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->logon home = \\%L\%U\.profiles -logon path = \\%L\profiles\%U</PRE -></P -><DIV -CLASS="NOTE" -><P -></P -><TABLE -CLASS="NOTE" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Note"></TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" -><P ->I have not checked what 'net use /home' does on NT when "logon home" is -set as above.</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT3" -><HR><H4 -CLASS="SECT3" -><A -NAME="AEN1020" -></A ->6.8.2.4. Windows 9X Profile Setup</H4 -><P ->When a user first logs in on Windows 9X, the file user.DAT is created, -as are folders "Start Menu", "Desktop", "Programs" and "Nethood". -These directories and their contents will be merged with the local -versions stored in c:\windows\profiles\username on subsequent logins, -taking the most recent from each. You will need to use the [global] -options "preserve case = yes", "short preserve case = yes" and -"case sensitive = no" in order to maintain capital letters in shortcuts -in any of the profile folders.</P -><P ->The user.DAT file contains all the user's preferences. If you wish to -enforce a set of preferences, rename their user.DAT file to user.MAN, -and deny them write access to this file.</P -><P -></P -><OL -TYPE="1" -><LI -><P -> On the Windows 95 machine, go to Control Panel | Passwords and - select the User Profiles tab. Select the required level of - roaming preferences. Press OK, but do _not_ allow the computer - to reboot. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> On the Windows 95 machine, go to Control Panel | Network | - Client for Microsoft Networks | Preferences. Select 'Log on to - NT Domain'. Then, ensure that the Primary Logon is 'Client for - Microsoft Networks'. Press OK, and this time allow the computer - to reboot. - </P -></LI -></OL -><P ->Under Windows 95, Profiles are downloaded from the Primary Logon. -If you have the Primary Logon as 'Client for Novell Networks', then -the profiles and logon script will be downloaded from your Novell -Server. If you have the Primary Logon as 'Windows Logon', then the -profiles will be loaded from the local machine - a bit against the -concept of roaming profiles, if you ask me.</P -><P ->You will now find that the Microsoft Networks Login box contains -[user, password, domain] instead of just [user, password]. Type in -the samba server's domain name (or any other domain known to exist, -but bear in mind that the user will be authenticated against this -domain and profiles downloaded from it, if that domain logon server -supports it), user name and user's password.</P -><P ->Once the user has been successfully validated, the Windows 95 machine -will inform you that 'The user has not logged on before' and asks you -if you wish to save the user's preferences? Select 'yes'.</P -><P ->Once the Windows 95 client comes up with the desktop, you should be able -to examine the contents of the directory specified in the "logon path" -on the samba server and verify that the "Desktop", "Start Menu", -"Programs" and "Nethood" folders have been created.</P -><P ->These folders will be cached locally on the client, and updated when -the user logs off (if you haven't made them read-only by then :-). -You will find that if the user creates further folders or short-cuts, -that the client will merge the profile contents downloaded with the -contents of the profile directory already on the local client, taking -the newest folders and short-cuts from each set.</P -><P ->If you have made the folders / files read-only on the samba server, -then you will get errors from the w95 machine on logon and logout, as -it attempts to merge the local and the remote profile. Basically, if -you have any errors reported by the w95 machine, check the Unix file -permissions and ownership rights on the profile directory contents, -on the samba server.</P +>On the PC type the command <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>net view \\BIGSERVER</B +>. You will +need to do this from within a "dos prompt" window. You should get back a +list of available shares on the server.</P ><P ->If you have problems creating user profiles, you can reset the user's -local desktop cache, as shown below. When this user then next logs in, -they will be told that they are logging in "for the first time".</P +>If you get a "network name not found" or similar error then netbios +name resolution is not working. This is usually caused by a problem in +nmbd. To overcome it you could do one of the following (you only need +to choose one of them):</P ><P ></P ><OL TYPE="1" ><LI ><P -> instead of logging in under the [user, password, domain] dialog, - press escape. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> run the regedit.exe program, and look in: - </P -><P -> HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Windows\CurrentVersion\ProfileList - </P -><P -> you will find an entry, for each user, of ProfilePath. Note the - contents of this key (likely to be c:\windows\profiles\username), - then delete the key ProfilePath for the required user. - </P -><P -> [Exit the registry editor]. - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->WARNING</I -></SPAN -> - before deleting the contents of the - directory listed in - the ProfilePath (this is likely to be c:\windows\profiles\username), - ask them if they have any important files stored on their desktop - or in their start menu. delete the contents of the directory - ProfilePath (making a backup if any of the files are needed). - </P -><P -> This will have the effect of removing the local (read-only hidden - system file) user.DAT in their profile directory, as well as the - local "desktop", "nethood", "start menu" and "programs" folders. - </P +> fixup the nmbd installation</P ></LI ><LI ><P -> search for the user's .PWL password-caching file in the c:\windows - directory, and delete it. - </P +> add the IP address of BIGSERVER to the "wins server" box in the + advanced tcp/ip setup on the PC.</P ></LI ><LI ><P -> log off the windows 95 client. - </P +> enable windows name resolution via DNS in the advanced section of + the tcp/ip setup</P ></LI ><LI ><P -> check the contents of the profile path (see "logon path" described - above), and delete the user.DAT or user.MAN file for the user, - making a backup if required. - </P +> add BIGSERVER to your lmhosts file on the PC.</P ></LI ></OL ><P ->If all else fails, increase samba's debug log levels to between 3 and 10, -and / or run a packet trace program such as tcpdump or netmon.exe, and -look for any error reports.</P -><P ->If you have access to an NT server, then first set up roaming profiles -and / or netlogons on the NT server. Make a packet trace, or examine -the example packet traces provided with NT server, and see what the -differences are with the equivalent samba trace.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT3" -><HR><H4 -CLASS="SECT3" -><A -NAME="AEN1056" -></A ->6.8.2.5. Windows NT Workstation 4.0</H4 -><P ->When a user first logs in to a Windows NT Workstation, the profile -NTuser.DAT is created. The profile location can be now specified -through the "logon path" parameter. </P -><DIV -CLASS="NOTE" -><P -></P -><TABLE -CLASS="NOTE" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Note"></TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" -><P ->[lkcl 10aug97 - i tried setting the path to -\\samba-server\homes\profile, and discovered that this fails because -a background process maintains the connection to the [homes] share -which does _not_ close down in between user logins. you have to -have \\samba-server\%L\profile, where user is the username created -from the [homes] share].</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV -><P ->There is a parameter that is now available for use with NT Profiles: -"logon drive". This should be set to "h:" or any other drive, and -should be used in conjunction with the new "logon home" parameter.</P -><P ->The entry for the NT 4.0 profile is a _directory_ not a file. The NT -help on profiles mentions that a directory is also created with a .PDS -extension. The user, while logging in, must have write permission to -create the full profile path (and the folder with the .PDS extension) -[lkcl 10aug97 - i found that the creation of the .PDS directory failed, -and had to create these manually for each user, with a shell script. -also, i presume, but have not tested, that the full profile path must -be browseable just as it is for w95, due to the manner in which they -attempt to create the full profile path: test existence of each path -component; create path component].</P -><P ->In the profile directory, NT creates more folders than 95. It creates -"Application Data" and others, as well as "Desktop", "Nethood", -"Start Menu" and "Programs". The profile itself is stored in a file -NTuser.DAT. Nothing appears to be stored in the .PDS directory, and -its purpose is currently unknown.</P -><P ->You can use the System Control Panel to copy a local profile onto -a samba server (see NT Help on profiles: it is also capable of firing -up the correct location in the System Control Panel for you). The -NT Help file also mentions that renaming NTuser.DAT to NTuser.MAN -turns a profile into a mandatory one.</P -><DIV -CLASS="NOTE" -><P -></P -><TABLE -CLASS="NOTE" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Note"></TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" -><P ->[lkcl 10aug97 - i notice that NT Workstation tells me that it is -downloading a profile from a slow link. whether this is actually the -case, or whether there is some configuration issue, as yet unknown, -that makes NT Workstation _think_ that the link is a slow one is a -matter to be resolved].</P -><P ->[lkcl 20aug97 - after samba digest correspondence, one user found, and -another confirmed, that profiles cannot be loaded from a samba server -unless "security = user" and "encrypt passwords = yes" (see the file -ENCRYPTION.txt) or "security = server" and "password server = ip.address. -of.yourNTserver" are used. Either of these options will allow the NT -workstation to access the samba server using LAN manager encrypted -passwords, without the user intervention normally required by NT -workstation for clear-text passwords].</P -><P ->[lkcl 25aug97 - more comments received about NT profiles: the case of -the profile _matters_. the file _must_ be called NTuser.DAT or, for -a mandatory profile, NTuser.MAN].</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT3" -><HR><H4 -CLASS="SECT3" -><A -NAME="AEN1069" -></A ->6.8.2.6. Windows NT Server</H4 -><P ->There is nothing to stop you specifying any path that you like for the -location of users' profiles. Therefore, you could specify that the -profile be stored on a samba server, or any other SMB server, as long as -that SMB server supports encrypted passwords.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT3" -><HR><H4 -CLASS="SECT3" -><A -NAME="AEN1072" -></A ->6.8.2.7. Sharing Profiles between W95 and NT Workstation 4.0</H4 -><DIV -CLASS="WARNING" -><P -></P -><TABLE -CLASS="WARNING" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Warning"></TD -><TH -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="CENTER" -><B ->Potentially outdated or incorrect material follows</B -></TH -></TR -><TR -><TD -> </TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" -><P ->I think this is all bogus, but have not deleted it. (Richard Sharpe)</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV -><P ->The default logon path is \\%N\%U. NT Workstation will attempt to create -a directory "\\samba-server\username.PDS" if you specify the logon path -as "\\samba-server\username" with the NT User Manager. Therefore, you -will need to specify (for example) "\\samba-server\username\profile". -NT 4.0 will attempt to create "\\samba-server\username\profile.PDS", which -is more likely to succeed.</P -><P ->If you then want to share the same Start Menu / Desktop with W95, you will -need to specify "logon path = \\samba-server\username\profile" [lkcl 10aug97 -this has its drawbacks: i created a shortcut to telnet.exe, which attempts -to run from the c:\winnt\system32 directory. this directory is obviously -unlikely to exist on a Win95-only host].</P -><P -> If you have this set up correctly, you will find separate user.DAT and -NTuser.DAT files in the same profile directory.</P -><DIV -CLASS="NOTE" -><P -></P -><TABLE -CLASS="NOTE" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Note"></TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" -><P ->[lkcl 25aug97 - there are some issues to resolve with downloading of -NT profiles, probably to do with time/date stamps. i have found that -NTuser.DAT is never updated on the workstation after the first time that -it is copied to the local workstation profile directory. this is in -contrast to w95, where it _does_ transfer / update profiles correctly].</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV -></DIV -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1082" -></A ->6.9. DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control & Samba</H2 -><DIV -CLASS="WARNING" -><P -></P -><TABLE -CLASS="WARNING" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Warning"></TD -><TH -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="CENTER" -><B ->Possibly Outdated Material</B -></TH -></TR -><TR -><TD -> </TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" -><P -> This appendix was originally authored by John H Terpstra of - the Samba Team and is included here for posterity. - </P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV -><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE :</I -></SPAN -> -The term "Domain Controller" and those related to it refer to one specific -method of authentication that can underly an SMB domain. Domain Controllers -prior to Windows NT Server 3.1 were sold by various companies and based on -private extensions to the LAN Manager 2.1 protocol. Windows NT introduced -Microsoft-specific ways of distributing the user authentication database. -See DOMAIN.txt for examples of how Samba can participate in or create -SMB domains based on shared authentication database schemes other than the -Windows NT SAM.</P -><P ->Windows NT Server can be installed as either a plain file and print server -(WORKGROUP workstation or server) or as a server that participates in Domain -Control (DOMAIN member, Primary Domain controller or Backup Domain controller). -The same is true for OS/2 Warp Server, Digital Pathworks and other similar -products, all of which can participate in Domain Control along with Windows NT.</P -><P ->To many people these terms can be confusing, so let's try to clear the air.</P -><P ->Every Windows NT system (workstation or server) has a registry database. -The registry contains entries that describe the initialization information -for all services (the equivalent of Unix Daemons) that run within the Windows -NT environment. The registry also contains entries that tell application -software where to find dynamically loadable libraries that they depend upon. -In fact, the registry contains entries that describes everything that anything -may need to know to interact with the rest of the system.</P -><P ->The registry files can be located on any Windows NT machine by opening a -command prompt and typing:</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->C:\WINNT\></TT -> dir %SystemRoot%\System32\config</P -><P ->The environment variable %SystemRoot% value can be obtained by typing:</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->C:\WINNT></TT ->echo %SystemRoot%</P -><P ->The active parts of the registry that you may want to be familiar with are -the files called: default, system, software, sam and security.</P -><P ->In a domain environment, Microsoft Windows NT domain controllers participate -in replication of the SAM and SECURITY files so that all controllers within -the domain have an exactly identical copy of each.</P -><P ->The Microsoft Windows NT system is structured within a security model that -says that all applications and services must authenticate themselves before -they can obtain permission from the security manager to do what they set out -to do.</P -><P ->The Windows NT User database also resides within the registry. This part of -the registry contains the user's security identifier, home directory, group -memberships, desktop profile, and so on.</P -><P ->Every Windows NT system (workstation as well as server) will have its own -registry. Windows NT Servers that participate in Domain Security control -have a database that they share in common - thus they do NOT own an -independent full registry database of their own, as do Workstations and -plain Servers.</P -><P ->The User database is called the SAM (Security Access Manager) database and -is used for all user authentication as well as for authentication of inter- -process authentication (i.e. to ensure that the service action a user has -requested is permitted within the limits of that user's privileges).</P -><P ->The Samba team have produced a utility that can dump the Windows NT SAM into -smbpasswd format: see ENCRYPTION.txt for information on smbpasswd and -/pub/samba/pwdump on your nearest Samba mirror for the utility. This -facility is useful but cannot be easily used to implement SAM replication -to Samba systems.</P -><P ->Windows for Workgroups, Windows 95, and Windows NT Workstations and Servers -can participate in a Domain security system that is controlled by Windows NT -servers that have been correctly configured. Almost every domain will have -ONE Primary Domain Controller (PDC). It is desirable that each domain will -have at least one Backup Domain Controller (BDC).</P -><P ->The PDC and BDCs then participate in replication of the SAM database so that -each Domain Controlling participant will have an up to date SAM component -within its registry.</P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><HR><H1 -><A -NAME="SAMBA-BDC" -></A ->Chapter 7. How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1118" -></A ->7.1. Prerequisite Reading</H2 -><P ->Before you continue reading in this chapter, please make sure -that you are comfortable with configuring a Samba PDC -as described in the <A -HREF="Samba-PDC-HOWTO.html" -TARGET="_top" ->Samba-PDC-HOWTO</A ->.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1122" -></A ->7.2. Background</H2 -><P ->What is a Domain Controller? It is a machine that is able to answer -logon requests from workstations in a Windows NT Domain. Whenever a -user logs into a Windows NT Workstation, the workstation connects to a -Domain Controller and asks him whether the username and password the -user typed in is correct. The Domain Controller replies with a lot of -information about the user, for example the place where the users -profile is stored, the users full name of the user. All this -information is stored in the NT user database, the so-called SAM.</P -><P ->There are two kinds of Domain Controller in a NT 4 compatible Domain: -A Primary Domain Controller (PDC) and one or more Backup Domain -Controllers (BDC). The PDC contains the master copy of the -SAM. Whenever the SAM has to change, for example when a user changes -his password, this change has to be done on the PDC. A Backup Domain -Controller is a machine that maintains a read-only copy of the -SAM. This way it is able to reply to logon requests and authenticate -users in case the PDC is not available. During this time no changes to -the SAM are possible. Whenever changes to the SAM are done on the PDC, -all BDC receive the changes from the PDC.</P -><P ->Since version 2.2 Samba officially supports domain logons for all -current Windows Clients, including Windows 2000 and XP. This text -assumes the domain to be named SAMBA. To be able to act as a PDC, some -parameters in the [global]-section of the smb.conf have to be set:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->workgroup = SAMBA -domain master = yes -domain logons = yes</PRE -></P -><P ->Several other things like a [homes] and a [netlogon] share also may be -set along with settings for the profile path, the users home drive and -others. This will not be covered in this document.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1130" -></A ->7.3. What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?</H2 +>If you get a "invalid network name" or "bad password error" then the +same fixes apply as they did for the "smbclient -L" test above. In +particular, make sure your "hosts allow" line is correct (see the man +pages)</P ><P ->Every machine that is a Domain Controller for the domain SAMBA has to -register the NetBIOS group name SAMBA#1c with the WINS server and/or -by broadcast on the local network. The PDC also registers the unique -NetBIOS name SAMBA#1b with the WINS server. The name type #1b is -normally reserved for the domain master browser, a role that has -nothing to do with anything related to authentication, but the -Microsoft Domain implementation requires the domain master browser to -be on the same machine as the PDC.</P -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN1133" -></A ->7.3.1. How does a Workstation find its domain controller?</H3 +>Also, do not overlook that fact that when the workstation requests the +connection to the samba server it will attempt to connect using the +name with which you logged onto your Windows machine. You need to make +sure that an account exists on your Samba server with that exact same +name and password.</P ><P ->A NT workstation in the domain SAMBA that wants a local user to be -authenticated has to find the domain controller for SAMBA. It does -this by doing a NetBIOS name query for the group name SAMBA#1c. It -assumes that each of the machines it gets back from the queries is a -domain controller and can answer logon requests. To not open security -holes both the workstation and the selected (TODO: How is the DC -chosen) domain controller authenticate each other. After that the -workstation sends the user's credentials (his name and password) to -the domain controller, asking for approval.</P +>If you get "specified computer is not receiving requests" or similar +it probably means that the host is not contactable via tcp services. +Check to see if the host is running tcp wrappers, and if so add an entry in +the hosts.allow file for your client (or subnet, etc.)</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1136" +NAME="AEN329" ></A ->7.3.2. When is the PDC needed?</H3 +>2.3.9. Test 9</H3 ><P ->Whenever a user wants to change his password, this has to be done on -the PDC. To find the PDC, the workstation does a NetBIOS name query -for SAMBA#1b, assuming this machine maintains the master copy of the -SAM. The workstation contacts the PDC, both mutually authenticate and -the password change is done.</P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1139" -></A ->7.4. Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller?</H2 +>Run the command <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>net use x: \\BIGSERVER\TMP</B +>. You should +be prompted for a password then you should get a "command completed +successfully" message. If not then your PC software is incorrectly +installed or your smb.conf is incorrect. make sure your "hosts allow" +and other config lines in smb.conf are correct.</P ><P ->With version 2.2, no. The native NT SAM replication protocols have -not yet been fully implemented. The Samba Team is working on -understanding and implementing the protocols, but this work has not -been finished for version 2.2.</P +>It's also possible that the server can't work out what user name to +connect you as. To see if this is the problem add the line "user = +USERNAME" to the [tmp] section of smb.conf where "USERNAME" is the +username corresponding to the password you typed. If you find this +fixes things you may need the username mapping option. </P ><P ->Can I get the benefits of a BDC with Samba? Yes. The main reason for -implementing a BDC is availability. If the PDC is a Samba machine, -a second Samba machine can be set up to -service logon requests whenever the PDC is down.</P +>It might also be the case that your client only sends encrypted passwords +and you have <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>encrypt passwords = no</B +> in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +>. +Turn it back on to fix.</P ></DIV ><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1143" -></A ->7.5. How do I set up a Samba BDC?</H2 -><P ->Several things have to be done:</P -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P ->The domain SID has to be the same on the PDC and the BDC. This used to -be stored in the file private/MACHINE.SID. This file is not created -anymore since Samba 2.2.5 or even earlier. Nowadays the domain SID is -stored in the file private/secrets.tdb. Simply copying the secrets.tdb -from the PDC to the BDC does not work, as the BDC would -generate a new SID for itself and override the domain SID with this -new BDC SID.</P -><P ->To retrieve the domain SID from the PDC or an existing BDC and store it in the -secrets.tdb, execute 'net rpc getsid' on the BDC.</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->The Unix user database has to be synchronized from the PDC to the -BDC. This means that both the /etc/passwd and /etc/group have to be -replicated from the PDC to the BDC. This can be done manually -whenever changes are made, or the PDC is set up as a NIS master -server and the BDC as a NIS slave server. To set up the BDC as a -mere NIS client would not be enough, as the BDC would not be able to -access its user database in case of a PDC failure.</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->The Samba password database in the file private/smbpasswd has to be -replicated from the PDC to the BDC. This is a bit tricky, see the -next section.</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->Any netlogon share has to be replicated from the PDC to the -BDC. This can be done manually whenever login scripts are changed, -or it can be done automatically together with the smbpasswd -synchronization.</P -></LI -></UL -><P ->Finally, the BDC has to be found by the workstations. This can be done -by setting</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->workgroup = samba -domain master = no -domain logons = yes</PRE -></P -><P ->in the [global]-section of the smb.conf of the BDC. This makes the BDC -only register the name SAMBA#1c with the WINS server. This is no -problem as the name SAMBA#1c is a NetBIOS group name that is meant to -be registered by more than one machine. The parameter 'domain master = -no' forces the BDC not to register SAMBA#1b which as a unique NetBIOS -name is reserved for the Primary Domain Controller.</P -><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1160" -></A ->7.5.1. How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?</H3 -><P ->Replication of the smbpasswd file is sensitive. It has to be done -whenever changes to the SAM are made. Every user's password change is -done in the smbpasswd file and has to be replicated to the BDC. So -replicating the smbpasswd file very often is necessary.</P -><P ->As the smbpasswd file contains plain text password equivalents, it -must not be sent unencrypted over the wire. The best way to set up -smbpasswd replication from the PDC to the BDC is to use the utility -rsync. rsync can use ssh as a transport. ssh itself can be set up to -accept *only* rsync transfer without requiring the user to type a -password.</P -></DIV -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><HR><H1 -><A -NAME="ADS" -></A ->Chapter 8. Samba as a ADS domain member</H1 -><P ->This is a VERY ROUGH guide to setting up the current (November 2001) -pre-alpha version of Samba 3.0 with kerberos authentication against a -Windows2000 KDC. The procedures listed here are likely to change as -the code develops.</P -><P ->Pieces you need before you begin: -<P -></P -><TABLE -BORDER="0" -><TBODY -><TR -><TD ->a Windows 2000 server.</TD -></TR -><TR -><TD ->samba 3.0 or higher.</TD -></TR -><TR -><TD ->the MIT kerberos development libraries (either install from the above sources or use a package). The heimdal libraries will not work.</TD -></TR -><TR -><TD ->the OpenLDAP development libraries.</TD -></TR -></TBODY -></TABLE -><P -></P -></P -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1178" -></A ->8.1. Installing the required packages for Debian</H2 -><P ->On Debian you need to install the following packages: -<P -></P -><TABLE -BORDER="0" -><TBODY -><TR -><TD ->libkrb5-dev</TD -></TR -><TR -><TD ->krb5-user</TD -></TR -></TBODY -></TABLE -><P -></P -></P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1184" -></A ->8.2. Installing the required packages for RedHat</H2 -><P ->On RedHat this means you should have at least: -<P -></P -><TABLE -BORDER="0" -><TBODY -><TR -><TD ->krb5-workstation (for kinit)</TD -></TR -><TR -><TD ->krb5-libs (for linking with)</TD -></TR -><TR -><TD ->krb5-devel (because you are compiling from source)</TD -></TR -></TBODY -></TABLE -><P -></P -></P -><P ->in addition to the standard development environment.</P -><P ->Note that these are not standard on a RedHat install, and you may need -to get them off CD2.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1193" -></A ->8.3. Compile Samba</H2 -><P ->If your kerberos libraries are in a non-standard location then - remember to add the configure option --with-krb5=DIR.</P -><P ->After you run configure make sure that include/config.h contains - lines like this:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->#define HAVE_KRB5 1 -#define HAVE_LDAP 1</PRE -></P -><P ->If it doesn't then configure did not find your krb5 libraries or - your ldap libraries. Look in config.log to figure out why and fix - it.</P -><P ->Then compile and install Samba as usual. You must use at least the - following 3 options in smb.conf:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> realm = YOUR.KERBEROS.REALM - ads server = your.kerberos.server - security = ADS - encrypt passwords = yes</PRE -></P -><P ->Strictly speaking, you can omit the realm name and you can use an IP - address for the ads server. In that case Samba will auto-detect these.</P -><P ->You do *not* need a smbpasswd file, although it won't do any harm - and if you have one then Samba will be able to fall back to normal - password security for older clients. I expect that the above - required options will change soon when we get better active - directory integration.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1205" +NAME="AEN337" ></A ->8.4. Setup your /etc/krb5.conf</H2 -><P ->The minimal configuration for krb5.conf is:</P +>2.3.10. Test 10</H3 ><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> [realms] - YOUR.KERBEROS.REALM = { - kdc = your.kerberos.server - }</PRE -></P -><P ->Test your config by doing a "kinit USERNAME@REALM" and making sure that - your password is accepted by the Win2000 KDC. </P -><P ->NOTE: The realm must be uppercase. </P -><P ->You also must ensure that you can do a reverse DNS lookup on the IP -address of your KDC. Also, the name that this reverse lookup maps to -must either be the netbios name of the KDC (ie. the hostname with no -domain attached) or it can alternatively be the netbios name -followed by the realm. </P -><P ->The easiest way to ensure you get this right is to add a /etc/hosts -entry mapping the IP address of your KDC to its netbios name. If you -don't get this right then you will get a "local error" when you try -to join the realm.</P -><P ->If all you want is kerberos support in smbclient then you can skip -straight to step 5 now. Step 3 is only needed if you want kerberos -support in smbd.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1215" -></A ->8.5. Create the computer account</H2 +>Run the command <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmblookup -M TESTGROUP</B +> where +TESTGROUP is the name of the workgroup that your Samba server and +Windows PCs belong to. You should get back the IP address of the +master browser for that workgroup.</P ><P ->Do a "kinit" as a user that has authority to change arbitrary -passwords on the KDC ("Administrator" is a good choice). Then as a -user that has write permission on the Samba private directory -(usually root) run: -<B +>If you don't then the election process has failed. Wait a minute to +see if it is just being slow then try again. If it still fails after +that then look at the browsing options you have set in smb.conf. Make +sure you have <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->net ads join</B -></P +>preferred master = yes</B +> to ensure that +an election is held at startup.</P +></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1219" -></A ->8.5.1. Possible errors</H3 -><P -><P -></P -><DIV -CLASS="VARIABLELIST" -><DL -><DT ->"bash: kinit: command not found"</DT -><DD -><P ->kinit is in the krb5-workstation RPM on RedHat systems, and is in /usr/kerberos/bin, so it won't be in the path until you log in again (or open a new terminal)</P -></DD -><DT ->"ADS support not compiled in"</DT -><DD -><P ->Samba must be reconfigured (remove config.cache) and recompiled (make clean all install) after the kerberos libs and headers are installed.</P -></DD -></DL -></DIV -></P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1231" +NAME="AEN343" ></A ->8.6. Test your server setup</H2 +>2.3.11. Test 11</H3 ><P ->On a Windows 2000 client try <B +>From file manager try to browse the server. Your samba server should +appear in the browse list of your local workgroup (or the one you +specified in smb.conf). You should be able to double click on the name +of the server and get a list of shares. If you get a "invalid +password" error when you do then you are probably running WinNT and it +is refusing to browse a server that has no encrypted password +capability and is in user level security mode. In this case either set +<B CLASS="COMMAND" ->net use * \\server\share</B ->. You should -be logged in with kerberos without needing to know a password. If -this fails then run <B +>security = server</B +> AND +<B CLASS="COMMAND" ->klist tickets</B ->. Did you get a ticket for the -server? Does it have an encoding type of DES-CBC-MD5 ? </P +>password server = Windows_NT_Machine</B +> in your +smb.conf file, or enable encrypted passwords AFTER compiling in support +for encrypted passwords (refer to the Makefile).</P ></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1236" -></A ->8.7. Testing with smbclient</H2 -><P ->On your Samba server try to login to a Win2000 server or your Samba -server using smbclient and kerberos. Use smbclient as usual, but -specify the -k option to choose kerberos authentication.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1239" +NAME="AEN348" ></A ->8.8. Notes</H2 -><P ->You must change administrator password at least once after DC install, - to create the right encoding types</P -><P ->w2k doesn't seem to create the _kerberos._udp and _ldap._tcp in - their defaults DNS setup. Maybe fixed in service packs?</P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><HR><H1 -><A -NAME="DOMAIN-SECURITY" -></A ->Chapter 9. Samba as a NT4 domain member</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1261" -></A ->9.1. Joining an NT Domain with Samba 2.2</H2 -><P ->Assume you have a Samba 2.x server with a NetBIOS name of - <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->SERV1</TT -> and are joining an NT domain called - <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->DOM</TT ->, which has a PDC with a NetBIOS name - of <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->DOMPDC</TT -> and two backup domain controllers - with NetBIOS names <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->DOMBDC1</TT -> and <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->DOMBDC2 - </TT ->.</P -><P ->In order to join the domain, first stop all Samba daemons - and run the command:</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->root# </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B ->smbpasswd -j DOM -r DOMPDC - -U<TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->Administrator%password</I -></TT -></B -></TT -></P +>2.4. Still having troubles?</H2 ><P ->as we are joining the domain DOM and the PDC for that domain - (the only machine that has write access to the domain SAM database) - is DOMPDC. The <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->Administrator%password</I -></TT -> is - the login name and password for an account which has the necessary - privilege to add machines to the domain. If this is successful - you will see the message:</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" ->smbpasswd: Joined domain DOM.</TT -> - </P -><P ->in your terminal window. See the <A -HREF="smbpasswd.8.html" -TARGET="_top" -> smbpasswd(8)</A -> man page for more details.</P -><P ->There is existing development code to join a domain - without having to create the machine trust account on the PDC - beforehand. This code will hopefully be available soon - in release branches as well.</P -><P ->This command goes through the machine account password - change protocol, then writes the new (random) machine account - password for this Samba server into a file in the same directory - in which an smbpasswd file would be stored - normally :</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/usr/local/samba/private</TT -></P -><P ->In Samba 2.0.x, the filename looks like this:</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="FILENAME" -><TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I -><NT DOMAIN NAME></I -></TT ->.<TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I -><Samba - Server Name></I -></TT ->.mac</TT -></P -><P ->The <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->.mac</TT -> suffix stands for machine account - password file. So in our example above, the file would be called:</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->DOM.SERV1.mac</TT -></P -><P ->In Samba 2.2, this file has been replaced with a TDB - (Trivial Database) file named <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->secrets.tdb</TT ->. - </P -><P ->This file is created and owned by root and is not - readable by any other user. It is the key to the domain-level - security for your system, and should be treated as carefully - as a shadow password file.</P -><P ->Now, before restarting the Samba daemons you must - edit your <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html" -TARGET="_top" -><TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf(5)</TT -> - </A -> file to tell Samba it should now use domain security.</P -><P ->Change (or add) your <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" -TARGET="_top" -> <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->security =</I -></TT -></A -> line in the [global] section - of your smb.conf to read:</P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->security = domain</B -></P -><P ->Next change the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" -TARGET="_top" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I -> workgroup =</I -></TT -></A -> line in the [global] section to read: </P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->workgroup = DOM</B -></P -><P ->as this is the name of the domain we are joining. </P -><P ->You must also have the parameter <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +>Try the mailing list or newsgroup, or use the ethereal utility to +sniff the problem. The official samba mailing list can be reached at +<A +HREF="mailto:samba@samba.org" TARGET="_top" -> <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->encrypt passwords</I -></TT -></A -> set to <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->yes - </TT -> in order for your users to authenticate to the NT PDC.</P -><P ->Finally, add (or modify) a <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER" +>samba@samba.org</A +>. To find +out more about samba and how to subscribe to the mailing list check +out the samba web page at +<A +HREF="http://samba.org/samba" TARGET="_top" -> <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->password server =</I -></TT -></A -> line in the [global] - section to read: </P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->password server = DOMPDC DOMBDC1 DOMBDC2</B -></P -><P ->These are the primary and backup domain controllers Samba - will attempt to contact in order to authenticate users. Samba will - try to contact each of these servers in order, so you may want to - rearrange this list in order to spread out the authentication load - among domain controllers.</P -><P ->Alternatively, if you want smbd to automatically determine - the list of Domain controllers to use for authentication, you may - set this line to be :</P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->password server = *</B +>http://samba.org/samba</A ></P ><P ->This method, which was introduced in Samba 2.0.6, - allows Samba to use exactly the same mechanism that NT does. This - method either broadcasts or uses a WINS database in order to - find domain controllers to authenticate against.</P -><P ->Finally, restart your Samba daemons and get ready for - clients to begin using domain security!</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1325" -></A ->9.2. Samba and Windows 2000 Domains</H2 -><P ->Many people have asked regarding the state of Samba's ability to participate in -a Windows 2000 Domain. Samba 3.0 is able to act as a member server of a Windows -2000 domain operating in mixed or native mode.</P -><P ->There is much confusion between the circumstances that require a "mixed" mode -Win2k DC and a when this host can be switched to "native" mode. A "mixed" mode -Win2k domain controller is only needed if Windows NT BDCs must exist in the same -domain. By default, a Win2k DC in "native" mode will still support -NetBIOS and NTLMv1 for authentication of legacy clients such as Windows 9x and -NT 4.0. Samba has the same requirements as a Windows NT 4.0 member server.</P -><P ->The steps for adding a Samba 2.2 host to a Win2k domain are the same as those -for adding a Samba server to a Windows NT 4.0 domain. The only exception is that -the "Server Manager" from NT 4 has been replaced by the "Active Directory Users and -Computers" MMC (Microsoft Management Console) plugin.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1330" -></A ->9.3. Why is this better than security = server?</H2 -><P ->Currently, domain security in Samba doesn't free you from - having to create local Unix users to represent the users attaching - to your server. This means that if domain user <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->DOM\fred - </TT -> attaches to your domain security Samba server, there needs - to be a local Unix user fred to represent that user in the Unix - filesystem. This is very similar to the older Samba security mode - <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITYEQUALSSERVER" -TARGET="_top" ->security = server</A ->, - where Samba would pass through the authentication request to a Windows - NT server in the same way as a Windows 95 or Windows 98 server would. - </P -><P ->Please refer to the <A -HREF="winbind.html" -TARGET="_top" ->Winbind - paper</A -> for information on a system to automatically - assign UNIX uids and gids to Windows NT Domain users and groups. - This code is available in development branches only at the moment, - but will be moved to release branches soon.</P -><P ->The advantage to domain-level security is that the - authentication in domain-level security is passed down the authenticated - RPC channel in exactly the same way that an NT server would do it. This - means Samba servers now participate in domain trust relationships in - exactly the same way NT servers do (i.e., you can add Samba servers into - a resource domain and have the authentication passed on from a resource - domain PDC to an account domain PDC.</P -><P ->In addition, with <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->security = server</B -> every Samba - daemon on a server has to keep a connection open to the - authenticating server for as long as that daemon lasts. This can drain - the connection resources on a Microsoft NT server and cause it to run - out of available connections. With <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->security = domain</B ->, - however, the Samba daemons connect to the PDC/BDC only for as long - as is necessary to authenticate the user, and then drop the connection, - thus conserving PDC connection resources.</P -><P ->And finally, acting in the same manner as an NT server - authenticating to a PDC means that as part of the authentication - reply, the Samba server gets the user identification information such - as the user SID, the list of NT groups the user belongs to, etc. All - this information will allow Samba to be extended in the future into - a mode the developers currently call appliance mode. In this mode, - no local Unix users will be necessary, and Samba will generate Unix - uids and gids from the information passed back from the PDC when a - user is authenticated, making a Samba server truly plug and play - in an NT domain environment. Watch for this code soon.</P -><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE:</I -></SPAN -> Much of the text of this document - was first published in the Web magazine <A -HREF="http://www.linuxworld.com" -TARGET="_top" -> - LinuxWorld</A -> as the article <A -HREF="http://www.linuxworld.com/linuxworld/lw-1998-10/lw-10-samba.html" -TARGET="_top" ->Doing - the NIS/NT Samba</A ->.</P -></DIV -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="PART" -><A -NAME="AEN1346" -></A -><DIV -CLASS="TITLEPAGE" -><H1 -CLASS="TITLE" ->III. Optional configuration</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="PARTINTRO" -><A -NAME="AEN1348" -></A -><H1 ->Introduction</H1 -><P ->Samba has several features that you might want or might not want to use. The chapters in this -part each cover one specific feature.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="TOC" -><DL -><DT -><B ->Table of Contents</B -></DT -><DT ->10. <A -HREF="#INTEGRATE-MS-NETWORKS" ->Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->10.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1362" ->Agenda</A -></DT -><DT ->10.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1384" ->Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->10.2.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1400" -><TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/hosts</TT -></A -></DT -><DT ->10.2.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1416" -><TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/resolv.conf</TT -></A -></DT -><DT ->10.2.3. <A -HREF="#AEN1427" -><TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/host.conf</TT -></A -></DT -><DT ->10.2.4. <A -HREF="#AEN1435" -><TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT -></A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->10.3. <A -HREF="#AEN1447" ->Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->10.3.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1459" ->The NetBIOS Name Cache</A -></DT -><DT ->10.3.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1464" ->The LMHOSTS file</A -></DT -><DT ->10.3.3. <A -HREF="#AEN1472" ->HOSTS file</A -></DT -><DT ->10.3.4. <A -HREF="#AEN1477" ->DNS Lookup</A -></DT -><DT ->10.3.5. <A -HREF="#AEN1480" ->WINS Lookup</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->10.4. <A -HREF="#AEN1492" ->How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and -dependable browsing using Samba</A -></DT -><DT ->10.5. <A -HREF="#AEN1502" ->MS Windows security options and how to configure -Samba for seemless integration</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->10.5.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1530" ->Use MS Windows NT as an authentication server</A -></DT -><DT ->10.5.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1538" ->Make Samba a member of an MS Windows NT security domain</A -></DT -><DT ->10.5.3. <A -HREF="#AEN1555" ->Configure Samba as an authentication server</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->10.6. <A -HREF="#AEN1572" ->Conclusions</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->11. <A -HREF="#UNIX-PERMISSIONS" ->UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->11.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1593" ->Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT - security dialogs</A -></DT -><DT ->11.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1602" ->How to view file security on a Samba share</A -></DT -><DT ->11.3. <A -HREF="#AEN1613" ->Viewing file ownership</A -></DT -><DT ->11.4. <A -HREF="#AEN1633" ->Viewing file or directory permissions</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->11.4.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1648" ->File Permissions</A -></DT -><DT ->11.4.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1662" ->Directory Permissions</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->11.5. <A -HREF="#AEN1669" ->Modifying file or directory permissions</A -></DT -><DT ->11.6. <A -HREF="#AEN1691" ->Interaction with the standard Samba create mask - parameters</A -></DT -><DT ->11.7. <A -HREF="#AEN1755" ->Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute - mapping</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->12. <A -HREF="#PAM" ->Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally -managed authentication</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->12.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1776" ->Samba and PAM</A -></DT -><DT ->12.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1820" ->Distributed Authentication</A -></DT -><DT ->12.3. <A -HREF="#AEN1827" ->PAM Configuration in smb.conf</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->13. <A -HREF="#MSDFS" ->Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->13.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1847" ->Instructions</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->13.1.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1882" ->Notes</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -></DL -></DD -><DT ->14. <A -HREF="#PRINTING" ->Printing Support</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->14.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1908" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->14.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1930" ->Configuration</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->14.2.1. <A -HREF="#AEN1938" ->Creating [print$]</A -></DT -><DT ->14.2.2. <A -HREF="#AEN1973" ->Setting Drivers for Existing Printers</A -></DT -><DT ->14.2.3. <A -HREF="#AEN1989" ->Support a large number of printers</A -></DT -><DT ->14.2.4. <A -HREF="#AEN2000" ->Adding New Printers via the Windows NT APW</A -></DT -><DT ->14.2.5. <A -HREF="#AEN2030" ->Samba and Printer Ports</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->14.3. <A -HREF="#AEN2038" ->The Imprints Toolset</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->14.3.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2042" ->What is Imprints?</A -></DT -><DT ->14.3.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2052" ->Creating Printer Driver Packages</A -></DT -><DT ->14.3.3. <A -HREF="#AEN2055" ->The Imprints server</A -></DT -><DT ->14.3.4. <A -HREF="#AEN2059" ->The Installation Client</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->14.4. <A -HREF="#AEN2081" ->Diagnosis</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->14.4.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2083" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->14.4.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2099" ->Debugging printer problems</A -></DT -><DT ->14.4.3. <A -HREF="#AEN2108" ->What printers do I have?</A -></DT -><DT ->14.4.4. <A -HREF="#AEN2116" ->Setting up printcap and print servers</A -></DT -><DT ->14.4.5. <A -HREF="#AEN2144" ->Job sent, no output</A -></DT -><DT ->14.4.6. <A -HREF="#AEN2155" ->Job sent, strange output</A -></DT -><DT ->14.4.7. <A -HREF="#AEN2167" ->Raw PostScript printed</A -></DT -><DT ->14.4.8. <A -HREF="#AEN2170" ->Advanced Printing</A -></DT -><DT ->14.4.9. <A -HREF="#AEN2173" ->Real debugging</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -></DL -></DD -><DT ->15. <A -HREF="#SECURITYLEVELS" ->Security levels</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->15.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2186" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->15.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2197" ->More complete description of security levels</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->16. <A -HREF="#WINBIND" ->Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->16.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2249" ->Abstract</A -></DT -><DT ->16.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2253" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->16.3. <A -HREF="#AEN2266" ->What Winbind Provides</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->16.3.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2273" ->Target Uses</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->16.4. <A -HREF="#AEN2277" ->How Winbind Works</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->16.4.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2282" ->Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</A -></DT -><DT ->16.4.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2286" ->Name Service Switch</A -></DT -><DT ->16.4.3. <A -HREF="#AEN2302" ->Pluggable Authentication Modules</A -></DT -><DT ->16.4.4. <A -HREF="#AEN2310" ->User and Group ID Allocation</A -></DT -><DT ->16.4.5. <A -HREF="#AEN2314" ->Result Caching</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->16.5. <A -HREF="#AEN2317" ->Installation and Configuration</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->16.5.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2324" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->16.5.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2337" ->Requirements</A -></DT -><DT ->16.5.3. <A -HREF="#AEN2351" ->Testing Things Out</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->16.6. <A -HREF="#AEN2566" ->Limitations</A -></DT -><DT ->16.7. <A -HREF="#AEN2576" ->Conclusion</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->17. <A -HREF="#PDB-MYSQL" ->Passdb MySQL plugin</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->17.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2590" ->Building</A -></DT -><DT ->17.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2596" ->Configuring</A -></DT -><DT ->17.3. <A -HREF="#AEN2611" ->Using plaintext passwords or encrypted password</A -></DT -><DT ->17.4. <A -HREF="#AEN2616" ->Getting non-column data from the table</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->18. <A -HREF="#PDB-XML" ->Passdb XML plugin</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->18.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2635" ->Building</A -></DT -><DT ->18.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2641" ->Usage</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->19. <A -HREF="#SAMBA-LDAP-HOWTO" ->Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->19.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2664" ->Purpose</A -></DT -><DT ->19.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2684" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->19.3. <A -HREF="#AEN2713" ->Supported LDAP Servers</A -></DT -><DT ->19.4. <A -HREF="#AEN2718" ->Schema and Relationship to the RFC 2307 posixAccount</A -></DT -><DT ->19.5. <A -HREF="#AEN2730" ->Configuring Samba with LDAP</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->19.5.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2732" ->OpenLDAP configuration</A -></DT -><DT ->19.5.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2749" ->Configuring Samba</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->19.6. <A -HREF="#AEN2777" ->Accounts and Groups management</A -></DT -><DT ->19.7. <A -HREF="#AEN2782" ->Security and sambaAccount</A -></DT -><DT ->19.8. <A -HREF="#AEN2802" ->LDAP specials attributes for sambaAccounts</A -></DT -><DT ->19.9. <A -HREF="#AEN2872" ->Example LDIF Entries for a sambaAccount</A -></DT -><DT ->19.10. <A -HREF="#AEN2880" ->Comments</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->20. <A -HREF="#CVS-ACCESS" ->HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->20.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2891" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->20.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2896" ->CVS Access to samba.org</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->20.2.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2899" ->Access via CVSweb</A -></DT -><DT ->20.2.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2904" ->Access via cvs</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -></DL -></DD -><DT ->21. <A -HREF="#GROUPMAPPING" ->Group mapping HOWTO</A -></DT -><DT ->22. <A -HREF="#SPEED" ->Samba performance issues</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->22.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2982" ->Comparisons</A -></DT -><DT ->22.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2988" ->Oplocks</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->22.2.1. <A -HREF="#AEN2990" ->Overview</A -></DT -><DT ->22.2.2. <A -HREF="#AEN2998" ->Level2 Oplocks</A -></DT -><DT ->22.2.3. <A -HREF="#AEN3004" ->Old 'fake oplocks' option - deprecated</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->22.3. <A -HREF="#AEN3008" ->Socket options</A -></DT -><DT ->22.4. <A -HREF="#AEN3015" ->Read size</A -></DT -><DT ->22.5. <A -HREF="#AEN3020" ->Max xmit</A -></DT -><DT ->22.6. <A -HREF="#AEN3025" ->Locking</A -></DT -><DT ->22.7. <A -HREF="#AEN3029" ->Share modes</A -></DT -><DT ->22.8. <A -HREF="#AEN3034" ->Log level</A -></DT -><DT ->22.9. <A -HREF="#AEN3037" ->Wide lines</A -></DT -><DT ->22.10. <A -HREF="#AEN3040" ->Read raw</A -></DT -><DT ->22.11. <A -HREF="#AEN3045" ->Write raw</A -></DT -><DT ->22.12. <A -HREF="#AEN3049" ->Read prediction</A -></DT -><DT ->22.13. <A -HREF="#AEN3056" ->Memory mapping</A -></DT -><DT ->22.14. <A -HREF="#AEN3061" ->Slow Clients</A -></DT -><DT ->22.15. <A -HREF="#AEN3065" ->Slow Logins</A -></DT -><DT ->22.16. <A -HREF="#AEN3068" ->Client tuning</A -></DT -><DT ->22.17. <A -HREF="#AEN3100" ->My Results</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -></DL +>Also look at the other docs in the Samba package!</P ></DIV ></DIV ><DIV @@ -8026,15 +2770,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="INTEGRATE-MS-NETWORKS" ></A ->Chapter 10. Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</H1 +>Chapter 3. Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1362" +NAME="AEN365" ></A ->10.1. Agenda</H2 +>3.1. Agenda</H2 ><P >To identify the key functional mechanisms of MS Windows networking to enable the deployment of Samba as a means of extending and/or @@ -8099,9 +2843,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1384" +NAME="AEN387" ></A ->10.2. Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</H2 +>3.2. Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</H2 ><P >The key configuration files covered in this section are:</P ><P @@ -8141,9 +2885,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1400" +NAME="AEN403" ></A ->10.2.1. <TT +>3.2.1. <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/hosts</TT ></H3 @@ -8222,9 +2966,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1416" +NAME="AEN419" ></A ->10.2.2. <TT +>3.2.2. <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/resolv.conf</TT ></H3 @@ -8260,9 +3004,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1427" +NAME="AEN430" ></A ->10.2.3. <TT +>3.2.3. <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/host.conf</TT ></H3 @@ -8289,9 +3033,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1435" +NAME="AEN438" ></A ->10.2.4. <TT +>3.2.4. <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT ></H3 @@ -8330,7 +3074,7 @@ facilities and/or services are correctly configured.</P sent, TCP/IP networks are silent. All TCP/IP communications assumes a principal of speaking only when necessary.</P ><P ->Starting with version 2.2.0 samba has Linux support for extensions to +>Samba version 2.2.0 will add Linux support for extensions to the name service switch infrastructure so that linux clients will be able to obtain resolution of MS Windows NetBIOS names to IP Addresses. To gain this functionality Samba needs to be compiled @@ -8358,9 +3102,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1447" +NAME="AEN450" ></A ->10.3. Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</H2 +>3.3. Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</H2 ><P >MS Windows networking is predicated about the name each machine is given. This name is known variously (and inconsistently) as @@ -8443,9 +3187,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1459" +NAME="AEN462" ></A ->10.3.1. The NetBIOS Name Cache</H3 +>3.3.1. The NetBIOS Name Cache</H3 ><P >All MS Windows machines employ an in memory buffer in which is stored the NetBIOS names and IP addresses for all external @@ -8470,9 +3214,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1464" +NAME="AEN467" ></A ->10.3.2. The LMHOSTS file</H3 +>3.3.2. The LMHOSTS file</H3 ><P >This file is usually located in MS Windows NT 4.0 or 2000 in <TT @@ -8573,9 +3317,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1472" +NAME="AEN475" ></A ->10.3.3. HOSTS file</H3 +>3.3.3. HOSTS file</H3 ><P >This file is usually located in MS Windows NT 4.0 or 2000 in <TT @@ -8595,9 +3339,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1477" +NAME="AEN480" ></A ->10.3.4. DNS Lookup</H3 +>3.3.4. DNS Lookup</H3 ><P >This capability is configured in the TCP/IP setup area in the network configuration facility. If enabled an elaborate name resolution sequence @@ -8615,9 +3359,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1480" +NAME="AEN483" ></A ->10.3.5. WINS Lookup</H3 +>3.3.5. WINS Lookup</H3 ><P >A WINS (Windows Internet Name Server) service is the equivaent of the rfc1001/1002 specified NBNS (NetBIOS Name Server). A WINS server stores @@ -8658,9 +3402,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1492" +NAME="AEN495" ></A ->10.4. How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and +>3.4. How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and dependable browsing using Samba</H2 ><P >As stated above, MS Windows machines register their NetBIOS names @@ -8725,9 +3469,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1502" +NAME="AEN505" ></A ->10.5. MS Windows security options and how to configure +>3.5. MS Windows security options and how to configure Samba for seemless integration</H2 ><P >MS Windows clients may use encrypted passwords as part of a @@ -8862,9 +3606,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1530" +NAME="AEN533" ></A ->10.5.1. Use MS Windows NT as an authentication server</H3 +>3.5.1. Use MS Windows NT as an authentication server</H3 ><P >This method involves the additions of the following parameters in the smb.conf file:</P @@ -8898,9 +3642,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1538" +NAME="AEN541" ></A ->10.5.2. Make Samba a member of an MS Windows NT security domain</H3 +>3.5.2. Make Samba a member of an MS Windows NT security domain</H3 ><P >This method involves additon of the following paramters in the smb.conf file:</P ><P @@ -8961,9 +3705,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1555" +NAME="AEN558" ></A ->10.5.3. Configure Samba as an authentication server</H3 +>3.5.3. Configure Samba as an authentication server</H3 ><P >This mode of authentication demands that there be on the Unix/Linux system both a Unix style account as well as an @@ -8998,9 +3742,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1562" +NAME="AEN565" ></A ->10.5.3.1. Users</H4 +>3.5.3.1. Users</H4 ><P >A user account that may provide a home directory should be created. The following Linux system commands are typical of @@ -9021,9 +3765,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1567" +NAME="AEN570" ></A ->10.5.3.2. MS Windows NT Machine Accounts</H4 +>3.5.3.2. MS Windows NT Machine Accounts</H4 ><P >These are required only when Samba is used as a domain controller. Refer to the Samba-PDC-HOWTO for more details.</P @@ -9042,9 +3786,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1572" +NAME="AEN575" ></A ->10.6. Conclusions</H2 +>3.6. Conclusions</H2 ><P >Samba provides a flexible means to operate as...</P ><P @@ -9078,17 +3822,502 @@ NAME="AEN1572" CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A +NAME="PAM" +></A +>Chapter 4. Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally +managed authentication</H1 +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN596" +></A +>4.1. Samba and PAM</H2 +><P +>A number of Unix systems (eg: Sun Solaris), as well as the +xxxxBSD family and Linux, now utilize the Pluggable Authentication +Modules (PAM) facility to provide all authentication, +authorization and resource control services. Prior to the +introduction of PAM, a decision to use an alternative to +the system password database (<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +>) +would require the provision of alternatives for all programs that provide +security services. Such a choice would involve provision of +alternatives to such programs as: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>login</B +>, +<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passwd</B +>, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>chown</B +>, etc.</P +><P +>PAM provides a mechanism that disconnects these security programs +from the underlying authentication/authorization infrastructure. +PAM is configured either through one file <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/pam.conf</TT +> (Solaris), +or by editing individual files that are located in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/pam.d</TT +>.</P +><P +>The following is an example <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/pam.d/login</TT +> configuration file. +This example had all options been uncommented is probably not usable +as it stacks many conditions before allowing successful completion +of the login process. Essentially all conditions can be disabled +by commenting them out except the calls to <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_pwdb.so</TT +>.</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>#%PAM-1.0 +# The PAM configuration file for the `login' service +# +auth required pam_securetty.so +auth required pam_nologin.so +# auth required pam_dialup.so +# auth optional pam_mail.so +auth required pam_pwdb.so shadow md5 +# account requisite pam_time.so +account required pam_pwdb.so +session required pam_pwdb.so +# session optional pam_lastlog.so +# password required pam_cracklib.so retry=3 +password required pam_pwdb.so shadow md5</PRE +></P +><P +>PAM allows use of replacable modules. Those available on a +sample system include:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>$ /bin/ls /lib/security +pam_access.so pam_ftp.so pam_limits.so +pam_ncp_auth.so pam_rhosts_auth.so pam_stress.so +pam_cracklib.so pam_group.so pam_listfile.so +pam_nologin.so pam_rootok.so pam_tally.so +pam_deny.so pam_issue.so pam_mail.so +pam_permit.so pam_securetty.so pam_time.so +pam_dialup.so pam_lastlog.so pam_mkhomedir.so +pam_pwdb.so pam_shells.so pam_unix.so +pam_env.so pam_ldap.so pam_motd.so +pam_radius.so pam_smbpass.so pam_unix_acct.so +pam_wheel.so pam_unix_auth.so pam_unix_passwd.so +pam_userdb.so pam_warn.so pam_unix_session.so</PRE +></P +><P +>The following example for the login program replaces the use of +the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_pwdb.so</TT +> module which uses the system +password database (<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +>, +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/shadow</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/group</TT +>) with +the module <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_smbpass.so</TT +> which uses the Samba +database which contains the Microsoft MD4 encrypted password +hashes. This database is stored in either +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd</TT +>, +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/samba/smbpasswd</TT +>, or in +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/samba.d/smbpasswd</TT +>, depending on the +Samba implementation for your Unix/Linux system. The +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_smbpass.so</TT +> module is provided by +Samba version 2.2.1 or later. It can be compiled by specifying the +<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>--with-pam_smbpass</B +> options when running Samba's +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>configure</TT +> script. For more information +on the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_smbpass</TT +> module, see the documentation +in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>source/pam_smbpass</TT +> directory of the Samba +source distribution.</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>#%PAM-1.0 +# The PAM configuration file for the `login' service +# +auth required pam_smbpass.so nodelay +account required pam_smbpass.so nodelay +session required pam_smbpass.so nodelay +password required pam_smbpass.so nodelay</PRE +></P +><P +>The following is the PAM configuration file for a particular +Linux system. The default condition uses <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_pwdb.so</TT +>.</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>#%PAM-1.0 +# The PAM configuration file for the `samba' service +# +auth required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so nullok nodelay shadow audit +account required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so audit nodelay +session required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so nodelay +password required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so shadow md5</PRE +></P +><P +>In the following example the decision has been made to use the +smbpasswd database even for basic samba authentication. Such a +decision could also be made for the passwd program and would +thus allow the smbpasswd passwords to be changed using the passwd +program.</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>#%PAM-1.0 +# The PAM configuration file for the `samba' service +# +auth required /lib/security/pam_smbpass.so nodelay +account required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so audit nodelay +session required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so nodelay +password required /lib/security/pam_smbpass.so nodelay smbconf=/etc/samba.d/smb.conf</PRE +></P +><P +>Note: PAM allows stacking of authentication mechanisms. It is +also possible to pass information obtained within one PAM module through +to the next module in the PAM stack. Please refer to the documentation for +your particular system implementation for details regarding the specific +capabilities of PAM in this environment. Some Linux implmentations also +provide the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_stack.so</TT +> module that allows all +authentication to be configured in a single central file. The +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_stack.so</TT +> method has some very devoted followers +on the basis that it allows for easier administration. As with all issues in +life though, every decision makes trade-offs, so you may want examine the +PAM documentation for further helpful information.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN640" +></A +>4.2. Distributed Authentication</H2 +><P +>The astute administrator will realize from this that the +combination of <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_smbpass.so</TT +>, +<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>winbindd</B +>, and <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>rsync</B +> (see +<A +HREF="http://rsync.samba.org/" +TARGET="_top" +>http://rsync.samba.org/</A +>) +will allow the establishment of a centrally managed, distributed +user/password database that can also be used by all +PAM (eg: Linux) aware programs and applications. This arrangement +can have particularly potent advantages compared with the +use of Microsoft Active Directory Service (ADS) in so far as +reduction of wide area network authentication traffic.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN647" +></A +>4.3. PAM Configuration in smb.conf</H2 +><P +>There is an option in smb.conf called <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS" +TARGET="_top" +>obey pam restrictions</A +>. +The following is from the on-line help for this option in SWAT;</P +><P +>When Samba 2.2 is configure to enable PAM support (i.e. +<TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>--with-pam</TT +>), this parameter will +control whether or not Samba should obey PAM's account +and session management directives. The default behavior +is to use PAM for clear text authentication only and to +ignore any account or session management. Note that Samba always +ignores PAM for authentication in the case of +<A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +TARGET="_top" +>encrypt passwords = yes</A +>. +The reason is that PAM modules cannot support the challenge/response +authentication mechanism needed in the presence of SMB +password encryption. </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>obey pam restrictions = no</B +></P +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="CHAPTER" +><HR><H1 +><A +NAME="MSDFS" +></A +>Chapter 5. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</H1 +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN667" +></A +>5.1. Instructions</H2 +><P +>The Distributed File System (or Dfs) provides a means of + separating the logical view of files and directories that users + see from the actual physical locations of these resources on the + network. It allows for higher availability, smoother storage expansion, + load balancing etc. For more information about Dfs, refer to <A +HREF="http://www.microsoft.com/NTServer/nts/downloads/winfeatures/NTSDistrFile/AdminGuide.asp" +TARGET="_top" +> Microsoft documentation</A +>. </P +><P +>This document explains how to host a Dfs tree on a Unix + machine (for Dfs-aware clients to browse) using Samba.</P +><P +>To enable SMB-based DFS for Samba, configure it with the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>--with-msdfs</I +></TT +> option. Once built, a + Samba server can be made a Dfs server by setting the global + boolean <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#HOSTMSDFS" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> host msdfs</I +></TT +></A +> parameter in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf + </TT +> file. You designate a share as a Dfs root using the share + level boolean <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#MSDFSROOT" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> msdfs root</I +></TT +></A +> parameter. A Dfs root directory on + Samba hosts Dfs links in the form of symbolic links that point + to other servers. For example, a symbolic link + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>junction->msdfs:storage1\share1</TT +> in + the share directory acts as the Dfs junction. When Dfs-aware + clients attempt to access the junction link, they are redirected + to the storage location (in this case, \\storage1\share1).</P +><P +>Dfs trees on Samba work with all Dfs-aware clients ranging + from Windows 95 to 2000.</P +><P +>Here's an example of setting up a Dfs tree on a Samba + server.</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +># The smb.conf file: +[global] + netbios name = SAMBA + host msdfs = yes + +[dfs] + path = /export/dfsroot + msdfs root = yes + </PRE +></P +><P +>In the /export/dfsroot directory we set up our dfs links to + other servers on the network.</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>root# </TT +><TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +>cd /export/dfsroot</B +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>root# </TT +><TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +>chown root /export/dfsroot</B +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>root# </TT +><TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +>chmod 755 /export/dfsroot</B +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>root# </TT +><TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +>ln -s msdfs:storageA\\shareA linka</B +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>root# </TT +><TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +>ln -s msdfs:serverB\\share,serverC\\share linkb</B +></TT +></P +><P +>You should set up the permissions and ownership of + the directory acting as the Dfs root such that only designated + users can create, delete or modify the msdfs links. Also note + that symlink names should be all lowercase. This limitation exists + to have Samba avoid trying all the case combinations to get at + the link name. Finally set up the symbolic links to point to the + network shares you want, and start Samba.</P +><P +>Users on Dfs-aware clients can now browse the Dfs tree + on the Samba server at \\samba\dfs. Accessing + links linka or linkb (which appear as directories to the client) + takes users directly to the appropriate shares on the network.</P +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN702" +></A +>5.1.1. Notes</H3 +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>Windows clients need to be rebooted + if a previously mounted non-dfs share is made a dfs + root or vice versa. A better way is to introduce a + new share and make it the dfs root.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Currently there's a restriction that msdfs + symlink names should all be lowercase.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>For security purposes, the directory + acting as the root of the Dfs tree should have ownership + and permissions set so that only designated users can + modify the symbolic links in the directory.</P +></LI +></UL +></DIV +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="CHAPTER" +><HR><H1 +><A NAME="UNIX-PERMISSIONS" ></A ->Chapter 11. UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</H1 +>Chapter 6. UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1593" +NAME="AEN722" ></A ->11.1. Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT +>6.1. Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT security dialogs</H2 ><P >New in the Samba 2.0.4 release is the ability for Windows @@ -9125,9 +4354,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1602" +NAME="AEN731" ></A ->11.2. How to view file security on a Samba share</H2 +>6.2. How to view file security on a Samba share</H2 ><P >From an NT 4.0 client, single-click with the right mouse button on any file or directory in a Samba mounted @@ -9195,9 +4424,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1613" +NAME="AEN742" ></A ->11.3. Viewing file ownership</H2 +>6.3. Viewing file ownership</H2 ><P >Clicking on the <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -9289,9 +4518,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1633" +NAME="AEN762" ></A ->11.4. Viewing file or directory permissions</H2 +>6.4. Viewing file or directory permissions</H2 ><P >The third button is the <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -9351,9 +4580,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1648" +NAME="AEN777" ></A ->11.4.1. File Permissions</H3 +>6.4.1. File Permissions</H3 ><P >The standard UNIX user/group/world triple and the corresponding "read", "write", "execute" permissions @@ -9413,9 +4642,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1662" +NAME="AEN791" ></A ->11.4.2. Directory Permissions</H3 +>6.4.2. Directory Permissions</H3 ><P >Directories on an NT NTFS file system have two different sets of permissions. The first set of permissions @@ -9445,9 +4674,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1669" +NAME="AEN798" ></A ->11.5. Modifying file or directory permissions</H2 +>6.5. Modifying file or directory permissions</H2 ><P >Modifying file and directory permissions is as simple as changing the displayed permissions in the dialog box, and @@ -9543,9 +4772,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1691" +NAME="AEN820" ></A ->11.6. Interaction with the standard Samba create mask +>6.6. Interaction with the standard Samba create mask parameters</H2 ><P >Note that with Samba 2.0.5 there are four new parameters @@ -9820,9 +5049,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1755" +NAME="AEN884" ></A ->11.7. Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute +>6.7. Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute mapping</H2 ><P >Samba maps some of the DOS attribute bits (such as "read @@ -9867,502 +5096,17 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="PAM" -></A ->Chapter 12. Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally -managed authentication</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1776" -></A ->12.1. Samba and PAM</H2 -><P ->A number of Unix systems (eg: Sun Solaris), as well as the -xxxxBSD family and Linux, now utilize the Pluggable Authentication -Modules (PAM) facility to provide all authentication, -authorization and resource control services. Prior to the -introduction of PAM, a decision to use an alternative to -the system password database (<TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd</TT ->) -would require the provision of alternatives for all programs that provide -security services. Such a choice would involve provision of -alternatives to such programs as: <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->login</B ->, -<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->passwd</B ->, <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->chown</B ->, etc.</P -><P ->PAM provides a mechanism that disconnects these security programs -from the underlying authentication/authorization infrastructure. -PAM is configured either through one file <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/pam.conf</TT -> (Solaris), -or by editing individual files that are located in <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/pam.d</TT ->.</P -><P ->The following is an example <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/pam.d/login</TT -> configuration file. -This example had all options been uncommented is probably not usable -as it stacks many conditions before allowing successful completion -of the login process. Essentially all conditions can be disabled -by commenting them out except the calls to <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->pam_pwdb.so</TT ->.</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->#%PAM-1.0 -# The PAM configuration file for the `login' service -# -auth required pam_securetty.so -auth required pam_nologin.so -# auth required pam_dialup.so -# auth optional pam_mail.so -auth required pam_pwdb.so shadow md5 -# account requisite pam_time.so -account required pam_pwdb.so -session required pam_pwdb.so -# session optional pam_lastlog.so -# password required pam_cracklib.so retry=3 -password required pam_pwdb.so shadow md5</PRE -></P -><P ->PAM allows use of replacable modules. Those available on a -sample system include:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->$ /bin/ls /lib/security -pam_access.so pam_ftp.so pam_limits.so -pam_ncp_auth.so pam_rhosts_auth.so pam_stress.so -pam_cracklib.so pam_group.so pam_listfile.so -pam_nologin.so pam_rootok.so pam_tally.so -pam_deny.so pam_issue.so pam_mail.so -pam_permit.so pam_securetty.so pam_time.so -pam_dialup.so pam_lastlog.so pam_mkhomedir.so -pam_pwdb.so pam_shells.so pam_unix.so -pam_env.so pam_ldap.so pam_motd.so -pam_radius.so pam_smbpass.so pam_unix_acct.so -pam_wheel.so pam_unix_auth.so pam_unix_passwd.so -pam_userdb.so pam_warn.so pam_unix_session.so</PRE -></P -><P ->The following example for the login program replaces the use of -the <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->pam_pwdb.so</TT -> module which uses the system -password database (<TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd</TT ->, -<TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/shadow</TT ->, <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/group</TT ->) with -the module <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->pam_smbpass.so</TT -> which uses the Samba -database which contains the Microsoft MD4 encrypted password -hashes. This database is stored in either -<TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd</TT ->, -<TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/samba/smbpasswd</TT ->, or in -<TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/samba.d/smbpasswd</TT ->, depending on the -Samba implementation for your Unix/Linux system. The -<TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->pam_smbpass.so</TT -> module is provided by -Samba version 2.2.1 or later. It can be compiled by specifying the -<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->--with-pam_smbpass</B -> options when running Samba's -<TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->configure</TT -> script. For more information -on the <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->pam_smbpass</TT -> module, see the documentation -in the <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->source/pam_smbpass</TT -> directory of the Samba -source distribution.</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->#%PAM-1.0 -# The PAM configuration file for the `login' service -# -auth required pam_smbpass.so nodelay -account required pam_smbpass.so nodelay -session required pam_smbpass.so nodelay -password required pam_smbpass.so nodelay</PRE -></P -><P ->The following is the PAM configuration file for a particular -Linux system. The default condition uses <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->pam_pwdb.so</TT ->.</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->#%PAM-1.0 -# The PAM configuration file for the `samba' service -# -auth required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so nullok nodelay shadow audit -account required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so audit nodelay -session required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so nodelay -password required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so shadow md5</PRE -></P -><P ->In the following example the decision has been made to use the -smbpasswd database even for basic samba authentication. Such a -decision could also be made for the passwd program and would -thus allow the smbpasswd passwords to be changed using the passwd -program.</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->#%PAM-1.0 -# The PAM configuration file for the `samba' service -# -auth required /lib/security/pam_smbpass.so nodelay -account required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so audit nodelay -session required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so nodelay -password required /lib/security/pam_smbpass.so nodelay smbconf=/etc/samba.d/smb.conf</PRE -></P -><P ->Note: PAM allows stacking of authentication mechanisms. It is -also possible to pass information obtained within one PAM module through -to the next module in the PAM stack. Please refer to the documentation for -your particular system implementation for details regarding the specific -capabilities of PAM in this environment. Some Linux implmentations also -provide the <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->pam_stack.so</TT -> module that allows all -authentication to be configured in a single central file. The -<TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->pam_stack.so</TT -> method has some very devoted followers -on the basis that it allows for easier administration. As with all issues in -life though, every decision makes trade-offs, so you may want examine the -PAM documentation for further helpful information.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1820" -></A ->12.2. Distributed Authentication</H2 -><P ->The astute administrator will realize from this that the -combination of <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->pam_smbpass.so</TT ->, -<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->winbindd</B ->, and <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->rsync</B -> (see -<A -HREF="http://rsync.samba.org/" -TARGET="_top" ->http://rsync.samba.org/</A ->) -will allow the establishment of a centrally managed, distributed -user/password database that can also be used by all -PAM (eg: Linux) aware programs and applications. This arrangement -can have particularly potent advantages compared with the -use of Microsoft Active Directory Service (ADS) in so far as -reduction of wide area network authentication traffic.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1827" -></A ->12.3. PAM Configuration in smb.conf</H2 -><P ->There is an option in smb.conf called <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS" -TARGET="_top" ->obey pam restrictions</A ->. -The following is from the on-line help for this option in SWAT;</P -><P ->When Samba 2.2 is configure to enable PAM support (i.e. -<TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->--with-pam</TT ->), this parameter will -control whether or not Samba should obey PAM's account -and session management directives. The default behavior -is to use PAM for clear text authentication only and to -ignore any account or session management. Note that Samba always -ignores PAM for authentication in the case of -<A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" -TARGET="_top" ->encrypt passwords = yes</A ->. -The reason is that PAM modules cannot support the challenge/response -authentication mechanism needed in the presence of SMB -password encryption. </P -><P ->Default: <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->obey pam restrictions = no</B -></P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><HR><H1 -><A -NAME="MSDFS" -></A ->Chapter 13. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1847" -></A ->13.1. Instructions</H2 -><P ->The Distributed File System (or Dfs) provides a means of - separating the logical view of files and directories that users - see from the actual physical locations of these resources on the - network. It allows for higher availability, smoother storage expansion, - load balancing etc. For more information about Dfs, refer to <A -HREF="http://www.microsoft.com/NTServer/nts/downloads/winfeatures/NTSDistrFile/AdminGuide.asp" -TARGET="_top" -> Microsoft documentation</A ->. </P -><P ->This document explains how to host a Dfs tree on a Unix - machine (for Dfs-aware clients to browse) using Samba.</P -><P ->To enable SMB-based DFS for Samba, configure it with the - <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->--with-msdfs</I -></TT -> option. Once built, a - Samba server can be made a Dfs server by setting the global - boolean <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#HOSTMSDFS" -TARGET="_top" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I -> host msdfs</I -></TT -></A -> parameter in the <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf - </TT -> file. You designate a share as a Dfs root using the share - level boolean <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#MSDFSROOT" -TARGET="_top" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I -> msdfs root</I -></TT -></A -> parameter. A Dfs root directory on - Samba hosts Dfs links in the form of symbolic links that point - to other servers. For example, a symbolic link - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->junction->msdfs:storage1\share1</TT -> in - the share directory acts as the Dfs junction. When Dfs-aware - clients attempt to access the junction link, they are redirected - to the storage location (in this case, \\storage1\share1).</P -><P ->Dfs trees on Samba work with all Dfs-aware clients ranging - from Windows 95 to 2000.</P -><P ->Here's an example of setting up a Dfs tree on a Samba - server.</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -># The smb.conf file: -[global] - netbios name = SAMBA - host msdfs = yes - -[dfs] - path = /export/dfsroot - msdfs root = yes - </PRE -></P -><P ->In the /export/dfsroot directory we set up our dfs links to - other servers on the network.</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->root# </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B ->cd /export/dfsroot</B -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->root# </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B ->chown root /export/dfsroot</B -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->root# </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B ->chmod 755 /export/dfsroot</B -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->root# </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B ->ln -s msdfs:storageA\\shareA linka</B -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->root# </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B ->ln -s msdfs:serverB\\share,serverC\\share linkb</B -></TT -></P -><P ->You should set up the permissions and ownership of - the directory acting as the Dfs root such that only designated - users can create, delete or modify the msdfs links. Also note - that symlink names should be all lowercase. This limitation exists - to have Samba avoid trying all the case combinations to get at - the link name. Finally set up the symbolic links to point to the - network shares you want, and start Samba.</P -><P ->Users on Dfs-aware clients can now browse the Dfs tree - on the Samba server at \\samba\dfs. Accessing - links linka or linkb (which appear as directories to the client) - takes users directly to the appropriate shares on the network.</P -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN1882" -></A ->13.1.1. Notes</H3 -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P ->Windows clients need to be rebooted - if a previously mounted non-dfs share is made a dfs - root or vice versa. A better way is to introduce a - new share and make it the dfs root.</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->Currently there's a restriction that msdfs - symlink names should all be lowercase.</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->For security purposes, the directory - acting as the root of the Dfs tree should have ownership - and permissions set so that only designated users can - modify the symbolic links in the directory.</P -></LI -></UL -></DIV -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><HR><H1 -><A NAME="PRINTING" ></A ->Chapter 14. Printing Support</H1 +>Chapter 7. Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1908" +NAME="AEN905" ></A ->14.1. Introduction</H2 +>7.1. Introduction</H2 ><P >Beginning with the 2.2.0 release, Samba supports the native Windows NT printing mechanisms implemented via @@ -10419,7 +5163,12 @@ TARGET="_top" >There has been some initial confusion about what all this means and whether or not it is a requirement for printer drivers to be installed on a Samba host in order to support printing from Windows -clients. As a side note, Samba does not use these drivers in any way to process +clients. A bug existed in Samba 2.2.0 which made Windows NT/2000 clients +require that the Samba server possess a valid driver for the printer. +This is fixed in Samba 2.2.1 and once again, Windows NT/2000 clients +can use the local APW for installing drivers to be used with a Samba +served printer. This is the same behavior exhibited by Windows 9x clients. +As a side note, Samba does not use these drivers in any way to process spooled files. They are utilized entirely by the clients.</P ><P >The following MS KB article, may be of some help if you are dealing with @@ -10443,9 +5192,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1930" +NAME="AEN927" ></A ->14.2. Configuration</H2 +>7.2. Configuration</H2 ><DIV CLASS="WARNING" ><P @@ -10500,6 +5249,20 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" > provided a means of defining the printer driver name to be sent to the client.</P +><P +>These parameters, including <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer driver +file</I +></TT +> parameter, are being deprecated and should not +be used in new installations. For more information on this change, +you should refer to the <A +HREF="#MIGRATION" +>Migration section</A +> +of this document.</P ></TD ></TR ></TABLE @@ -10509,9 +5272,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1938" +NAME="AEN938" ></A ->14.2.1. Creating [print$]</H3 +>7.2.1. Creating [print$]</H3 ><P >In order to support the uploading of printer driver files, you must first configure a file share named [print$]. @@ -10732,14 +5495,22 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1973" +NAME="AEN973" ></A ->14.2.2. Setting Drivers for Existing Printers</H3 +>7.2.2. Setting Drivers for Existing Printers</H3 ><P >The initial listing of printers in the Samba host's Printers folder will have no real printer driver assigned -to them. This defaults to a NULL string to allow the use -of the local Add Printer Wizard on NT/2000 clients. +to them. By default, in Samba 2.2.0 this driver name was set to +<SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NO PRINTER DRIVER AVAILABLE FOR THIS PRINTER</I +></SPAN +>. +Later versions changed this to a NULL string to allow the use +tof the local Add Printer Wizard on NT/2000 clients. Attempting to view the printer properties for a printer which has this default driver assigned will result in the error message:</P @@ -10804,9 +5575,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1989" +NAME="AEN990" ></A ->14.2.3. Support a large number of printers</H3 +>7.2.3. Support a large number of printers</H3 ><P >One issue that has arisen during the development phase of Samba 2.2 is the need to support driver downloads for @@ -10870,9 +5641,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2000" +NAME="AEN1001" ></A ->14.2.4. Adding New Printers via the Windows NT APW</H3 +>7.2.4. Adding New Printers via the Windows NT APW</H3 ><P >By default, Samba offers all printer shares defined in <TT CLASS="FILENAME" @@ -11039,9 +5810,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2030" +NAME="AEN1031" ></A ->14.2.5. Samba and Printer Ports</H3 +>7.2.5. Samba and Printer Ports</H3 ><P >Windows NT/2000 print servers associate a port with each printer. These normally take the form of LPT1:, COM1:, FILE:, etc... Samba must also support the @@ -11076,9 +5847,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2038" +NAME="AEN1039" ></A ->14.3. The Imprints Toolset</H2 +>7.3. The Imprints Toolset</H2 ><P >The Imprints tool set provides a UNIX equivalent of the Windows NT Add Printer Wizard. For complete information, please @@ -11094,9 +5865,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2042" +NAME="AEN1043" ></A ->14.3.1. What is Imprints?</H3 +>7.3.1. What is Imprints?</H3 ><P >Imprints is a collection of tools for supporting the goals of</P @@ -11126,9 +5897,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2052" +NAME="AEN1053" ></A ->14.3.2. Creating Printer Driver Packages</H3 +>7.3.2. Creating Printer Driver Packages</H3 ><P >The process of creating printer driver packages is beyond the scope of this document (refer to Imprints.txt also included @@ -11142,9 +5913,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2055" +NAME="AEN1056" ></A ->14.3.3. The Imprints server</H3 +>7.3.3. The Imprints server</H3 ><P >The Imprints server is really a database server that may be queried via standard HTTP mechanisms. Each printer @@ -11166,9 +5937,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2059" +NAME="AEN1060" ></A ->14.3.4. The Installation Client</H3 +>7.3.4. The Installation Client</H3 ><P >More information regarding the Imprints installation client is available in the <TT @@ -11260,17 +6031,185 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2081" +NAME="AEN1082" +></A +>7.4. <A +NAME="MIGRATION" ></A ->14.4. Diagnosis</H2 +>Migration to from Samba 2.0.x to 2.2.x</H2 +><P +>Given that printer driver management has changed (we hope improved) in +2.2 over prior releases, migration from an existing setup to 2.2 can +follow several paths. Here are the possible scenarios for +migration:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>If you do not desire the new Windows NT + print driver support, nothing needs to be done. + All existing parameters work the same.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If you want to take advantage of NT printer + driver support but do not want to migrate the + 9x drivers to the new setup, the leave the existing + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>printers.def</TT +> file. When smbd attempts + to locate a + 9x driver for the printer in the TDB and fails it + will drop down to using the printers.def (and all + associated parameters). The <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>make_printerdef</B +> + tool will also remain for backwards compatibility but will + be removed in the next major release.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If you install a Windows 9x driver for a printer + on your Samba host (in the printing TDB), this information will + take precedence and the three old printing parameters + will be ignored (including print driver location).</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>If you want to migrate an existing <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>printers.def</TT +> + file into the new setup, the current only solution is to use the Windows + NT APW to install the NT drivers and the 9x drivers. This can be scripted + using <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbclient</B +> and <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>rpcclient</B +>. See the + Imprints installation client at <A +HREF="http://imprints.sourceforge.net/" +TARGET="_top" +>http://imprints.sourceforge.net/</A +> + for an example. + </P +></LI +></UL ><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" +CLASS="WARNING" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +WIDTH="100%" +BORDER="0" +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="25" +ALIGN="CENTER" +VALIGN="TOP" +><IMG +SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" +HSPACE="5" +ALT="Warning"></TD +><TH +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>Achtung!</B +></TH +></TR +><TR +><TD +> </TD +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="TOP" +><P +>The following <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> parameters are considered to +be deprecated and will be removed soon. Do not use them in new +installations</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer driver file (G)</I +></TT +> + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer driver (S)</I +></TT +> + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer driver location (S)</I +></TT +> + </P +></LI +></UL +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +><P +>The have been two new parameters add in Samba 2.2.2 to for +better support of Samba 2.0.x backwards capability (<TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>disable +spoolss</I +></TT +>) and for using local printers drivers on Windows +NT/2000 clients (<TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>use client driver</I +></TT +>). Both of +these options are described in the smb.coinf(5) man page and are +disabled by default.</P +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="CHAPTER" +><HR><H1 +><A +NAME="PRINTINGDEBUG" +></A +>Chapter 8. Debugging Printing Problems</H1 +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2083" +NAME="AEN1128" ></A ->14.4.1. Introduction</H3 +>8.1. Introduction</H2 ><P >This is a short description of how to debug printing problems with Samba. This describes how to debug problems with printing from a SMB @@ -11339,13 +6278,13 @@ printer. The %j gets replaced with the "job number" which comes from the lpq output.</P ></DIV ><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2099" +NAME="AEN1144" ></A ->14.4.2. Debugging printer problems</H3 +>8.2. Debugging printer problems</H2 ><P >One way to debug printing problems is to start by replacing these command with shell scripts that record the arguments and the contents @@ -11396,13 +6335,13 @@ have problems with their /etc/printcap file or permissions on various print queues.</P ></DIV ><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2108" +NAME="AEN1153" ></A ->14.4.3. What printers do I have?</H3 +>8.3. What printers do I have?</H2 ><P >You can use the 'testprns' program to check to see if the printer name you are using is recognized by Samba. For example, you can @@ -11425,13 +6364,13 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ></P ></DIV ><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2116" +NAME="AEN1161" ></A ->14.4.4. Setting up printcap and print servers</H3 +>8.4. Setting up printcap and print servers</H2 ><P >You may need to set up some printcaps for your Samba system to use. It is strongly recommended that you use the facilities provided by @@ -11509,13 +6448,13 @@ it reread the printcap information.</P ></OL ></DIV ><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2144" +NAME="AEN1189" ></A ->14.4.5. Job sent, no output</H3 +>8.5. Job sent, no output</H2 ><P >This is the most frustrating part of printing. You may have sent the job, verified that the job was forwarded, set up a wrapper around @@ -11554,13 +6493,13 @@ your system administrator has installed a 'print filter' that will convert the file to a format appropriate for your printer.</P ></DIV ><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2155" +NAME="AEN1200" ></A ->14.4.6. Job sent, strange output</H3 +>8.6. Job sent, strange output</H2 ><P >Once you have the job printing, you can then start worrying about making it print nicely.</P @@ -11600,13 +6539,13 @@ automatically add a ^D to the end of the job if it is detected as PostScript. The multiple ^D may cause an additional page of output.</P ></DIV ><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2167" +NAME="AEN1212" ></A ->14.4.7. Raw PostScript printed</H3 +>8.7. Raw PostScript printed</H2 ><P >This is a problem that is usually caused by either the print spooling system putting information at the start of the print job that makes @@ -11615,13 +6554,13 @@ does not support PostScript. You may need to enable 'Automatic Format Detection' on your printer.</P ></DIV ><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2170" +NAME="AEN1215" ></A ->14.4.8. Advanced Printing</H3 +>8.8. Advanced Printing</H2 ><P >Note that you can do some pretty magic things by using your imagination with the "print command" option and some shell scripts. @@ -11631,34 +6570,33 @@ the type of output and its size and send it to an appropriate printer.</P ></DIV ><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2173" +NAME="AEN1218" ></A ->14.4.9. Real debugging</H3 +>8.9. Real debugging</H2 ><P >If the above debug tips don't help, then maybe you need to bring in the bug guns, system tracing. See Tracing.txt in this directory.</P ></DIV ></DIV -></DIV ><DIV CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A NAME="SECURITYLEVELS" ></A ->Chapter 15. Security levels</H1 +>Chapter 9. Security levels</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2186" +NAME="AEN1231" ></A ->15.1. Introduction</H2 +>9.1. Introduction</H2 ><P >Samba supports the following options to the global smb.conf parameter</P ><P @@ -11674,7 +6612,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >security</I ></TT ></A -> = [share|user(default)|server|domain|ads]</PRE +> = [share|user(default)|domain|ads]</PRE ></P ><P >Please refer to the smb.conf man page for usage information and to the document @@ -11702,9 +6640,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2197" +NAME="AEN1242" ></A ->15.2. More complete description of security levels</H2 +>9.2. More complete description of security levels</H2 ><P >A SMB server tells the client at startup what "security level" it is running. There are two options "share level" and "user level". Which @@ -11796,17 +6734,371 @@ schemes by which the two could be kept in sync.</P CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A +NAME="DOMAIN-SECURITY" +></A +>Chapter 10. security = domain in Samba 2.x</H1 +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1275" +></A +>10.1. Joining an NT Domain with Samba 2.2</H2 +><P +>Assume you have a Samba 2.x server with a NetBIOS name of + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SERV1</TT +> and are joining an NT domain called + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>DOM</TT +>, which has a PDC with a NetBIOS name + of <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>DOMPDC</TT +> and two backup domain controllers + with NetBIOS names <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>DOMBDC1</TT +> and <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>DOMBDC2 + </TT +>.</P +><P +>In order to join the domain, first stop all Samba daemons + and run the command:</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>root# </TT +><TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +>smbpasswd -j DOM -r DOMPDC + -U<TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>Administrator%password</I +></TT +></B +></TT +></P +><P +>as we are joining the domain DOM and the PDC for that domain + (the only machine that has write access to the domain SAM database) + is DOMPDC. The <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>Administrator%password</I +></TT +> is + the login name and password for an account which has the necessary + privilege to add machines to the domain. If this is successful + you will see the message:</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" +>smbpasswd: Joined domain DOM.</TT +> + </P +><P +>in your terminal window. See the <A +HREF="smbpasswd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> smbpasswd(8)</A +> man page for more details.</P +><P +>There is existing development code to join a domain + without having to create the machine trust account on the PDC + beforehand. This code will hopefully be available soon + in release branches as well.</P +><P +>This command goes through the machine account password + change protocol, then writes the new (random) machine account + password for this Samba server into a file in the same directory + in which an smbpasswd file would be stored - normally :</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/usr/local/samba/private</TT +></P +><P +>In Samba 2.0.x, the filename looks like this:</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +><TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +><NT DOMAIN NAME></I +></TT +>.<TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +><Samba + Server Name></I +></TT +>.mac</TT +></P +><P +>The <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>.mac</TT +> suffix stands for machine account + password file. So in our example above, the file would be called:</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>DOM.SERV1.mac</TT +></P +><P +>In Samba 2.2, this file has been replaced with a TDB + (Trivial Database) file named <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>secrets.tdb</TT +>. + </P +><P +>This file is created and owned by root and is not + readable by any other user. It is the key to the domain-level + security for your system, and should be treated as carefully + as a shadow password file.</P +><P +>Now, before restarting the Samba daemons you must + edit your <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf(5)</TT +> + </A +> file to tell Samba it should now use domain security.</P +><P +>Change (or add) your <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" +TARGET="_top" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security =</I +></TT +></A +> line in the [global] section + of your smb.conf to read:</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = domain</B +></P +><P +>Next change the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> workgroup =</I +></TT +></A +> line in the [global] section to read: </P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>workgroup = DOM</B +></P +><P +>as this is the name of the domain we are joining. </P +><P +>You must also have the parameter <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +TARGET="_top" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>encrypt passwords</I +></TT +></A +> set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>yes + </TT +> in order for your users to authenticate to the NT PDC.</P +><P +>Finally, add (or modify) a <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER" +TARGET="_top" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server =</I +></TT +></A +> line in the [global] + section to read: </P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>password server = DOMPDC DOMBDC1 DOMBDC2</B +></P +><P +>These are the primary and backup domain controllers Samba + will attempt to contact in order to authenticate users. Samba will + try to contact each of these servers in order, so you may want to + rearrange this list in order to spread out the authentication load + among domain controllers.</P +><P +>Alternatively, if you want smbd to automatically determine + the list of Domain controllers to use for authentication, you may + set this line to be :</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>password server = *</B +></P +><P +>This method, which was introduced in Samba 2.0.6, + allows Samba to use exactly the same mechanism that NT does. This + method either broadcasts or uses a WINS database in order to + find domain controllers to authenticate against.</P +><P +>Finally, restart your Samba daemons and get ready for + clients to begin using domain security!</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1339" +></A +>10.2. Samba and Windows 2000 Domains</H2 +><P +>Many people have asked regarding the state of Samba's ability to participate in +a Windows 2000 Domain. Samba 2.2 is able to act as a member server of a Windows +2000 domain operating in mixed or native mode.</P +><P +>There is much confusion between the circumstances that require a "mixed" mode +Win2k DC and a when this host can be switched to "native" mode. A "mixed" mode +Win2k domain controller is only needed if Windows NT BDCs must exist in the same +domain. By default, a Win2k DC in "native" mode will still support +NetBIOS and NTLMv1 for authentication of legacy clients such as Windows 9x and +NT 4.0. Samba has the same requirements as a Windows NT 4.0 member server.</P +><P +>The steps for adding a Samba 2.2 host to a Win2k domain are the same as those +for adding a Samba server to a Windows NT 4.0 domain. The only exception is that +the "Server Manager" from NT 4 has been replaced by the "Active Directory Users and +Computers" MMC (Microsoft Management Console) plugin.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1344" +></A +>10.3. Why is this better than security = server?</H2 +><P +>Currently, domain security in Samba doesn't free you from + having to create local Unix users to represent the users attaching + to your server. This means that if domain user <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>DOM\fred + </TT +> attaches to your domain security Samba server, there needs + to be a local Unix user fred to represent that user in the Unix + filesystem. This is very similar to the older Samba security mode + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITYEQUALSSERVER" +TARGET="_top" +>security = server</A +>, + where Samba would pass through the authentication request to a Windows + NT server in the same way as a Windows 95 or Windows 98 server would. + </P +><P +>Please refer to the <A +HREF="winbind.html" +TARGET="_top" +>Winbind + paper</A +> for information on a system to automatically + assign UNIX uids and gids to Windows NT Domain users and groups. + This code is available in development branches only at the moment, + but will be moved to release branches soon.</P +><P +>The advantage to domain-level security is that the + authentication in domain-level security is passed down the authenticated + RPC channel in exactly the same way that an NT server would do it. This + means Samba servers now participate in domain trust relationships in + exactly the same way NT servers do (i.e., you can add Samba servers into + a resource domain and have the authentication passed on from a resource + domain PDC to an account domain PDC.</P +><P +>In addition, with <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = server</B +> every Samba + daemon on a server has to keep a connection open to the + authenticating server for as long as that daemon lasts. This can drain + the connection resources on a Microsoft NT server and cause it to run + out of available connections. With <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>security = domain</B +>, + however, the Samba daemons connect to the PDC/BDC only for as long + as is necessary to authenticate the user, and then drop the connection, + thus conserving PDC connection resources.</P +><P +>And finally, acting in the same manner as an NT server + authenticating to a PDC means that as part of the authentication + reply, the Samba server gets the user identification information such + as the user SID, the list of NT groups the user belongs to, etc. All + this information will allow Samba to be extended in the future into + a mode the developers currently call appliance mode. In this mode, + no local Unix users will be necessary, and Samba will generate Unix + uids and gids from the information passed back from the PDC when a + user is authenticated, making a Samba server truly plug and play + in an NT domain environment. Watch for this code soon.</P +><P +><SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOTE:</I +></SPAN +> Much of the text of this document + was first published in the Web magazine <A +HREF="http://www.linuxworld.com" +TARGET="_top" +> + LinuxWorld</A +> as the article <A +HREF="http://www.linuxworld.com/linuxworld/lw-1998-10/lw-10-samba.html" +TARGET="_top" +>Doing + the NIS/NT Samba</A +>.</P +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="CHAPTER" +><HR><H1 +><A NAME="WINBIND" ></A ->Chapter 16. Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</H1 +>Chapter 11. Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2249" +NAME="AEN1397" ></A ->16.1. Abstract</H2 +>11.1. Abstract</H2 ><P >Integration of UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT through a unified logon has been considered a "holy grail" in heterogeneous @@ -11831,9 +7123,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2253" +NAME="AEN1401" ></A ->16.2. Introduction</H2 +>11.2. Introduction</H2 ><P >It is well known that UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT have different models for representing user and group information and @@ -11885,9 +7177,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2266" +NAME="AEN1414" ></A ->16.3. What Winbind Provides</H2 +>11.3. What Winbind Provides</H2 ><P >Winbind unifies UNIX and Windows NT account management by allowing a UNIX box to become a full member of a NT domain. Once @@ -11927,9 +7219,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2273" +NAME="AEN1421" ></A ->16.3.1. Target Uses</H3 +>11.3.1. Target Uses</H3 ><P >Winbind is targeted at organizations that have an existing NT based domain infrastructure into which they wish @@ -11951,9 +7243,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2277" +NAME="AEN1425" ></A ->16.4. How Winbind Works</H2 +>11.4. How Winbind Works</H2 ><P >The winbind system is designed around a client/server architecture. A long running <B @@ -11971,9 +7263,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2282" +NAME="AEN1430" ></A ->16.4.1. Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</H3 +>11.4.1. Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</H3 ><P >Over the last two years, efforts have been underway by various Samba Team members to decode various aspects of @@ -11997,9 +7289,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2286" +NAME="AEN1434" ></A ->16.4.2. Name Service Switch</H3 +>11.4.2. Name Service Switch</H3 ><P >The Name Service Switch, or NSS, is a feature that is present in many UNIX operating systems. It allows system @@ -12077,9 +7369,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2302" +NAME="AEN1450" ></A ->16.4.3. Pluggable Authentication Modules</H3 +>11.4.3. Pluggable Authentication Modules</H3 ><P >Pluggable Authentication Modules, also known as PAM, is a system for abstracting authentication and authorization @@ -12126,9 +7418,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2310" +NAME="AEN1458" ></A ->16.4.4. User and Group ID Allocation</H3 +>11.4.4. User and Group ID Allocation</H3 ><P >When a user or group is created under Windows NT is it allocated a numerical relative identifier (RID). This is @@ -12152,9 +7444,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2314" +NAME="AEN1462" ></A ->16.4.5. Result Caching</H3 +>11.4.5. Result Caching</H3 ><P >An active system can generate a lot of user and group name lookups. To reduce the network cost of these lookups winbind @@ -12175,9 +7467,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2317" +NAME="AEN1465" ></A ->16.5. Installation and Configuration</H2 +>11.5. Installation and Configuration</H2 ><P >Many thanks to John Trostel <A HREF="mailto:jtrostel@snapserver.com" @@ -12202,9 +7494,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2324" +NAME="AEN1472" ></A ->16.5.1. Introduction</H3 +>11.5.1. Introduction</H3 ><P >This HOWTO describes the procedures used to get winbind up and running on my RedHat 7.1 system. Winbind is capable of providing access @@ -12261,9 +7553,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2337" +NAME="AEN1485" ></A ->16.5.2. Requirements</H3 +>11.5.2. Requirements</H3 ><P >If you have a samba configuration file that you are currently using... <SPAN @@ -12301,7 +7593,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" > back to the original state they were in if you get frustrated with the way things are going. ;-)</P ><P ->The latest version of SAMBA (version 3.0 as of this writing), now +>The latest version of SAMBA (version 2.2.2 as of this writing), now includes a functioning winbindd daemon. Please refer to the <A HREF="http://samba.org/" @@ -12331,9 +7623,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2351" +NAME="AEN1499" ></A ->16.5.3. Testing Things Out</H3 +>11.5.3. Testing Things Out</H3 ><P >Before starting, it is probably best to kill off all the SAMBA related daemons running on your server. Kill off all <B @@ -12376,9 +7668,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2362" +NAME="AEN1510" ></A ->16.5.3.1. Configure and compile SAMBA</H4 +>11.5.3.1. Configure and compile SAMBA</H4 ><P >The configuration and compilation of SAMBA is pretty straightforward. The first three steps may not be necessary depending upon @@ -12442,9 +7734,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2381" +NAME="AEN1529" ></A ->16.5.3.2. Configure <TT +>11.5.3.2. Configure <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >nsswitch.conf</TT > and the @@ -12547,9 +7839,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2414" +NAME="AEN1562" ></A ->16.5.3.3. Configure smb.conf</H4 +>11.5.3.3. Configure smb.conf</H4 ><P >Several parameters are needed in the smb.conf file to control the behavior of <B @@ -12622,9 +7914,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2430" +NAME="AEN1578" ></A ->16.5.3.4. Join the SAMBA server to the PDC domain</H4 +>11.5.3.4. Join the SAMBA server to the PDC domain</H4 ><P >Enter the following command to make the SAMBA server join the PDC domain, where <TT @@ -12646,7 +7938,7 @@ CLASS="PROMPT" >root#</TT > <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->/usr/local/samba/bin/net rpc join -S PDC -U Administrator</B +>/usr/local/samba/bin/net rpc join -s PDC -U Administrator</B ></P ><P >The proper response to the command should be: "Joined the domain @@ -12668,9 +7960,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2441" +NAME="AEN1589" ></A ->16.5.3.5. Start up the winbindd daemon and test it!</H4 +>11.5.3.5. Start up the winbindd daemon and test it!</H4 ><P >Eventually, you will want to modify your smb startup script to automatically invoke the winbindd daemon when the other parts of @@ -12791,17 +8083,17 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2477" +NAME="AEN1625" ></A ->16.5.3.6. Fix the init.d startup scripts</H4 +>11.5.3.6. Fix the init.d startup scripts</H4 ><DIV CLASS="SECT4" ><H5 CLASS="SECT4" ><A -NAME="AEN2479" +NAME="AEN1627" ></A ->16.5.3.6.1. Linux</H5 +>11.5.3.6.1. Linux</H5 ><P >The <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -12895,9 +8187,9 @@ CLASS="SECT4" ><HR><H5 CLASS="SECT4" ><A -NAME="AEN2496" +NAME="AEN1644" ></A ->16.5.3.6.2. Solaris</H5 +>11.5.3.6.2. Solaris</H5 ><P >On solaris, you need to modify the <TT @@ -12966,9 +8258,9 @@ CLASS="SECT4" ><HR><H5 CLASS="SECT4" ><A -NAME="AEN2503" +NAME="AEN1651" ></A ->16.5.3.6.3. Restarting</H5 +>11.5.3.6.3. Restarting</H5 ><P >If you restart the <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -12990,9 +8282,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><HR><H4 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2509" +NAME="AEN1657" ></A ->16.5.3.7. Configure Winbind and PAM</H4 +>11.5.3.7. Configure Winbind and PAM</H4 ><P >If you have made it this far, you know that winbindd and samba are working together. If you want to use winbind to provide authentication for other @@ -13048,9 +8340,9 @@ CLASS="SECT4" ><HR><H5 CLASS="SECT4" ><A -NAME="AEN2526" +NAME="AEN1674" ></A ->16.5.3.7.1. Linux/FreeBSD-specific PAM configuration</H5 +>11.5.3.7.1. Linux/FreeBSD-specific PAM configuration</H5 ><P >The <TT CLASS="FILENAME" @@ -13177,9 +8469,9 @@ CLASS="SECT4" ><HR><H5 CLASS="SECT4" ><A -NAME="AEN2559" +NAME="AEN1707" ></A ->16.5.3.7.2. Solaris-specific configuration</H5 +>11.5.3.7.2. Solaris-specific configuration</H5 ><P >The /etc/pam.conf needs to be changed. I changed this file so that my Domain users can logon both locally as well as telnet.The following are the changes @@ -13264,9 +8556,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2566" +NAME="AEN1714" ></A ->16.6. Limitations</H2 +>11.6. Limitations</H2 ><P >Winbind has a number of limitations in its current released version that we hope to overcome in future @@ -13305,9 +8597,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2576" +NAME="AEN1724" ></A ->16.7. Conclusion</H2 +>11.7. Conclusion</H2 ><P >The winbind system, through the use of the Name Service Switch, Pluggable Authentication Modules, and appropriate @@ -13321,205 +8613,2724 @@ NAME="AEN2576" CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="PDB-MYSQL" +NAME="SAMBA-PDC" ></A ->Chapter 17. Passdb MySQL plugin</H1 +>Chapter 12. How to Configure Samba 2.2 as a Primary Domain Controller</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2590" +NAME="AEN1744" ></A ->17.1. Building</H2 +>12.1. Prerequisite Reading</H2 ><P ->To build the plugin, run <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->make bin/pdb_mysql.so</B +>Before you continue reading in this chapter, please make sure +that you are comfortable with configuring basic files services +in smb.conf and how to enable and administer password +encryption in Samba. Theses two topics are covered in the +<A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf(5)</TT +></A +> +manpage and the <A +HREF="ENCRYPTION.html" +TARGET="_top" +>Encryption chapter</A +> +of this HOWTO Collection.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1750" +></A +>12.2. Background</H2 +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="NOTE" +WIDTH="100%" +BORDER="0" +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="25" +ALIGN="CENTER" +VALIGN="TOP" +><IMG +SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" +HSPACE="5" +ALT="Note"></TD +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="TOP" +><P +><SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Author's Note:</I +></SPAN +> This document is a combination +of David Bannon's "Samba 2.2 PDC HOWTO" and "Samba NT Domain FAQ". +Both documents are superseded by this one.</P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +><P +>Versions of Samba prior to release 2.2 had marginal capabilities to act +as a Windows NT 4.0 Primary Domain Controller + +(PDC). With Samba 2.2.0, we are proud to announce official support for +Windows NT 4.0-style domain logons from Windows NT 4.0 and Windows +2000 clients. This article outlines the steps +necessary for configuring Samba as a PDC. It is necessary to have a +working Samba server prior to implementing the PDC functionality. If +you have not followed the steps outlined in <A +HREF="UNIX_INSTALL.html" +TARGET="_top" +> UNIX_INSTALL.html</A +>, please make sure +that your server is configured correctly before proceeding. Another +good resource in the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smb.conf(5) man +page</A +>. The following functionality should work in 2.2:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +> domain logons for Windows NT 4.0/2000 clients. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> placing a Windows 9x client in user level security + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> retrieving a list of users and groups from a Samba PDC to + Windows 9x/NT/2000 clients + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> roving (roaming) user profiles + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> Windows NT 4.0-style system policies + </P +></LI +></UL +><P +>The following pieces of functionality are not included in the 2.2 release:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +> Windows NT 4 domain trusts + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> SAM replication with Windows NT 4.0 Domain Controllers + (i.e. a Samba PDC and a Windows NT BDC or vice versa) + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> Adding users via the User Manager for Domains + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> Acting as a Windows 2000 Domain Controller (i.e. Kerberos and + Active Directory) + </P +></LI +></UL +><P +>Please note that Windows 9x clients are not true members of a domain +for reasons outlined in this article. Therefore the protocol for +support Windows 9x-style domain logons is completely different +from NT4 domain logons and has been officially supported for some +time.</P +><P +>Implementing a Samba PDC can basically be divided into 2 broad +steps.</P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +> Configuring the Samba PDC + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> Creating machine trust accounts and joining clients + to the domain + </P +></LI +></OL +><P +>There are other minor details such as user profiles, system +policies, etc... However, these are not necessarily specific +to a Samba PDC as much as they are related to Windows NT networking +concepts. They will be mentioned only briefly here.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1789" +></A +>12.3. Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</H2 +><P +>The first step in creating a working Samba PDC is to +understand the parameters necessary in smb.conf. I will not +attempt to re-explain the parameters here as they are more that +adequately covered in <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +> the smb.conf +man page</A +>. For convenience, the parameters have been +linked with the actual smb.conf description.</P +><P +>Here is an example <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> for acting as a PDC:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>[global] + ; Basic server settings + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#NETBIOSNAME" +TARGET="_top" +>netbios name</A +> = <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>POGO</I +></TT > -in the <TT + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" +TARGET="_top" +>workgroup</A +> = <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>NARNIA</I +></TT +> + + ; we should act as the domain and local master browser + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#OSLEVEL" +TARGET="_top" +>os level</A +> = 64 + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#PERFERREDMASTER" +TARGET="_top" +>preferred master</A +> = yes + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINMASTER" +TARGET="_top" +>domain master</A +> = yes + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#LOCALMASTER" +TARGET="_top" +>local master</A +> = yes + + ; security settings (must user security = user) + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITYEQUALSUSER" +TARGET="_top" +>security</A +> = user + + ; encrypted passwords are a requirement for a PDC + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +TARGET="_top" +>encrypt passwords</A +> = yes + + ; support domain logons + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINLOGONS" +TARGET="_top" +>domain logons</A +> = yes + + ; where to store user profiles? + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONPATH" +TARGET="_top" +>logon path</A +> = \\%N\profiles\%u + + ; where is a user's home directory and where should it + ; be mounted at? + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONDRIVE" +TARGET="_top" +>logon drive</A +> = H: + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONHOME" +TARGET="_top" +>logon home</A +> = \\homeserver\%u + + ; specify a generic logon script for all users + ; this is a relative **DOS** path to the [netlogon] share + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONSCRIPT" +TARGET="_top" +>logon script</A +> = logon.cmd + +; necessary share for domain controller +[netlogon] + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" +TARGET="_top" +>path</A +> = /usr/local/samba/lib/netlogon + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" +TARGET="_top" +>read only</A +> = yes + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WRITELIST" +TARGET="_top" +>write list</A +> = <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>ntadmin</I +></TT +> + +; share for storing user profiles +[profiles] + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" +TARGET="_top" +>path</A +> = /export/smb/ntprofile + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" +TARGET="_top" +>read only</A +> = no + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" +TARGET="_top" +>create mask</A +> = 0600 + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#DIRECTORYMASK" +TARGET="_top" +>directory mask</A +> = 0700</PRE +></P +><P +>There are a couple of points to emphasize in the above configuration.</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +> Encrypted passwords must be enabled. For more details on how + to do this, refer to <A +HREF="ENCRYPTION.html" +TARGET="_top" +>ENCRYPTION.html</A +>. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The server must support domain logons and a + <TT CLASS="FILENAME" ->source/</TT -> directory of samba distribution. </P +>[netlogon]</TT +> share + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The server must be the domain master browser in order for Windows + client to locate the server as a DC. Please refer to the various + Network Browsing documentation included with this distribution for + details. + </P +></LI +></UL ><P ->Next, copy pdb_mysql.so to any location you want. I -strongly recommend installing it in $PREFIX/lib or /usr/lib/samba/</P +>As Samba 2.2 does not offer a complete implementation of group mapping +between Windows NT groups and Unix groups (this is really quite +complicated to explain in a short space), you should refer to the +<A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINADMINGROUP" +TARGET="_top" +>domain admin +group</A +> smb.conf parameter for information of creating "Domain +Admins" style accounts.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2596" +NAME="AEN1832" ></A ->17.2. Configuring</H2 +>12.4. Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients to the +Domain</H2 ><P ->This plugin lacks some good documentation, but here is some short info:</P +>A machine trust account is a Samba account that is used to +authenticate a client machine (rather than a user) to the Samba +server. In Windows terminology, this is known as a "Computer +Account."</P +><P +>The password of a machine trust account acts as the shared secret for +secure communication with the Domain Controller. This is a security +feature to prevent an unauthorized machine with the same NetBIOS name +from joining the domain and gaining access to domain user/group +accounts. Windows NT and 2000 clients use machine trust accounts, but +Windows 9x clients do not. Hence, a Windows 9x client is never a true +member of a domain because it does not possess a machine trust +account, and thus has no shared secret with the domain controller.</P +><P +>A Windows PDC stores each machine trust account in the Windows +Registry. A Samba PDC, however, stores each machine trust account +in two parts, as follows: + +<P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>A Samba account, stored in the same location as user + LanMan and NT password hashes (currently + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smbpasswd</TT +>). The Samba account + possesses and uses only the NT password hash.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>A corresponding Unix account, typically stored in + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +>. (Future releases will alleviate the need to + create <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +> entries.) </P +></LI +></UL +></P +><P +>There are two ways to create machine trust accounts:</P ><P ->Add a the following to the <B +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +> Manual creation. Both the Samba and corresponding + Unix account are created by hand.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +> "On-the-fly" creation. The Samba machine trust + account is automatically created by Samba at the time the client + is joined to the domain. (For security, this is the + recommended method.) The corresponding Unix account may be + created automatically or manually. </P +></LI +></UL +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN1851" +></A +>12.4.1. Manual Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</H3 +><P +>The first step in manually creating a machine trust account is to +manually create the corresponding Unix account in +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +>. This can be done using +<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>vipw</B +> or other 'add user' command that is normally +used to create new Unix accounts. The following is an example for a +Linux based Samba server:</P +><P +> <TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>root# </TT +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>/usr/sbin/useradd -g 100 -d /dev/null -c <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>"machine +nickname"</I +></TT +> -s /bin/false <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>machine_name</I +></TT +>$ </B +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>root# </TT +><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->passdb backend</B -> variable in your <TT +>passwd -l <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>machine_name</I +></TT +>$</B +></P +><P +>The <TT CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf</TT ->: -<PRE +>/etc/passwd</TT +> entry will list the machine name +with a "$" appended, won't have a password, will have a null shell and no +home directory. For example a machine named 'doppy' would have an +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +> entry like this:</P +><P +><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->passdb backend = [other-plugins] plugin:/location/to/pdb_mysql.so:identifier [other-plugins]</PRE +>doppy$:x:505:501:<TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>machine_nickname</I +></TT +>:/dev/null:/bin/false</PRE +></P +><P +>Above, <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>machine_nickname</I +></TT +> can be any +descriptive name for the client, i.e., BasementComputer. +<TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>machine_name</I +></TT +> absolutely must be the NetBIOS +name of the client to be joined to the domain. The "$" must be +appended to the NetBIOS name of the client or Samba will not recognize +this as a machine trust account.</P +><P +>Now that the corresponding Unix account has been created, the next step is to create +the Samba account for the client containing the well-known initial +machine trust account password. This can be done using the <A +HREF="smbpasswd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd(8)</B +></A +> command +as shown here:</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>root# </TT +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd -a -m <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>machine_name</I +></TT +></B ></P ><P ->The identifier can be any string you like, as long as it doesn't collide with -the identifiers of other plugins or other instances of pdb_mysql. If you -specify multiple pdb_mysql.so entries in 'passdb backend', you also need to -use different identifiers!</P +>where <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>machine_name</I +></TT +> is the machine's NetBIOS +name. The RID of the new machine account is generated from the UID of +the corresponding Unix account.</P +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +WIDTH="100%" +BORDER="0" +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="25" +ALIGN="CENTER" +VALIGN="TOP" +><IMG +SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" +HSPACE="5" +ALT="Warning"></TD +><TH +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>Join the client to the domain immediately</B +></TH +></TR +><TR +><TD +> </TD +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="TOP" +><P +> Manually creating a machine trust account using this method is the + equivalent of creating a machine trust account on a Windows NT PDC using + the "Server Manager". From the time at which the account is created + to the time which the client joins the domain and changes the password, + your domain is vulnerable to an intruder joining your domain using a + a machine with the same NetBIOS name. A PDC inherently trusts + members of the domain and will serve out a large degree of user + information to such clients. You have been warned! + </P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN1886" +></A +>12.4.2. "On-the-Fly" Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</H3 +><P +>The second (and recommended) way of creating machine trust accounts is +simply to allow the Samba server to create them as needed when the client +is joined to the domain. </P +><P +>Since each Samba machine trust account requires a corresponding +Unix account, a method for automatically creating the +Unix account is usually supplied; this requires configuration of the +<A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ADDUSERSCRIPT" +TARGET="_top" +>add user script</A +> +option in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +>. This +method is not required, however; corresponding Unix accounts may also +be created manually.</P ><P ->Additional options can be given thru the smb.conf file in the [global] section.</P +>Below is an example for a RedHat 6.2 Linux system.</P ><P ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->identifier:mysql host - host name, defaults to 'localhost' -identifier:mysql password -identifier:mysql user - defaults to 'samba' -identifier:mysql database - defaults to 'samba' -identifier:mysql port - defaults to 3306 -identifier:table - Name of the table containing users</PRE +>[global] + # <...remainder of parameters...> + add user script = /usr/sbin/useradd -d /dev/null -g 100 -s /bin/false -M %u </PRE ></P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN1895" +></A +>12.4.3. Joining the Client to the Domain</H3 ><P ->Names of the columns in this table(I've added column types those columns should have first):</P +>The procedure for joining a client to the domain varies with the +version of Windows.</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Windows 2000</I +></SPAN +></P +><P +> When the user elects to join the client to a domain, Windows prompts for + an account and password that is privileged to join the domain. A + Samba administrative account (i.e., a Samba account that has root + privileges on the Samba server) must be entered here; the + operation will fail if an ordinary user account is given. + The password for this account should be + set to a different password than the associated + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +> entry, for security + reasons. </P +><P +>The session key of the Samba administrative account acts as an + encryption key for setting the password of the machine trust + account. The machine trust account will be created on-the-fly, or + updated if it already exists.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +><SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Windows NT</I +></SPAN +></P +><P +> If the machine trust account was created manually, on the + Identification Changes menu enter the domain name, but do not + check the box "Create a Computer Account in the Domain." In this case, + the existing machine trust account is used to join the machine to + the domain.</P +><P +> If the machine trust account is to be created + on-the-fly, on the Identification Changes menu enter the domain + name, and check the box "Create a Computer Account in the Domain." In + this case, joining the domain proceeds as above for Windows 2000 + (i.e., you must supply a Samba administrative account when + prompted).</P +></LI +></UL +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1910" +></A +>12.5. Common Problems and Errors</H2 +><P +></P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +> <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>I cannot include a '$' in a machine name.</I +></SPAN +> + </P +><P +> A 'machine name' in (typically) <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +> + of the machine name with a '$' appended. FreeBSD (and other BSD + systems?) won't create a user with a '$' in their name. + </P +><P +> The problem is only in the program used to make the entry, once + made, it works perfectly. So create a user without the '$' and + use <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>vipw</B +> to edit the entry, adding the '$'. Or create + the whole entry with vipw if you like, make sure you use a + unique User ID ! + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>I get told "You already have a connection to the Domain...." + or "Cannot join domain, the credentials supplied conflict with an + existing set.." when creating a machine trust account.</I +></SPAN +> + </P +><P +> This happens if you try to create a machine trust account from the + machine itself and already have a connection (e.g. mapped drive) + to a share (or IPC$) on the Samba PDC. The following command + will remove all network drive connections: + </P +><P +> <TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>C:\WINNT\></TT +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>net use * /d</B +> + </P +><P +> Further, if the machine is a already a 'member of a workgroup' that + is the same name as the domain you are joining (bad idea) you will + get this message. Change the workgroup name to something else, it + does not matter what, reboot, and try again. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>The system can not log you on (C000019B)....</I +></SPAN +> + </P +><P +>I joined the domain successfully but after upgrading + to a newer version of the Samba code I get the message, "The system + can not log you on (C000019B), Please try a gain or consult your + system administrator" when attempting to logon. + </P +><P +> This occurs when the domain SID stored in + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>private/WORKGROUP.SID</TT +> is + changed. For example, you remove the file and <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> automatically + creates a new one. Or you are swapping back and forth between + versions 2.0.7, TNG and the HEAD branch code (not recommended). The + only way to correct the problem is to restore the original domain + SID or remove the domain client from the domain and rejoin. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>The machine trust account for this computer either does not + exist or is not accessible.</I +></SPAN +> + </P +><P +> When I try to join the domain I get the message "The machine account + for this computer either does not exist or is not accessible". What's + wrong? + </P +><P +> This problem is caused by the PDC not having a suitable machine trust account. + If you are using the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add user script</I +></TT +> method to create + accounts then this would indicate that it has not worked. Ensure the domain + admin user system is working. + </P +><P +> Alternatively if you are creating account entries manually then they + have not been created correctly. Make sure that you have the entry + correct for the machine trust account in smbpasswd file on the Samba PDC. + If you added the account using an editor rather than using the smbpasswd + utility, make sure that the account name is the machine NetBIOS name + with a '$' appended to it ( i.e. computer_name$ ). There must be an entry + in both /etc/passwd and the smbpasswd file. Some people have reported + that inconsistent subnet masks between the Samba server and the NT + client have caused this problem. Make sure that these are consistent + for both client and server. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>When I attempt to login to a Samba Domain from a NT4/W2K workstation, + I get a message about my account being disabled.</I +></SPAN +> + </P +><P +> This problem is caused by a PAM related bug in Samba 2.2.0. This bug is + fixed in 2.2.1. Other symptoms could be unaccessible shares on + NT/W2K member servers in the domain or the following error in your smbd.log: + passdb/pampass.c:pam_account(268) PAM: UNKNOWN ERROR for User: %user% + </P +><P +> At first be ensure to enable the useraccounts with <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd -e + %user%</B +>, this is normally done, when you create an account. + </P +><P +> In order to work around this problem in 2.2.0, configure the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>account</I +></TT +> control flag in + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/pam.d/samba</TT +> file as follows: + </P ><P ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->identifier:logon time column - int(9) -identifier:logoff time column - int(9) -identifier:kickoff time column - int(9) -identifier:pass last set time column - int(9) -identifier:pass can change time column - int(9) -identifier:pass must change time column - int(9) -identifier:username column - varchar(255) - unix username -identifier:domain column - varchar(255) - NT domain user is part of -identifier:nt username column - varchar(255) - NT username -identifier:fullname column - varchar(255) - Full name of user -identifier:home dir column - varchar(255) - Unix homedir path -identifier:dir drive column - varchar(2) - Directory drive path (eg: 'H:') -identifier:logon script column - varchar(255) - Batch file to run on client side when logging on -identifier:profile path column - varchar(255) - Path of profile -identifier:acct desc column - varchar(255) - Some ASCII NT user data -identifier:workstations column - varchar(255) - Workstations user can logon to (or NULL for all) -identifier:unknown string column - varchar(255) - unknown string -identifier:munged dial column - varchar(255) - ? -identifier:uid column - int(9) - Unix user ID (uid) -identifier:gid column - int(9) - Unix user group (gid) -identifier:user sid column - varchar(255) - NT user SID -identifier:group sid column - varchar(255) - NT group ID -identifier:lanman pass column - varchar(255) - encrypted lanman password -identifier:nt pass column - varchar(255) - encrypted nt passwd -identifier:plaintext pass column - varchar(255) - plaintext password -identifier:acct control column - int(9) - nt user data -identifier:unknown 3 column - int(9) - unknown -identifier:logon divs column - int(9) - ? -identifier:hours len column - int(9) - ? -identifier:unknown 5 column - int(9) - unknown -identifier:unknown 6 column - int(9) - unknown</PRE -></P -><P ->Eventually, you can put a colon (:) after the name of each column, which -should specify the column to update when updating the table. You can also -specify nothing behind the colon - then the data from the field will not be -updated. </P +> account required pam_permit.so + </PRE +></P +><P +> If you want to remain backward compatibility to samba 2.0.x use + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_permit.so</TT +>, it's also possible to use + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_pwdb.so</TT +>. There are some bugs if you try to + use <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_unix.so</TT +>, if you need this, be ensure to use + the most recent version of this file. + </P +></LI +></UL ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2611" +NAME="AEN1958" ></A ->17.3. Using plaintext passwords or encrypted password</H2 +>12.6. System Policies and Profiles</H2 ><P ->I strongly discourage the use of plaintext passwords, however, you can use them:</P +>Much of the information necessary to implement System Policies and +Roving User Profiles in a Samba domain is the same as that for +implementing these same items in a Windows NT 4.0 domain. +You should read the white paper <A +HREF="http://www.microsoft.com/ntserver/management/deployment/planguide/prof_policies.asp" +TARGET="_top" +>Implementing +Profiles and Policies in Windows NT 4.0</A +> available from Microsoft.</P +><P +>Here are some additional details:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +> <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>What about Windows NT Policy Editor?</I +></SPAN +> + </P +><P +> To create or edit <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>ntconfig.pol</TT +> you must use + the NT Server Policy Editor, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>poledit.exe</B +> which + is included with NT Server but <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>not NT Workstation</I +></SPAN +>. + There is a Policy Editor on a NTws + but it is not suitable for creating <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Domain Policies</I +></SPAN +>. + Further, although the Windows 95 + Policy Editor can be installed on an NT Workstation/Server, it will not + work with NT policies because the registry key that are set by the policy templates. + However, the files from the NT Server will run happily enough on an NTws. + You need <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>poledit.exe, common.adm</TT +> and <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>winnt.adm</TT +>. It is convenient + to put the two *.adm files in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>c:\winnt\inf</TT +> which is where + the binary will look for them unless told otherwise. Note also that that + directory is 'hidden'. + </P +><P +> The Windows NT policy editor is also included with the Service Pack 3 (and + later) for Windows NT 4.0. Extract the files using <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>servicepackname /x</B +>, + i.e. that's <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>Nt4sp6ai.exe /x</B +> for service pack 6a. The policy editor, + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>poledit.exe</B +> and the associated template files (*.adm) should + be extracted as well. It is also possible to downloaded the policy template + files for Office97 and get a copy of the policy editor. Another possible + location is with the Zero Administration Kit available for download from Microsoft. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Can Win95 do Policies?</I +></SPAN +> + </P +><P +> Install the group policy handler for Win9x to pick up group + policies. Look on the Win98 CD in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>\tools\reskit\netadmin\poledit</TT +>. + Install group policies on a Win9x client by double-clicking + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>grouppol.inf</TT +>. Log off and on again a couple of + times and see if Win98 picks up group policies. Unfortunately this needs + to be done on every Win9x machine that uses group policies.... + </P +><P +> If group policies don't work one reports suggests getting the updated + (read: working) grouppol.dll for Windows 9x. The group list is grabbed + from /etc/group. + </P +></LI +><LI ><P ->If you would like to use plaintext passwords, set 'identifier:lanman pass column' and 'identifier:nt pass column' to 'NULL' (without the quotes) and 'identifier:plaintext pass column' to the name of the column containing the plaintext passwords. </P +> <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>How do I get 'User Manager' and 'Server Manager'</I +></SPAN +> + </P +><P +> Since I don't need to buy an NT Server CD now, how do I get + the 'User Manager for Domains', the 'Server Manager'? + </P ><P ->If you use encrypted passwords, set the 'identifier:plaintext pass column' to 'NULL' (without the quotes). This is the default.</P +> Microsoft distributes a version of these tools called nexus for + installation on Windows 95 systems. The tools set includes + </P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>Server Manager</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>User Manager for Domains</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Event Viewer</P +></LI +></UL +><P +> Click here to download the archived file <A +HREF="ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/Softlib/MSLFILES/NEXUS.EXE" +TARGET="_top" +>ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/Softlib/MSLFILES/NEXUS.EXE</A +> + </P +><P +> The Windows NT 4.0 version of the 'User Manager for + Domains' and 'Server Manager' are available from Microsoft via ftp + from <A +HREF="ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/Softlib/MSLFILES/SRVTOOLS.EXE" +TARGET="_top" +>ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/Softlib/MSLFILES/SRVTOOLS.EXE</A +> + </P +></LI +></UL ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2616" +NAME="AEN2002" ></A ->17.4. Getting non-column data from the table</H2 +>12.7. What other help can I get?</H2 ><P ->It is possible to have not all data in the database and making some 'constant'.</P +>There are many sources of information available in the form +of mailing lists, RFC's and documentation. The docs that come +with the samba distribution contain very good explanations of +general SMB topics such as browsing.</P ><P ->For example, you can set 'identifier:fullname column' to : -<B +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +> <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>What are some diagnostics tools I can use to debug the domain logon + process and where can I find them?</I +></SPAN +> + </P +><P +> One of the best diagnostic tools for debugging problems is Samba itself. + You can use the -d option for both smbd and nmbd to specify what + 'debug level' at which to run. See the man pages on smbd, nmbd and + smb.conf for more information on debugging options. The debug + level can range from 1 (the default) to 10 (100 for debugging passwords). + </P +><P +> Another helpful method of debugging is to compile samba using the + <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->CONCAT(First_name,' ',Sur_name)</B +>gcc -g </B +> flag. This will include debug + information in the binaries and allow you to attach gdb to the + running smbd / nmbd process. In order to attach gdb to an smbd + process for an NT workstation, first get the workstation to make the + connection. Pressing ctrl-alt-delete and going down to the domain box + is sufficient (at least, on the first time you join the domain) to + generate a 'LsaEnumTrustedDomains'. Thereafter, the workstation + maintains an open connection, and therefore there will be an smbd + process running (assuming that you haven't set a really short smbd + idle timeout) So, in between pressing ctrl alt delete, and actually + typing in your password, you can gdb attach and continue. + </P +><P +> Some useful samba commands worth investigating: + </P +><P ></P +><UL +><LI ><P ->Or, set 'identifier:workstations column' to : -<B +>testparam | more</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>smbclient -L //{netbios name of server}</P +></LI +></UL +><P +> An SMB enabled version of tcpdump is available from + <A +HREF="http://www.tcpdump.org/" +TARGET="_top" +>http://www.tcpdup.org/</A +>. + Ethereal, another good packet sniffer for Unix and Win32 + hosts, can be downloaded from <A +HREF="http://www.ethereal.com/" +TARGET="_top" +>http://www.ethereal.com</A +>. + </P +><P +> For tracing things on the Microsoft Windows NT, Network Monitor + (aka. netmon) is available on the Microsoft Developer Network CD's, + the Windows NT Server install CD and the SMS CD's. The version of + netmon that ships with SMS allows for dumping packets between any two + computers (i.e. placing the network interface in promiscuous mode). + The version on the NT Server install CD will only allow monitoring + of network traffic directed to the local NT box and broadcasts on the + local subnet. Be aware that Ethereal can read and write netmon + formatted files. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>How do I install 'Network Monitor' on an NT Workstation + or a Windows 9x box?</I +></SPAN +> + </P +><P +> Installing netmon on an NT workstation requires a couple + of steps. The following are for installing Netmon V4.00.349, which comes + with Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0, on Microsoft Windows NT + Workstation 4.0. The process should be similar for other version of + Windows NT / Netmon. You will need both the Microsoft Windows + NT Server 4.0 Install CD and the Workstation 4.0 Install CD. + </P +><P +> Initially you will need to install 'Network Monitor Tools and Agent' + on the NT Server. To do this + </P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>Goto Start - Settings - Control Panel - + Network - Services - Add </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Select the 'Network Monitor Tools and Agent' and + click on 'OK'.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Click 'OK' on the Network Control Panel. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Insert the Windows NT Server 4.0 install CD + when prompted.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +> At this point the Netmon files should exist in + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>%SYSTEMROOT%\System32\netmon\*.*</TT +>. + Two subdirectories exist as well, <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>parsers\</TT +> + which contains the necessary DLL's for parsing the netmon packet + dump, and <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>captures\</TT +>. + </P +><P +> In order to install the Netmon tools on an NT Workstation, you will + first need to install the 'Network Monitor Agent' from the Workstation + install CD. + </P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>Goto Start - Settings - Control Panel - + Network - Services - Add</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Select the 'Network Monitor Agent' and click + on 'OK'.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Click 'OK' on the Network Control Panel. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Insert the Windows NT Workstation 4.0 install + CD when prompted.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +> Now copy the files from the NT Server in %SYSTEMROOT%\System32\netmon\*.* + to %SYSTEMROOT%\System32\netmon\*.* on the Workstation and set + permissions as you deem appropriate for your site. You will need + administrative rights on the NT box to run netmon. + </P +><P +> To install Netmon on a Windows 9x box install the network monitor agent + from the Windows 9x CD (\admin\nettools\netmon). There is a readme + file located with the netmon driver files on the CD if you need + information on how to do this. Copy the files from a working + Netmon installation. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The following is a list if helpful URLs and other links: + </P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>Home of Samba site <A +HREF="http://samba.org" +TARGET="_top" +> http://samba.org</A +>. We have a mirror near you !</P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Development</I +></SPAN +> document + on the Samba mirrors might mention your problem. If so, + it might mean that the developers are working on it.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>See how Scott Merrill simulates a BDC behavior at + <A +HREF="http://www.skippy.net/linux/smb-howto.html" +TARGET="_top" +> http://www.skippy.net/linux/smb-howto.html</A +>. </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Although 2.0.7 has almost had its day as a PDC, David Bannon will + keep the 2.0.7 PDC pages at <A +HREF="http://bioserve.latrobe.edu.au/samba" +TARGET="_top" +> http://bioserve.latrobe.edu.au/samba</A +> going for a while yet.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Misc links to CIFS information + <A +HREF="http://samba.org/cifs/" +TARGET="_top" +>http://samba.org/cifs/</A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +>NT Domains for Unix <A +HREF="http://mailhost.cb1.com/~lkcl/ntdom/" +TARGET="_top" +> http://mailhost.cb1.com/~lkcl/ntdom/</A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +>FTP site for older SMB specs: + <A +HREF="ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/developr/drg/CIFS/" +TARGET="_top" +> ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/developr/drg/CIFS/</A +></P +></LI +></UL +></LI +></UL +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +> <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>How do I get help from the mailing lists?</I +></SPAN +> + </P +><P +> There are a number of Samba related mailing lists. Go to <A +HREF="http://samba.org" +TARGET="_top" +>http://samba.org</A +>, click on your nearest mirror + and then click on <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>Support</B +> and then click on <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->NULL</B +> Samba related mailing lists</B +>. + </P +><P +> For questions relating to Samba TNG go to + <A +HREF="http://www.samba-tng.org/" +TARGET="_top" +>http://www.samba-tng.org/</A +> + It has been requested that you don't post questions about Samba-TNG to the + main stream Samba lists.</P +><P +> If you post a message to one of the lists please observe the following guide lines : + </P +><P ></P +><UL +><LI +><P +> Always remember that the developers are volunteers, they are + not paid and they never guarantee to produce a particular feature at + a particular time. Any time lines are 'best guess' and nothing more. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> Always mention what version of samba you are using and what + operating system its running under. You should probably list the + relevant sections of your smb.conf file, at least the options + in [global] that affect PDC support.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>In addition to the version, if you obtained Samba via + CVS mention the date when you last checked it out.</P +></LI +><LI ><P ->See the MySQL documentation for more language constructs.</P +> Try and make your question clear and brief, lots of long, + convoluted questions get deleted before they are completely read ! + Don't post html encoded messages (if you can select colour or font + size its html).</P +></LI +><LI +><P +> If you run one of those nifty 'I'm on holidays' things when + you are away, make sure its configured to not answer mailing lists. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> Don't cross post. Work out which is the best list to post to + and see what happens, i.e. don't post to both samba-ntdom and samba-technical. + Many people active on the lists subscribe to more + than one list and get annoyed to see the same message two or more times. + Often someone will see a message and thinking it would be better dealt + with on another, will forward it on for you.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>You might include <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>partial</I +></SPAN +> + log files written at a debug level set to as much as 20. + Please don't send the entire log but enough to give the context of the + error messages.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>(Possibly) If you have a complete netmon trace ( from the opening of + the pipe to the error ) you can send the *.CAP file as well.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Please think carefully before attaching a document to an email. + Consider pasting the relevant parts into the body of the message. The samba + mailing lists go to a huge number of people, do they all need a copy of your + smb.conf in their attach directory?</P +></LI +></UL +></LI +><LI +><P +> <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>How do I get off the mailing lists?</I +></SPAN +> + </P +><P +>To have your name removed from a samba mailing list, go to the + same place you went to to get on it. Go to <A +HREF="http://lists.samba.org/" +TARGET="_top" +>http://lists.samba.org</A +>, + click on your nearest mirror and then click on <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>Support</B +> and + then click on <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> Samba related mailing lists</B +>. Or perhaps see + <A +HREF="http://lists.samba.org/mailman/roster/samba-ntdom" +TARGET="_top" +>here</A +> + </P +><P +> Please don't post messages to the list asking to be removed, you will just + be referred to the above address (unless that process failed in some way...) + </P +></LI +></UL +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2116" +></A +>12.8. Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</H2 +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="NOTE" +WIDTH="100%" +BORDER="0" +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="25" +ALIGN="CENTER" +VALIGN="TOP" +><IMG +SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" +HSPACE="5" +ALT="Note"></TD +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="TOP" +><P +>The following section contains much of the original +DOMAIN.txt file previously included with Samba. Much of +the material is based on what went into the book <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Special +Edition, Using Samba</I +></SPAN +>, by Richard Sharpe.</P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +><P +>A domain and a workgroup are exactly the same thing in terms of network +browsing. The difference is that a distributable authentication +database is associated with a domain, for secure login access to a +network. Also, different access rights can be granted to users if they +successfully authenticate against a domain logon server (NT server and +other systems based on NT server support this, as does at least Samba TNG now).</P +><P +>The SMB client logging on to a domain has an expectation that every other +server in the domain should accept the same authentication information. +Network browsing functionality of domains and workgroups is +identical and is explained in BROWSING.txt. It should be noted, that browsing +is totally orthogonal to logon support.</P +><P +>Issues related to the single-logon network model are discussed in this +section. Samba supports domain logons, network logon scripts, and user +profiles for MS Windows for workgroups and MS Windows 9X/ME clients +which will be the focus of this section.</P +><P +>When an SMB client in a domain wishes to logon it broadcast requests for a +logon server. The first one to reply gets the job, and validates its +password using whatever mechanism the Samba administrator has installed. +It is possible (but very stupid) to create a domain where the user +database is not shared between servers, i.e. they are effectively workgroup +servers advertising themselves as participating in a domain. This +demonstrates how authentication is quite different from but closely +involved with domains.</P +><P +>Using these features you can make your clients verify their logon via +the Samba server; make clients run a batch file when they logon to +the network and download their preferences, desktop and start menu.</P +><P +>Before launching into the configuration instructions, it is +worthwhile lookingat how a Windows 9x/ME client performs a logon:</P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +> The client broadcasts (to the IP broadcast address of the subnet it is in) + a NetLogon request. This is sent to the NetBIOS name DOMAIN<1c> at the + NetBIOS layer. The client chooses the first response it receives, which + contains the NetBIOS name of the logon server to use in the format of + \\SERVER. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The client then connects to that server, logs on (does an SMBsessetupX) and + then connects to the IPC$ share (using an SMBtconX). + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The client then does a NetWkstaUserLogon request, which retrieves the name + of the user's logon script. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The client then connects to the NetLogon share and searches for this + and if it is found and can be read, is retrieved and executed by the client. + After this, the client disconnects from the NetLogon share. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The client then sends a NetUserGetInfo request to the server, to retrieve + the user's home share, which is used to search for profiles. Since the + response to the NetUserGetInfo request does not contain much more + the user's home share, profiles for Win9X clients MUST reside in the user + home directory. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The client then connects to the user's home share and searches for the + user's profile. As it turns out, you can specify the user's home share as + a sharename and path. For example, \\server\fred\.profile. + If the profiles are found, they are implemented. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The client then disconnects from the user's home share, and reconnects to + the NetLogon share and looks for CONFIG.POL, the policies file. If this is + found, it is read and implemented. + </P +></LI +></OL +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN2142" +></A +>12.8.1. Configuration Instructions: Network Logons</H3 +><P +>The main difference between a PDC and a Windows 9x logon +server configuration is that</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>Password encryption is not required for a Windows 9x logon server.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Windows 9x/ME clients do not possess machine trust accounts.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>Therefore, a Samba PDC will also act as a Windows 9x logon +server.</P +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +WIDTH="100%" +BORDER="0" +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="25" +ALIGN="CENTER" +VALIGN="TOP" +><IMG +SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" +HSPACE="5" +ALT="Warning"></TD +><TH +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>security mode and master browsers</B +></TH +></TR +><TR +><TD +> </TD +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="TOP" +><P +>There are a few comments to make in order to tie up some +loose ends. There has been much debate over the issue of whether +or not it is ok to configure Samba as a Domain Controller in security +modes other than <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>USER</TT +>. The only security mode +which will not work due to technical reasons is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SHARE</TT +> +mode security. <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>DOMAIN</TT +> and <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SERVER</TT +> +mode security is really just a variation on SMB user level security.</P +><P +>Actually, this issue is also closely tied to the debate on whether +or not Samba must be the domain master browser for its workgroup +when operating as a DC. While it may technically be possible +to configure a server as such (after all, browsing and domain logons +are two distinctly different functions), it is not a good idea to +so. You should remember that the DC must register the DOMAIN#1b NetBIOS +name. This is the name used by Windows clients to locate the DC. +Windows clients do not distinguish between the DC and the DMB. +For this reason, it is very wise to configure the Samba DC as the DMB.</P +><P +>Now back to the issue of configuring a Samba DC to use a mode other +than "security = user". If a Samba host is configured to use +another SMB server or DC in order to validate user connection +requests, then it is a fact that some other machine on the network +(the "password server") knows more about user than the Samba host. +99% of the time, this other host is a domain controller. Now +in order to operate in domain mode security, the "workgroup" parameter +must be set to the name of the Windows NT domain (which already +has a domain controller, right?)</P +><P +>Therefore configuring a Samba box as a DC for a domain that +already by definition has a PDC is asking for trouble. +Therefore, you should always configure the Samba DC to be the DMB +for its domain.</P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN2161" +></A +>12.8.2. Configuration Instructions: Setting up Roaming User Profiles</H3 +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +WIDTH="100%" +BORDER="0" +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="25" +ALIGN="CENTER" +VALIGN="TOP" +><IMG +SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" +HSPACE="5" +ALT="Warning"></TD +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="TOP" +><P +><SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOTE!</I +></SPAN +> Roaming profiles support is different +for Win9X and WinNT.</P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +><P +>Before discussing how to configure roaming profiles, it is useful to see how +Win9X and WinNT clients implement these features.</P +><P +>Win9X clients send a NetUserGetInfo request to the server to get the user's +profiles location. However, the response does not have room for a separate +profiles location field, only the user's home share. This means that Win9X +profiles are restricted to being in the user's home directory.</P +><P +>WinNT clients send a NetSAMLogon RPC request, which contains many fields, +including a separate field for the location of the user's profiles. +This means that support for profiles is different for Win9X and WinNT.</P +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H4 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN2169" +></A +>12.8.2.1. Windows NT Configuration</H4 +><P +>To support WinNT clients, in the [global] section of smb.conf set the +following (for example):</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>logon path = \\profileserver\profileshare\profilepath\%U\moreprofilepath</PRE +></P +><P +>The default for this option is \\%N\%U\profile, namely +\\sambaserver\username\profile. The \\N%\%U service is created +automatically by the [homes] service. +If you are using a samba server for the profiles, you _must_ make the +share specified in the logon path browseable. </P +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="NOTE" +WIDTH="100%" +BORDER="0" +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="25" +ALIGN="CENTER" +VALIGN="TOP" +><IMG +SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" +HSPACE="5" +ALT="Note"></TD +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="TOP" +><P +>[lkcl 26aug96 - we have discovered a problem where Windows clients can +maintain a connection to the [homes] share in between logins. The +[homes] share must NOT therefore be used in a profile path.]</P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H4 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN2177" +></A +>12.8.2.2. Windows 9X Configuration</H4 +><P +>To support Win9X clients, you must use the "logon home" parameter. Samba has +now been fixed so that "net use/home" now works as well, and it, too, relies +on the "logon home" parameter.</P +><P +>By using the logon home parameter, you are restricted to putting Win9X +profiles in the user's home directory. But wait! There is a trick you +can use. If you set the following in the [global] section of your +smb.conf file:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>logon home = \\%L\%U\.profiles</PRE +></P +><P +>then your Win9X clients will dutifully put their clients in a subdirectory +of your home directory called .profiles (thus making them hidden).</P +><P +>Not only that, but 'net use/home' will also work, because of a feature in +Win9X. It removes any directory stuff off the end of the home directory area +and only uses the server and share portion. That is, it looks like you +specified \\%L\%U for "logon home".</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H4 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN2185" +></A +>12.8.2.3. Win9X and WinNT Configuration</H4 +><P +>You can support profiles for both Win9X and WinNT clients by setting both the +"logon home" and "logon path" parameters. For example:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>logon home = \\%L\%U\.profiles +logon path = \\%L\profiles\%U</PRE +></P +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="NOTE" +WIDTH="100%" +BORDER="0" +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="25" +ALIGN="CENTER" +VALIGN="TOP" +><IMG +SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" +HSPACE="5" +ALT="Note"></TD +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="TOP" +><P +>I have not checked what 'net use /home' does on NT when "logon home" is +set as above.</P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H4 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN2192" +></A +>12.8.2.4. Windows 9X Profile Setup</H4 +><P +>When a user first logs in on Windows 9X, the file user.DAT is created, +as are folders "Start Menu", "Desktop", "Programs" and "Nethood". +These directories and their contents will be merged with the local +versions stored in c:\windows\profiles\username on subsequent logins, +taking the most recent from each. You will need to use the [global] +options "preserve case = yes", "short preserve case = yes" and +"case sensitive = no" in order to maintain capital letters in shortcuts +in any of the profile folders.</P +><P +>The user.DAT file contains all the user's preferences. If you wish to +enforce a set of preferences, rename their user.DAT file to user.MAN, +and deny them write access to this file.</P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +> On the Windows 95 machine, go to Control Panel | Passwords and + select the User Profiles tab. Select the required level of + roaming preferences. Press OK, but do _not_ allow the computer + to reboot. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> On the Windows 95 machine, go to Control Panel | Network | + Client for Microsoft Networks | Preferences. Select 'Log on to + NT Domain'. Then, ensure that the Primary Logon is 'Client for + Microsoft Networks'. Press OK, and this time allow the computer + to reboot. + </P +></LI +></OL +><P +>Under Windows 95, Profiles are downloaded from the Primary Logon. +If you have the Primary Logon as 'Client for Novell Networks', then +the profiles and logon script will be downloaded from your Novell +Server. If you have the Primary Logon as 'Windows Logon', then the +profiles will be loaded from the local machine - a bit against the +concept of roaming profiles, if you ask me.</P +><P +>You will now find that the Microsoft Networks Login box contains +[user, password, domain] instead of just [user, password]. Type in +the samba server's domain name (or any other domain known to exist, +but bear in mind that the user will be authenticated against this +domain and profiles downloaded from it, if that domain logon server +supports it), user name and user's password.</P +><P +>Once the user has been successfully validated, the Windows 95 machine +will inform you that 'The user has not logged on before' and asks you +if you wish to save the user's preferences? Select 'yes'.</P +><P +>Once the Windows 95 client comes up with the desktop, you should be able +to examine the contents of the directory specified in the "logon path" +on the samba server and verify that the "Desktop", "Start Menu", +"Programs" and "Nethood" folders have been created.</P +><P +>These folders will be cached locally on the client, and updated when +the user logs off (if you haven't made them read-only by then :-). +You will find that if the user creates further folders or short-cuts, +that the client will merge the profile contents downloaded with the +contents of the profile directory already on the local client, taking +the newest folders and short-cuts from each set.</P +><P +>If you have made the folders / files read-only on the samba server, +then you will get errors from the w95 machine on logon and logout, as +it attempts to merge the local and the remote profile. Basically, if +you have any errors reported by the w95 machine, check the Unix file +permissions and ownership rights on the profile directory contents, +on the samba server.</P +><P +>If you have problems creating user profiles, you can reset the user's +local desktop cache, as shown below. When this user then next logs in, +they will be told that they are logging in "for the first time".</P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +> instead of logging in under the [user, password, domain] dialog, + press escape. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> run the regedit.exe program, and look in: + </P +><P +> HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Windows\CurrentVersion\ProfileList + </P +><P +> you will find an entry, for each user, of ProfilePath. Note the + contents of this key (likely to be c:\windows\profiles\username), + then delete the key ProfilePath for the required user. + </P +><P +> [Exit the registry editor]. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>WARNING</I +></SPAN +> - before deleting the contents of the + directory listed in + the ProfilePath (this is likely to be c:\windows\profiles\username), + ask them if they have any important files stored on their desktop + or in their start menu. delete the contents of the directory + ProfilePath (making a backup if any of the files are needed). + </P +><P +> This will have the effect of removing the local (read-only hidden + system file) user.DAT in their profile directory, as well as the + local "desktop", "nethood", "start menu" and "programs" folders. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> search for the user's .PWL password-caching file in the c:\windows + directory, and delete it. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> log off the windows 95 client. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> check the contents of the profile path (see "logon path" described + above), and delete the user.DAT or user.MAN file for the user, + making a backup if required. + </P +></LI +></OL +><P +>If all else fails, increase samba's debug log levels to between 3 and 10, +and / or run a packet trace program such as tcpdump or netmon.exe, and +look for any error reports.</P +><P +>If you have access to an NT server, then first set up roaming profiles +and / or netlogons on the NT server. Make a packet trace, or examine +the example packet traces provided with NT server, and see what the +differences are with the equivalent samba trace.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H4 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN2228" +></A +>12.8.2.5. Windows NT Workstation 4.0</H4 +><P +>When a user first logs in to a Windows NT Workstation, the profile +NTuser.DAT is created. The profile location can be now specified +through the "logon path" parameter. </P +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="NOTE" +WIDTH="100%" +BORDER="0" +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="25" +ALIGN="CENTER" +VALIGN="TOP" +><IMG +SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" +HSPACE="5" +ALT="Note"></TD +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="TOP" +><P +>[lkcl 10aug97 - i tried setting the path to +\\samba-server\homes\profile, and discovered that this fails because +a background process maintains the connection to the [homes] share +which does _not_ close down in between user logins. you have to +have \\samba-server\%L\profile, where user is the username created +from the [homes] share].</P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +><P +>There is a parameter that is now available for use with NT Profiles: +"logon drive". This should be set to "h:" or any other drive, and +should be used in conjunction with the new "logon home" parameter.</P +><P +>The entry for the NT 4.0 profile is a _directory_ not a file. The NT +help on profiles mentions that a directory is also created with a .PDS +extension. The user, while logging in, must have write permission to +create the full profile path (and the folder with the .PDS extension) +[lkcl 10aug97 - i found that the creation of the .PDS directory failed, +and had to create these manually for each user, with a shell script. +also, i presume, but have not tested, that the full profile path must +be browseable just as it is for w95, due to the manner in which they +attempt to create the full profile path: test existence of each path +component; create path component].</P +><P +>In the profile directory, NT creates more folders than 95. It creates +"Application Data" and others, as well as "Desktop", "Nethood", +"Start Menu" and "Programs". The profile itself is stored in a file +NTuser.DAT. Nothing appears to be stored in the .PDS directory, and +its purpose is currently unknown.</P +><P +>You can use the System Control Panel to copy a local profile onto +a samba server (see NT Help on profiles: it is also capable of firing +up the correct location in the System Control Panel for you). The +NT Help file also mentions that renaming NTuser.DAT to NTuser.MAN +turns a profile into a mandatory one.</P +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="NOTE" +WIDTH="100%" +BORDER="0" +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="25" +ALIGN="CENTER" +VALIGN="TOP" +><IMG +SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" +HSPACE="5" +ALT="Note"></TD +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="TOP" +><P +>[lkcl 10aug97 - i notice that NT Workstation tells me that it is +downloading a profile from a slow link. whether this is actually the +case, or whether there is some configuration issue, as yet unknown, +that makes NT Workstation _think_ that the link is a slow one is a +matter to be resolved].</P +><P +>[lkcl 20aug97 - after samba digest correspondence, one user found, and +another confirmed, that profiles cannot be loaded from a samba server +unless "security = user" and "encrypt passwords = yes" (see the file +ENCRYPTION.txt) or "security = server" and "password server = ip.address. +of.yourNTserver" are used. Either of these options will allow the NT +workstation to access the samba server using LAN manager encrypted +passwords, without the user intervention normally required by NT +workstation for clear-text passwords].</P +><P +>[lkcl 25aug97 - more comments received about NT profiles: the case of +the profile _matters_. the file _must_ be called NTuser.DAT or, for +a mandatory profile, NTuser.MAN].</P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H4 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN2241" +></A +>12.8.2.6. Windows NT Server</H4 +><P +>There is nothing to stop you specifying any path that you like for the +location of users' profiles. Therefore, you could specify that the +profile be stored on a samba server, or any other SMB server, as long as +that SMB server supports encrypted passwords.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H4 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN2244" +></A +>12.8.2.7. Sharing Profiles between W95 and NT Workstation 4.0</H4 +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +WIDTH="100%" +BORDER="0" +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="25" +ALIGN="CENTER" +VALIGN="TOP" +><IMG +SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" +HSPACE="5" +ALT="Warning"></TD +><TH +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>Potentially outdated or incorrect material follows</B +></TH +></TR +><TR +><TD +> </TD +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="TOP" +><P +>I think this is all bogus, but have not deleted it. (Richard Sharpe)</P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +><P +>The default logon path is \\%N\%U. NT Workstation will attempt to create +a directory "\\samba-server\username.PDS" if you specify the logon path +as "\\samba-server\username" with the NT User Manager. Therefore, you +will need to specify (for example) "\\samba-server\username\profile". +NT 4.0 will attempt to create "\\samba-server\username\profile.PDS", which +is more likely to succeed.</P +><P +>If you then want to share the same Start Menu / Desktop with W95, you will +need to specify "logon path = \\samba-server\username\profile" [lkcl 10aug97 +this has its drawbacks: i created a shortcut to telnet.exe, which attempts +to run from the c:\winnt\system32 directory. this directory is obviously +unlikely to exist on a Win95-only host].</P +><P +> If you have this set up correctly, you will find separate user.DAT and +NTuser.DAT files in the same profile directory.</P +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="NOTE" +WIDTH="100%" +BORDER="0" +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="25" +ALIGN="CENTER" +VALIGN="TOP" +><IMG +SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" +HSPACE="5" +ALT="Note"></TD +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="TOP" +><P +>[lkcl 25aug97 - there are some issues to resolve with downloading of +NT profiles, probably to do with time/date stamps. i have found that +NTuser.DAT is never updated on the workstation after the first time that +it is copied to the local workstation profile directory. this is in +contrast to w95, where it _does_ transfer / update profiles correctly].</P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +></DIV +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2254" +></A +>12.9. DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control & Samba</H2 +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +WIDTH="100%" +BORDER="0" +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="25" +ALIGN="CENTER" +VALIGN="TOP" +><IMG +SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" +HSPACE="5" +ALT="Warning"></TD +><TH +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>Possibly Outdated Material</B +></TH +></TR +><TR +><TD +> </TD +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="TOP" +><P +> This appendix was originally authored by John H Terpstra of + the Samba Team and is included here for posterity. + </P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +><P +><SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOTE :</I +></SPAN +> +The term "Domain Controller" and those related to it refer to one specific +method of authentication that can underly an SMB domain. Domain Controllers +prior to Windows NT Server 3.1 were sold by various companies and based on +private extensions to the LAN Manager 2.1 protocol. Windows NT introduced +Microsoft-specific ways of distributing the user authentication database. +See DOMAIN.txt for examples of how Samba can participate in or create +SMB domains based on shared authentication database schemes other than the +Windows NT SAM.</P +><P +>Windows NT Server can be installed as either a plain file and print server +(WORKGROUP workstation or server) or as a server that participates in Domain +Control (DOMAIN member, Primary Domain controller or Backup Domain controller). +The same is true for OS/2 Warp Server, Digital Pathworks and other similar +products, all of which can participate in Domain Control along with Windows NT.</P +><P +>To many people these terms can be confusing, so let's try to clear the air.</P +><P +>Every Windows NT system (workstation or server) has a registry database. +The registry contains entries that describe the initialization information +for all services (the equivalent of Unix Daemons) that run within the Windows +NT environment. The registry also contains entries that tell application +software where to find dynamically loadable libraries that they depend upon. +In fact, the registry contains entries that describes everything that anything +may need to know to interact with the rest of the system.</P +><P +>The registry files can be located on any Windows NT machine by opening a +command prompt and typing:</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>C:\WINNT\></TT +> dir %SystemRoot%\System32\config</P +><P +>The environment variable %SystemRoot% value can be obtained by typing:</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>C:\WINNT></TT +>echo %SystemRoot%</P +><P +>The active parts of the registry that you may want to be familiar with are +the files called: default, system, software, sam and security.</P +><P +>In a domain environment, Microsoft Windows NT domain controllers participate +in replication of the SAM and SECURITY files so that all controllers within +the domain have an exactly identical copy of each.</P +><P +>The Microsoft Windows NT system is structured within a security model that +says that all applications and services must authenticate themselves before +they can obtain permission from the security manager to do what they set out +to do.</P +><P +>The Windows NT User database also resides within the registry. This part of +the registry contains the user's security identifier, home directory, group +memberships, desktop profile, and so on.</P +><P +>Every Windows NT system (workstation as well as server) will have its own +registry. Windows NT Servers that participate in Domain Security control +have a database that they share in common - thus they do NOT own an +independent full registry database of their own, as do Workstations and +plain Servers.</P +><P +>The User database is called the SAM (Security Access Manager) database and +is used for all user authentication as well as for authentication of inter- +process authentication (i.e. to ensure that the service action a user has +requested is permitted within the limits of that user's privileges).</P +><P +>The Samba team have produced a utility that can dump the Windows NT SAM into +smbpasswd format: see ENCRYPTION.txt for information on smbpasswd and +/pub/samba/pwdump on your nearest Samba mirror for the utility. This +facility is useful but cannot be easily used to implement SAM replication +to Samba systems.</P +><P +>Windows for Workgroups, Windows 95, and Windows NT Workstations and Servers +can participate in a Domain security system that is controlled by Windows NT +servers that have been correctly configured. Almost every domain will have +ONE Primary Domain Controller (PDC). It is desirable that each domain will +have at least one Backup Domain Controller (BDC).</P +><P +>The PDC and BDCs then participate in replication of the SAM database so that +each Domain Controlling participant will have an up to date SAM component +within its registry.</P ></DIV ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="PDB-XML" +NAME="SAMBA-BDC" ></A ->Chapter 18. Passdb XML plugin</H1 +>Chapter 13. How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2635" +NAME="AEN2290" ></A ->18.1. Building</H2 +>13.1. Prerequisite Reading</H2 ><P ->This module requires libxml2 to be installed.</P +>Before you continue reading in this chapter, please make sure +that you are comfortable with configuring a Samba PDC +as described in the <A +HREF="Samba-PDC-HOWTO.html" +TARGET="_top" +>Samba-PDC-HOWTO</A +>.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2294" +></A +>13.2. Background</H2 ><P ->To build pdb_xml, run: <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->make bin/pdb_xml.so</B -> in -the directory <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->source/</TT ->. </P +>What is a Domain Controller? It is a machine that is able to answer +logon requests from workstations in a Windows NT Domain. Whenever a +user logs into a Windows NT Workstation, the workstation connects to a +Domain Controller and asks him whether the username and password the +user typed in is correct. The Domain Controller replies with a lot of +information about the user, for example the place where the users +profile is stored, the users full name of the user. All this +information is stored in the NT user database, the so-called SAM.</P +><P +>There are two kinds of Domain Controller in a NT 4 compatible Domain: +A Primary Domain Controller (PDC) and one or more Backup Domain +Controllers (BDC). The PDC contains the master copy of the +SAM. Whenever the SAM has to change, for example when a user changes +his password, this change has to be done on the PDC. A Backup Domain +Controller is a machine that maintains a read-only copy of the +SAM. This way it is able to reply to logon requests and authenticate +users in case the PDC is not available. During this time no changes to +the SAM are possible. Whenever changes to the SAM are done on the PDC, +all BDC receive the changes from the PDC.</P +><P +>Since version 2.2 Samba officially supports domain logons for all +current Windows Clients, including Windows 2000 and XP. This text +assumes the domain to be named SAMBA. To be able to act as a PDC, some +parameters in the [global]-section of the smb.conf have to be set:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>workgroup = SAMBA +domain master = yes +domain logons = yes</PRE +></P +><P +>Several other things like a [homes] and a [netlogon] share also may be +set along with settings for the profile path, the users home drive and +others. This will not be covered in this document.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2641" +NAME="AEN2302" ></A ->18.2. Usage</H2 +>13.3. What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?</H2 ><P ->The usage of pdb_xml is pretty straightforward. To export data, use: - -<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->pdbedit -e plugin:/usr/lib/samba/pdb_xml.so:filename</B -> - -(where filename is the name of the file to put the data in)</P +>Every machine that is a Domain Controller for the domain SAMBA has to +register the NetBIOS group name SAMBA#1c with the WINS server and/or +by broadcast on the local network. The PDC also registers the unique +NetBIOS name SAMBA#1b with the WINS server. The name type #1b is +normally reserved for the domain master browser, a role that has +nothing to do with anything related to authentication, but the +Microsoft Domain implementation requires the domain master browser to +be on the same machine as the PDC.</P +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN2305" +></A +>13.3.1. How does a Workstation find its domain controller?</H3 ><P ->To import data, use: -<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->pdbedit -i plugin:/usr/lib/samba/pdb_xml.so:filename -e current-pdb</B -> - -Where filename is the name to read the data from and current-pdb to put it in.</P +>A NT workstation in the domain SAMBA that wants a local user to be +authenticated has to find the domain controller for SAMBA. It does +this by doing a NetBIOS name query for the group name SAMBA#1c. It +assumes that each of the machines it gets back from the queries is a +domain controller and can answer logon requests. To not open security +holes both the workstation and the selected (TODO: How is the DC +chosen) domain controller authenticate each other. After that the +workstation sends the user's credentials (his name and password) to +the domain controller, asking for approval.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN2308" +></A +>13.3.2. When is the PDC needed?</H3 +><P +>Whenever a user wants to change his password, this has to be done on +the PDC. To find the PDC, the workstation does a NetBIOS name query +for SAMBA#1b, assuming this machine maintains the master copy of the +SAM. The workstation contacts the PDC, both mutually authenticate and +the password change is done.</P +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2311" +></A +>13.4. Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller?</H2 +><P +>With version 2.2, no. The native NT SAM replication protocols have +not yet been fully implemented. The Samba Team is working on +understanding and implementing the protocols, but this work has not +been finished for version 2.2.</P +><P +>Can I get the benefits of a BDC with Samba? Yes. The main reason for +implementing a BDC is availability. If the PDC is a Samba machine, +a second Samba machine can be set up to +service logon requests whenever the PDC is down.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2315" +></A +>13.5. How do I set up a Samba BDC?</H2 +><P +>Several things have to be done:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>The domain SID has to be the same on the PDC and the BDC. This used to +be stored in the file private/MACHINE.SID. This file is not created +anymore since Samba 2.2.5 or even earlier. Nowadays the domain SID is +stored in the file private/secrets.tdb. Simply copying the secrets.tdb +from the PDC to the BDC does not work, as the BDC would +generate a new SID for itself and override the domain SID with this +new BDC SID.</P +><P +>To retrieve the domain SID from the PDC or an existing BDC and store it in the +secrets.tdb, execute 'net rpc getsid' on the BDC.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The Unix user database has to be synchronized from the PDC to the +BDC. This means that both the /etc/passwd and /etc/group have to be +replicated from the PDC to the BDC. This can be done manually +whenever changes are made, or the PDC is set up as a NIS master +server and the BDC as a NIS slave server. To set up the BDC as a +mere NIS client would not be enough, as the BDC would not be able to +access its user database in case of a PDC failure.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The Samba password database in the file private/smbpasswd has to be +replicated from the PDC to the BDC. This is a bit tricky, see the +next section.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Any netlogon share has to be replicated from the PDC to the +BDC. This can be done manually whenever login scripts are changed, +or it can be done automatically together with the smbpasswd +synchronization.</P +></LI +></UL +><P +>Finally, the BDC has to be found by the workstations. This can be done +by setting</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>workgroup = samba +domain master = no +domain logons = yes</PRE +></P +><P +>in the [global]-section of the smb.conf of the BDC. This makes the BDC +only register the name SAMBA#1c with the WINS server. This is no +problem as the name SAMBA#1c is a NetBIOS group name that is meant to +be registered by more than one machine. The parameter 'domain master = +no' forces the BDC not to register SAMBA#1b which as a unique NetBIOS +name is reserved for the Primary Domain Controller.</P +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN2332" +></A +>13.5.1. How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?</H3 +><P +>Replication of the smbpasswd file is sensitive. It has to be done +whenever changes to the SAM are made. Every user's password change is +done in the smbpasswd file and has to be replicated to the BDC. So +replicating the smbpasswd file very often is necessary.</P +><P +>As the smbpasswd file contains plain text password equivalents, it +must not be sent unencrypted over the wire. The best way to set up +smbpasswd replication from the PDC to the BDC is to use the utility +rsync. rsync can use ssh as a transport. ssh itself can be set up to +accept *only* rsync transfer without requiring the user to type a +password.</P +></DIV ></DIV ></DIV ><DIV @@ -13528,15 +11339,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="SAMBA-LDAP-HOWTO" ></A ->Chapter 19. Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory</H1 +>Chapter 14. Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2664" +NAME="AEN2353" ></A ->19.1. Purpose</H2 +>14.1. Purpose</H2 ><P >This document describes how to use an LDAP directory for storing Samba user account information traditionally stored in the smbpasswd(5) file. It is @@ -13602,9 +11413,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2684" +NAME="AEN2373" ></A ->19.2. Introduction</H2 +>14.2. Introduction</H2 ><P >Traditionally, when configuring <A HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" @@ -13719,9 +11530,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2713" +NAME="AEN2402" ></A ->19.3. Supported LDAP Servers</H2 +>14.3. Supported LDAP Servers</H2 ><P >The LDAP samdb code in 2.2.3 has been developed and tested using the OpenLDAP 2.0 server and client libraries. The same code should be able to work with @@ -13744,9 +11555,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2718" +NAME="AEN2407" ></A ->19.4. Schema and Relationship to the RFC 2307 posixAccount</H2 +>14.4. Schema and Relationship to the RFC 2307 posixAccount</H2 ><P >Samba 2.2.3 includes the necessary schema file for OpenLDAP 2.0 in <TT @@ -13803,17 +11614,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2730" +NAME="AEN2419" ></A ->19.5. Configuring Samba with LDAP</H2 +>14.5. Configuring Samba with LDAP</H2 ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2732" +NAME="AEN2421" ></A ->19.5.1. OpenLDAP configuration</H3 +>14.5.1. OpenLDAP configuration</H3 ><P >To include support for the sambaAccount object in an OpenLDAP directory server, first copy the samba.schema file to slapd's configuration directory.</P @@ -13893,9 +11704,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2749" +NAME="AEN2438" ></A ->19.5.2. Configuring Samba</H3 +>14.5.2. Configuring Samba</H3 ><P >The following parameters are available in smb.conf only with <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -14013,9 +11824,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2777" +NAME="AEN2466" ></A ->19.6. Accounts and Groups management</H2 +>14.6. Accounts and Groups management</H2 ><P >As users accounts are managed thru the sambaAccount objectclass, you should modify you existing administration tools to deal with sambaAccount attributes.</P @@ -14038,9 +11849,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2782" +NAME="AEN2471" ></A ->19.7. Security and sambaAccount</H2 +>14.7. Security and sambaAccount</H2 ><P >There are two important points to remember when discussing the security of sambaAccount entries in the directory.</P @@ -14117,9 +11928,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2802" +NAME="AEN2491" ></A ->19.8. LDAP specials attributes for sambaAccounts</H2 +>14.8. LDAP specials attributes for sambaAccounts</H2 ><P >The sambaAccount objectclass is composed of the following attributes:</P ><P @@ -14328,9 +12139,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2872" +NAME="AEN2561" ></A ->19.9. Example LDIF Entries for a sambaAccount</H2 +>14.9. Example LDIF Entries for a sambaAccount</H2 ><P >The following is a working LDIF with the inclusion of the posixAccount objectclass:</P ><P @@ -14386,9 +12197,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2880" +NAME="AEN2569" ></A ->19.10. Comments</H2 +>14.10. Comments</H2 ><P >Please mail all comments regarding this HOWTO to <A HREF="mailto:jerry@samba.org" @@ -14402,29 +12213,69 @@ last updated to reflect the Samba 2.2.3 release. </P CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="CVS-ACCESS" +NAME="ADS" ></A ->Chapter 20. HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</H1 +>Chapter 15. Using samba 3.0 with ActiveDirectory support</H1 +><P +>This is a VERY ROUGH guide to setting up the current (November 2001) +pre-alpha version of Samba 3.0 with kerberos authentication against a +Windows2000 KDC. The procedures listed here are likely to change as +the code develops.</P +><P +>Pieces you need before you begin: +<P +></P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +><TBODY +><TR +><TD +>a Windows 2000 server.</TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +>samba 3.0 or higher.</TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +>the MIT kerberos development libraries (either install from the above sources or use a package). The heimdal libraries will not work.</TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +>the OpenLDAP development libraries.</TD +></TR +></TBODY +></TABLE +><P +></P +></P ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" -><H2 +><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2891" +NAME="AEN2587" ></A ->20.1. Introduction</H2 +>15.1. Installing the required packages for Debian</H2 ><P ->Samba is developed in an open environment. Developers use CVS -(Concurrent Versioning System) to "checkin" (also known as -"commit") new source code. Samba's various CVS branches can -be accessed via anonymous CVS using the instructions -detailed in this chapter.</P +>On Debian you need to install the following packages: +<P +></P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +><TBODY +><TR +><TD +>libkrb5-dev</TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +>krb5-user</TD +></TR +></TBODY +></TABLE ><P ->This document is a modified version of the instructions found at -<A -HREF="http://samba.org/samba/cvs.html" -TARGET="_top" ->http://samba.org/samba/cvs.html</A +></P ></P ></DIV ><DIV @@ -14432,244 +12283,939 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2896" +NAME="AEN2593" ></A ->20.2. CVS Access to samba.org</H2 +>15.2. Installing the required packages for RedHat</H2 ><P ->The machine samba.org runs a publicly accessible CVS -repository for access to the source code of several packages, -including samba, rsync and jitterbug. There are two main ways of -accessing the CVS server on this host.</P +>On RedHat this means you should have at least: +<P +></P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +><TBODY +><TR +><TD +>krb5-workstation (for kinit)</TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +>krb5-libs (for linking with)</TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +>krb5-devel (because you are compiling from source)</TD +></TR +></TBODY +></TABLE +><P +></P +></P +><P +>in addition to the standard development environment.</P +><P +>Note that these are not standard on a RedHat install, and you may need +to get them off CD2.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2602" +></A +>15.3. Compile Samba</H2 +><P +>If your kerberos libraries are in a non-standard location then + remember to add the configure option --with-krb5=DIR.</P +><P +>After you run configure make sure that include/config.h contains + lines like this:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>#define HAVE_KRB5 1 +#define HAVE_LDAP 1</PRE +></P +><P +>If it doesn't then configure did not find your krb5 libraries or + your ldap libraries. Look in config.log to figure out why and fix + it.</P +><P +>Then compile and install Samba as usual. You must use at least the + following 3 options in smb.conf:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> realm = YOUR.KERBEROS.REALM + ads server = your.kerberos.server + security = ADS + encrypt passwords = yes</PRE +></P +><P +>Strictly speaking, you can omit the realm name and you can use an IP + address for the ads server. In that case Samba will auto-detect these.</P +><P +>You do *not* need a smbpasswd file, although it won't do any harm + and if you have one then Samba will be able to fall back to normal + password security for older clients. I expect that the above + required options will change soon when we get better active + directory integration.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2614" +></A +>15.4. Setup your /etc/krb5.conf</H2 +><P +>The minimal configuration for krb5.conf is:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> [realms] + YOUR.KERBEROS.REALM = { + kdc = your.kerberos.server + }</PRE +></P +><P +>Test your config by doing a "kinit USERNAME@REALM" and making sure that + your password is accepted by the Win2000 KDC. </P +><P +>NOTE: The realm must be uppercase. </P +><P +>You also must ensure that you can do a reverse DNS lookup on the IP +address of your KDC. Also, the name that this reverse lookup maps to +must either be the netbios name of the KDC (ie. the hostname with no +domain attached) or it can alternatively be the netbios name +followed by the realm. </P +><P +>The easiest way to ensure you get this right is to add a /etc/hosts +entry mapping the IP address of your KDC to its netbios name. If you +don't get this right then you will get a "local error" when you try +to join the realm.</P +><P +>If all you want is kerberos support in smbclient then you can skip +straight to step 5 now. Step 3 is only needed if you want kerberos +support in smbd.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2624" +></A +>15.5. Create the computer account</H2 +><P +>Do a "kinit" as a user that has authority to change arbitrary +passwords on the KDC ("Administrator" is a good choice). Then as a +user that has write permission on the Samba private directory +(usually root) run: +<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>net ads join</B +></P ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2899" +NAME="AEN2628" ></A ->20.2.1. Access via CVSweb</H3 +>15.5.1. Possible errors</H3 ><P ->You can access the source code via your -favourite WWW browser. This allows you to access the contents of -individual files in the repository and also to look at the revision -history and commit logs of individual files. You can also ask for a diff -listing between any two versions on the repository.</P ><P ->Use the URL : <A -HREF="http://samba.org/cgi-bin/cvsweb" -TARGET="_top" ->http://samba.org/cgi-bin/cvsweb</A ></P +><DIV +CLASS="VARIABLELIST" +><DL +><DT +>"bash: kinit: command not found"</DT +><DD +><P +>kinit is in the krb5-workstation RPM on RedHat systems, and is in /usr/kerberos/bin, so it won't be in the path until you log in again (or open a new terminal)</P +></DD +><DT +>"ADS support not compiled in"</DT +><DD +><P +>Samba must be reconfigured (remove config.cache) and recompiled (make clean all install) after the kerberos libs and headers are installed.</P +></DD +></DL +></DIV +></P +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2640" +></A +>15.6. Test your server setup</H2 +><P +>On a Windows 2000 client try <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>net use * \\server\share</B +>. You should +be logged in with kerberos without needing to know a password. If +this fails then run <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>klist tickets</B +>. Did you get a ticket for the +server? Does it have an encoding type of DES-CBC-MD5 ? </P ></DIV ><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2645" +></A +>15.7. Testing with smbclient</H2 +><P +>On your Samba server try to login to a Win2000 server or your Samba +server using smbclient and kerberos. Use smbclient as usual, but +specify the -k option to choose kerberos authentication.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2648" +></A +>15.8. Notes</H2 +><P +>You must change administrator password at least once after DC install, + to create the right encoding types</P +><P +>w2k doesn't seem to create the _kerberos._udp and _ldap._tcp in + their defaults DNS setup. Maybe fixed in service packs?</P +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="CHAPTER" +><HR><H1 +><A +NAME="IMPROVED-BROWSING" +></A +>Chapter 16. Improved browsing in samba</H1 +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2659" +></A +>16.1. Overview of browsing</H2 +><P +>SMB networking provides a mechanism by which clients can access a list +of machines in a network, a so-called "browse list". This list +contains machines that are ready to offer file and/or print services +to other machines within the network. Thus it does not include +machines which aren't currently able to do server tasks. The browse +list is heavily used by all SMB clients. Configuration of SMB +browsing has been problematic for some Samba users, hence this +document.</P +><P +>Browsing will NOT work if name resolution from NetBIOS names to IP +addresses does not function correctly. Use of a WINS server is highly +recommended to aid the resolution of NetBIOS (SMB) names to IP addresses. +WINS allows remote segment clients to obtain NetBIOS name_type information +that can NOT be provided by any other means of name resolution.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2663" +></A +>16.2. Browsing support in samba</H2 +><P +>Samba now fully supports browsing. The browsing is supported by nmbd +and is also controlled by options in the smb.conf file (see smb.conf(5)).</P +><P +>Samba can act as a local browse master for a workgroup and the ability +for samba to support domain logons and scripts is now available. See +DOMAIN.txt for more information on domain logons.</P +><P +>Samba can also act as a domain master browser for a workgroup. This +means that it will collate lists from local browse masters into a +wide area network server list. In order for browse clients to +resolve the names they may find in this list, it is recommended that +both samba and your clients use a WINS server.</P +><P +>Note that you should NOT set Samba to be the domain master for a +workgroup that has the same name as an NT Domain: on each wide area +network, you must only ever have one domain master browser per workgroup, +regardless of whether it is NT, Samba or any other type of domain master +that is providing this service.</P +><P +>[Note that nmbd can be configured as a WINS server, but it is not +necessary to specifically use samba as your WINS server. NTAS can +be configured as your WINS server. In a mixed NT server and +samba environment on a Wide Area Network, it is recommended that +you use the NT server's WINS server capabilities. In a samba-only +environment, it is recommended that you use one and only one nmbd +as your WINS server].</P +><P +>To get browsing to work you need to run nmbd as usual, but will need +to use the "workgroup" option in smb.conf to control what workgroup +Samba becomes a part of.</P +><P +>Samba also has a useful option for a Samba server to offer itself for +browsing on another subnet. It is recommended that this option is only +used for 'unusual' purposes: announcements over the internet, for +example. See "remote announce" in the smb.conf man page. </P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2672" +></A +>16.3. Problem resolution</H2 +><P +>If something doesn't work then hopefully the log.nmb file will help +you track down the problem. Try a debug level of 2 or 3 for finding +problems. Also note that the current browse list usually gets stored +in text form in a file called browse.dat.</P +><P +>Note that if it doesn't work for you, then you should still be able to +type the server name as \\SERVER in filemanager then hit enter and +filemanager should display the list of available shares.</P +><P +>Some people find browsing fails because they don't have the global +"guest account" set to a valid account. Remember that the IPC$ +connection that lists the shares is done as guest, and thus you must +have a valid guest account.</P +><P +>Also, a lot of people are getting bitten by the problem of too many +parameters on the command line of nmbd in inetd.conf. This trick is to +not use spaces between the option and the parameter (eg: -d2 instead +of -d 2), and to not use the -B and -N options. New versions of nmbd +are now far more likely to correctly find your broadcast and network +address, so in most cases these aren't needed.</P +><P +>The other big problem people have is that their broadcast address, +netmask or IP address is wrong (specified with the "interfaces" option +in smb.conf)</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2679" +></A +>16.4. Browsing across subnets</H2 +><P +>With the release of Samba 1.9.17(alpha1 and above) Samba has been +updated to enable it to support the replication of browse lists +across subnet boundaries. New code and options have been added to +achieve this. This section describes how to set this feature up +in different settings.</P +><P +>To see browse lists that span TCP/IP subnets (ie. networks separated +by routers that don't pass broadcast traffic) you must set up at least +one WINS server. The WINS server acts as a DNS for NetBIOS names, allowing +NetBIOS name to IP address translation to be done by doing a direct +query of the WINS server. This is done via a directed UDP packet on +port 137 to the WINS server machine. The reason for a WINS server is +that by default, all NetBIOS name to IP address translation is done +by broadcasts from the querying machine. This means that machines +on one subnet will not be able to resolve the names of machines on +another subnet without using a WINS server.</P +><P +>Remember, for browsing across subnets to work correctly, all machines, +be they Windows 95, Windows NT, or Samba servers must have the IP address +of a WINS server given to them by a DHCP server, or by manual configuration +(for Win95 and WinNT, this is in the TCP/IP Properties, under Network +settings) for Samba this is in the smb.conf file.</P +><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2904" +NAME="AEN2684" ></A ->20.2.2. Access via cvs</H3 +>16.4.1. How does cross subnet browsing work ?</H3 ><P ->You can also access the source code via a -normal cvs client. This gives you much more control over you can -do with the repository and allows you to checkout whole source trees -and keep them up to date via normal cvs commands. This is the -preferred method of access if you are a developer and not -just a casual browser.</P +>Cross subnet browsing is a complicated dance, containing multiple +moving parts. It has taken Microsoft several years to get the code +that achieves this correct, and Samba lags behind in some areas. +However, with the 1.9.17 release, Samba is capable of cross subnet +browsing when configured correctly.</P ><P ->To download the latest cvs source code, point your -browser at the URL : <A -HREF="http://www.cyclic.com/" -TARGET="_top" ->http://www.cyclic.com/</A ->. -and click on the 'How to get cvs' link. CVS is free software under -the GNU GPL (as is Samba). Note that there are several graphical CVS clients -which provide a graphical interface to the sometimes mundane CVS commands. -Links to theses clients are also available from http://www.cyclic.com.</P +>Consider a network set up as follows :</P ><P ->To gain access via anonymous cvs use the following steps. -For this example it is assumed that you want a copy of the -samba source code. For the other source code repositories -on this system just substitute the correct package name</P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> (DMB) + N1_A N1_B N1_C N1_D N1_E + | | | | | + ------------------------------------------------------- + | subnet 1 | + +---+ +---+ + |R1 | Router 1 Router 2 |R2 | + +---+ +---+ + | | + | subnet 2 subnet 3 | + -------------------------- ------------------------------------ + | | | | | | | | + N2_A N2_B N2_C N2_D N3_A N3_B N3_C N3_D + (WINS)</PRE +></P +><P +>Consisting of 3 subnets (1, 2, 3) connected by two routers +(R1, R2) - these do not pass broadcasts. Subnet 1 has 5 machines +on it, subnet 2 has 4 machines, subnet 3 has 4 machines. Assume +for the moment that all these machines are configured to be in the +same workgroup (for simplicities sake). Machine N1_C on subnet 1 +is configured as Domain Master Browser (ie. it will collate the +browse lists for the workgroup). Machine N2_D is configured as +WINS server and all the other machines are configured to register +their NetBIOS names with it.</P +><P +>As all these machines are booted up, elections for master browsers +will take place on each of the three subnets. Assume that machine +N1_C wins on subnet 1, N2_B wins on subnet 2, and N3_D wins on +subnet 3 - these machines are known as local master browsers for +their particular subnet. N1_C has an advantage in winning as the +local master browser on subnet 1 as it is set up as Domain Master +Browser.</P +><P +>On each of the three networks, machines that are configured to +offer sharing services will broadcast that they are offering +these services. The local master browser on each subnet will +receive these broadcasts and keep a record of the fact that +the machine is offering a service. This list of records is +the basis of the browse list. For this case, assume that +all the machines are configured to offer services so all machines +will be on the browse list.</P +><P +>For each network, the local master browser on that network is +considered 'authoritative' for all the names it receives via +local broadcast. This is because a machine seen by the local +master browser via a local broadcast must be on the same +network as the local master browser and thus is a 'trusted' +and 'verifiable' resource. Machines on other networks that +the local master browsers learn about when collating their +browse lists have not been directly seen - these records are +called 'non-authoritative'.</P +><P +>At this point the browse lists look as follows (these are +the machines you would see in your network neighborhood if +you looked in it on a particular network right now).</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>Subnet Browse Master List +------ ------------- ---- +Subnet1 N1_C N1_A, N1_B, N1_C, N1_D, N1_E + +Subnet2 N2_B N2_A, N2_B, N2_C, N2_D + +Subnet3 N3_D N3_A, N3_B, N3_C, N3_D</PRE +></P +><P +>Note that at this point all the subnets are separate, no +machine is seen across any of the subnets.</P +><P +>Now examine subnet 2. As soon as N2_B has become the local +master browser it looks for a Domain master browser to synchronize +its browse list with. It does this by querying the WINS server +(N2_D) for the IP address associated with the NetBIOS name +WORKGROUP>1B<. This name was registerd by the Domain master +browser (N1_C) with the WINS server as soon as it was booted.</P +><P +>Once N2_B knows the address of the Domain master browser it +tells it that is the local master browser for subnet 2 by +sending a MasterAnnouncement packet as a UDP port 138 packet. +It then synchronizes with it by doing a NetServerEnum2 call. This +tells the Domain Master Browser to send it all the server +names it knows about. Once the domain master browser receives +the MasterAnnouncement packet it schedules a synchronization +request to the sender of that packet. After both synchronizations +are done the browse lists look like :</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>Subnet Browse Master List +------ ------------- ---- +Subnet1 N1_C N1_A, N1_B, N1_C, N1_D, N1_E, + N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*) + +Subnet2 N2_B N2_A, N2_B, N2_C, N2_D + N1_A(*), N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*) + +Subnet3 N3_D N3_A, N3_B, N3_C, N3_D + +Servers with a (*) after them are non-authoritative names.</PRE +></P +><P +>At this point users looking in their network neighborhood on +subnets 1 or 2 will see all the servers on both, users on +subnet 3 will still only see the servers on their own subnet.</P +><P +>The same sequence of events that occured for N2_B now occurs +for the local master browser on subnet 3 (N3_D). When it +synchronizes browse lists with the domain master browser (N1_A) +it gets both the server entries on subnet 1, and those on +subnet 2. After N3_D has synchronized with N1_C and vica-versa +the browse lists look like.</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>Subnet Browse Master List +------ ------------- ---- +Subnet1 N1_C N1_A, N1_B, N1_C, N1_D, N1_E, + N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*), + N3_A(*), N3_B(*), N3_C(*), N3_D(*) + +Subnet2 N2_B N2_A, N2_B, N2_C, N2_D + N1_A(*), N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*) + +Subnet3 N3_D N3_A, N3_B, N3_C, N3_D + N1_A(*), N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*), + N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*) + +Servers with a (*) after them are non-authoritative names.</PRE +></P +><P +>At this point users looking in their network neighborhood on +subnets 1 or 3 will see all the servers on all sunbets, users on +subnet 2 will still only see the servers on subnets 1 and 2, but not 3.</P +><P +>Finally, the local master browser for subnet 2 (N2_B) will sync again +with the domain master browser (N1_C) and will recieve the missing +server entries. Finally - and as a steady state (if no machines +are removed or shut off) the browse lists will look like :</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>Subnet Browse Master List +------ ------------- ---- +Subnet1 N1_C N1_A, N1_B, N1_C, N1_D, N1_E, + N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*), + N3_A(*), N3_B(*), N3_C(*), N3_D(*) + +Subnet2 N2_B N2_A, N2_B, N2_C, N2_D + N1_A(*), N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*) + N3_A(*), N3_B(*), N3_C(*), N3_D(*) + +Subnet3 N3_D N3_A, N3_B, N3_C, N3_D + N1_A(*), N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*), + N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*) + +Servers with a (*) after them are non-authoritative names.</PRE +></P +><P +>Synchronizations between the domain master browser and local +master browsers will continue to occur, but this should be a +steady state situation.</P +><P +>If either router R1 or R2 fails the following will occur:</P ><P ></P ><OL TYPE="1" ><LI ><P -> Install a recent copy of cvs. All you really need is a - copy of the cvs client binary. +> Names of computers on each side of the inaccessible network fragments + will be maintained for as long as 36 minutes, in the network neighbourhood + lists. </P ></LI ><LI ><P -> Run the command +> Attempts to connect to these inaccessible computers will fail, but the + names will not be removed from the network neighbourhood lists. </P +></LI +><LI ><P -> <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot login</B -> +> If one of the fragments is cut off from the WINS server, it will only + be able to access servers on its local subnet, by using subnet-isolated + broadcast NetBIOS name resolution. The effects are similar to that of + losing access to a DNS server. </P +></LI +></OL +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2719" +></A +>16.5. Setting up a WINS server</H2 +><P +>Either a Samba machine or a Windows NT Server machine may be set up +as a WINS server. To set a Samba machine to be a WINS server you must +add the following option to the smb.conf file on the selected machine : +in the [globals] section add the line </P ><P -> When it asks you for a password type <TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" ><B ->cvs</B -></TT ->. - </P -></LI -><LI +CLASS="COMMAND" +> wins support = yes</B +></P ><P -> Run the command - </P +>Versions of Samba previous to 1.9.17 had this parameter default to +yes. If you have any older versions of Samba on your network it is +strongly suggested you upgrade to 1.9.17 or above, or at the very +least set the parameter to 'no' on all these machines.</P ><P -> <B +>Machines with "<B CLASS="COMMAND" ->cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot co samba</B -> - </P +>wins support = yes</B +>" will keep a list of +all NetBIOS names registered with them, acting as a DNS for NetBIOS names.</P ><P -> This will create a directory called samba containing the - latest samba source code (i.e. the HEAD tagged cvs branch). This - currently corresponds to the 3.0 development tree. - </P +>You should set up only ONE wins server. Do NOT set the +"<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>wins support = yes</B +>" option on more than one Samba +server.</P ><P -> CVS branches other HEAD can be obtained by using the <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->-r</I -></TT -> - and defining a tag name. A list of branch tag names can be found on the - "Development" page of the samba web site. A common request is to obtain the - latest 2.2 release code. This could be done by using the following command. - </P +>To set up a Windows NT Server as a WINS server you need to set up +the WINS service - see your NT documentation for details. Note that +Windows NT WINS Servers can replicate to each other, allowing more +than one to be set up in a complex subnet environment. As Microsoft +refuse to document these replication protocols Samba cannot currently +participate in these replications. It is possible in the future that +a Samba->Samba WINS replication protocol may be defined, in which +case more than one Samba machine could be set up as a WINS server +but currently only one Samba server should have the "wins support = yes" +parameter set.</P ><P -> <B +>After the WINS server has been configured you must ensure that all +machines participating on the network are configured with the address +of this WINS server. If your WINS server is a Samba machine, fill in +the Samba machine IP address in the "Primary WINS Server" field of +the "Control Panel->Network->Protocols->TCP->WINS Server" dialogs +in Windows 95 or Windows NT. To tell a Samba server the IP address +of the WINS server add the following line to the [global] section of +all smb.conf files :</P +><P +><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot co -r SAMBA_2_2 samba</B -> - </P -></LI -><LI +> wins server = >name or IP address<</B +></P ><P -> Whenever you want to merge in the latest code changes use - the following command from within the samba directory: - </P +>where >name or IP address< is either the DNS name of the WINS server +machine or its IP address.</P ><P -> <B +>Note that this line MUST NOT BE SET in the smb.conf file of the Samba +server acting as the WINS server itself. If you set both the +"<B CLASS="COMMAND" ->cvs update -d -P</B -> - </P -></LI -></OL -></DIV -></DIV +>wins support = yes</B +>" option and the +"<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>wins server = >name<</B +>" option then +nmbd will fail to start.</P +><P +>There are two possible scenarios for setting up cross subnet browsing. +The first details setting up cross subnet browsing on a network containing +Windows 95, Samba and Windows NT machines that are not configured as +part of a Windows NT Domain. The second details setting up cross subnet +browsing on networks that contain NT Domains.</P ></DIV ><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="GROUPMAPPING" +NAME="AEN2738" ></A ->Chapter 21. Group mapping HOWTO</H1 +>16.6. Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</H2 ><P -> -Starting with Samba 3.0 alpha 2, a new group mapping function is available. The -current method (likely to change) to manage the groups is a new command called -<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbgroupedit</B ->.</P +>To set up cross subnet browsing on a network containing machines +in up to be in a WORKGROUP, not an NT Domain you need to set up one +Samba server to be the Domain Master Browser (note that this is *NOT* +the same as a Primary Domain Controller, although in an NT Domain the +same machine plays both roles). The role of a Domain master browser is +to collate the browse lists from local master browsers on all the +subnets that have a machine participating in the workgroup. Without +one machine configured as a domain master browser each subnet would +be an isolated workgroup, unable to see any machines on any other +subnet. It is the presense of a domain master browser that makes +cross subnet browsing possible for a workgroup.</P ><P ->The first immediate reason to use the group mapping on a PDC, is that -the <B +>In an WORKGROUP environment the domain master browser must be a +Samba server, and there must only be one domain master browser per +workgroup name. To set up a Samba server as a domain master browser, +set the following option in the [global] section of the smb.conf file :</P +><P +><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->domain admin group</B -> of <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf</TT -> is -now gone. This parameter was used to give the listed users local admin rights -on their workstations. It was some magic stuff that simply worked but didn't -scale very well for complex setups.</P +> domain master = yes</B +></P ><P ->Let me explain how it works on NT/W2K, to have this magic fade away. -When installing NT/W2K on a computer, the installer program creates some users -and groups. Notably the 'Administrators' group, and gives to that group some -privileges like the ability to change the date and time or to kill any process -(or close too) running on the local machine. The 'Administrator' user is a -member of the 'Administrators' group, and thus 'inherit' the 'Administrators' -group privileges. If a 'joe' user is created and become a member of the -'Administrator' group, 'joe' has exactly the same rights as 'Administrator'.</P +>The domain master browser should also preferrably be the local master +browser for its own subnet. In order to achieve this set the following +options in the [global] section of the smb.conf file :</P ><P ->When a NT/W2K machine is joined to a domain, during that phase, the "Domain -Administrators' group of the PDC is added to the 'Administrators' group of the -workstation. Every members of the 'Domain Administrators' group 'inherit' the -rights of the 'Administrators' group when logging on the workstation.</P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> domain master = yes + local master = yes + preferred master = yes + os level = 65</PRE +></P ><P ->You are now wondering how to make some of your samba PDC users members of the -'Domain Administrators' ? That's really easy.</P +>The domain master browser may be the same machine as the WINS +server, if you require.</P ><P +>Next, you should ensure that each of the subnets contains a +machine that can act as a local master browser for the +workgroup. Any NT machine should be able to do this, as will +Windows 95 machines (although these tend to get rebooted more +often, so it's not such a good idea to use these). To make a +Samba server a local master browser set the following +options in the [global] section of the smb.conf file :</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> domain master = no + local master = yes + preferred master = yes + os level = 65</PRE ></P -><OL -TYPE="1" -><LI ><P ->create a unix group (usually in <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/group</TT ->), let's call it domadm</P -></LI -><LI +>Do not do this for more than one Samba server on each subnet, +or they will war with each other over which is to be the local +master browser.</P ><P ->add to this group the users that must be Administrators. For example if you want joe,john and mary, your entry in <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/group</TT -> will look like:</P +>The "local master" parameter allows Samba to act as a local master +browser. The "preferred master" causes nmbd to force a browser +election on startup and the "os level" parameter sets Samba high +enough so that it should win any browser elections.</P +><P +>If you have an NT machine on the subnet that you wish to +be the local master browser then you can disable Samba from +becoming a local master browser by setting the following +options in the [global] section of the smb.conf file :</P ><P ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->domadm:x:502:joe,john,mary</PRE +> domain master = no + local master = no + preferred master = no + os level = 0</PRE ></P -></LI -><LI +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2756" +></A +>16.7. Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</H2 ><P ->Map this domadm group to the <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->domain admins</B -> group by running the command:</P +>If you are adding Samba servers to a Windows NT Domain then +you must not set up a Samba server as a domain master browser. +By default, a Windows NT Primary Domain Controller for a Domain +name is also the Domain master browser for that name, and many +things will break if a Samba server registers the Domain master +browser NetBIOS name (DOMAIN>1B<) with WINS instead of the PDC.</P ><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbgroupedit -c "Domain Admins" -u domadm</B +>For subnets other than the one containing the Windows NT PDC +you may set up Samba servers as local master browsers as +described. To make a Samba server a local master browser set +the following options in the [global] section of the smb.conf +file :</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> domain master = no + local master = yes + preferred master = yes + os level = 65</PRE ></P -></LI -></OL ><P ->You're set, joe, john and mary are domain administrators !</P +>If you wish to have a Samba server fight the election with machines +on the same subnet you may set the "os level" parameter to lower +levels. By doing this you can tune the order of machines that +will become local master browsers if they are running. For +more details on this see the section "FORCING SAMBA TO BE THE MASTER" +below.</P ><P ->Like the Domain Admins group, you can map any arbitrary Unix group to any NT -group. You can also make any Unix group a domain group. For example, on a domain -member machine (an NT/W2K or a samba server running winbind), you would like to -give access to a certain directory to some users who are member of a group on -your samba PDC. Flag that group as a domain group by running:</P +>If you have Windows NT machines that are members of the domain +on all subnets, and you are sure they will always be running then +you can disable Samba from taking part in browser elections and +ever becoming a local master browser by setting following options +in the [global] section of the smb.conf file :</P ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbgroupedit -a unixgroup -td</B +> domain master = no + local master = no + preferred master = no + os level = 0</B ></P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2766" +></A +>16.8. Forcing samba to be the master</H2 ><P ->You can list the various groups in the mapping database like this</P +>Who becomes the "master browser" is determined by an election process +using broadcasts. Each election packet contains a number of parameters +which determine what precedence (bias) a host should have in the +election. By default Samba uses a very low precedence and thus loses +elections to just about anyone else.</P +><P +>If you want Samba to win elections then just set the "os level" global +option in smb.conf to a higher number. It defaults to 0. Using 34 +would make it win all elections over every other system (except other +samba systems!)</P +><P +>A "os level" of 2 would make it beat WfWg and Win95, but not NTAS. A +NTAS domain controller uses level 32.</P +><P +>The maximum os level is 255</P +><P +>If you want samba to force an election on startup, then set the +"preferred master" global option in smb.conf to "yes". Samba will +then have a slight advantage over other potential master browsers +that are not preferred master browsers. Use this parameter with +care, as if you have two hosts (whether they are windows 95 or NT or +samba) on the same local subnet both set with "preferred master" to +"yes", then periodically and continually they will force an election +in order to become the local master browser.</P +><P +>If you want samba to be a "domain master browser", then it is +recommended that you also set "preferred master" to "yes", because +samba will not become a domain master browser for the whole of your +LAN or WAN if it is not also a local master browser on its own +broadcast isolated subnet.</P +><P +>It is possible to configure two samba servers to attempt to become +the domain master browser for a domain. The first server that comes +up will be the domain master browser. All other samba servers will +attempt to become the domain master browser every 5 minutes. They +will find that another samba server is already the domain master +browser and will fail. This provides automatic redundancy, should +the current domain master browser fail.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2775" +></A +>16.9. Making samba the domain master</H2 +><P +>The domain master is responsible for collating the browse lists of +multiple subnets so that browsing can occur between subnets. You can +make samba act as the domain master by setting "domain master = yes" +in smb.conf. By default it will not be a domain master.</P +><P +>Note that you should NOT set Samba to be the domain master for a +workgroup that has the same name as an NT Domain.</P +><P +>When samba is the domain master and the master browser it will listen +for master announcements (made roughly every twelve minutes) from local +master browsers on other subnets and then contact them to synchronise +browse lists.</P +><P +>If you want samba to be the domain master then I suggest you also set +the "os level" high enough to make sure it wins elections, and set +"preferred master" to "yes", to get samba to force an election on +startup.</P +><P +>Note that all your servers (including samba) and clients should be +using a WINS server to resolve NetBIOS names. If your clients are only +using broadcasting to resolve NetBIOS names, then two things will occur:</P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +> your local master browsers will be unable to find a domain master + browser, as it will only be looking on the local subnet. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> if a client happens to get hold of a domain-wide browse list, and + a user attempts to access a host in that list, it will be unable to + resolve the NetBIOS name of that host. + </P +></LI +></OL +><P +>If, however, both samba and your clients are using a WINS server, then:</P ><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbgroupedit -v</B ></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +> your local master browsers will contact the WINS server and, as long as + samba has registered that it is a domain master browser with the WINS + server, your local master browser will receive samba's ip address + as its domain master browser. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> when a client receives a domain-wide browse list, and a user attempts + to access a host in that list, it will contact the WINS server to + resolve the NetBIOS name of that host. as long as that host has + registered its NetBIOS name with the same WINS server, the user will + be able to see that host. + </P +></LI +></OL +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2793" +></A +>16.10. Note about broadcast addresses</H2 +><P +>If your network uses a "0" based broadcast address (for example if it +ends in a 0) then you will strike problems. Windows for Workgroups +does not seem to support a 0's broadcast and you will probably find +that browsing and name lookups won't work.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN2796" +></A +>16.11. Multiple interfaces</H2 +><P +>Samba now supports machines with multiple network interfaces. If you +have multiple interfaces then you will need to use the "interfaces" +option in smb.conf to configure them. See smb.conf(5) for details.</P +></DIV ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="CHAPTER" @@ -14677,15 +13223,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="SPEED" ></A ->Chapter 22. Samba performance issues</H1 +>Chapter 17. Samba performance issues</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2982" +NAME="AEN2814" ></A ->22.1. Comparisons</H2 +>17.1. Comparisons</H2 ><P >The Samba server uses TCP to talk to the client. Thus if you are trying to see if it performs well you should really compare it to @@ -14714,17 +13260,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2988" +NAME="AEN2820" ></A ->22.2. Oplocks</H2 +>17.2. Oplocks</H2 ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2990" +NAME="AEN2822" ></A ->22.2.1. Overview</H3 +>17.2.1. Overview</H3 ><P >Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission from a server to locally cache file operations. If a server grants an oplock @@ -14758,9 +13304,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2998" +NAME="AEN2830" ></A ->22.2.2. Level2 Oplocks</H3 +>17.2.2. Level2 Oplocks</H3 ><P >With Samba 2.0.5 a new capability - level2 (read only) oplocks is supported (although the option is off by default - see the smb.conf @@ -14782,9 +13328,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3004" +NAME="AEN2836" ></A ->22.2.3. Old 'fake oplocks' option - deprecated</H3 +>17.2.3. Old 'fake oplocks' option - deprecated</H3 ><P >Samba can also fake oplocks, by granting a oplock whenever a client asks for one. This is controlled using the smb.conf option "fake @@ -14803,9 +13349,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3008" +NAME="AEN2840" ></A ->22.3. Socket options</H2 +>17.3. Socket options</H2 ><P >There are a number of socket options that can greatly affect the performance of a TCP based server like Samba.</P @@ -14831,9 +13377,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3015" +NAME="AEN2847" ></A ->22.4. Read size</H2 +>17.4. Read size</H2 ><P >The option "read size" affects the overlap of disk reads/writes with network reads/writes. If the amount of data being transferred in @@ -14857,9 +13403,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3020" +NAME="AEN2852" ></A ->22.5. Max xmit</H2 +>17.5. Max xmit</H2 ><P >At startup the client and server negotiate a "maximum transmit" size, which limits the size of nearly all SMB commands. You can set the @@ -14880,9 +13426,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3025" +NAME="AEN2857" ></A ->22.6. Locking</H2 +>17.6. Locking</H2 ><P >By default Samba does not implement strict locking on each read/write call (although it did in previous versions). If you enable strict @@ -14897,9 +13443,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3029" +NAME="AEN2861" ></A ->22.7. Share modes</H2 +>17.7. Share modes</H2 ><P >Some people find that opening files is very slow. This is often because of the "share modes" code needed to fully implement the dos @@ -14927,9 +13473,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3034" +NAME="AEN2866" ></A ->22.8. Log level</H2 +>17.8. Log level</H2 ><P >If you set the log level (also known as "debug level") higher than 2 then you may suffer a large drop in performance. This is because the @@ -14941,9 +13487,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3037" +NAME="AEN2869" ></A ->22.9. Wide lines</H2 +>17.9. Wide lines</H2 ><P >The "wide links" option is now enabled by default, but if you disable it (for better security) then you may suffer a performance hit in @@ -14955,9 +13501,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3040" +NAME="AEN2872" ></A ->22.10. Read raw</H2 +>17.10. Read raw</H2 ><P >The "read raw" operation is designed to be an optimised, low-latency file read operation. A server may choose to not support it, @@ -14977,9 +13523,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3045" +NAME="AEN2877" ></A ->22.11. Write raw</H2 +>17.11. Write raw</H2 ><P >The "write raw" operation is designed to be an optimised, low-latency file write operation. A server may choose to not support it, @@ -14994,9 +13540,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3049" +NAME="AEN2881" ></A ->22.12. Read prediction</H2 +>17.12. Read prediction</H2 ><P >Samba can do read prediction on some of the SMB commands. Read prediction means that Samba reads some extra data on the last file it @@ -15020,9 +13566,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3056" +NAME="AEN2888" ></A ->22.13. Memory mapping</H2 +>17.13. Memory mapping</H2 ><P >Samba supports reading files via memory mapping them. One some machines this can give a large boost to performance, on others it @@ -15041,9 +13587,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3061" +NAME="AEN2893" ></A ->22.14. Slow Clients</H2 +>17.14. Slow Clients</H2 ><P >One person has reported that setting the protocol to COREPLUS rather than LANMAN2 gave a dramatic speed improvement (from 10k/s to 150k/s).</P @@ -15058,9 +13604,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3065" +NAME="AEN2897" ></A ->22.15. Slow Logins</H2 +>17.15. Slow Logins</H2 ><P >Slow logins are almost always due to the password checking time. Using the lowest practical "password level" will improve things a lot. You @@ -15071,9 +13617,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3068" +NAME="AEN2900" ></A ->22.16. Client tuning</H2 +>17.16. Client tuning</H2 ><P >Often a speed problem can be traced to the client. The client (for example Windows for Workgroups) can often be tuned for better TCP @@ -15175,9 +13721,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3100" +NAME="AEN2932" ></A ->22.17. My Results</H2 +>17.17. My Results</H2 ><P >Some people want to see real numbers in a document like this, so here they are. I have a 486sx33 client running WfWg 3.11 with the 3.11b @@ -15200,466 +13746,13 @@ smbclient running on another linux box. Maybe I'll add those results here someday ...</P ></DIV ></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="PART" -><A -NAME="AEN3106" -></A -><DIV -CLASS="TITLEPAGE" -><H1 -CLASS="TITLE" ->IV. Appendixes</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="TOC" -><DL -><DT -><B ->Table of Contents</B -></DT -><DT ->23. <A -HREF="#PORTABILITY" ->Portability</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->23.1. <A -HREF="#AEN3115" ->HPUX</A -></DT -><DT ->23.2. <A -HREF="#AEN3121" ->SCO Unix</A -></DT -><DT ->23.3. <A -HREF="#AEN3125" ->DNIX</A -></DT -><DT ->23.4. <A -HREF="#AEN3154" ->RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->24. <A -HREF="#OTHER-CLIENTS" ->Samba and other CIFS clients</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->24.1. <A -HREF="#AEN3175" ->Macintosh clients?</A -></DT -><DT ->24.2. <A -HREF="#AEN3184" ->OS2 Client</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->24.2.1. <A -HREF="#AEN3186" ->How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or - OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba?</A -></DT -><DT ->24.2.2. <A -HREF="#AEN3201" ->How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect), - OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba?</A -></DT -><DT ->24.2.3. <A -HREF="#AEN3210" ->Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version) - is used as a client?</A -></DT -><DT ->24.2.4. <A -HREF="#AEN3214" ->How do I get printer driver download working - for OS/2 clients?</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->24.3. <A -HREF="#AEN3224" ->Windows for Workgroups</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->24.3.1. <A -HREF="#AEN3226" ->Use latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft</A -></DT -><DT ->24.3.2. <A -HREF="#AEN3231" ->Delete .pwl files after password change</A -></DT -><DT ->24.3.3. <A -HREF="#AEN3236" ->Configure WfW password handling</A -></DT -><DT ->24.3.4. <A -HREF="#AEN3240" ->Case handling of passwords</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->24.4. <A -HREF="#AEN3245" ->Windows '95/'98</A -></DT -><DT ->24.5. <A -HREF="#AEN3261" ->Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->25. <A -HREF="#BUGREPORT" ->Reporting Bugs</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->25.1. <A -HREF="#AEN3285" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->25.2. <A -HREF="#AEN3295" ->General info</A -></DT -><DT ->25.3. <A -HREF="#AEN3301" ->Debug levels</A -></DT -><DT ->25.4. <A -HREF="#AEN3318" ->Internal errors</A -></DT -><DT ->25.5. <A -HREF="#AEN3328" ->Attaching to a running process</A -></DT -><DT ->25.6. <A -HREF="#AEN3331" ->Patches</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->26. <A -HREF="#DIAGNOSIS" ->Diagnosing your samba server</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->26.1. <A -HREF="#AEN3354" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->26.2. <A -HREF="#AEN3359" ->Assumptions</A -></DT -><DT ->26.3. <A -HREF="#AEN3369" ->Tests</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->26.3.1. <A -HREF="#AEN3371" ->Test 1</A -></DT -><DT ->26.3.2. <A -HREF="#AEN3377" ->Test 2</A -></DT -><DT ->26.3.3. <A -HREF="#AEN3383" ->Test 3</A -></DT -><DT ->26.3.4. <A -HREF="#AEN3398" ->Test 4</A -></DT -><DT ->26.3.5. <A -HREF="#AEN3403" ->Test 5</A -></DT -><DT ->26.3.6. <A -HREF="#AEN3409" ->Test 6</A -></DT -><DT ->26.3.7. <A -HREF="#AEN3417" ->Test 7</A -></DT -><DT ->26.3.8. <A -HREF="#AEN3443" ->Test 8</A -></DT -><DT ->26.3.9. <A -HREF="#AEN3460" ->Test 9</A -></DT -><DT ->26.3.10. <A -HREF="#AEN3468" ->Test 10</A -></DT -><DT ->26.3.11. <A -HREF="#AEN3474" ->Test 11</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->26.4. <A -HREF="#AEN3479" ->Still having troubles?</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -></DL -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><HR><H1 -><A -NAME="PORTABILITY" -></A ->Chapter 23. Portability</H1 -><P ->Samba works on a wide range of platforms but the interface all the -platforms provide is not always compatible. This chapter contains -platform-specific information about compiling and using samba.</P -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN3115" -></A ->23.1. HPUX</H2 -><P ->HP's implementation of supplementary groups is, er, non-standard (for -hysterical reasons). There are two group files, /etc/group and -/etc/logingroup; the system maps UIDs to numbers using the former, but -initgroups() reads the latter. Most system admins who know the ropes -symlink /etc/group to /etc/logingroup (hard link doesn't work for reasons -too stupid to go into here). initgroups() will complain if one of the -groups you're in in /etc/logingroup has what it considers to be an invalid -ID, which means outside the range [0..UID_MAX], where UID_MAX is (I think) -60000 currently on HP-UX. This precludes -2 and 65534, the usual 'nobody' -GIDs.</P -><P ->If you encounter this problem, make sure that the programs that are failing -to initgroups() be run as users not in any groups with GIDs outside the -allowed range.</P -><P ->This is documented in the HP manual pages under setgroups(2) and passwd(4).</P -><P ->On HPUX you must use gcc or the HP Ansi compiler. The free compiler -that comes with HP-UX is not Ansi compliant and cannot compile -Samba.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN3121" -></A ->23.2. SCO Unix</H2 -><P -> -If you run an old version of SCO Unix then you may need to get important -TCP/IP patches for Samba to work correctly. Without the patch, you may -encounter corrupt data transfers using samba.</P -><P ->The patch you need is UOD385 Connection Drivers SLS. It is available from -SCO (ftp.sco.com, directory SLS, files uod385a.Z and uod385a.ltr.Z).</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN3125" -></A ->23.3. DNIX</H2 -><P ->DNIX has a problem with seteuid() and setegid(). These routines are -needed for Samba to work correctly, but they were left out of the DNIX -C library for some reason.</P -><P ->For this reason Samba by default defines the macro NO_EID in the DNIX -section of includes.h. This works around the problem in a limited way, -but it is far from ideal, some things still won't work right.</P -><P -> -To fix the problem properly you need to assemble the following two -functions and then either add them to your C library or link them into -Samba.</P -><P -> -put this in the file <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->setegid.s</TT ->:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> .globl _setegid -_setegid: - moveq #47,d0 - movl #100,a0 - moveq #1,d1 - movl 4(sp),a1 - trap #9 - bccs 1$ - jmp cerror -1$: - clrl d0 - rts</PRE -></P -><P ->put this in the file <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->seteuid.s</TT ->:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> .globl _seteuid -_seteuid: - moveq #47,d0 - movl #100,a0 - moveq #0,d1 - movl 4(sp),a1 - trap #9 - bccs 1$ - jmp cerror -1$: - clrl d0 - rts</PRE -></P -><P ->after creating the above files you then assemble them using</P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->as seteuid.s</B -></P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->as setegid.s</B -></P -><P ->that should produce the files <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->seteuid.o</TT -> and -<TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->setegid.o</TT -></P -><P ->then you need to add these to the LIBSM line in the DNIX section of -the Samba Makefile. Your LIBSM line will then look something like this:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->LIBSM = setegid.o seteuid.o -ln</PRE -></P -><P -> -You should then remove the line:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->#define NO_EID</PRE -></P -><P ->from the DNIX section of <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->includes.h</TT -></P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN3154" -></A ->23.4. RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II</H2 -><P ->By default RedHat Rembrandt-II during installation adds an -entry to /etc/hosts as follows: -<PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> 127.0.0.1 loopback "hostname"."domainname"</PRE -></P -><P ->This causes Samba to loop back onto the loopback interface. -The result is that Samba fails to communicate correctly with -the world and therefor may fail to correctly negotiate who -is the master browse list holder and who is the master browser.</P -><P ->Corrective Action: Delete the entry after the word loopback - in the line starting 127.0.0.1</P -></DIV -></DIV ><DIV CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A NAME="OTHER-CLIENTS" ></A ->Chapter 24. Samba and other CIFS clients</H1 +>Chapter 18. Samba and other CIFS clients</H1 ><P >This chapter contains client-specific information.</P ><DIV @@ -15667,9 +13760,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3175" +NAME="AEN2953" ></A ->24.1. Macintosh clients?</H2 +>18.1. Macintosh clients?</H2 ><P >Yes. <A HREF="http://www.thursby.com/" @@ -15713,17 +13806,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3184" +NAME="AEN2962" ></A ->24.2. OS2 Client</H2 +>18.2. OS2 Client</H2 ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3186" +NAME="AEN2964" ></A ->24.2.1. How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or +>18.2.1. How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba?</H3 ><P >A more complete answer to this question can be @@ -15780,9 +13873,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3201" +NAME="AEN2979" ></A ->24.2.2. How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect), +>18.2.2. How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect), OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba?</H3 ><P >You can use the free Microsoft LAN Manager 2.2c Client @@ -15824,9 +13917,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3210" +NAME="AEN2988" ></A ->24.2.3. Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version) +>18.2.3. Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version) is used as a client?</H3 ><P >When you do a NET VIEW or use the "File and Print @@ -15846,9 +13939,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3214" +NAME="AEN2992" ></A ->24.2.4. How do I get printer driver download working +>18.2.4. How do I get printer driver download working for OS/2 clients?</H3 ><P >First, create a share called [PRINTDRV] that is @@ -15897,17 +13990,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3224" +NAME="AEN3002" ></A ->24.3. Windows for Workgroups</H2 +>18.3. Windows for Workgroups</H2 ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3226" +NAME="AEN3004" ></A ->24.3.1. Use latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft</H3 +>18.3.1. Use latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft</H3 ><P >Use the latest TCP/IP stack from microsoft if you use Windows for workgroups.</P @@ -15927,9 +14020,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3231" +NAME="AEN3009" ></A ->24.3.2. Delete .pwl files after password change</H3 +>18.3.2. Delete .pwl files after password change</H3 ><P >WfWg does a lousy job with passwords. I find that if I change my password on either the unix box or the PC the safest thing to do is to @@ -15947,9 +14040,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3236" +NAME="AEN3014" ></A ->24.3.3. Configure WfW password handling</H3 +>18.3.3. Configure WfW password handling</H3 ><P >There is a program call admincfg.exe on the last disk (disk 8) of the WFW 3.11 disk set. To install it @@ -15966,9 +14059,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3240" +NAME="AEN3018" ></A ->24.3.4. Case handling of passwords</H3 +>18.3.4. Case handling of passwords</H3 ><P >Windows for Workgroups uppercases the password before sending it to the server. Unix passwords can be case-sensitive though. Check the <A HREF="smb.conf.5.html" @@ -15985,9 +14078,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3245" +NAME="AEN3023" ></A ->24.4. Windows '95/'98</H2 +>18.4. Windows '95/'98</H2 ><P >When using Windows 95 OEM SR2 the following updates are recommended where Samba is being used. Please NOTE that the above change will affect you once these @@ -16033,9 +14126,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3261" +NAME="AEN3039" ></A ->24.5. Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</H2 +>18.5. Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</H2 ><P > There are several annoyances with Windows 2000 SP2. One of which @@ -16115,28 +14208,191 @@ create accounts on the Samba host for Domain users.</I CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="BUGREPORT" +NAME="CVS-ACCESS" ></A ->Chapter 25. Reporting Bugs</H1 +>Chapter 19. HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3285" +NAME="AEN3063" +></A +>19.1. Introduction</H2 +><P +>Samba is developed in an open environment. Developers use CVS +(Concurrent Versioning System) to "checkin" (also known as +"commit") new source code. Samba's various CVS branches can +be accessed via anonymous CVS using the instructions +detailed in this chapter.</P +><P +>This document is a modified version of the instructions found at +<A +HREF="http://samba.org/samba/cvs.html" +TARGET="_top" +>http://samba.org/samba/cvs.html</A +></P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN3068" ></A ->25.1. Introduction</H2 +>19.2. CVS Access to samba.org</H2 ><P ->The email address for bug reports for stable releases is <A -HREF="samba@samba.org" +>The machine samba.org runs a publicly accessible CVS +repository for access to the source code of several packages, +including samba, rsync and jitterbug. There are two main ways of +accessing the CVS server on this host.</P +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN3071" +></A +>19.2.1. Access via CVSweb</H3 +><P +>You can access the source code via your +favourite WWW browser. This allows you to access the contents of +individual files in the repository and also to look at the revision +history and commit logs of individual files. You can also ask for a diff +listing between any two versions on the repository.</P +><P +>Use the URL : <A +HREF="http://samba.org/cgi-bin/cvsweb" TARGET="_top" ->samba@samba.org</A ->. -Bug reports for alpha releases should go to <A -HREF="mailto:samba-technical@samba.org" +>http://samba.org/cgi-bin/cvsweb</A +></P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN3076" +></A +>19.2.2. Access via cvs</H3 +><P +>You can also access the source code via a +normal cvs client. This gives you much more control over you can +do with the repository and allows you to checkout whole source trees +and keep them up to date via normal cvs commands. This is the +preferred method of access if you are a developer and not +just a casual browser.</P +><P +>To download the latest cvs source code, point your +browser at the URL : <A +HREF="http://www.cyclic.com/" TARGET="_top" ->samba-technical@samba.org</A ->.</P +>http://www.cyclic.com/</A +>. +and click on the 'How to get cvs' link. CVS is free software under +the GNU GPL (as is Samba). Note that there are several graphical CVS clients +which provide a graphical interface to the sometimes mundane CVS commands. +Links to theses clients are also available from http://www.cyclic.com.</P +><P +>To gain access via anonymous cvs use the following steps. +For this example it is assumed that you want a copy of the +samba source code. For the other source code repositories +on this system just substitute the correct package name</P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +> Install a recent copy of cvs. All you really need is a + copy of the cvs client binary. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> Run the command + </P +><P +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot login</B +> + </P +><P +> When it asks you for a password type <TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +>cvs</B +></TT +>. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> Run the command + </P +><P +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot co samba</B +> + </P +><P +> This will create a directory called samba containing the + latest samba source code (i.e. the HEAD tagged cvs branch). This + currently corresponds to the 3.0 development tree. + </P +><P +> CVS branches other HEAD can be obtained by using the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>-r</I +></TT +> + and defining a tag name. A list of branch tag names can be found on the + "Development" page of the samba web site. A common request is to obtain the + latest 2.2 release code. This could be done by using the following command. + </P +><P +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot co -r SAMBA_2_2 samba</B +> + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> Whenever you want to merge in the latest code changes use + the following command from within the samba directory: + </P +><P +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>cvs update -d -P</B +> + </P +></LI +></OL +></DIV +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="CHAPTER" +><HR><H1 +><A +NAME="BUGREPORT" +></A +>Chapter 20. Reporting Bugs</H1 +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN3111" +></A +>20.1. Introduction</H2 +><P +>The email address for bug reports is samba@samba.org</P ><P >Please take the time to read this file before you submit a bug report. Also, please see if it has changed between releases, as we @@ -16157,20 +14413,16 @@ that list that may be able to help you.</P ><P >You may also like to look though the recent mailing list archives, which are conveniently accessible on the Samba web pages -at <A -HREF="http://samba.org/samba/" -TARGET="_top" ->http://samba.org/samba/</A ->.</P +at http://samba.org/samba/ </P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3295" +NAME="AEN3118" ></A ->25.2. General info</H2 +>20.2. General info</H2 ><P >Before submitting a bug report check your config for silly errors. Look in your log files for obvious messages that tell you that @@ -16193,9 +14445,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3301" +NAME="AEN3124" ></A ->25.3. Debug levels</H2 +>20.3. Debug levels</H2 ><P >If the bug has anything to do with Samba behaving incorrectly as a server (like refusing to open a file) then the log files will probably @@ -16263,9 +14515,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3318" +NAME="AEN3141" ></A ->25.4. Internal errors</H2 +>20.4. Internal errors</H2 ><P >If you get a "INTERNAL ERROR" message in your log files it means that Samba got an unexpected signal while running. It is probably a @@ -16307,9 +14559,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3328" +NAME="AEN3151" ></A ->25.5. Attaching to a running process</H2 +>20.5. Attaching to a running process</H2 ><P >Unfortunately some unixes (in particular some recent linux kernels) refuse to dump a core file if the task has changed uid (which smbd @@ -16324,9 +14576,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3331" +NAME="AEN3154" ></A ->25.6. Patches</H2 +>20.6. Patches</H2 ><P >The best sort of bug report is one that includes a fix! If you send us patches please use <B @@ -16345,535 +14597,263 @@ exactly what version you used. </P CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="DIAGNOSIS" -></A ->Chapter 26. Diagnosing your samba server</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN3354" +NAME="GROUPMAPPING" ></A ->26.1. Introduction</H2 -><P ->This file contains a list of tests you can perform to validate your -Samba server. It also tells you what the likely cause of the problem -is if it fails any one of these steps. If it passes all these tests -then it is probably working fine.</P +>Chapter 21. Group mapping HOWTO</H1 ><P ->You should do ALL the tests, in the order shown. We have tried to -carefully choose them so later tests only use capabilities verified in -the earlier tests.</P +> +Starting with Samba 3.0 alpha 2, a new group mapping function is available. The +current method (likely to change) to manage the groups is a new command called +<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbgroupedit</B +>.</P ><P ->If you send one of the samba mailing lists an email saying "it doesn't work" -and you have not followed this test procedure then you should not be surprised -your email is ignored.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN3359" -></A ->26.2. Assumptions</H2 +>The first immediate reason to use the group mapping on a PDC, is that +the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>domain admin group</B +> of <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> is +now gone. This parameter was used to give the listed users local admin rights +on their workstations. It was some magic stuff that simply worked but didn't +scale very well for complex setups.</P ><P ->In all of the tests it is assumed you have a Samba server called -BIGSERVER and a PC called ACLIENT both in workgroup TESTGROUP.</P +>Let me explain how it works on NT/W2K, to have this magic fade away. +When installing NT/W2K on a computer, the installer program creates some users +and groups. Notably the 'Administrators' group, and gives to that group some +privileges like the ability to change the date and time or to kill any process +(or close too) running on the local machine. The 'Administrator' user is a +member of the 'Administrators' group, and thus 'inherit' the 'Administrators' +group privileges. If a 'joe' user is created and become a member of the +'Administrator' group, 'joe' has exactly the same rights as 'Administrator'.</P ><P ->The procedure is similar for other types of clients.</P +>When a NT/W2K machine is joined to a domain, during that phase, the "Domain +Administrators' group of the PDC is added to the 'Administrators' group of the +workstation. Every members of the 'Domain Administrators' group 'inherit' the +rights of the 'Administrators' group when logging on the workstation.</P ><P ->It is also assumed you know the name of an available share in your -smb.conf. I will assume this share is called "tmp". You can add a -"tmp" share like by adding the following to smb.conf:</P +>You are now wondering how to make some of your samba PDC users members of the +'Domain Administrators' ? That's really easy.</P ><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> [tmp] - comment = temporary files - path = /tmp - read only = yes </PRE ></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI ><P ->THESE TESTS ASSUME VERSION 3.0.0 OR LATER OF THE SAMBA SUITE. SOME -COMMANDS SHOWN DID NOT EXIST IN EARLIER VERSIONS</P -><P ->Please pay attention to the error messages you receive. If any error message -reports that your server is being unfriendly you should first check that you -IP name resolution is correctly set up. eg: Make sure your /etc/resolv.conf -file points to name servers that really do exist.</P -><P ->Also, if you do not have DNS server access for name resolution please check -that the settings for your smb.conf file results in "dns proxy = no". The -best way to check this is with "testparm smb.conf"</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN3369" -></A ->26.3. Tests</H2 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN3371" -></A ->26.3.1. Test 1</H3 -><P ->In the directory in which you store your smb.conf file, run the command -"testparm smb.conf". If it reports any errors then your smb.conf -configuration file is faulty.</P -><P ->Note: Your smb.conf file may be located in: <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/samba</TT -> - Or in: <TT +>create a unix group (usually in <TT CLASS="FILENAME" ->/usr/local/samba/lib</TT -></P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN3377" -></A ->26.3.2. Test 2</H3 -><P ->Run the command "ping BIGSERVER" from the PC and "ping ACLIENT" from -the unix box. If you don't get a valid response then your TCP/IP -software is not correctly installed. </P -><P ->Note that you will need to start a "dos prompt" window on the PC to -run ping.</P -><P ->If you get a message saying "host not found" or similar then your DNS -software or /etc/hosts file is not correctly setup. It is possible to -run samba without DNS entries for the server and client, but I assume -you do have correct entries for the remainder of these tests. </P -><P ->Another reason why ping might fail is if your host is running firewall -software. You will need to relax the rules to let in the workstation -in question, perhaps by allowing access from another subnet (on Linux -this is done via the ipfwadm program.)</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN3383" -></A ->26.3.3. Test 3</H3 -><P ->Run the command "smbclient -L BIGSERVER" on the unix box. You -should get a list of available shares back. </P -><P ->If you get a error message containing the string "Bad password" then -you probably have either an incorrect "hosts allow", "hosts deny" or -"valid users" line in your smb.conf, or your guest account is not -valid. Check what your guest account is using "testparm" and -temporarily remove any "hosts allow", "hosts deny", "valid users" or -"invalid users" lines.</P -><P ->If you get a "connection refused" response then the smbd server may -not be running. If you installed it in inetd.conf then you probably edited -that file incorrectly. If you installed it as a daemon then check that -it is running, and check that the netbios-ssn port is in a LISTEN -state using "netstat -a".</P -><P ->If you get a "session request failed" then the server refused the -connection. If it says "Your server software is being unfriendly" then -its probably because you have invalid command line parameters to smbd, -or a similar fatal problem with the initial startup of smbd. Also -check your config file (smb.conf) for syntax errors with "testparm" -and that the various directories where samba keeps its log and lock -files exist.</P +>/etc/group</TT +>), let's call it domadm</P +></LI +><LI ><P ->There are a number of reasons for which smbd may refuse or decline -a session request. The most common of these involve one or more of -the following smb.conf file entries:</P +>add to this group the users that must be Administrators. For example if you want joe,john and mary, your entry in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/group</TT +> will look like:</P ><P ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> hosts deny = ALL - hosts allow = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/yy - bind interfaces only = Yes</PRE +>domadm:x:502:joe,john,mary</PRE ></P +></LI +><LI ><P ->In the above, no allowance has been made for any session requests that -will automatically translate to the loopback adaptor address 127.0.0.1. -To solve this problem change these lines to:</P +>Map this domadm group to the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>domain admins</B +> group by running the command:</P ><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> hosts deny = ALL - hosts allow = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/yy 127.</PRE +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbgroupedit -c "Domain Admins" -u domadm</B ></P +></LI +></OL ><P ->Do NOT use the "bind interfaces only" parameter where you may wish to -use the samba password change facility, or where smbclient may need to -access local service for name resolution or for local resource -connections. (Note: the "bind interfaces only" parameter deficiency -where it will not allow connections to the loopback address will be -fixed soon).</P +>You're set, joe, john and mary are domain administrators !</P ><P ->Another common cause of these two errors is having something already running -on port 139, such as Samba (ie: smbd is running from inetd already) or -something like Digital's Pathworks. Check your inetd.conf file before trying -to start smbd as a daemon, it can avoid a lot of frustration!</P +>Like the Domain Admins group, you can map any arbitrary Unix group to any NT +group. You can also make any Unix group a domain group. For example, on a domain +member machine (an NT/W2K or a samba server running winbind), you would like to +give access to a certain directory to some users who are member of a group on +your samba PDC. Flag that group as a domain group by running:</P ><P ->And yet another possible cause for failure of TEST 3 is when the subnet mask -and / or broadcast address settings are incorrect. Please check that the -network interface IP Address / Broadcast Address / Subnet Mask settings are -correct and that Samba has correctly noted these in the log.nmb file.</P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbgroupedit -a unixgroup -td</B +></P +><P +>You can list the various groups in the mapping database like this</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbgroupedit -v</B +></P ></DIV ><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" +CLASS="CHAPTER" +><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="AEN3398" +NAME="PORTABILITY" ></A ->26.3.4. Test 4</H3 +>Chapter 22. Portability</H1 ><P ->Run the command "nmblookup -B BIGSERVER __SAMBA__". You should get the -IP address of your Samba server back.</P -><P ->If you don't then nmbd is incorrectly installed. Check your inetd.conf -if you run it from there, or that the daemon is running and listening -to udp port 137.</P -><P ->One common problem is that many inetd implementations can't take many -parameters on the command line. If this is the case then create a -one-line script that contains the right parameters and run that from -inetd.</P -></DIV +>Samba works on a wide range of platforms but the interface all the +platforms provide is not always compatible. This chapter contains +platform-specific information about compiling and using samba.</P ><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3403" +NAME="AEN3201" ></A ->26.3.5. Test 5</H3 +>22.1. HPUX</H2 ><P ->run the command <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->nmblookup -B ACLIENT '*'</B -></P +>HP's implementation of supplementary groups is, er, non-standard (for +hysterical reasons). There are two group files, /etc/group and +/etc/logingroup; the system maps UIDs to numbers using the former, but +initgroups() reads the latter. Most system admins who know the ropes +symlink /etc/group to /etc/logingroup (hard link doesn't work for reasons +too stupid to go into here). initgroups() will complain if one of the +groups you're in in /etc/logingroup has what it considers to be an invalid +ID, which means outside the range [0..UID_MAX], where UID_MAX is (I think) +60000 currently on HP-UX. This precludes -2 and 65534, the usual 'nobody' +GIDs.</P ><P ->You should get the PCs IP address back. If you don't then the client -software on the PC isn't installed correctly, or isn't started, or you -got the name of the PC wrong. </P +>If you encounter this problem, make sure that the programs that are failing +to initgroups() be run as users not in any groups with GIDs outside the +allowed range.</P ><P ->If ACLIENT doesn't resolve via DNS then use the IP address of the -client in the above test.</P +>This is documented in the HP manual pages under setgroups(2) and passwd(4).</P ></DIV ><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3409" +NAME="AEN3206" ></A ->26.3.6. Test 6</H3 -><P ->Run the command <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->nmblookup -d 2 '*'</B -></P -><P ->This time we are trying the same as the previous test but are trying -it via a broadcast to the default broadcast address. A number of -Netbios/TCPIP hosts on the network should respond, although Samba may -not catch all of the responses in the short time it listens. You -should see "got a positive name query response" messages from several -hosts.</P -><P ->If this doesn't give a similar result to the previous test then -nmblookup isn't correctly getting your broadcast address through its -automatic mechanism. In this case you should experiment use the -"interfaces" option in smb.conf to manually configure your IP -address, broadcast and netmask. </P +>22.2. SCO Unix</H2 ><P ->If your PC and server aren't on the same subnet then you will need to -use the -B option to set the broadcast address to the that of the PCs -subnet.</P +> +If you run an old version of SCO Unix then you may need to get important +TCP/IP patches for Samba to work correctly. Without the patch, you may +encounter corrupt data transfers using samba.</P ><P ->This test will probably fail if your subnet mask and broadcast address are -not correct. (Refer to TEST 3 notes above).</P +>The patch you need is UOD385 Connection Drivers SLS. It is available from +SCO (ftp.sco.com, directory SLS, files uod385a.Z and uod385a.ltr.Z).</P ></DIV ><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3417" +NAME="AEN3210" ></A ->26.3.7. Test 7</H3 +>22.3. DNIX</H2 ><P ->Run the command <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbclient //BIGSERVER/TMP</B ->. You should -then be prompted for a password. You should use the password of the account -you are logged into the unix box with. If you want to test with -another account then add the -U >accountname< option to the end of -the command line. eg: -<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbclient //bigserver/tmp -Ujohndoe</B -></P +>DNIX has a problem with seteuid() and setegid(). These routines are +needed for Samba to work correctly, but they were left out of the DNIX +C library for some reason.</P ><P ->Note: It is possible to specify the password along with the username -as follows: -<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbclient //bigserver/tmp -Ujohndoe%secret</B -></P +>For this reason Samba by default defines the macro NO_EID in the DNIX +section of includes.h. This works around the problem in a limited way, +but it is far from ideal, some things still won't work right.</P ><P ->Once you enter the password you should get the "smb>" prompt. If you -don't then look at the error message. If it says "invalid network -name" then the service "tmp" is not correctly setup in your smb.conf.</P +> +To fix the problem properly you need to assemble the following two +functions and then either add them to your C library or link them into +Samba.</P ><P ->If it says "bad password" then the likely causes are:</P +> +put this in the file <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>setegid.s</TT +>:</P ><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> .globl _setegid +_setegid: + moveq #47,d0 + movl #100,a0 + moveq #1,d1 + movl 4(sp),a1 + trap #9 + bccs 1$ + jmp cerror +1$: + clrl d0 + rts</PRE ></P -><OL -TYPE="1" -><LI -><P -> you have shadow passords (or some other password system) but didn't - compile in support for them in smbd - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> your "valid users" configuration is incorrect - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -> you have a mixed case password and you haven't enabled the "password - level" option at a high enough level - </P -></LI -><LI ><P -> the "path =" line in smb.conf is incorrect. Check it with testparm - </P -></LI -><LI +>put this in the file <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>seteuid.s</TT +>:</P ><P -> you enabled password encryption but didn't create the SMB encrypted - password file - </P -></LI -></OL +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> .globl _seteuid +_seteuid: + moveq #47,d0 + movl #100,a0 + moveq #0,d1 + movl 4(sp),a1 + trap #9 + bccs 1$ + jmp cerror +1$: + clrl d0 + rts</PRE +></P ><P ->Once connected you should be able to use the commands -<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->dir</B -> <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->get</B -> <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->put</B -> etc. -Type <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->help >command<</B -> for instructions. You should -especially check that the amount of free disk space shown is correct -when you type <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->dir</B ->.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN3443" -></A ->26.3.8. Test 8</H3 +>after creating the above files you then assemble them using</P ><P ->On the PC type the command <B +><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->net view \\BIGSERVER</B ->. You will -need to do this from within a "dos prompt" window. You should get back a -list of available shares on the server.</P -><P ->If you get a "network name not found" or similar error then netbios -name resolution is not working. This is usually caused by a problem in -nmbd. To overcome it you could do one of the following (you only need -to choose one of them):</P -><P +>as seteuid.s</B ></P -><OL -TYPE="1" -><LI ><P -> fixup the nmbd installation</P -></LI -><LI -><P -> add the IP address of BIGSERVER to the "wins server" box in the - advanced tcp/ip setup on the PC.</P -></LI -><LI -><P -> enable windows name resolution via DNS in the advanced section of - the tcp/ip setup</P -></LI -><LI -><P -> add BIGSERVER to your lmhosts file on the PC.</P -></LI -></OL -><P ->If you get a "invalid network name" or "bad password error" then the -same fixes apply as they did for the "smbclient -L" test above. In -particular, make sure your "hosts allow" line is correct (see the man -pages)</P -><P ->Also, do not overlook that fact that when the workstation requests the -connection to the samba server it will attempt to connect using the -name with which you logged onto your Windows machine. You need to make -sure that an account exists on your Samba server with that exact same -name and password.</P -><P ->If you get "specified computer is not receiving requests" or similar -it probably means that the host is not contactable via tcp services. -Check to see if the host is running tcp wrappers, and if so add an entry in -the hosts.allow file for your client (or subnet, etc.)</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN3460" -></A ->26.3.9. Test 9</H3 -><P ->Run the command <B +><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->net use x: \\BIGSERVER\TMP</B ->. You should -be prompted for a password then you should get a "command completed -successfully" message. If not then your PC software is incorrectly -installed or your smb.conf is incorrect. make sure your "hosts allow" -and other config lines in smb.conf are correct.</P -><P ->It's also possible that the server can't work out what user name to -connect you as. To see if this is the problem add the line "user = -USERNAME" to the [tmp] section of smb.conf where "USERNAME" is the -username corresponding to the password you typed. If you find this -fixes things you may need the username mapping option. </P +>as setegid.s</B +></P ><P ->It might also be the case that your client only sends encrypted passwords -and you have <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->encrypt passwords = no</B -> in <TT +>that should produce the files <TT CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf</TT ->. -Turn it back on to fix.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN3468" -></A ->26.3.10. Test 10</H3 +>seteuid.o</TT +> and +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>setegid.o</TT +></P ><P ->Run the command <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->nmblookup -M TESTGROUP</B -> where -TESTGROUP is the name of the workgroup that your Samba server and -Windows PCs belong to. You should get back the IP address of the -master browser for that workgroup.</P +>then you need to add these to the LIBSM line in the DNIX section of +the Samba Makefile. Your LIBSM line will then look something like this:</P ><P ->If you don't then the election process has failed. Wait a minute to -see if it is just being slow then try again. If it still fails after -that then look at the browsing options you have set in smb.conf. Make -sure you have <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->preferred master = yes</B -> to ensure that -an election is held at startup.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H3 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN3474" -></A ->26.3.11. Test 11</H3 +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>LIBSM = setegid.o seteuid.o -ln</PRE +></P ><P ->From file manager try to browse the server. Your samba server should -appear in the browse list of your local workgroup (or the one you -specified in smb.conf). You should be able to double click on the name -of the server and get a list of shares. If you get a "invalid -password" error when you do then you are probably running WinNT and it -is refusing to browse a server that has no encrypted password -capability and is in user level security mode. In this case either set -<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->security = server</B -> AND -<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->password server = Windows_NT_Machine</B -> in your -smb.conf file, or enable encrypted passwords AFTER compiling in support -for encrypted passwords (refer to the Makefile).</P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN3479" -></A ->26.4. Still having troubles?</H2 +> +You should then remove the line:</P ><P ->Try the mailing list or newsgroup, or use the ethereal utility to -sniff the problem. The official samba mailing list can be reached at -<A -HREF="mailto:samba@samba.org" -TARGET="_top" ->samba@samba.org</A ->. To find -out more about samba and how to subscribe to the mailing list check -out the samba web page at -<A -HREF="http://samba.org/samba" -TARGET="_top" ->http://samba.org/samba</A +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>#define NO_EID</PRE ></P ><P ->Also look at the other docs in the Samba package!</P -></DIV +>from the DNIX section of <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>includes.h</TT +></P ></DIV ></DIV ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/Samba-HOWTO.html b/docs/htmldocs/Samba-HOWTO.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..da69705bc3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/Samba-HOWTO.html @@ -0,0 +1,1440 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<HTML +><HEAD +><TITLE +>SAMBA Project Documentation</TITLE +><META +NAME="GENERATOR" +CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.76b+ +"><LINK +REL="NEXT" +TITLE="How to Install and Test SAMBA" +HREF="install.html"></HEAD +><BODY +CLASS="BOOK" +BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" +TEXT="#000000" +LINK="#0000FF" +VLINK="#840084" +ALINK="#0000FF" +><DIV +CLASS="BOOK" +><A +NAME="SAMBA-PROJECT-DOCUMENTATION"><DIV +CLASS="TITLEPAGE" +><H1 +CLASS="TITLE" +><A +NAME="SAMBA-PROJECT-DOCUMENTATION">SAMBA Project Documentation</H1 +><H3 +CLASS="AUTHOR" +><A +NAME="AEN4">SAMBA Team</H3 +><HR></DIV +><H1 +><A +NAME="AEN8">Abstract</H1 +><P +><SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Last Update</I +></SPAN +> : Thu Aug 15 12:48:45 CDT 2002</P +><P +>This book is a collection of HOWTOs added to Samba documentation over the years. +I try to ensure that all are current, but sometimes the is a larger job +than one person can maintain. The most recent version of this document +can be found at <A +HREF="http://www.samba.org/" +TARGET="_top" +>http://www.samba.org/</A +> +on the "Documentation" page. Please send updates to <A +HREF="mailto:jerry@samba.org" +TARGET="_top" +>jerry@samba.org</A +>.</P +><P +>This documentation is distributed under the GNU General Public License (GPL) +version 2. A copy of the license is included with the Samba source +distribution. A copy can be found on-line at <A +HREF="http://www.fsf.org/licenses/gpl.txt" +TARGET="_top" +>http://www.fsf.org/licenses/gpl.txt</A +></P +><P +>Cheers, jerry</P +><DIV +CLASS="TOC" +><DL +><DT +><B +>Table of Contents</B +></DT +><DT +>1. <A +HREF="install.html" +>How to Install and Test SAMBA</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>1.1. <A +HREF="install.html#AEN20" +>Step 0: Read the man pages</A +></DT +><DT +>1.2. <A +HREF="install.html#AEN28" +>Step 1: Building the Binaries</A +></DT +><DT +>1.3. <A +HREF="install.html#AEN56" +>Step 2: The all important step</A +></DT +><DT +>1.4. <A +HREF="install.html#AEN60" +>Step 3: Create the smb configuration file.</A +></DT +><DT +>1.5. <A +HREF="install.html#AEN74" +>Step 4: Test your config file with + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>testparm</B +></A +></DT +><DT +>1.6. <A +HREF="install.html#AEN80" +>Step 5: Starting the smbd and nmbd</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>1.6.1. <A +HREF="install.html#AEN90" +>Step 5a: Starting from inetd.conf</A +></DT +><DT +>1.6.2. <A +HREF="install.html#AEN119" +>Step 5b. Alternative: starting it as a daemon</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>1.7. <A +HREF="install.html#AEN135" +>Step 6: Try listing the shares available on your + server</A +></DT +><DT +>1.8. <A +HREF="install.html#AEN144" +>Step 7: Try connecting with the unix client</A +></DT +><DT +>1.9. <A +HREF="install.html#AEN160" +>Step 8: Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT, + Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</A +></DT +><DT +>1.10. <A +HREF="install.html#AEN174" +>What If Things Don't Work?</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>1.10.1. <A +HREF="install.html#AEN179" +>Diagnosing Problems</A +></DT +><DT +>1.10.2. <A +HREF="install.html#AEN183" +>Scope IDs</A +></DT +><DT +>1.10.3. <A +HREF="install.html#AEN186" +>Choosing the Protocol Level</A +></DT +><DT +>1.10.4. <A +HREF="install.html#AEN195" +>Printing from UNIX to a Client PC</A +></DT +><DT +>1.10.5. <A +HREF="install.html#AEN200" +>Locking</A +></DT +><DT +>1.10.6. <A +HREF="install.html#AEN209" +>Mapping Usernames</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +></DL +></DD +><DT +>2. <A +HREF="diagnosis.html" +>Diagnosing your samba server</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>2.1. <A +HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN223" +>Introduction</A +></DT +><DT +>2.2. <A +HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN228" +>Assumptions</A +></DT +><DT +>2.3. <A +HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN238" +>Tests</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>2.3.1. <A +HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN240" +>Test 1</A +></DT +><DT +>2.3.2. <A +HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN246" +>Test 2</A +></DT +><DT +>2.3.3. <A +HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN252" +>Test 3</A +></DT +><DT +>2.3.4. <A +HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN267" +>Test 4</A +></DT +><DT +>2.3.5. <A +HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN272" +>Test 5</A +></DT +><DT +>2.3.6. <A +HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN278" +>Test 6</A +></DT +><DT +>2.3.7. <A +HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN286" +>Test 7</A +></DT +><DT +>2.3.8. <A +HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN312" +>Test 8</A +></DT +><DT +>2.3.9. <A +HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN329" +>Test 9</A +></DT +><DT +>2.3.10. <A +HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN334" +>Test 10</A +></DT +><DT +>2.3.11. <A +HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN340" +>Test 11</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>2.4. <A +HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN345" +>Still having troubles?</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>3. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html" +>Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>3.1. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN362" +>Agenda</A +></DT +><DT +>3.2. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN384" +>Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>3.2.1. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN400" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/hosts</TT +></A +></DT +><DT +>3.2.2. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN416" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/resolv.conf</TT +></A +></DT +><DT +>3.2.3. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN427" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/host.conf</TT +></A +></DT +><DT +>3.2.4. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN435" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT +></A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>3.3. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN447" +>Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>3.3.1. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN459" +>The NetBIOS Name Cache</A +></DT +><DT +>3.3.2. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN464" +>The LMHOSTS file</A +></DT +><DT +>3.3.3. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN472" +>HOSTS file</A +></DT +><DT +>3.3.4. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN477" +>DNS Lookup</A +></DT +><DT +>3.3.5. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN480" +>WINS Lookup</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>3.4. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN492" +>How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and +dependable browsing using Samba</A +></DT +><DT +>3.5. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN502" +>MS Windows security options and how to configure +Samba for seemless integration</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>3.5.1. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN530" +>Use MS Windows NT as an authentication server</A +></DT +><DT +>3.5.2. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN538" +>Make Samba a member of an MS Windows NT security domain</A +></DT +><DT +>3.5.3. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN555" +>Configure Samba as an authentication server</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>3.6. <A +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN572" +>Conclusions</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>4. <A +HREF="pam.html" +>Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally +managed authentication</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>4.1. <A +HREF="pam.html#AEN593" +>Samba and PAM</A +></DT +><DT +>4.2. <A +HREF="pam.html#AEN637" +>Distributed Authentication</A +></DT +><DT +>4.3. <A +HREF="pam.html#AEN644" +>PAM Configuration in smb.conf</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>5. <A +HREF="msdfs.html" +>Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>5.1. <A +HREF="msdfs.html#AEN664" +>Instructions</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>5.1.1. <A +HREF="msdfs.html#AEN699" +>Notes</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +></DL +></DD +><DT +>6. <A +HREF="unix-permissions.html" +>UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>6.1. <A +HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN719" +>Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT + security dialogs</A +></DT +><DT +>6.2. <A +HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN728" +>How to view file security on a Samba share</A +></DT +><DT +>6.3. <A +HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN739" +>Viewing file ownership</A +></DT +><DT +>6.4. <A +HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN759" +>Viewing file or directory permissions</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>6.4.1. <A +HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN774" +>File Permissions</A +></DT +><DT +>6.4.2. <A +HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN788" +>Directory Permissions</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>6.5. <A +HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN795" +>Modifying file or directory permissions</A +></DT +><DT +>6.6. <A +HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN817" +>Interaction with the standard Samba create mask + parameters</A +></DT +><DT +>6.7. <A +HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN881" +>Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute + mapping</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>7. <A +HREF="printing.html" +>Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>7.1. <A +HREF="printing.html#AEN902" +>Introduction</A +></DT +><DT +>7.2. <A +HREF="printing.html#AEN924" +>Configuration</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>7.2.1. <A +HREF="printing.html#AEN935" +>Creating [print$]</A +></DT +><DT +>7.2.2. <A +HREF="printing.html#AEN970" +>Setting Drivers for Existing Printers</A +></DT +><DT +>7.2.3. <A +HREF="printing.html#AEN987" +>Support a large number of printers</A +></DT +><DT +>7.2.4. <A +HREF="printing.html#AEN998" +>Adding New Printers via the Windows NT APW</A +></DT +><DT +>7.2.5. <A +HREF="printing.html#AEN1028" +>Samba and Printer Ports</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>7.3. <A +HREF="printing.html#AEN1036" +>The Imprints Toolset</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>7.3.1. <A +HREF="printing.html#AEN1040" +>What is Imprints?</A +></DT +><DT +>7.3.2. <A +HREF="printing.html#AEN1050" +>Creating Printer Driver Packages</A +></DT +><DT +>7.3.3. <A +HREF="printing.html#AEN1053" +>The Imprints server</A +></DT +><DT +>7.3.4. <A +HREF="printing.html#AEN1057" +>The Installation Client</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>7.4. <A +HREF="printing.html#AEN1079" +><A +NAME="MIGRATION" +></A +>Migration to from Samba 2.0.x to 2.2.x</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>8. <A +HREF="printingdebug.html" +>Debugging Printing Problems</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>8.1. <A +HREF="printingdebug.html#AEN1125" +>Introduction</A +></DT +><DT +>8.2. <A +HREF="printingdebug.html#AEN1141" +>Debugging printer problems</A +></DT +><DT +>8.3. <A +HREF="printingdebug.html#AEN1150" +>What printers do I have?</A +></DT +><DT +>8.4. <A +HREF="printingdebug.html#AEN1158" +>Setting up printcap and print servers</A +></DT +><DT +>8.5. <A +HREF="printingdebug.html#AEN1186" +>Job sent, no output</A +></DT +><DT +>8.6. <A +HREF="printingdebug.html#AEN1197" +>Job sent, strange output</A +></DT +><DT +>8.7. <A +HREF="printingdebug.html#AEN1209" +>Raw PostScript printed</A +></DT +><DT +>8.8. <A +HREF="printingdebug.html#AEN1212" +>Advanced Printing</A +></DT +><DT +>8.9. <A +HREF="printingdebug.html#AEN1215" +>Real debugging</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>9. <A +HREF="securitylevels.html" +>Security levels</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>9.1. <A +HREF="securitylevels.html#AEN1228" +>Introduction</A +></DT +><DT +>9.2. <A +HREF="securitylevels.html#AEN1239" +>More complete description of security levels</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>10. <A +HREF="domain-security.html" +>security = domain in Samba 2.x</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>10.1. <A +HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1272" +>Joining an NT Domain with Samba 2.2</A +></DT +><DT +>10.2. <A +HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1336" +>Samba and Windows 2000 Domains</A +></DT +><DT +>10.3. <A +HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1341" +>Why is this better than security = server?</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>11. <A +HREF="winbind.html" +>Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>11.1. <A +HREF="winbind.html#AEN1394" +>Abstract</A +></DT +><DT +>11.2. <A +HREF="winbind.html#AEN1398" +>Introduction</A +></DT +><DT +>11.3. <A +HREF="winbind.html#AEN1411" +>What Winbind Provides</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>11.3.1. <A +HREF="winbind.html#AEN1418" +>Target Uses</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>11.4. <A +HREF="winbind.html#AEN1422" +>How Winbind Works</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>11.4.1. <A +HREF="winbind.html#AEN1427" +>Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</A +></DT +><DT +>11.4.2. <A +HREF="winbind.html#AEN1431" +>Name Service Switch</A +></DT +><DT +>11.4.3. <A +HREF="winbind.html#AEN1447" +>Pluggable Authentication Modules</A +></DT +><DT +>11.4.4. <A +HREF="winbind.html#AEN1455" +>User and Group ID Allocation</A +></DT +><DT +>11.4.5. <A +HREF="winbind.html#AEN1459" +>Result Caching</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>11.5. <A +HREF="winbind.html#AEN1462" +>Installation and Configuration</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>11.5.1. <A +HREF="winbind.html#AEN1469" +>Introduction</A +></DT +><DT +>11.5.2. <A +HREF="winbind.html#AEN1482" +>Requirements</A +></DT +><DT +>11.5.3. <A +HREF="winbind.html#AEN1496" +>Testing Things Out</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>11.6. <A +HREF="winbind.html#AEN1711" +>Limitations</A +></DT +><DT +>11.7. <A +HREF="winbind.html#AEN1721" +>Conclusion</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>12. <A +HREF="samba-pdc.html" +>How to Configure Samba 2.2 as a Primary Domain Controller</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>12.1. <A +HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1741" +>Prerequisite Reading</A +></DT +><DT +>12.2. <A +HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1747" +>Background</A +></DT +><DT +>12.3. <A +HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1786" +>Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</A +></DT +><DT +>12.4. <A +HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1829" +>Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients to the +Domain</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>12.4.1. <A +HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1848" +>Manual Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</A +></DT +><DT +>12.4.2. <A +HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1883" +>"On-the-Fly" Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</A +></DT +><DT +>12.4.3. <A +HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1892" +>Joining the Client to the Domain</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>12.5. <A +HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1907" +>Common Problems and Errors</A +></DT +><DT +>12.6. <A +HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1955" +>System Policies and Profiles</A +></DT +><DT +>12.7. <A +HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1999" +>What other help can I get?</A +></DT +><DT +>12.8. <A +HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN2113" +>Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>12.8.1. <A +HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN2139" +>Configuration Instructions: Network Logons</A +></DT +><DT +>12.8.2. <A +HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN2158" +>Configuration Instructions: Setting up Roaming User Profiles</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>12.9. <A +HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN2251" +>DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control & Samba</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>13. <A +HREF="samba-bdc.html" +>How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>13.1. <A +HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN2287" +>Prerequisite Reading</A +></DT +><DT +>13.2. <A +HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN2291" +>Background</A +></DT +><DT +>13.3. <A +HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN2299" +>What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>13.3.1. <A +HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN2302" +>How does a Workstation find its domain controller?</A +></DT +><DT +>13.3.2. <A +HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN2305" +>When is the PDC needed?</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>13.4. <A +HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN2308" +>Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller?</A +></DT +><DT +>13.5. <A +HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN2312" +>How do I set up a Samba BDC?</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>13.5.1. <A +HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN2329" +>How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +></DL +></DD +><DT +>14. <A +HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html" +>Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>14.1. <A +HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2350" +>Purpose</A +></DT +><DT +>14.2. <A +HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2370" +>Introduction</A +></DT +><DT +>14.3. <A +HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2399" +>Supported LDAP Servers</A +></DT +><DT +>14.4. <A +HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2404" +>Schema and Relationship to the RFC 2307 posixAccount</A +></DT +><DT +>14.5. <A +HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2416" +>Configuring Samba with LDAP</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>14.5.1. <A +HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2418" +>OpenLDAP configuration</A +></DT +><DT +>14.5.2. <A +HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2435" +>Configuring Samba</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>14.6. <A +HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2463" +>Accounts and Groups management</A +></DT +><DT +>14.7. <A +HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2468" +>Security and sambaAccount</A +></DT +><DT +>14.8. <A +HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2488" +>LDAP specials attributes for sambaAccounts</A +></DT +><DT +>14.9. <A +HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2558" +>Example LDIF Entries for a sambaAccount</A +></DT +><DT +>14.10. <A +HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2566" +>Comments</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>15. <A +HREF="improved-browsing.html" +>Improved browsing in samba</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>15.1. <A +HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2577" +>Overview of browsing</A +></DT +><DT +>15.2. <A +HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2581" +>Browsing support in samba</A +></DT +><DT +>15.3. <A +HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2590" +>Problem resolution</A +></DT +><DT +>15.4. <A +HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2597" +>Browsing across subnets</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>15.4.1. <A +HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2602" +>How does cross subnet browsing work ?</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>15.5. <A +HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2637" +>Setting up a WINS server</A +></DT +><DT +>15.6. <A +HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2656" +>Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</A +></DT +><DT +>15.7. <A +HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2674" +>Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</A +></DT +><DT +>15.8. <A +HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2684" +>Forcing samba to be the master</A +></DT +><DT +>15.9. <A +HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2693" +>Making samba the domain master</A +></DT +><DT +>15.10. <A +HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2711" +>Note about broadcast addresses</A +></DT +><DT +>15.11. <A +HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2714" +>Multiple interfaces</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>16. <A +HREF="speed.html" +>Samba performance issues</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>16.1. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2732" +>Comparisons</A +></DT +><DT +>16.2. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2738" +>Oplocks</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>16.2.1. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2740" +>Overview</A +></DT +><DT +>16.2.2. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2748" +>Level2 Oplocks</A +></DT +><DT +>16.2.3. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2754" +>Old 'fake oplocks' option - deprecated</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>16.3. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2758" +>Socket options</A +></DT +><DT +>16.4. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2765" +>Read size</A +></DT +><DT +>16.5. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2770" +>Max xmit</A +></DT +><DT +>16.6. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2775" +>Locking</A +></DT +><DT +>16.7. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2779" +>Share modes</A +></DT +><DT +>16.8. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2784" +>Log level</A +></DT +><DT +>16.9. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2787" +>Wide lines</A +></DT +><DT +>16.10. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2790" +>Read raw</A +></DT +><DT +>16.11. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2795" +>Write raw</A +></DT +><DT +>16.12. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2799" +>Read prediction</A +></DT +><DT +>16.13. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2806" +>Memory mapping</A +></DT +><DT +>16.14. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2811" +>Slow Clients</A +></DT +><DT +>16.15. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2815" +>Slow Logins</A +></DT +><DT +>16.16. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2818" +>Client tuning</A +></DT +><DT +>16.17. <A +HREF="speed.html#AEN2850" +>My Results</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>17. <A +HREF="other-clients.html" +>Samba and other CIFS clients</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>17.1. <A +HREF="other-clients.html#AEN2871" +>Macintosh clients?</A +></DT +><DT +>17.2. <A +HREF="other-clients.html#AEN2880" +>OS2 Client</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>17.2.1. <A +HREF="other-clients.html#AEN2882" +>How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or + OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba?</A +></DT +><DT +>17.2.2. <A +HREF="other-clients.html#AEN2897" +>How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect), + OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba?</A +></DT +><DT +>17.2.3. <A +HREF="other-clients.html#AEN2906" +>Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version) + is used as a client?</A +></DT +><DT +>17.2.4. <A +HREF="other-clients.html#AEN2910" +>How do I get printer driver download working + for OS/2 clients?</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>17.3. <A +HREF="other-clients.html#AEN2920" +>Windows for Workgroups</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>17.3.1. <A +HREF="other-clients.html#AEN2922" +>Use latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft</A +></DT +><DT +>17.3.2. <A +HREF="other-clients.html#AEN2927" +>Delete .pwl files after password change</A +></DT +><DT +>17.3.3. <A +HREF="other-clients.html#AEN2932" +>Configure WfW password handling</A +></DT +><DT +>17.3.4. <A +HREF="other-clients.html#AEN2936" +>Case handling of passwords</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>17.4. <A +HREF="other-clients.html#AEN2941" +>Windows '95/'98</A +></DT +><DT +>17.5. <A +HREF="other-clients.html#AEN2957" +>Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>18. <A +HREF="cvs-access.html" +>HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>18.1. <A +HREF="cvs-access.html#AEN2981" +>Introduction</A +></DT +><DT +>18.2. <A +HREF="cvs-access.html#AEN2986" +>CVS Access to samba.org</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>18.2.1. <A +HREF="cvs-access.html#AEN2989" +>Access via CVSweb</A +></DT +><DT +>18.2.2. <A +HREF="cvs-access.html#AEN2994" +>Access via cvs</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +></DL +></DD +><DT +>19. <A +HREF="bugreport.html" +>Reporting Bugs</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>19.1. <A +HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3029" +>Introduction</A +></DT +><DT +>19.2. <A +HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3036" +>General info</A +></DT +><DT +>19.3. <A +HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3042" +>Debug levels</A +></DT +><DT +>19.4. <A +HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3059" +>Internal errors</A +></DT +><DT +>19.5. <A +HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3069" +>Attaching to a running process</A +></DT +><DT +>19.6. <A +HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3072" +>Patches</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>20. <A +HREF="groupmapping.html" +>Group mapping HOWTO</A +></DT +><DT +>21. <A +HREF="portability.html" +>Portability</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>21.1. <A +HREF="portability.html#AEN3119" +>HPUX</A +></DT +><DT +>21.2. <A +HREF="portability.html#AEN3124" +>SCO Unix</A +></DT +><DT +>21.3. <A +HREF="portability.html#AEN3128" +>DNIX</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +></DL +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="NAVFOOTER" +><HR +ALIGN="LEFT" +WIDTH="100%"><TABLE +SUMMARY="Footer navigation table" +WIDTH="100%" +BORDER="0" +CELLPADDING="0" +CELLSPACING="0" +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="33%" +ALIGN="left" +VALIGN="top" +> </TD +><TD +WIDTH="34%" +ALIGN="center" +VALIGN="top" +> </TD +><TD +WIDTH="33%" +ALIGN="right" +VALIGN="top" +><A +HREF="install.html" +ACCESSKEY="N" +>Next</A +></TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="33%" +ALIGN="left" +VALIGN="top" +> </TD +><TD +WIDTH="34%" +ALIGN="center" +VALIGN="top" +> </TD +><TD +WIDTH="33%" +ALIGN="right" +VALIGN="top" +>How to Install and Test SAMBA</TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +></BODY +></HTML +>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/samba-pdc.html b/docs/htmldocs/Samba-PDC-HOWTO.html index ebf6e85674..ae4f545800 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/samba-pdc.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/Samba-PDC-HOWTO.html @@ -1,88 +1,36 @@ -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> <HTML ><HEAD ><TITLE ->How to Configure Samba as a NT4 Primary Domain Controller</TITLE +>How to Configure Samba 2.2 as a Primary Domain Controller</TITLE ><META NAME="GENERATOR" -CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK -REL="HOME" -TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" -HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Type of installation" -HREF="p544.html"><LINK -REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="Type of installation" -HREF="p544.html"><LINK -REL="NEXT" -TITLE="How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain" -HREF="samba-bdc.html"></HEAD +CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.57"></HEAD ><BODY -CLASS="CHAPTER" +CLASS="ARTICLE" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" TEXT="#000000" LINK="#0000FF" VLINK="#840084" ALINK="#0000FF" ><DIV -CLASS="NAVHEADER" -><TABLE -SUMMARY="Header navigation table" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -CELLPADDING="0" -CELLSPACING="0" -><TR -><TH -COLSPAN="3" -ALIGN="center" ->SAMBA Project Documentation</TH -></TR -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="10%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="bottom" -><A -HREF="p544.html" -ACCESSKEY="P" ->Prev</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="80%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="bottom" -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="10%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="bottom" -><A -HREF="samba-bdc.html" -ACCESSKEY="N" ->Next</A -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -><HR -ALIGN="LEFT" -WIDTH="100%"></DIV +CLASS="ARTICLE" ><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" +CLASS="TITLEPAGE" ><H1 +CLASS="TITLE" ><A NAME="SAMBA-PDC" -></A ->Chapter 6. How to Configure Samba as a NT4 Primary Domain Controller</H1 +>How to Configure Samba 2.2 as a Primary Domain Controller</A +></H1 +><HR></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN566" -></A ->6.1. Prerequisite Reading</H1 +NAME="AEN3" +>Prerequisite Reading</A +></H1 ><P >Before you continue reading in this chapter, please make sure that you are comfortable with configuring basic files services @@ -105,45 +53,26 @@ of this HOWTO Collection.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 +><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN572" -></A ->6.2. Background</H1 +NAME="AEN9" +>Background</A +></H1 ><DIV CLASS="NOTE" -><P -></P -><TABLE +><BLOCKQUOTE CLASS="NOTE" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Note"></TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" +><B +>Note: </B ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Author's Note:</I -></SPAN > This document is a combination of David Bannon's "Samba 2.2 PDC HOWTO" and "Samba NT Domain FAQ". Both documents are superseded by this one.</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE +></BLOCKQUOTE ></DIV ><P >Versions of Samba prior to release 2.2 had marginal capabilities to act @@ -257,12 +186,12 @@ concepts. They will be mentioned only briefly here.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 +><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN611" -></A ->6.3. Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</H1 +NAME="AEN48" +>Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</A +></H1 ><P >The first step in creating a working Samba PDC is to understand the parameters necessary in smb.conf. I will not @@ -469,13 +398,13 @@ Admins" style accounts.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 +><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN654" -></A ->6.4. Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients to the -Domain</H1 +NAME="AEN91" +>Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients to the +Domain</A +></H1 ><P >A machine trust account is a Samba account that is used to authenticate a client machine (rather than a user) to the Samba @@ -543,12 +472,12 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ></UL ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" -><H2 +><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN673" -></A ->6.4.1. Manual Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</H2 +NAME="AEN110" +>Manual Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</A +></H2 ><P >The first step in manually creating a machine trust account is to manually create the corresponding Unix account in @@ -595,26 +524,6 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE" >$</B ></P ><P ->On *BSD systems, this can be done using the 'chpass' utility:</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->root# </TT -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->chpass -a "<TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->machine_name</I -></TT ->$:*:101:100::0:0:Workstation <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->machine_name</I -></TT ->:/dev/null:/sbin/nologin"</B -></P -><P >The <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/passwd</TT @@ -692,30 +601,18 @@ CLASS="WARNING" ></P ><TABLE CLASS="WARNING" +BORDER="1" WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" ><TR ><TD -WIDTH="25" ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Warning"></TD -><TH -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="CENTER" ><B >Join the client to the domain immediately</B -></TH +></TD ></TR ><TR ><TD -> </TD -><TD ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" ><P > Manually creating a machine trust account using this method is the equivalent of creating a machine trust account on a Windows NT PDC using @@ -733,12 +630,12 @@ VALIGN="TOP" ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" -><H2 +><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN714" -></A ->6.4.2. "On-the-Fly" Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</H2 +NAME="AEN145" +>"On-the-Fly" Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</A +></H2 ><P >The second (and recommended) way of creating machine trust accounts is simply to allow the Samba server to create them as needed when the client @@ -770,12 +667,12 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" -><H2 +><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN723" -></A ->6.4.3. Joining the Client to the Domain</H2 +NAME="AEN154" +>Joining the Client to the Domain</A +></H2 ><P >The procedure for joining a client to the domain varies with the version of Windows.</P @@ -784,12 +681,9 @@ version of Windows.</P ><UL ><LI ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Windows 2000</I -></SPAN ></P ><P > When the user elects to join the client to a domain, Windows prompts for @@ -812,12 +706,9 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ></LI ><LI ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Windows NT</I -></SPAN ></P ><P > If the machine trust account was created manually, on the @@ -838,12 +729,12 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 +><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN738" -></A ->6.5. Common Problems and Errors</H1 +NAME="AEN169" +>Common Problems and Errors</A +></H1 ><P ></P ><P @@ -851,12 +742,9 @@ NAME="AEN738" ><UL ><LI ><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >I cannot include a '$' in a machine name.</I -></SPAN > </P ><P @@ -880,14 +768,11 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></LI ><LI ><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >I get told "You already have a connection to the Domain...." or "Cannot join domain, the credentials supplied conflict with an existing set.." when creating a machine trust account.</I -></SPAN > </P ><P @@ -914,12 +799,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></LI ><LI ><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >The system can not log you on (C000019B)....</I -></SPAN > </P ><P @@ -946,13 +828,10 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></LI ><LI ><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >The machine trust account for this computer either does not exist or is not accessible.</I -></SPAN > </P ><P @@ -986,13 +865,10 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></LI ><LI ><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >When I attempt to login to a Samba Domain from a NT4/W2K workstation, I get a message about my account being disabled.</I -></SPAN > </P ><P @@ -1048,12 +924,12 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 +><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN786" -></A ->6.6. System Policies and Profiles</H1 +NAME="AEN217" +>System Policies and Profiles</A +></H1 ><P >Much of the information necessary to implement System Policies and Roving User Profiles in a Samba domain is the same as that for @@ -1071,12 +947,9 @@ Profiles and Policies in Windows NT 4.0</A ><UL ><LI ><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >What about Windows NT Policy Editor?</I -></SPAN > </P ><P @@ -1088,20 +961,14 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" CLASS="COMMAND" >poledit.exe</B > which - is included with NT Server but <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I + is included with NT Server but <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >not NT Workstation</I -></SPAN >. There is a Policy Editor on a NTws - but it is not suitable for creating <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I + but it is not suitable for creating <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Domain Policies</I -></SPAN >. Further, although the Windows 95 Policy Editor can be installed on an NT Workstation/Server, it will not @@ -1142,12 +1009,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></LI ><LI ><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Can Win95 do Policies?</I -></SPAN > </P ><P @@ -1172,12 +1036,9 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ></LI ><LI ><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >How do I get 'User Manager' and 'Server Manager'</I -></SPAN > </P ><P @@ -1225,12 +1086,12 @@ TARGET="_top" ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 +><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN830" -></A ->6.7. What other help can I get?</H1 +NAME="AEN261" +>What other help can I get?</A +></H1 ><P >There are many sources of information available in the form of mailing lists, RFC's and documentation. The docs that come @@ -1241,13 +1102,10 @@ general SMB topics such as browsing.</P ><UL ><LI ><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >What are some diagnostics tools I can use to debug the domain logon process and where can I find them?</I -></SPAN > </P ><P @@ -1317,13 +1175,10 @@ TARGET="_top" ></LI ><LI ><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >How do I install 'Network Monitor' on an NT Workstation or a Windows 9x box?</I -></SPAN > </P ><P @@ -1438,12 +1293,9 @@ TARGET="_top" ></LI ><LI ><P -> The <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I +> The <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Development</I -></SPAN > document on the Samba mirrors might mention your problem. If so, it might mean that the developers are working on it.</P @@ -1500,12 +1352,9 @@ TARGET="_top" ><UL ><LI ><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >How do I get help from the mailing lists?</I -></SPAN > </P ><P @@ -1580,12 +1429,9 @@ TARGET="_top" ></LI ><LI ><P ->You might include <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I +>You might include <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >partial</I -></SPAN > log files written at a debug level set to as much as 20. Please don't send the entire log but enough to give the context of the @@ -1607,12 +1453,9 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" ></LI ><LI ><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >How do I get off the mailing lists?</I -></SPAN > </P ><P @@ -1645,46 +1488,27 @@ TARGET="_top" ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 +><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN944" -></A ->6.8. Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</H1 +NAME="AEN375" +>Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</A +></H1 ><DIV CLASS="NOTE" -><P -></P -><TABLE +><BLOCKQUOTE CLASS="NOTE" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Note"></TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" ><P +><B +>Note: </B >The following section contains much of the original DOMAIN.txt file previously included with Samba. Much of -the material is based on what went into the book <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I +the material is based on what went into the book <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Special Edition, Using Samba</I -></SPAN >, by Richard Sharpe.</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE +></BLOCKQUOTE ></DIV ><P >A domain and a workgroup are exactly the same thing in terms of network @@ -1779,12 +1603,12 @@ TYPE="1" ></OL ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" -><H2 +><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN970" -></A ->6.8.1. Configuration Instructions: Network Logons</H2 +NAME="AEN401" +>Configuration Instructions: Network Logons</A +></H2 ><P >The main difference between a PDC and a Windows 9x logon server configuration is that</P @@ -1809,30 +1633,18 @@ CLASS="WARNING" ></P ><TABLE CLASS="WARNING" +BORDER="1" WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" ><TR ><TD -WIDTH="25" ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Warning"></TD -><TH -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="CENTER" ><B >security mode and master browsers</B -></TH +></TD ></TR ><TR ><TD -> </TD -><TD ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" ><P >There are a few comments to make in order to tie up some loose ends. There has been much debate over the issue of whether @@ -1885,39 +1697,34 @@ for its domain.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" -><H2 +><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN989" -></A ->6.8.2. Configuration Instructions: Setting up Roaming User Profiles</H2 +NAME="AEN420" +>Configuration Instructions: Setting up Roaming User Profiles</A +></H2 ><DIV CLASS="WARNING" ><P ></P ><TABLE CLASS="WARNING" +BORDER="1" WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" ><TR ><TD -WIDTH="25" ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Warning"></TD +><B +>Warning</B +></TD +></TR +><TR ><TD ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >NOTE!</I -></SPAN > Roaming profiles support is different for Win9X and WinNT.</P ></TD @@ -1938,12 +1745,12 @@ including a separate field for the location of the user's profiles. This means that support for profiles is different for Win9X and WinNT.</P ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" -><H3 +><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN997" -></A ->6.8.2.1. Windows NT Configuration</H3 +NAME="AEN428" +>Windows NT Configuration</A +></H3 ><P >To support WinNT clients, in the [global] section of smb.conf set the following (for example):</P @@ -1960,41 +1767,25 @@ If you are using a samba server for the profiles, you _must_ make the share specified in the logon path browseable. </P ><DIV CLASS="NOTE" -><P -></P -><TABLE +><BLOCKQUOTE CLASS="NOTE" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Note"></TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" ><P +><B +>Note: </B >[lkcl 26aug96 - we have discovered a problem where Windows clients can maintain a connection to the [homes] share in between logins. The [homes] share must NOT therefore be used in a profile path.]</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE +></BLOCKQUOTE ></DIV ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" -><H3 +><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1005" -></A ->6.8.2.2. Windows 9X Configuration</H3 +NAME="AEN436" +>Windows 9X Configuration</A +></H3 ><P >To support Win9X clients, you must use the "logon home" parameter. Samba has now been fixed so that "net use/home" now works as well, and it, too, relies @@ -2020,12 +1811,12 @@ specified \\%L\%U for "logon home".</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" -><H3 +><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1013" -></A ->6.8.2.3. Win9X and WinNT Configuration</H3 +NAME="AEN444" +>Win9X and WinNT Configuration</A +></H3 ><P >You can support profiles for both Win9X and WinNT clients by setting both the "logon home" and "logon path" parameters. For example:</P @@ -2037,40 +1828,24 @@ logon path = \\%L\profiles\%U</PRE ></P ><DIV CLASS="NOTE" -><P -></P -><TABLE +><BLOCKQUOTE CLASS="NOTE" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Note"></TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" ><P +><B +>Note: </B >I have not checked what 'net use /home' does on NT when "logon home" is set as above.</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE +></BLOCKQUOTE ></DIV ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" -><H3 +><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1020" -></A ->6.8.2.4. Windows 9X Profile Setup</H3 +NAME="AEN451" +>Windows 9X Profile Setup</A +></H3 ><P >When a user first logs in on Windows 9X, the file user.DAT is created, as are folders "Start Menu", "Desktop", "Programs" and "Nethood". @@ -2175,12 +1950,9 @@ TYPE="1" ></LI ><LI ><P -> <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >WARNING</I -></SPAN > - before deleting the contents of the directory listed in the ProfilePath (this is likely to be c:\windows\profiles\username), @@ -2225,46 +1997,30 @@ differences are with the equivalent samba trace.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" -><H3 +><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1056" -></A ->6.8.2.5. Windows NT Workstation 4.0</H3 +NAME="AEN487" +>Windows NT Workstation 4.0</A +></H3 ><P >When a user first logs in to a Windows NT Workstation, the profile NTuser.DAT is created. The profile location can be now specified through the "logon path" parameter. </P ><DIV CLASS="NOTE" -><P -></P -><TABLE +><BLOCKQUOTE CLASS="NOTE" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Note"></TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" ><P +><B +>Note: </B >[lkcl 10aug97 - i tried setting the path to \\samba-server\homes\profile, and discovered that this fails because a background process maintains the connection to the [homes] share which does _not_ close down in between user logins. you have to have \\samba-server\%L\profile, where user is the username created from the [homes] share].</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE +></BLOCKQUOTE ></DIV ><P >There is a parameter that is now available for use with NT Profiles: @@ -2295,25 +2051,11 @@ NT Help file also mentions that renaming NTuser.DAT to NTuser.MAN turns a profile into a mandatory one.</P ><DIV CLASS="NOTE" -><P -></P -><TABLE +><BLOCKQUOTE CLASS="NOTE" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Note"></TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" ><P +><B +>Note: </B >[lkcl 10aug97 - i notice that NT Workstation tells me that it is downloading a profile from a slow link. whether this is actually the case, or whether there is some configuration issue, as yet unknown, @@ -2332,19 +2074,17 @@ workstation for clear-text passwords].</P >[lkcl 25aug97 - more comments received about NT profiles: the case of the profile _matters_. the file _must_ be called NTuser.DAT or, for a mandatory profile, NTuser.MAN].</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE +></BLOCKQUOTE ></DIV ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" -><H3 +><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1069" -></A ->6.8.2.6. Windows NT Server</H3 +NAME="AEN500" +>Windows NT Server</A +></H3 ><P >There is nothing to stop you specifying any path that you like for the location of users' profiles. Therefore, you could specify that the @@ -2353,42 +2093,30 @@ that SMB server supports encrypted passwords.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT3" -><H3 +><HR><H3 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1072" -></A ->6.8.2.7. Sharing Profiles between W95 and NT Workstation 4.0</H3 +NAME="AEN503" +>Sharing Profiles between W95 and NT Workstation 4.0</A +></H3 ><DIV CLASS="WARNING" ><P ></P ><TABLE CLASS="WARNING" +BORDER="1" WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" ><TR ><TD -WIDTH="25" ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Warning"></TD -><TH -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="CENTER" ><B >Potentially outdated or incorrect material follows</B -></TH +></TD ></TR ><TR ><TD -> </TD -><TD ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" ><P >I think this is all bogus, but have not deleted it. (Richard Sharpe)</P ></TD @@ -2413,75 +2141,47 @@ unlikely to exist on a Win95-only host].</P NTuser.DAT files in the same profile directory.</P ><DIV CLASS="NOTE" -><P -></P -><TABLE +><BLOCKQUOTE CLASS="NOTE" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/note.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Note"></TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" ><P +><B +>Note: </B >[lkcl 25aug97 - there are some issues to resolve with downloading of NT profiles, probably to do with time/date stamps. i have found that NTuser.DAT is never updated on the workstation after the first time that it is copied to the local workstation profile directory. this is in contrast to w95, where it _does_ transfer / update profiles correctly].</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE +></BLOCKQUOTE ></DIV ></DIV ></DIV ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 +><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1082" -></A ->6.9. DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control & Samba</H1 +NAME="AEN513" +>DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control & Samba</A +></H1 ><DIV CLASS="WARNING" ><P ></P ><TABLE CLASS="WARNING" +BORDER="1" WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" ><TR ><TD -WIDTH="25" ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Warning"></TD -><TH -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="CENTER" ><B >Possibly Outdated Material</B -></TH +></TD ></TR ><TR ><TD -> </TD -><TD ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" ><P > This appendix was originally authored by John H Terpstra of the Samba Team and is included here for posterity. @@ -2491,12 +2191,9 @@ VALIGN="TOP" ></TABLE ></DIV ><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >NOTE :</I -></SPAN > The term "Domain Controller" and those related to it refer to one specific method of authentication that can underly an SMB domain. Domain Controllers @@ -2582,68 +2279,6 @@ each Domain Controlling participant will have an up to date SAM component within its registry.</P ></DIV ></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="NAVFOOTER" -><HR -ALIGN="LEFT" -WIDTH="100%"><TABLE -SUMMARY="Footer navigation table" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -CELLPADDING="0" -CELLSPACING="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p544.html" -ACCESSKEY="P" ->Prev</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="34%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="samba-howto-collection.html" -ACCESSKEY="H" ->Home</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="samba-bdc.html" -ACCESSKEY="N" ->Next</A -></TD -></TR -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="top" ->Type of installation</TD -><TD -WIDTH="34%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p544.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="top" ->How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain</TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV ></BODY ></HTML >
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/ads.html b/docs/htmldocs/ads.html deleted file mode 100644 index fc6b78b32c..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/ads.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,423 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> -<HTML -><HEAD -><TITLE ->Samba as a ADS domain member</TITLE -><META -NAME="GENERATOR" -CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK -REL="HOME" -TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" -HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Type of installation" -HREF="p544.html"><LINK -REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain" -HREF="samba-bdc.html"><LINK -REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Samba as a NT4 domain member" -HREF="domain-security.html"></HEAD -><BODY -CLASS="CHAPTER" -BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" -TEXT="#000000" -LINK="#0000FF" -VLINK="#840084" -ALINK="#0000FF" -><DIV -CLASS="NAVHEADER" -><TABLE -SUMMARY="Header navigation table" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -CELLPADDING="0" -CELLSPACING="0" -><TR -><TH -COLSPAN="3" -ALIGN="center" ->SAMBA Project Documentation</TH -></TR -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="10%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="bottom" -><A -HREF="samba-bdc.html" -ACCESSKEY="P" ->Prev</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="80%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="bottom" -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="10%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="bottom" -><A -HREF="domain-security.html" -ACCESSKEY="N" ->Next</A -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -><HR -ALIGN="LEFT" -WIDTH="100%"></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><H1 -><A -NAME="ADS" -></A ->Chapter 8. Samba as a ADS domain member</H1 -><P ->This is a VERY ROUGH guide to setting up the current (November 2001) -pre-alpha version of Samba 3.0 with kerberos authentication against a -Windows2000 KDC. The procedures listed here are likely to change as -the code develops.</P -><P ->Pieces you need before you begin: -<P -></P -><TABLE -BORDER="0" -><TBODY -><TR -><TD ->a Windows 2000 server.</TD -></TR -><TR -><TD ->samba 3.0 or higher.</TD -></TR -><TR -><TD ->the MIT kerberos development libraries (either install from the above sources or use a package). The heimdal libraries will not work.</TD -></TR -><TR -><TD ->the OpenLDAP development libraries.</TD -></TR -></TBODY -></TABLE -><P -></P -></P -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1178" -></A ->8.1. Installing the required packages for Debian</H1 -><P ->On Debian you need to install the following packages: -<P -></P -><TABLE -BORDER="0" -><TBODY -><TR -><TD ->libkrb5-dev</TD -></TR -><TR -><TD ->krb5-user</TD -></TR -></TBODY -></TABLE -><P -></P -></P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1184" -></A ->8.2. Installing the required packages for RedHat</H1 -><P ->On RedHat this means you should have at least: -<P -></P -><TABLE -BORDER="0" -><TBODY -><TR -><TD ->krb5-workstation (for kinit)</TD -></TR -><TR -><TD ->krb5-libs (for linking with)</TD -></TR -><TR -><TD ->krb5-devel (because you are compiling from source)</TD -></TR -></TBODY -></TABLE -><P -></P -></P -><P ->in addition to the standard development environment.</P -><P ->Note that these are not standard on a RedHat install, and you may need -to get them off CD2.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1193" -></A ->8.3. Compile Samba</H1 -><P ->If your kerberos libraries are in a non-standard location then - remember to add the configure option --with-krb5=DIR.</P -><P ->After you run configure make sure that include/config.h contains - lines like this:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->#define HAVE_KRB5 1 -#define HAVE_LDAP 1</PRE -></P -><P ->If it doesn't then configure did not find your krb5 libraries or - your ldap libraries. Look in config.log to figure out why and fix - it.</P -><P ->Then compile and install Samba as usual. You must use at least the - following 3 options in smb.conf:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> realm = YOUR.KERBEROS.REALM - ads server = your.kerberos.server - security = ADS - encrypt passwords = yes</PRE -></P -><P ->Strictly speaking, you can omit the realm name and you can use an IP - address for the ads server. In that case Samba will auto-detect these.</P -><P ->You do *not* need a smbpasswd file, although it won't do any harm - and if you have one then Samba will be able to fall back to normal - password security for older clients. I expect that the above - required options will change soon when we get better active - directory integration.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1205" -></A ->8.4. Setup your /etc/krb5.conf</H1 -><P ->The minimal configuration for krb5.conf is:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> [realms] - YOUR.KERBEROS.REALM = { - kdc = your.kerberos.server - }</PRE -></P -><P ->Test your config by doing a "kinit USERNAME@REALM" and making sure that - your password is accepted by the Win2000 KDC. </P -><P ->NOTE: The realm must be uppercase. </P -><P ->You also must ensure that you can do a reverse DNS lookup on the IP -address of your KDC. Also, the name that this reverse lookup maps to -must either be the netbios name of the KDC (ie. the hostname with no -domain attached) or it can alternatively be the netbios name -followed by the realm. </P -><P ->The easiest way to ensure you get this right is to add a /etc/hosts -entry mapping the IP address of your KDC to its netbios name. If you -don't get this right then you will get a "local error" when you try -to join the realm.</P -><P ->If all you want is kerberos support in smbclient then you can skip -straight to step 5 now. Step 3 is only needed if you want kerberos -support in smbd.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1215" -></A ->8.5. Create the computer account</H1 -><P ->Do a "kinit" as a user that has authority to change arbitrary -passwords on the KDC ("Administrator" is a good choice). Then as a -user that has write permission on the Samba private directory -(usually root) run: -<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->net ads join</B -></P -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN1219" -></A ->8.5.1. Possible errors</H2 -><P -><P -></P -><DIV -CLASS="VARIABLELIST" -><DL -><DT ->"bash: kinit: command not found"</DT -><DD -><P ->kinit is in the krb5-workstation RPM on RedHat systems, and is in /usr/kerberos/bin, so it won't be in the path until you log in again (or open a new terminal)</P -></DD -><DT ->"ADS support not compiled in"</DT -><DD -><P ->Samba must be reconfigured (remove config.cache) and recompiled (make clean all install) after the kerberos libs and headers are installed.</P -></DD -></DL -></DIV -></P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1231" -></A ->8.6. Test your server setup</H1 -><P ->On a Windows 2000 client try <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->net use * \\server\share</B ->. You should -be logged in with kerberos without needing to know a password. If -this fails then run <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->klist tickets</B ->. Did you get a ticket for the -server? Does it have an encoding type of DES-CBC-MD5 ? </P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1236" -></A ->8.7. Testing with smbclient</H1 -><P ->On your Samba server try to login to a Win2000 server or your Samba -server using smbclient and kerberos. Use smbclient as usual, but -specify the -k option to choose kerberos authentication.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1239" -></A ->8.8. Notes</H1 -><P ->You must change administrator password at least once after DC install, - to create the right encoding types</P -><P ->w2k doesn't seem to create the _kerberos._udp and _ldap._tcp in - their defaults DNS setup. Maybe fixed in service packs?</P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="NAVFOOTER" -><HR -ALIGN="LEFT" -WIDTH="100%"><TABLE -SUMMARY="Footer navigation table" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -CELLPADDING="0" -CELLSPACING="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="samba-bdc.html" -ACCESSKEY="P" ->Prev</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="34%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="samba-howto-collection.html" -ACCESSKEY="H" ->Home</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="domain-security.html" -ACCESSKEY="N" ->Next</A -></TD -></TR -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="top" ->How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain</TD -><TD -WIDTH="34%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p544.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="top" ->Samba as a NT4 domain member</TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV -></BODY -></HTML ->
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/browsing-quick.html b/docs/htmldocs/browsing-quick.html index d2546f74b2..340302a102 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/browsing-quick.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/browsing-quick.html @@ -9,15 +9,12 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="General installation" -HREF="p18.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="Oplocks" -HREF="oplocks.html"><LINK +TITLE="Improved browsing in samba" +HREF="improved-browsing.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" -TITLE="LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba" -HREF="pwencrypt.html"></HEAD +TITLE="Samba performance issues" +HREF="speed.html"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="CHAPTER" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -45,7 +42,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="oplocks.html" +HREF="improved-browsing.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -59,7 +56,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="pwencrypt.html" +HREF="speed.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -74,7 +71,7 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="BROWSING-QUICK" ></A ->Chapter 4. Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</H1 +>Chapter 16. Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</H1 ><P >This document should be read in conjunction with Browsing and may be taken as the fast track guide to implementing browsing across subnets @@ -86,9 +83,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN392" +NAME="AEN2665" ></A ->4.1. Discussion</H1 +>16.1. Discussion</H1 ><P >Firstly, all MS Windows networking is based on SMB (Server Message Block) based messaging. SMB messaging is implemented using NetBIOS. Samba @@ -132,9 +129,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN400" +NAME="AEN2673" ></A ->4.2. Use of the "Remote Announce" parameter</H1 +>16.2. Use of the "Remote Announce" parameter</H1 ><P >The "remote announce" parameter of smb.conf can be used to forcibly ensure that all the NetBIOS names on a network get announced to a remote network. @@ -190,9 +187,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN414" +NAME="AEN2687" ></A ->4.3. Use of the "Remote Browse Sync" parameter</H1 +>16.3. Use of the "Remote Browse Sync" parameter</H1 ><P >The "remote browse sync" parameter of smb.conf is used to announce to another LMB that it must synchronise it's NetBIOS name list with our @@ -212,9 +209,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN419" +NAME="AEN2692" ></A ->4.4. Use of WINS</H1 +>16.4. Use of WINS</H1 ><P >Use of WINS (either Samba WINS _or_ MS Windows NT Server WINS) is highly recommended. Every NetBIOS machine registers it's name together with a @@ -274,9 +271,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN430" +NAME="AEN2703" ></A ->4.5. Do NOT use more than one (1) protocol on MS Windows machines</H1 +>16.5. Do NOT use more than one (1) protocol on MS Windows machines</H1 ><P >A very common cause of browsing problems results from installing more than one protocol on an MS Windows machine.</P @@ -304,9 +301,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN436" +NAME="AEN2709" ></A ->4.6. Name Resolution Order</H1 +>16.6. Name Resolution Order</H1 ><P >Resolution of NetBIOS names to IP addresses can take place using a number of methods. The only ones that can provide NetBIOS name_type information @@ -401,7 +398,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="oplocks.html" +HREF="improved-browsing.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -419,7 +416,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="pwencrypt.html" +HREF="speed.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -429,21 +426,17 @@ ACCESSKEY="N" WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ->Oplocks</TD +>Improved browsing in samba</TD ><TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p18.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ->LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba</TD +>Samba performance issues</TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/bugreport.html b/docs/htmldocs/bugreport.html index b3d4972c16..b5058f0d61 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/bugreport.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/bugreport.html @@ -9,15 +9,12 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Appendixes" -HREF="p3106.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="Samba and other CIFS clients" -HREF="other-clients.html"><LINK +TITLE="HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS" +HREF="cvs-access.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Diagnosing your samba server" -HREF="diagnosis.html"></HEAD +TITLE="Group mapping HOWTO" +HREF="groupmapping.html"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="CHAPTER" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -45,7 +42,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="other-clients.html" +HREF="cvs-access.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -59,7 +56,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="diagnosis.html" +HREF="groupmapping.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -74,26 +71,17 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="BUGREPORT" ></A ->Chapter 25. Reporting Bugs</H1 +>Chapter 19. Reporting Bugs</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3285" +NAME="AEN2921" ></A ->25.1. Introduction</H1 +>19.1. Introduction</H1 ><P ->The email address for bug reports for stable releases is <A -HREF="samba@samba.org" -TARGET="_top" ->samba@samba.org</A ->. -Bug reports for alpha releases should go to <A -HREF="mailto:samba-technical@samba.org" -TARGET="_top" ->samba-technical@samba.org</A ->.</P +>The email address for bug reports is samba@samba.org</P ><P >Please take the time to read this file before you submit a bug report. Also, please see if it has changed between releases, as we @@ -114,20 +102,16 @@ that list that may be able to help you.</P ><P >You may also like to look though the recent mailing list archives, which are conveniently accessible on the Samba web pages -at <A -HREF="http://samba.org/samba/" -TARGET="_top" ->http://samba.org/samba/</A ->.</P +at http://samba.org/samba/ </P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3295" +NAME="AEN2928" ></A ->25.2. General info</H1 +>19.2. General info</H1 ><P >Before submitting a bug report check your config for silly errors. Look in your log files for obvious messages that tell you that @@ -150,9 +134,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3301" +NAME="AEN2934" ></A ->25.3. Debug levels</H1 +>19.3. Debug levels</H1 ><P >If the bug has anything to do with Samba behaving incorrectly as a server (like refusing to open a file) then the log files will probably @@ -220,9 +204,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3318" +NAME="AEN2951" ></A ->25.4. Internal errors</H1 +>19.4. Internal errors</H1 ><P >If you get a "INTERNAL ERROR" message in your log files it means that Samba got an unexpected signal while running. It is probably a @@ -264,9 +248,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3328" +NAME="AEN2961" ></A ->25.5. Attaching to a running process</H1 +>19.5. Attaching to a running process</H1 ><P >Unfortunately some unixes (in particular some recent linux kernels) refuse to dump a core file if the task has changed uid (which smbd @@ -281,9 +265,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3331" +NAME="AEN2964" ></A ->25.6. Patches</H1 +>19.6. Patches</H1 ><P >The best sort of bug report is one that includes a fix! If you send us patches please use <B @@ -314,7 +298,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="other-clients.html" +HREF="cvs-access.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -332,7 +316,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="diagnosis.html" +HREF="groupmapping.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -342,21 +326,17 @@ ACCESSKEY="N" WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ->Samba and other CIFS clients</TD +>HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</TD ><TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p3106.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ->Diagnosing your samba server</TD +>Group mapping HOWTO</TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/cvs-access.html b/docs/htmldocs/cvs-access.html index 5578824ee3..fba42db7b4 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/cvs-access.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/cvs-access.html @@ -9,15 +9,12 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Optional configuration" -HREF="p1346.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory" -HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html"><LINK +TITLE="Samba performance issues" +HREF="speed.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Group mapping HOWTO" -HREF="groupmapping.html"></HEAD +TITLE="Reporting Bugs" +HREF="bugreport.html"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="CHAPTER" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -45,7 +42,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html" +HREF="speed.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -59,7 +56,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="groupmapping.html" +HREF="bugreport.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -74,15 +71,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="CVS-ACCESS" ></A ->Chapter 20. HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</H1 +>Chapter 18. HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2891" +NAME="AEN2873" ></A ->20.1. Introduction</H1 +>18.1. Introduction</H1 ><P >Samba is developed in an open environment. Developers use CVS (Concurrent Versioning System) to "checkin" (also known as @@ -102,9 +99,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2896" +NAME="AEN2878" ></A ->20.2. CVS Access to samba.org</H1 +>18.2. CVS Access to samba.org</H1 ><P >The machine samba.org runs a publicly accessible CVS repository for access to the source code of several packages, @@ -115,9 +112,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2899" +NAME="AEN2881" ></A ->20.2.1. Access via CVSweb</H2 +>18.2.1. Access via CVSweb</H2 ><P >You can access the source code via your favourite WWW browser. This allows you to access the contents of @@ -136,9 +133,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2904" +NAME="AEN2886" ></A ->20.2.2. Access via cvs</H2 +>18.2.2. Access via cvs</H2 ><P >You can also access the source code via a normal cvs client. This gives you much more control over you can @@ -256,7 +253,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html" +HREF="speed.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -274,7 +271,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="groupmapping.html" +HREF="bugreport.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -284,21 +281,17 @@ ACCESSKEY="N" WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ->Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory</TD +>Samba performance issues</TD ><TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p1346.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ->Group mapping HOWTO</TD +>Reporting Bugs</TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/diagnosis.html b/docs/htmldocs/diagnosis.html index 976197c3bb..5ddf6b7a49 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/diagnosis.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/diagnosis.html @@ -9,12 +9,9 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Appendixes" -HREF="p3106.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="Reporting Bugs" -HREF="bugreport.html"></HEAD +TITLE="Samba and other CIFS clients" +HREF="other-clients.html"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="CHAPTER" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -42,7 +39,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="bugreport.html" +HREF="other-clients.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -67,44 +64,47 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="DIAGNOSIS" ></A ->Chapter 26. Diagnosing your samba server</H1 +>Chapter 23. Diagnosing your samba server</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3354" +NAME="AEN3184" ></A ->26.1. Introduction</H1 +>23.1. Introduction</H1 ><P >This file contains a list of tests you can perform to validate your Samba server. It also tells you what the likely cause of the problem is if it fails any one of these steps. If it passes all these tests then it is probably working fine.</P ><P ->You should do ALL the tests, in the order shown. We have tried to +>You should do ALL the tests, in the order shown. I have tried to carefully choose them so later tests only use capabilities verified in the earlier tests.</P ><P ->If you send one of the samba mailing lists an email saying "it doesn't work" -and you have not followed this test procedure then you should not be surprised -your email is ignored.</P +>If you send me an email saying "it doesn't work" and you have not +followed this test procedure then you should not be surprised if I +ignore your email.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3359" +NAME="AEN3189" ></A ->26.2. Assumptions</H1 +>23.2. Assumptions</H1 ><P ->In all of the tests it is assumed you have a Samba server called -BIGSERVER and a PC called ACLIENT both in workgroup TESTGROUP.</P +>In all of the tests I assume you have a Samba server called BIGSERVER +and a PC called ACLIENT both in workgroup TESTGROUP. I also assume the +PC is running windows for workgroups with a recent copy of the +microsoft tcp/ip stack. Alternatively, your PC may be running Windows +95 or Windows NT (Workstation or Server).</P ><P >The procedure is similar for other types of clients.</P ><P ->It is also assumed you know the name of an available share in your +>I also assume you know the name of an available share in your smb.conf. I will assume this share is called "tmp". You can add a "tmp" share like by adding the following to smb.conf:</P ><P @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" read only = yes </PRE ></P ><P ->THESE TESTS ASSUME VERSION 3.0.0 OR LATER OF THE SAMBA SUITE. SOME +>THESE TESTS ASSUME VERSION 2.0.6 OR LATER OF THE SAMBA SUITE. SOME COMMANDS SHOWN DID NOT EXIST IN EARLIER VERSIONS</P ><P >Please pay attention to the error messages you receive. If any error message @@ -133,17 +133,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3369" +NAME="AEN3199" ></A ->26.3. Tests</H1 +>23.3. Tests</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3371" +NAME="AEN3201" ></A ->26.3.1. Test 1</H2 +>23.3.1. Test 1</H2 ><P >In the directory in which you store your smb.conf file, run the command "testparm smb.conf". If it reports any errors then your smb.conf @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ configuration file is faulty.</P ><P >Note: Your smb.conf file may be located in: <TT CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/samba</TT +>/etc</TT > Or in: <TT CLASS="FILENAME" @@ -163,9 +163,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3377" +NAME="AEN3207" ></A ->26.3.2. Test 2</H2 +>23.3.2. Test 2</H2 ><P >Run the command "ping BIGSERVER" from the PC and "ping ACLIENT" from the unix box. If you don't get a valid response then your TCP/IP @@ -189,9 +189,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3383" +NAME="AEN3213" ></A ->26.3.3. Test 3</H2 +>23.3.3. Test 3</H2 ><P >Run the command "smbclient -L BIGSERVER" on the unix box. You should get a list of available shares back. </P @@ -260,9 +260,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3398" +NAME="AEN3228" ></A ->26.3.4. Test 4</H2 +>23.3.4. Test 4</H2 ><P >Run the command "nmblookup -B BIGSERVER __SAMBA__". You should get the IP address of your Samba server back.</P @@ -281,9 +281,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3403" +NAME="AEN3233" ></A ->26.3.5. Test 5</H2 +>23.3.5. Test 5</H2 ><P >run the command <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -302,9 +302,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3409" +NAME="AEN3239" ></A ->26.3.6. Test 6</H2 +>23.3.6. Test 6</H2 ><P >Run the command <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -336,9 +336,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3417" +NAME="AEN3247" ></A ->26.3.7. Test 7</H2 +>23.3.7. Test 7</H2 ><P >Run the command <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -425,9 +425,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3443" +NAME="AEN3273" ></A ->26.3.8. Test 8</H2 +>23.3.8. Test 8</H2 ><P >On the PC type the command <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -485,9 +485,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3460" +NAME="AEN3290" ></A ->26.3.9. Test 9</H2 +>23.3.9. Test 9</H2 ><P >Run the command <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -519,9 +519,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3468" +NAME="AEN3298" ></A ->26.3.10. Test 10</H2 +>23.3.10. Test 10</H2 ><P >Run the command <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -545,9 +545,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3474" +NAME="AEN3304" ></A ->26.3.11. Test 11</H2 +>23.3.11. Test 11</H2 ><P >From file manager try to browse the server. Your samba server should appear in the browse list of your local workgroup (or the one you @@ -573,9 +573,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3479" +NAME="AEN3309" ></A ->26.4. Still having troubles?</H1 +>23.4. Still having troubles?</H1 ><P >Try the mailing list or newsgroup, or use the ethereal utility to sniff the problem. The official samba mailing list can be reached at @@ -611,7 +611,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="bugreport.html" +HREF="other-clients.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -635,16 +635,12 @@ VALIGN="top" WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ->Reporting Bugs</TD +>Samba and other CIFS clients</TD ><TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p3106.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/domain-security.html b/docs/htmldocs/domain-security.html index 9cf9eceb8d..8273525710 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/domain-security.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/domain-security.html @@ -2,22 +2,19 @@ <HTML ><HEAD ><TITLE ->Samba as a NT4 domain member</TITLE +>security = domain in Samba 2.x</TITLE ><META NAME="GENERATOR" CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Type of installation" -HREF="p544.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="Samba as a ADS domain member" -HREF="ads.html"><LINK +TITLE="Security levels" +HREF="securitylevels.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Optional configuration" -HREF="p1346.html"></HEAD +TITLE="Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind" +HREF="winbind.html"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="CHAPTER" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -45,7 +42,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="ads.html" +HREF="securitylevels.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -59,7 +56,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="p1346.html" +HREF="winbind.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -74,13 +71,13 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="DOMAIN-SECURITY" ></A ->Chapter 9. Samba as a NT4 domain member</H1 +>Chapter 9. security = domain in Samba 2.x</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1261" +NAME="AEN1133" ></A >9.1. Joining an NT Domain with Samba 2.2</H1 ><P @@ -311,12 +308,12 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1325" +NAME="AEN1197" ></A >9.2. Samba and Windows 2000 Domains</H1 ><P >Many people have asked regarding the state of Samba's ability to participate in -a Windows 2000 Domain. Samba 3.0 is able to act as a member server of a Windows +a Windows 2000 Domain. Samba 2.2 is able to act as a member server of a Windows 2000 domain operating in mixed or native mode.</P ><P >There is much confusion between the circumstances that require a "mixed" mode @@ -336,7 +333,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1330" +NAME="AEN1202" ></A >9.3. Why is this better than security = server?</H1 ><P @@ -438,7 +435,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="ads.html" +HREF="securitylevels.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -456,7 +453,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="p1346.html" +HREF="winbind.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -466,21 +463,17 @@ ACCESSKEY="N" WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ->Samba as a ADS domain member</TD +>Security levels</TD ><TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p544.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ->Optional configuration</TD +>Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/findsmb.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/findsmb.1.html index 618363c104..08fffb47b6 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/findsmb.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/findsmb.1.html @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ NAME="AEN48" ><H2 >VERSION</H2 ><P ->This man page is correct for version 3.0 of +>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of the Samba suite.</P ></DIV ><DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/groupmapping.html b/docs/htmldocs/groupmapping.html index e2bbf14dd8..6ad9a3ad63 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/groupmapping.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/groupmapping.html @@ -9,15 +9,12 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Optional configuration" -HREF="p1346.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS" -HREF="cvs-access.html"><LINK +TITLE="Reporting Bugs" +HREF="bugreport.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Samba performance issues" -HREF="speed.html"></HEAD +TITLE="Portability" +HREF="portability.html"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="CHAPTER" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -45,7 +42,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="cvs-access.html" +HREF="bugreport.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -59,7 +56,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="speed.html" +HREF="portability.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -74,7 +71,7 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="GROUPMAPPING" ></A ->Chapter 21. Group mapping HOWTO</H1 +>Chapter 20. Group mapping HOWTO</H1 ><P > Starting with Samba 3.0 alpha 2, a new group mapping function is available. The @@ -185,7 +182,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="cvs-access.html" +HREF="bugreport.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -203,7 +200,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="speed.html" +HREF="portability.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -213,21 +210,17 @@ ACCESSKEY="N" WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ->HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</TD +>Reporting Bugs</TD ><TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p1346.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ->Samba performance issues</TD +>Portability</TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/improved-browsing.html b/docs/htmldocs/improved-browsing.html index 9c7038a031..3fad127ef0 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/improved-browsing.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/improved-browsing.html @@ -9,15 +9,12 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="General installation" -HREF="p18.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="How to Install and Test SAMBA" -HREF="install.html"><LINK +TITLE="Using samba 3.0 with ActiveDirectory support" +HREF="ads.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Oplocks" -HREF="oplocks.html"></HEAD +TITLE="Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide" +HREF="browsing-quick.html"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="CHAPTER" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -45,7 +42,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="install.html" +HREF="ads.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -59,7 +56,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="oplocks.html" +HREF="browsing-quick.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -74,15 +71,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="IMPROVED-BROWSING" ></A ->Chapter 2. Improved browsing in samba</H1 +>Chapter 15. Improved browsing in samba</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN228" +NAME="AEN2517" ></A ->2.1. Overview of browsing</H1 +>15.1. Overview of browsing</H1 ><P >SMB networking provides a mechanism by which clients can access a list of machines in a network, a so-called "browse list". This list @@ -104,9 +101,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN232" +NAME="AEN2521" ></A ->2.2. Browsing support in samba</H1 +>15.2. Browsing support in samba</H1 ><P >Samba now fully supports browsing. The browsing is supported by nmbd and is also controlled by options in the smb.conf file (see smb.conf(5)).</P @@ -149,9 +146,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN241" +NAME="AEN2530" ></A ->2.3. Problem resolution</H1 +>15.3. Problem resolution</H1 ><P >If something doesn't work then hopefully the log.nmb file will help you track down the problem. Try a debug level of 2 or 3 for finding @@ -183,9 +180,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN248" +NAME="AEN2537" ></A ->2.4. Browsing across subnets</H1 +>15.4. Browsing across subnets</H1 ><P >With the release of Samba 1.9.17(alpha1 and above) Samba has been updated to enable it to support the replication of browse lists @@ -214,9 +211,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN253" +NAME="AEN2542" ></A ->2.4.1. How does cross subnet browsing work ?</H2 +>15.4.1. How does cross subnet browsing work ?</H2 ><P >Cross subnet browsing is a complicated dance, containing multiple moving parts. It has taken Microsoft several years to get the code @@ -426,9 +423,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN288" +NAME="AEN2577" ></A ->2.5. Setting up a WINS server</H1 +>15.5. Setting up a WINS server</H1 ><P >Either a Samba machine or a Windows NT Server machine may be set up as a WINS server. To set a Samba machine to be a WINS server you must @@ -480,7 +477,7 @@ all smb.conf files :</P ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->wins server = >name or IP address<</B +> wins server = >name or IP address<</B ></P ><P >where >name or IP address< is either the DNS name of the WINS server @@ -509,9 +506,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN307" +NAME="AEN2596" ></A ->2.6. Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</H1 +>15.6. Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</H1 ><P >To set up cross subnet browsing on a network containing machines in up to be in a WORKGROUP, not an NT Domain you need to set up one @@ -532,7 +529,7 @@ set the following option in the [global] section of the smb.conf file :</P ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->domain master = yes</B +> domain master = yes</B ></P ><P >The domain master browser should also preferrably be the local master @@ -593,9 +590,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN325" +NAME="AEN2614" ></A ->2.7. Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</H1 +>15.7. Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</H1 ><P >If you are adding Samba servers to a Windows NT Domain then you must not set up a Samba server as a domain master browser. @@ -644,9 +641,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN335" +NAME="AEN2624" ></A ->2.8. Forcing samba to be the master</H1 +>15.8. Forcing samba to be the master</H1 ><P >Who becomes the "master browser" is determined by an election process using broadcasts. Each election packet contains a number of parameters @@ -692,9 +689,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN344" +NAME="AEN2633" ></A ->2.9. Making samba the domain master</H1 +>15.9. Making samba the domain master</H1 ><P >The domain master is responsible for collating the browse lists of multiple subnets so that browsing can occur between subnets. You can @@ -765,9 +762,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN362" +NAME="AEN2651" ></A ->2.10. Note about broadcast addresses</H1 +>15.10. Note about broadcast addresses</H1 ><P >If your network uses a "0" based broadcast address (for example if it ends in a 0) then you will strike problems. Windows for Workgroups @@ -779,9 +776,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN365" +NAME="AEN2654" ></A ->2.11. Multiple interfaces</H1 +>15.11. Multiple interfaces</H1 ><P >Samba now supports machines with multiple network interfaces. If you have multiple interfaces then you will need to use the "interfaces" @@ -804,7 +801,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="install.html" +HREF="ads.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -822,7 +819,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="oplocks.html" +HREF="browsing-quick.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -832,21 +829,17 @@ ACCESSKEY="N" WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ->How to Install and Test SAMBA</TD +>Using samba 3.0 with ActiveDirectory support</TD ><TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p18.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ->Oplocks</TD +>Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/install.html b/docs/htmldocs/install.html index 64a23b1a48..f78a6f85bd 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/install.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/install.html @@ -9,15 +9,12 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="General installation" -HREF="p18.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="General installation" -HREF="p18.html"><LINK +TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" +HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Improved browsing in samba" -HREF="improved-browsing.html"></HEAD +TITLE="Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba" +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="CHAPTER" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -45,7 +42,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="p18.html" +HREF="samba-howto-collection.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -59,7 +56,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="improved-browsing.html" +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -80,9 +77,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN25" +NAME="AEN20" ></A ->1.1. Read the man pages</H1 +>1.1. Step 0: Read the man pages</H1 ><P >The man pages distributed with SAMBA contain lots of useful info that will help to get you started. @@ -95,20 +92,10 @@ CLASS="PROMPT" ><TT CLASS="USERINPUT" ><B ->man smbd.8</B -></TT -> - or - <TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->$ </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B >nroff -man smbd.8 | more </B ></TT -> on older unixes.</P +></P ><P >Other sources of information are pointed to by the Samba web site,<A @@ -122,9 +109,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN35" +NAME="AEN28" ></A ->1.2. Building the Binaries</H1 +>1.2. Step 1: Building the Binaries</H1 ><P >To do this, first run the program <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -221,9 +208,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN63" +NAME="AEN56" ></A ->1.3. The all important step</H1 +>1.3. Step 2: The all important step</H1 ><P >At this stage you must fetch yourself a coffee or other drink you find stimulating. Getting the rest @@ -238,9 +225,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN67" +NAME="AEN60" ></A ->1.4. Create the smb configuration file.</H1 +>1.4. Step 3: Create the smb configuration file.</H1 ><P >There are sample configuration files in the examples subdirectory in the distribution. I suggest you read them @@ -294,9 +281,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN81" +NAME="AEN74" ></A ->1.5. Test your config file with +>1.5. Step 4: Test your config file with <B CLASS="COMMAND" >testparm</B @@ -312,21 +299,15 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><P >Make sure it runs OK and that the services look reasonable before proceeding. </P -><P ->Always run testparm again when you change - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf</TT ->!</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN89" +NAME="AEN80" ></A ->1.6. Starting the smbd and nmbd</H1 +>1.6. Step 5: Starting the smbd and nmbd</H1 ><P >You must choose to start smbd and nmbd either as daemons or from <B @@ -364,9 +345,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN99" +NAME="AEN90" ></A ->1.6.1. Starting from inetd.conf</H2 +>1.6.1. Step 5a: Starting from inetd.conf</H2 ><P >NOTE; The following will be different if you use NIS or NIS+ to distributed services maps.</P @@ -468,9 +449,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN128" +NAME="AEN119" ></A ->1.6.2. Alternative: starting it as a daemon</H2 +>1.6.2. Step 5b. Alternative: starting it as a daemon</H2 ><P >To start the server as a daemon you should create a script something like this one, perhaps calling @@ -525,9 +506,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN144" +NAME="AEN135" ></A ->1.7. Try listing the shares available on your +>1.7. Step 6: Try listing the shares available on your server</H1 ><P ><TT @@ -566,9 +547,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN153" +NAME="AEN144" ></A ->1.8. Try connecting with the unix client</H1 +>1.8. Step 7: Try connecting with the unix client</H1 ><P ><TT CLASS="PROMPT" @@ -629,9 +610,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN169" +NAME="AEN160" ></A ->1.9. Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT, +>1.9. Step 8: Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT, Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</H1 ><P >Try mounting disks. eg:</P @@ -678,7 +659,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN183" +NAME="AEN174" ></A >1.10. What If Things Don't Work?</H1 ><P @@ -701,16 +682,15 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN188" +NAME="AEN179" ></A >1.10.1. Diagnosing Problems</H2 ><P ->If you have installation problems then go to the - <A -HREF="Diagnosis.html" -TARGET="_top" ->Diagnosis</A -> chapter to try to find the +>If you have installation problems then go to + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>DIAGNOSIS.txt</TT +> to try to find the problem.</P ></DIV ><DIV @@ -718,7 +698,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN192" +NAME="AEN183" ></A >1.10.2. Scope IDs</H2 ><P @@ -734,7 +714,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN195" +NAME="AEN186" ></A >1.10.3. Choosing the Protocol Level</H2 ><P @@ -775,7 +755,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN204" +NAME="AEN195" ></A >1.10.4. Printing from UNIX to a Client PC</H2 ><P @@ -796,7 +776,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN209" +NAME="AEN200" ></A >1.10.5. Locking</H2 ><P @@ -856,7 +836,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN218" +NAME="AEN209" ></A >1.10.6. Mapping Usernames</H2 ><P @@ -882,7 +862,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="p18.html" +HREF="samba-howto-collection.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -900,7 +880,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="improved-browsing.html" +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -910,21 +890,17 @@ ACCESSKEY="N" WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ->General installation</TD +>SAMBA Project Documentation</TD ><TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p18.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ->Improved browsing in samba</TD +>Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/integrate-ms-networks.html b/docs/htmldocs/integrate-ms-networks.html index 051364e5b9..2412da9c4a 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/integrate-ms-networks.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/integrate-ms-networks.html @@ -9,15 +9,13 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Optional configuration" -HREF="p1346.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="Optional configuration" -HREF="p1346.html"><LINK +TITLE="How to Install and Test SAMBA" +HREF="install.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" -TITLE="UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists" -HREF="unix-permissions.html"></HEAD +TITLE="Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally +managed authentication" +HREF="pam.html"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="CHAPTER" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -45,7 +43,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="p1346.html" +HREF="install.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -59,7 +57,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="unix-permissions.html" +HREF="pam.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -74,15 +72,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="INTEGRATE-MS-NETWORKS" ></A ->Chapter 10. Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</H1 +>Chapter 2. Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1362" +NAME="AEN223" ></A ->10.1. Agenda</H1 +>2.1. Agenda</H1 ><P >To identify the key functional mechanisms of MS Windows networking to enable the deployment of Samba as a means of extending and/or @@ -147,9 +145,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1384" +NAME="AEN245" ></A ->10.2. Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</H1 +>2.2. Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</H1 ><P >The key configuration files covered in this section are:</P ><P @@ -189,9 +187,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1400" +NAME="AEN261" ></A ->10.2.1. <TT +>2.2.1. <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/hosts</TT ></H2 @@ -270,9 +268,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1416" +NAME="AEN277" ></A ->10.2.2. <TT +>2.2.2. <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/resolv.conf</TT ></H2 @@ -308,9 +306,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1427" +NAME="AEN288" ></A ->10.2.3. <TT +>2.2.3. <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/host.conf</TT ></H2 @@ -337,9 +335,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1435" +NAME="AEN296" ></A ->10.2.4. <TT +>2.2.4. <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT ></H2 @@ -378,7 +376,7 @@ facilities and/or services are correctly configured.</P sent, TCP/IP networks are silent. All TCP/IP communications assumes a principal of speaking only when necessary.</P ><P ->Starting with version 2.2.0 samba has Linux support for extensions to +>Samba version 2.2.0 will add Linux support for extensions to the name service switch infrastructure so that linux clients will be able to obtain resolution of MS Windows NetBIOS names to IP Addresses. To gain this functionality Samba needs to be compiled @@ -406,9 +404,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1447" +NAME="AEN308" ></A ->10.3. Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</H1 +>2.3. Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</H1 ><P >MS Windows networking is predicated about the name each machine is given. This name is known variously (and inconsistently) as @@ -491,9 +489,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1459" +NAME="AEN320" ></A ->10.3.1. The NetBIOS Name Cache</H2 +>2.3.1. The NetBIOS Name Cache</H2 ><P >All MS Windows machines employ an in memory buffer in which is stored the NetBIOS names and IP addresses for all external @@ -518,9 +516,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1464" +NAME="AEN325" ></A ->10.3.2. The LMHOSTS file</H2 +>2.3.2. The LMHOSTS file</H2 ><P >This file is usually located in MS Windows NT 4.0 or 2000 in <TT @@ -621,9 +619,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1472" +NAME="AEN333" ></A ->10.3.3. HOSTS file</H2 +>2.3.3. HOSTS file</H2 ><P >This file is usually located in MS Windows NT 4.0 or 2000 in <TT @@ -643,9 +641,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1477" +NAME="AEN338" ></A ->10.3.4. DNS Lookup</H2 +>2.3.4. DNS Lookup</H2 ><P >This capability is configured in the TCP/IP setup area in the network configuration facility. If enabled an elaborate name resolution sequence @@ -663,9 +661,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1480" +NAME="AEN341" ></A ->10.3.5. WINS Lookup</H2 +>2.3.5. WINS Lookup</H2 ><P >A WINS (Windows Internet Name Server) service is the equivaent of the rfc1001/1002 specified NBNS (NetBIOS Name Server). A WINS server stores @@ -706,9 +704,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1492" +NAME="AEN353" ></A ->10.4. How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and +>2.4. How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and dependable browsing using Samba</H1 ><P >As stated above, MS Windows machines register their NetBIOS names @@ -773,9 +771,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1502" +NAME="AEN363" ></A ->10.5. MS Windows security options and how to configure +>2.5. MS Windows security options and how to configure Samba for seemless integration</H1 ><P >MS Windows clients may use encrypted passwords as part of a @@ -910,9 +908,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1530" +NAME="AEN391" ></A ->10.5.1. Use MS Windows NT as an authentication server</H2 +>2.5.1. Use MS Windows NT as an authentication server</H2 ><P >This method involves the additions of the following parameters in the smb.conf file:</P @@ -946,9 +944,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1538" +NAME="AEN399" ></A ->10.5.2. Make Samba a member of an MS Windows NT security domain</H2 +>2.5.2. Make Samba a member of an MS Windows NT security domain</H2 ><P >This method involves additon of the following paramters in the smb.conf file:</P ><P @@ -1009,9 +1007,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1555" +NAME="AEN416" ></A ->10.5.3. Configure Samba as an authentication server</H2 +>2.5.3. Configure Samba as an authentication server</H2 ><P >This mode of authentication demands that there be on the Unix/Linux system both a Unix style account as well as an @@ -1046,9 +1044,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><H3 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1562" +NAME="AEN423" ></A ->10.5.3.1. Users</H3 +>2.5.3.1. Users</H3 ><P >A user account that may provide a home directory should be created. The following Linux system commands are typical of @@ -1069,9 +1067,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><H3 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN1567" +NAME="AEN428" ></A ->10.5.3.2. MS Windows NT Machine Accounts</H3 +>2.5.3.2. MS Windows NT Machine Accounts</H3 ><P >These are required only when Samba is used as a domain controller. Refer to the Samba-PDC-HOWTO for more details.</P @@ -1090,9 +1088,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1572" +NAME="AEN433" ></A ->10.6. Conclusions</H1 +>2.6. Conclusions</H1 ><P >Samba provides a flexible means to operate as...</P ><P @@ -1138,7 +1136,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="p1346.html" +HREF="install.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -1156,7 +1154,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="unix-permissions.html" +HREF="pam.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -1166,21 +1164,18 @@ ACCESSKEY="N" WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ->Optional configuration</TD +>How to Install and Test SAMBA</TD ><TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p1346.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ->UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</TD +>Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally +managed authentication</TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/msdfs.html b/docs/htmldocs/msdfs.html index 95902f7217..47628ccf85 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/msdfs.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/msdfs.html @@ -9,16 +9,13 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Optional configuration" -HREF="p1346.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" TITLE="Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally managed authentication" HREF="pam.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Printing Support" -HREF="printing.html"></HEAD +TITLE="UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists" +HREF="unix-permissions.html"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="CHAPTER" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -60,7 +57,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="printing.html" +HREF="unix-permissions.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -75,15 +72,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="MSDFS" ></A ->Chapter 13. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</H1 +>Chapter 4. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1847" +NAME="AEN525" ></A ->13.1. Instructions</H1 +>4.1. Instructions</H1 ><P >The Distributed File System (or Dfs) provides a means of separating the logical view of files and directories that users @@ -229,9 +226,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1882" +NAME="AEN560" ></A ->13.1.1. Notes</H2 +>4.1.1. Notes</H2 ><P ></P ><UL @@ -292,7 +289,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="printing.html" +HREF="unix-permissions.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -308,16 +305,12 @@ managed authentication</TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p1346.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ->Printing Support</TD +>UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/nmbd.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/nmbd.8.html index c9cdb5908b..05bf860124 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/nmbd.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/nmbd.8.html @@ -38,12 +38,12 @@ NAME="AEN8" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >nmbd</B -> [-D] [-a] [-i] [-o] [-h] [-V] [-d <debug level>] [-H <lmhosts file>] [-l <log directory>] [-n <primary netbios name>] [-p <port number>] [-s <configuration file>]</P +> [-D] [-a] [-i] [-o] [-P] [-h] [-V] [-d <debug level>] [-H <lmhosts file>] [-l <log directory>] [-n <primary netbios name>] [-p <port number>] [-s <configuration file>]</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN23" +NAME="AEN24" ></A ><H2 >DESCRIPTION</H2 @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > is a server that understands and can reply to NetBIOS over IP name service requests, like those produced by SMB/CIFS clients such as Windows 95/98/ME, - Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP and LanManager clients. It also + Windows NT, Windows 2000, and LanManager clients. It also participates in the browsing protocols which make up the Windows "Network Neighborhood" view.</P ><P @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN40" +NAME="AEN41" ></A ><H2 >OPTIONS</H2 @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN130" +NAME="AEN131" ></A ><H2 >FILES</H2 @@ -559,7 +559,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN177" +NAME="AEN178" ></A ><H2 >SIGNALS</H2 @@ -624,18 +624,18 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN193" +NAME="AEN194" ></A ><H2 >VERSION</H2 ><P ->This man page is correct for version 3.0 of +>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of the Samba suite.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN196" +NAME="AEN197" ></A ><H2 >SEE ALSO</H2 @@ -700,7 +700,7 @@ TARGET="_top" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN213" +NAME="AEN214" ></A ><H2 >AUTHOR</H2 diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/nmblookup.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/nmblookup.1.html index 2ce322990f..0209c4bd2b 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/nmblookup.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/nmblookup.1.html @@ -38,12 +38,12 @@ NAME="AEN8" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >nmblookup</B -> [-M] [-R] [-S] [-r] [-A] [-h] [-B <broadcast address>] [-U <unicast address>] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-i <NetBIOS scope>] [-T] [-f] {name}</P +> [-M] [-R] [-S] [-r] [-A] [-h] [-B <broadcast address>] [-U <unicast address>] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-i <NetBIOS scope>] [-T] {name}</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN25" +NAME="AEN24" ></A ><H2 >DESCRIPTION</H2 @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN31" +NAME="AEN30" ></A ><H2 >OPTIONS</H2 @@ -286,15 +286,6 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" > pair that is the normal output.</P ></DD ><DT ->-f</DT -><DD -><P -> Show which flags apply to the name that has been looked up. Possible - answers are zero or more of: Response, Authoritative, - Truncated, Recursion_Desired, Recursion_Available, Broadcast. - </P -></DD -><DT >name</DT ><DD ><P @@ -311,7 +302,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN115" +NAME="AEN110" ></A ><H2 >EXAMPLES</H2 @@ -348,18 +339,18 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN127" +NAME="AEN122" ></A ><H2 >VERSION</H2 ><P ->This man page is correct for version 3.0 of +>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of the Samba suite.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN130" +NAME="AEN125" ></A ><H2 >SEE ALSO</H2 @@ -386,7 +377,7 @@ TARGET="_top" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN137" +NAME="AEN132" ></A ><H2 >AUTHOR</H2 diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/oplocks.html b/docs/htmldocs/oplocks.html deleted file mode 100644 index c926f32c14..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/oplocks.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,208 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> -<HTML -><HEAD -><TITLE ->Oplocks</TITLE -><META -NAME="GENERATOR" -CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK -REL="HOME" -TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" -HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="General installation" -HREF="p18.html"><LINK -REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="Improved browsing in samba" -HREF="improved-browsing.html"><LINK -REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide" -HREF="browsing-quick.html"></HEAD -><BODY -CLASS="CHAPTER" -BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" -TEXT="#000000" -LINK="#0000FF" -VLINK="#840084" -ALINK="#0000FF" -><DIV -CLASS="NAVHEADER" -><TABLE -SUMMARY="Header navigation table" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -CELLPADDING="0" -CELLSPACING="0" -><TR -><TH -COLSPAN="3" -ALIGN="center" ->SAMBA Project Documentation</TH -></TR -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="10%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="bottom" -><A -HREF="improved-browsing.html" -ACCESSKEY="P" ->Prev</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="80%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="bottom" -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="10%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="bottom" -><A -HREF="browsing-quick.html" -ACCESSKEY="N" ->Next</A -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -><HR -ALIGN="LEFT" -WIDTH="100%"></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><H1 -><A -NAME="OPLOCKS" -></A ->Chapter 3. Oplocks</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN377" -></A ->3.1. What are oplocks?</H1 -><P ->When a client opens a file it can request an "oplock" or file -lease. This is (to simplify a bit) a guarentee that no one else -has the file open simultaneously. It allows the client to not -send any updates on the file to the server, thus reducing a -network file access to local access (once the file is in -client cache). An "oplock break" is when the server sends -a request to the client to flush all its changes back to -the server, so the file is in a consistent state for other -opens to succeed. If a client fails to respond to this -asynchronous request then the file can be corrupted. Hence -the "turn off oplocks" answer if people are having multi-user -file access problems.</P -><P ->Unless the kernel is "oplock aware" (SGI IRIX and Linux are -the only two UNIXes that are at the moment) then if a local -UNIX process accesses the file simultaneously then Samba -has no way of telling this is occuring, so the guarentee -to the client is broken. This can corrupt the file. Short -answer - it you have UNIX clients accessing the same file -as smbd locally or via NFS and you're not running Linux or -IRIX then turn off oplocks for that file or share.</P -><P ->"Share modes". These are modes of opening a file, that -guarentee an invarient - such as DENY_WRITE - which means -that if any other opens are requested with write access after -this current open has succeeded then they should be denied -with a "sharing violation" error message. Samba handles these -internally inside smbd. UNIX clients accessing the same file -ignore these invarients. Just proving that if you need simultaneous -file access from a Windows and UNIX client you *must* have an -application that is written to lock records correctly on both -sides. Few applications are written like this, and even fewer -are cross platform (UNIX and Windows) so in practice this isn't -much of a problem.</P -><P ->"Locking". This really means "byte range locking" - such as -lock 10 bytes at file offset 24 for write access. This is the -area in which well written UNIX and Windows apps will cooperate. -Windows locks (at least from NT or above) are 64-bit unsigned -offsets. UNIX locks are either 31 bit or 63 bit and are signed -(the top bit is used for the sign). Samba handles these by -first ensuring that all the Windows locks don't conflict (ie. -if other Windows clients have competing locks then just reject -immediately) - this allows us to support 64-bit Windows locks -on 32-bit filesystems. Secondly any locks that are valid are -then mapped onto UNIX fcntl byte range locks. These are the -locks that will be seen by UNIX processes. If there is a conflict -here the lock is rejected.</P -><P ->Note that if a client has an oplock then it "knows" that no -other client can have the file open so usually doesn't bother -to send to lock request to the server - this means once again -if you need to share files between UNIX and Windows processes -either use IRIX or Linux, or turn off oplocks for these -files/shares.</P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="NAVFOOTER" -><HR -ALIGN="LEFT" -WIDTH="100%"><TABLE -SUMMARY="Footer navigation table" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -CELLPADDING="0" -CELLSPACING="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="improved-browsing.html" -ACCESSKEY="P" ->Prev</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="34%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="samba-howto-collection.html" -ACCESSKEY="H" ->Home</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="browsing-quick.html" -ACCESSKEY="N" ->Next</A -></TD -></TR -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="top" ->Improved browsing in samba</TD -><TD -WIDTH="34%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p18.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="top" ->Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV -></BODY -></HTML ->
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/other-clients.html b/docs/htmldocs/other-clients.html index 38dfc04a64..4f6c5fe70a 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/other-clients.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/other-clients.html @@ -9,15 +9,12 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Appendixes" -HREF="p3106.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" TITLE="Portability" HREF="portability.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Reporting Bugs" -HREF="bugreport.html"></HEAD +TITLE="Diagnosing your samba server" +HREF="diagnosis.html"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="CHAPTER" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -59,7 +56,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="bugreport.html" +HREF="diagnosis.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -74,7 +71,7 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="OTHER-CLIENTS" ></A ->Chapter 24. Samba and other CIFS clients</H1 +>Chapter 22. Samba and other CIFS clients</H1 ><P >This chapter contains client-specific information.</P ><DIV @@ -82,9 +79,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3175" +NAME="AEN3070" ></A ->24.1. Macintosh clients?</H1 +>22.1. Macintosh clients?</H1 ><P >Yes. <A HREF="http://www.thursby.com/" @@ -128,17 +125,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3184" +NAME="AEN3079" ></A ->24.2. OS2 Client</H1 +>22.2. OS2 Client</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3186" +NAME="AEN3081" ></A ->24.2.1. How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or +>22.2.1. How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba?</H2 ><P >A more complete answer to this question can be @@ -195,9 +192,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3201" +NAME="AEN3096" ></A ->24.2.2. How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect), +>22.2.2. How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect), OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba?</H2 ><P >You can use the free Microsoft LAN Manager 2.2c Client @@ -239,9 +236,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3210" +NAME="AEN3105" ></A ->24.2.3. Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version) +>22.2.3. Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version) is used as a client?</H2 ><P >When you do a NET VIEW or use the "File and Print @@ -261,9 +258,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3214" +NAME="AEN3109" ></A ->24.2.4. How do I get printer driver download working +>22.2.4. How do I get printer driver download working for OS/2 clients?</H2 ><P >First, create a share called [PRINTDRV] that is @@ -312,17 +309,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3224" +NAME="AEN3119" ></A ->24.3. Windows for Workgroups</H1 +>22.3. Windows for Workgroups</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3226" +NAME="AEN3121" ></A ->24.3.1. Use latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft</H2 +>22.3.1. Use latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft</H2 ><P >Use the latest TCP/IP stack from microsoft if you use Windows for workgroups.</P @@ -342,9 +339,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3231" +NAME="AEN3126" ></A ->24.3.2. Delete .pwl files after password change</H2 +>22.3.2. Delete .pwl files after password change</H2 ><P >WfWg does a lousy job with passwords. I find that if I change my password on either the unix box or the PC the safest thing to do is to @@ -362,9 +359,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3236" +NAME="AEN3131" ></A ->24.3.3. Configure WfW password handling</H2 +>22.3.3. Configure WfW password handling</H2 ><P >There is a program call admincfg.exe on the last disk (disk 8) of the WFW 3.11 disk set. To install it @@ -381,9 +378,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3240" +NAME="AEN3135" ></A ->24.3.4. Case handling of passwords</H2 +>22.3.4. Case handling of passwords</H2 ><P >Windows for Workgroups uppercases the password before sending it to the server. Unix passwords can be case-sensitive though. Check the <A HREF="smb.conf.5.html" @@ -400,9 +397,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3245" +NAME="AEN3140" ></A ->24.4. Windows '95/'98</H1 +>22.4. Windows '95/'98</H1 ><P >When using Windows 95 OEM SR2 the following updates are recommended where Samba is being used. Please NOTE that the above change will affect you once these @@ -448,9 +445,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3261" +NAME="AEN3156" ></A ->24.5. Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</H1 +>22.5. Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</H1 ><P > There are several annoyances with Windows 2000 SP2. One of which @@ -560,7 +557,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="bugreport.html" +HREF="diagnosis.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -575,16 +572,12 @@ VALIGN="top" WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p3106.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ->Reporting Bugs</TD +>Diagnosing your samba server</TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/pam.html b/docs/htmldocs/pam.html index a641aae87a..3caf52d456 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/pam.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/pam.html @@ -10,12 +10,9 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Optional configuration" -HREF="p1346.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists" -HREF="unix-permissions.html"><LINK +TITLE="Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba" +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" TITLE="Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba" HREF="msdfs.html"></HEAD @@ -46,7 +43,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="unix-permissions.html" +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -75,16 +72,16 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="PAM" ></A ->Chapter 12. Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally +>Chapter 3. Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally managed authentication</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1776" +NAME="AEN454" ></A ->12.1. Samba and PAM</H1 +>3.1. Samba and PAM</H1 ><P >A number of Unix systems (eg: Sun Solaris), as well as the xxxxBSD family and Linux, now utilize the Pluggable Authentication @@ -296,9 +293,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1820" +NAME="AEN498" ></A ->12.2. Distributed Authentication</H1 +>3.2. Distributed Authentication</H1 ><P >The astute administrator will realize from this that the combination of <TT @@ -329,9 +326,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1827" +NAME="AEN505" ></A ->12.3. PAM Configuration in smb.conf</H1 +>3.3. PAM Configuration in smb.conf</H1 ><P >There is an option in smb.conf called <A HREF="smb.conf.5.html#OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS" @@ -381,7 +378,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="unix-permissions.html" +HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -409,16 +406,12 @@ ACCESSKEY="N" WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ->UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</TD +>Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</TD ><TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p1346.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/pdb-mysql.html b/docs/htmldocs/pdb-mysql.html deleted file mode 100644 index 33ccd322a3..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/pdb-mysql.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,286 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> -<HTML -><HEAD -><TITLE ->Passdb MySQL plugin</TITLE -><META -NAME="GENERATOR" -CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK -REL="HOME" -TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" -HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Optional configuration" -HREF="p1346.html"><LINK -REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind" -HREF="winbind.html"><LINK -REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Passdb XML plugin" -HREF="pdb-xml.html"></HEAD -><BODY -CLASS="CHAPTER" -BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" -TEXT="#000000" -LINK="#0000FF" -VLINK="#840084" -ALINK="#0000FF" -><DIV -CLASS="NAVHEADER" -><TABLE -SUMMARY="Header navigation table" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -CELLPADDING="0" -CELLSPACING="0" -><TR -><TH -COLSPAN="3" -ALIGN="center" ->SAMBA Project Documentation</TH -></TR -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="10%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="bottom" -><A -HREF="winbind.html" -ACCESSKEY="P" ->Prev</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="80%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="bottom" -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="10%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="bottom" -><A -HREF="pdb-xml.html" -ACCESSKEY="N" ->Next</A -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -><HR -ALIGN="LEFT" -WIDTH="100%"></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><H1 -><A -NAME="PDB-MYSQL" -></A ->Chapter 17. Passdb MySQL plugin</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN2590" -></A ->17.1. Building</H1 -><P ->To build the plugin, run <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->make bin/pdb_mysql.so</B -> -in the <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->source/</TT -> directory of samba distribution. </P -><P ->Next, copy pdb_mysql.so to any location you want. I -strongly recommend installing it in $PREFIX/lib or /usr/lib/samba/</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN2596" -></A ->17.2. Configuring</H1 -><P ->This plugin lacks some good documentation, but here is some short info:</P -><P ->Add a the following to the <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->passdb backend</B -> variable in your <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf</TT ->: -<PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->passdb backend = [other-plugins] plugin:/location/to/pdb_mysql.so:identifier [other-plugins]</PRE -></P -><P ->The identifier can be any string you like, as long as it doesn't collide with -the identifiers of other plugins or other instances of pdb_mysql. If you -specify multiple pdb_mysql.so entries in 'passdb backend', you also need to -use different identifiers!</P -><P ->Additional options can be given thru the smb.conf file in the [global] section.</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->identifier:mysql host - host name, defaults to 'localhost' -identifier:mysql password -identifier:mysql user - defaults to 'samba' -identifier:mysql database - defaults to 'samba' -identifier:mysql port - defaults to 3306 -identifier:table - Name of the table containing users</PRE -></P -><P ->Names of the columns in this table(I've added column types those columns should have first):</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->identifier:logon time column - int(9) -identifier:logoff time column - int(9) -identifier:kickoff time column - int(9) -identifier:pass last set time column - int(9) -identifier:pass can change time column - int(9) -identifier:pass must change time column - int(9) -identifier:username column - varchar(255) - unix username -identifier:domain column - varchar(255) - NT domain user is part of -identifier:nt username column - varchar(255) - NT username -identifier:fullname column - varchar(255) - Full name of user -identifier:home dir column - varchar(255) - Unix homedir path -identifier:dir drive column - varchar(2) - Directory drive path (eg: 'H:') -identifier:logon script column - varchar(255) - Batch file to run on client side when logging on -identifier:profile path column - varchar(255) - Path of profile -identifier:acct desc column - varchar(255) - Some ASCII NT user data -identifier:workstations column - varchar(255) - Workstations user can logon to (or NULL for all) -identifier:unknown string column - varchar(255) - unknown string -identifier:munged dial column - varchar(255) - ? -identifier:uid column - int(9) - Unix user ID (uid) -identifier:gid column - int(9) - Unix user group (gid) -identifier:user sid column - varchar(255) - NT user SID -identifier:group sid column - varchar(255) - NT group ID -identifier:lanman pass column - varchar(255) - encrypted lanman password -identifier:nt pass column - varchar(255) - encrypted nt passwd -identifier:plaintext pass column - varchar(255) - plaintext password -identifier:acct control column - int(9) - nt user data -identifier:unknown 3 column - int(9) - unknown -identifier:logon divs column - int(9) - ? -identifier:hours len column - int(9) - ? -identifier:unknown 5 column - int(9) - unknown -identifier:unknown 6 column - int(9) - unknown</PRE -></P -><P ->Eventually, you can put a colon (:) after the name of each column, which -should specify the column to update when updating the table. You can also -specify nothing behind the colon - then the data from the field will not be -updated. </P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN2611" -></A ->17.3. Using plaintext passwords or encrypted password</H1 -><P ->I strongly discourage the use of plaintext passwords, however, you can use them:</P -><P ->If you would like to use plaintext passwords, set 'identifier:lanman pass column' and 'identifier:nt pass column' to 'NULL' (without the quotes) and 'identifier:plaintext pass column' to the name of the column containing the plaintext passwords. </P -><P ->If you use encrypted passwords, set the 'identifier:plaintext pass column' to 'NULL' (without the quotes). This is the default.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN2616" -></A ->17.4. Getting non-column data from the table</H1 -><P ->It is possible to have not all data in the database and making some 'constant'.</P -><P ->For example, you can set 'identifier:fullname column' to : -<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->CONCAT(First_name,' ',Sur_name)</B -></P -><P ->Or, set 'identifier:workstations column' to : -<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->NULL</B -></P -><P ->See the MySQL documentation for more language constructs.</P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="NAVFOOTER" -><HR -ALIGN="LEFT" -WIDTH="100%"><TABLE -SUMMARY="Footer navigation table" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -CELLPADDING="0" -CELLSPACING="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="winbind.html" -ACCESSKEY="P" ->Prev</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="34%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="samba-howto-collection.html" -ACCESSKEY="H" ->Home</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="pdb-xml.html" -ACCESSKEY="N" ->Next</A -></TD -></TR -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="top" ->Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</TD -><TD -WIDTH="34%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p1346.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="top" ->Passdb XML plugin</TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV -></BODY -></HTML ->
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/pdb-xml.html b/docs/htmldocs/pdb-xml.html deleted file mode 100644 index 75abfc5a81..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/pdb-xml.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,189 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> -<HTML -><HEAD -><TITLE ->Passdb XML plugin</TITLE -><META -NAME="GENERATOR" -CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK -REL="HOME" -TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" -HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Optional configuration" -HREF="p1346.html"><LINK -REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="Passdb MySQL plugin" -HREF="pdb-mysql.html"><LINK -REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory" -HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html"></HEAD -><BODY -CLASS="CHAPTER" -BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" -TEXT="#000000" -LINK="#0000FF" -VLINK="#840084" -ALINK="#0000FF" -><DIV -CLASS="NAVHEADER" -><TABLE -SUMMARY="Header navigation table" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -CELLPADDING="0" -CELLSPACING="0" -><TR -><TH -COLSPAN="3" -ALIGN="center" ->SAMBA Project Documentation</TH -></TR -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="10%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="bottom" -><A -HREF="pdb-mysql.html" -ACCESSKEY="P" ->Prev</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="80%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="bottom" -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="10%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="bottom" -><A -HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html" -ACCESSKEY="N" ->Next</A -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -><HR -ALIGN="LEFT" -WIDTH="100%"></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><H1 -><A -NAME="PDB-XML" -></A ->Chapter 18. Passdb XML plugin</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN2635" -></A ->18.1. Building</H1 -><P ->This module requires libxml2 to be installed.</P -><P ->To build pdb_xml, run: <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->make bin/pdb_xml.so</B -> in -the directory <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->source/</TT ->. </P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN2641" -></A ->18.2. Usage</H1 -><P ->The usage of pdb_xml is pretty straightforward. To export data, use: - -<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->pdbedit -e plugin:/usr/lib/samba/pdb_xml.so:filename</B -> - -(where filename is the name of the file to put the data in)</P -><P ->To import data, use: -<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->pdbedit -i plugin:/usr/lib/samba/pdb_xml.so:filename -e current-pdb</B -> - -Where filename is the name to read the data from and current-pdb to put it in.</P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="NAVFOOTER" -><HR -ALIGN="LEFT" -WIDTH="100%"><TABLE -SUMMARY="Footer navigation table" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -CELLPADDING="0" -CELLSPACING="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="pdb-mysql.html" -ACCESSKEY="P" ->Prev</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="34%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="samba-howto-collection.html" -ACCESSKEY="H" ->Home</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html" -ACCESSKEY="N" ->Next</A -></TD -></TR -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="top" ->Passdb MySQL plugin</TD -><TD -WIDTH="34%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p1346.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="top" ->Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory</TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV -></BODY -></HTML ->
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/pdbedit.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/pdbedit.8.html index 7adae978b8..3ed3dfe8e9 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/pdbedit.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/pdbedit.8.html @@ -37,12 +37,12 @@ NAME="AEN8" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >pdbedit</B -> [-l] [-v] [-w] [-u username] [-f fullname] [-h homedir] [-D drive] [-S script] [-p profile] [-a] [-m] [-x] [-i passdb-backend] [-e passdb-backend] [-b passdb-backend] [-d debuglevel] [-s configfile] [-P account-policy] [-V value]</P +> [-l] [-v] [-w] [-u username] [-f fullname] [-h homedir] [-d drive] [-s script] [-p profile] [-a] [-m] [-x] [-i passdb-backend] [-e passdb-backend] [-b passdb-backend] [-D debuglevel]</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN30" +NAME="AEN27" ></A ><H2 >DESCRIPTION</H2 @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ TARGET="_top" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN37" +NAME="AEN34" ></A ><H2 >OPTIONS</H2 @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" </P ></DD ><DT ->-D drive</DT +>-d drive</DT ><DD ><P >This option can be used while adding or @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" </P ></DD ><DT ->-S script</DT +>-s script</DT ><DD ><P >This option can be used while adding or @@ -352,130 +352,13 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >pdbedit -b xml:/root/pdb-backup.xml -l</B ></P ></DD -><DT ->-P account-policy</DT -><DD -><P ->Display an account policy</P -><P ->Valid policies are: minimum password age, reset count minutes, disconnect time, - user must logon to change password, password history, lockout duration, min password length, - maximum password age and bad lockout attempt. - - </P -><P ->Example: <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->pdbedit -P "bad lockout attempt"</B -></P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> account policy value for bad lockout attempt is 0 - </PRE -></P -></DD -><DT ->-V account-policy-value</DT -><DD -><P ->Sets an account policy to a specified value. - This option may only be used in conjunction - with the <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->-P</I -></TT -> option. - - </P -><P ->Example: <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->pdbedit -P "bad lockout attempt" -V 3</B -></P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> account policy value for bad lockout attempt was 0 - account policy value for bad lockout attempt is now 3 - </PRE -></P -></DD -><DT ->-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT -><DD -><P -><TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->debuglevel</I -></TT -> is an integer -from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is -not specified is zero.</P -><P ->The higher this value, the more detail will be -logged to the log files about the activities of the -server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious -warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for -day to day running - it generates a small amount of -information about operations carried out.</P -><P ->Levels above 1 will generate considerable -amounts of log data, and should only be used when -investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for -use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log -data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</P -><P ->Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel" -TARGET="_top" ->log -level</A -> parameter in the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html" -TARGET="_top" -><TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf(5)</TT -></A -> file.</P -></DD -><DT ->-h|--help</DT -><DD -><P ->Print a summary of command line options.</P -></DD -><DT ->-s <configuration file></DT -><DD -><P ->The file specified contains the -configuration details required by the server. The -information in this file includes server-specific -information such as what printcap file to use, as well -as descriptions of all the services that the server is -to provide. See <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html" -TARGET="_top" -><TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf(5)</TT -></A -> for more information. -The default configuration file name is determined at -compile time.</P -></DD ></DL ></DIV ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN182" +NAME="AEN140" ></A ><H2 >NOTES</H2 @@ -485,7 +368,7 @@ NAME="AEN182" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN185" +NAME="AEN143" ></A ><H2 >VERSION</H2 @@ -496,7 +379,7 @@ NAME="AEN185" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN188" +NAME="AEN146" ></A ><H2 >SEE ALSO</H2 @@ -516,7 +399,7 @@ TARGET="_top" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN193" +NAME="AEN151" ></A ><H2 >AUTHOR</H2 diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/portability.html b/docs/htmldocs/portability.html index 09136b3961..cc83f61694 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/portability.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/portability.html @@ -9,12 +9,9 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Appendixes" -HREF="p3106.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="Appendixes" -HREF="p3106.html"><LINK +TITLE="Group mapping HOWTO" +HREF="groupmapping.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" TITLE="Samba and other CIFS clients" HREF="other-clients.html"></HEAD @@ -45,7 +42,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="p3106.html" +HREF="groupmapping.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -74,7 +71,7 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="PORTABILITY" ></A ->Chapter 23. Portability</H1 +>Chapter 21. Portability</H1 ><P >Samba works on a wide range of platforms but the interface all the platforms provide is not always compatible. This chapter contains @@ -84,9 +81,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3115" +NAME="AEN3011" ></A ->23.1. HPUX</H1 +>21.1. HPUX</H1 ><P >HP's implementation of supplementary groups is, er, non-standard (for hysterical reasons). There are two group files, /etc/group and @@ -104,19 +101,15 @@ to initgroups() be run as users not in any groups with GIDs outside the allowed range.</P ><P >This is documented in the HP manual pages under setgroups(2) and passwd(4).</P -><P ->On HPUX you must use gcc or the HP Ansi compiler. The free compiler -that comes with HP-UX is not Ansi compliant and cannot compile -Samba.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3121" +NAME="AEN3016" ></A ->23.2. SCO Unix</H1 +>21.2. SCO Unix</H1 ><P > If you run an old version of SCO Unix then you may need to get important @@ -131,9 +124,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3125" +NAME="AEN3020" ></A ->23.3. DNIX</H1 +>21.3. DNIX</H1 ><P >DNIX has a problem with seteuid() and setegid(). These routines are needed for Samba to work correctly, but they were left out of the DNIX @@ -238,9 +231,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3154" +NAME="AEN3049" ></A ->23.4. RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II</H1 +>21.4. RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II</H1 ><P >By default RedHat Rembrandt-II during installation adds an entry to /etc/hosts as follows: @@ -274,7 +267,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="p3106.html" +HREF="groupmapping.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -302,16 +295,12 @@ ACCESSKEY="N" WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ->Appendixes</TD +>Group mapping HOWTO</TD ><TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p3106.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/printing.html b/docs/htmldocs/printing.html index 5f054e1fda..7ae20acb43 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/printing.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/printing.html @@ -2,22 +2,19 @@ <HTML ><HEAD ><TITLE ->Printing Support</TITLE +>Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x</TITLE ><META NAME="GENERATOR" CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Optional configuration" -HREF="p1346.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba" -HREF="msdfs.html"><LINK +TITLE="UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists" +HREF="unix-permissions.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Security levels" -HREF="securitylevels.html"></HEAD +TITLE="Debugging Printing Problems" +HREF="printingdebug.html"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="CHAPTER" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -45,7 +42,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="msdfs.html" +HREF="unix-permissions.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -59,7 +56,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="securitylevels.html" +HREF="printingdebug.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -74,15 +71,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="PRINTING" ></A ->Chapter 14. Printing Support</H1 +>Chapter 6. Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1908" +NAME="AEN763" ></A ->14.1. Introduction</H1 +>6.1. Introduction</H1 ><P >Beginning with the 2.2.0 release, Samba supports the native Windows NT printing mechanisms implemented via @@ -139,7 +136,12 @@ TARGET="_top" >There has been some initial confusion about what all this means and whether or not it is a requirement for printer drivers to be installed on a Samba host in order to support printing from Windows -clients. As a side note, Samba does not use these drivers in any way to process +clients. A bug existed in Samba 2.2.0 which made Windows NT/2000 clients +require that the Samba server possess a valid driver for the printer. +This is fixed in Samba 2.2.1 and once again, Windows NT/2000 clients +can use the local APW for installing drivers to be used with a Samba +served printer. This is the same behavior exhibited by Windows 9x clients. +As a side note, Samba does not use these drivers in any way to process spooled files. They are utilized entirely by the clients.</P ><P >The following MS KB article, may be of some help if you are dealing with @@ -163,9 +165,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1930" +NAME="AEN785" ></A ->14.2. Configuration</H1 +>6.2. Configuration</H1 ><DIV CLASS="WARNING" ><P @@ -220,6 +222,20 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" > provided a means of defining the printer driver name to be sent to the client.</P +><P +>These parameters, including <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer driver +file</I +></TT +> parameter, are being deprecated and should not +be used in new installations. For more information on this change, +you should refer to the <A +HREF="printing.html#MIGRATION" +>Migration section</A +> +of this document.</P ></TD ></TR ></TABLE @@ -229,9 +245,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1938" +NAME="AEN796" ></A ->14.2.1. Creating [print$]</H2 +>6.2.1. Creating [print$]</H2 ><P >In order to support the uploading of printer driver files, you must first configure a file share named [print$]. @@ -452,14 +468,22 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1973" +NAME="AEN831" ></A ->14.2.2. Setting Drivers for Existing Printers</H2 +>6.2.2. Setting Drivers for Existing Printers</H2 ><P >The initial listing of printers in the Samba host's Printers folder will have no real printer driver assigned -to them. This defaults to a NULL string to allow the use -of the local Add Printer Wizard on NT/2000 clients. +to them. By default, in Samba 2.2.0 this driver name was set to +<SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NO PRINTER DRIVER AVAILABLE FOR THIS PRINTER</I +></SPAN +>. +Later versions changed this to a NULL string to allow the use +tof the local Add Printer Wizard on NT/2000 clients. Attempting to view the printer properties for a printer which has this default driver assigned will result in the error message:</P @@ -524,9 +548,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1989" +NAME="AEN848" ></A ->14.2.3. Support a large number of printers</H2 +>6.2.3. Support a large number of printers</H2 ><P >One issue that has arisen during the development phase of Samba 2.2 is the need to support driver downloads for @@ -590,9 +614,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2000" +NAME="AEN859" ></A ->14.2.4. Adding New Printers via the Windows NT APW</H2 +>6.2.4. Adding New Printers via the Windows NT APW</H2 ><P >By default, Samba offers all printer shares defined in <TT CLASS="FILENAME" @@ -759,9 +783,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2030" +NAME="AEN889" ></A ->14.2.5. Samba and Printer Ports</H2 +>6.2.5. Samba and Printer Ports</H2 ><P >Windows NT/2000 print servers associate a port with each printer. These normally take the form of LPT1:, COM1:, FILE:, etc... Samba must also support the @@ -796,9 +820,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2038" +NAME="AEN897" ></A ->14.3. The Imprints Toolset</H1 +>6.3. The Imprints Toolset</H1 ><P >The Imprints tool set provides a UNIX equivalent of the Windows NT Add Printer Wizard. For complete information, please @@ -814,9 +838,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2042" +NAME="AEN901" ></A ->14.3.1. What is Imprints?</H2 +>6.3.1. What is Imprints?</H2 ><P >Imprints is a collection of tools for supporting the goals of</P @@ -846,9 +870,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2052" +NAME="AEN911" ></A ->14.3.2. Creating Printer Driver Packages</H2 +>6.3.2. Creating Printer Driver Packages</H2 ><P >The process of creating printer driver packages is beyond the scope of this document (refer to Imprints.txt also included @@ -862,9 +886,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2055" +NAME="AEN914" ></A ->14.3.3. The Imprints server</H2 +>6.3.3. The Imprints server</H2 ><P >The Imprints server is really a database server that may be queried via standard HTTP mechanisms. Each printer @@ -886,9 +910,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2059" +NAME="AEN918" ></A ->14.3.4. The Installation Client</H2 +>6.3.4. The Installation Client</H2 ><P >More information regarding the Imprints installation client is available in the <TT @@ -980,388 +1004,168 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2081" +NAME="AEN940" ></A ->14.4. Diagnosis</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN2083" +>6.4. <A +NAME="MIGRATION" ></A ->14.4.1. Introduction</H2 -><P ->This is a short description of how to debug printing problems with -Samba. This describes how to debug problems with printing from a SMB -client to a Samba server, not the other way around. For the reverse -see the examples/printing directory.</P +>Migration to from Samba 2.0.x to 2.2.x</H1 ><P ->Ok, so you want to print to a Samba server from your PC. The first -thing you need to understand is that Samba does not actually do any -printing itself, it just acts as a middleman between your PC client -and your Unix printing subsystem. Samba receives the file from the PC -then passes the file to a external "print command". What print command -you use is up to you.</P +>Given that printer driver management has changed (we hope improved) in +2.2 over prior releases, migration from an existing setup to 2.2 can +follow several paths. Here are the possible scenarios for +migration:</P ><P ->The whole things is controlled using options in smb.conf. The most -relevant options (which you should look up in the smb.conf man page) -are:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> [global] - print command - send a file to a spooler - lpq command - get spool queue status - lprm command - remove a job - [printers] - path = /var/spool/lpd/samba</PRE -></P -><P ->The following are nice to know about:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> queuepause command - stop a printer or print queue - queueresume command - start a printer or print queue</PRE ></P -><P ->Example:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> print command = /usr/bin/lpr -r -P%p %s - lpq command = /usr/bin/lpq -P%p %s - lprm command = /usr/bin/lprm -P%p %j - queuepause command = /usr/sbin/lpc -P%p stop - queuepause command = /usr/sbin/lpc -P%p start</PRE -></P -><P ->Samba should set reasonable defaults for these depending on your -system type, but it isn't clairvoyant. It is not uncommon that you -have to tweak these for local conditions. The commands should -always have fully specified pathnames, as the smdb may not have -the correct PATH values.</P -><P ->When you send a job to Samba to be printed, it will make a temporary -copy of it in the directory specified in the [printers] section. -and it should be periodically cleaned out. The lpr -r option -requests that the temporary copy be removed after printing; If -printing fails then you might find leftover files in this directory, -and it should be periodically cleaned out. Samba used the lpq -command to determine the "job number" assigned to your print job -by the spooler.</P -><P ->The %>letter< are "macros" that get dynamically replaced with appropriate -values when they are used. The %s gets replaced with the name of the spool -file that Samba creates and the %p gets replaced with the name of the -printer. The %j gets replaced with the "job number" which comes from -the lpq output.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN2099" -></A ->14.4.2. Debugging printer problems</H2 -><P ->One way to debug printing problems is to start by replacing these -command with shell scripts that record the arguments and the contents -of the print file. A simple example of this kind of things might -be:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> print command = /tmp/saveprint %p %s - - #!/bin/saveprint - # we make sure that we are the right user - /usr/bin/id -p >/tmp/tmp.print - # we run the command and save the error messages - # replace the command with the one appropriate for your system - /usr/bin/lpr -r -P$1 $2 2>>&/tmp/tmp.print</PRE -></P -><P ->Then you print a file and try removing it. You may find that the -print queue needs to be stopped in order to see the queue status -and remove the job:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> h4: {42} % echo hi >/tmp/hi -h4: {43} % smbclient //localhost/lw4 -added interface ip=10.0.0.4 bcast=10.0.0.255 nmask=255.255.255.0 -Password: -Domain=[ASTART] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.0.7] -smb: \> print /tmp/hi -putting file /tmp/hi as hi-17534 (0.0 kb/s) (average 0.0 kb/s) -smb: \> queue -1049 3 hi-17534 -smb: \> cancel 1049 -Error cancelling job 1049 : code 0 -smb: \> cancel 1049 -Job 1049 cancelled -smb: \> queue -smb: \> exit</PRE -></P -><P ->The 'code 0' indicates that the job was removed. The comment -by the smbclient is a bit misleading on this. -You can observe the command output and then and look at the -/tmp/tmp.print file to see what the results are. You can quickly -find out if the problem is with your printing system. Often people -have problems with their /etc/printcap file or permissions on -various print queues.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN2108" -></A ->14.4.3. What printers do I have?</H2 -><P ->You can use the 'testprns' program to check to see if the printer -name you are using is recognized by Samba. For example, you can -use:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> testprns printer /etc/printcap</PRE -></P -><P ->Samba can get its printcap information from a file or from a program. -You can try the following to see the format of the extracted -information:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> testprns -a printer /etc/printcap - - testprns -a printer '|/bin/cat printcap'</PRE -></P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN2116" -></A ->14.4.4. Setting up printcap and print servers</H2 -><P ->You may need to set up some printcaps for your Samba system to use. -It is strongly recommended that you use the facilities provided by -the print spooler to set up queues and printcap information.</P -><P ->Samba requires either a printcap or program to deliver printcap -information. This printcap information has the format:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> name|alias1|alias2...:option=value:...</PRE -></P -><P ->For almost all printing systems, the printer 'name' must be composed -only of alphanumeric or underscore '_' characters. Some systems also -allow hyphens ('-') as well. An alias is an alternative name for the -printer, and an alias with a space in it is used as a 'comment' -about the printer. The printcap format optionally uses a \ at the end of lines -to extend the printcap to multiple lines.</P -><P ->Here are some examples of printcap files:</P -><P -><P -></P -><OL -TYPE="1" +><UL ><LI ><P ->pr just printer name</P +>If you do not desire the new Windows NT + print driver support, nothing needs to be done. + All existing parameters work the same.</P ></LI ><LI ><P ->pr|alias printer name and alias</P +>If you want to take advantage of NT printer + driver support but do not want to migrate the + 9x drivers to the new setup, the leave the existing + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>printers.def</TT +> file. When smbd attempts + to locate a + 9x driver for the printer in the TDB and fails it + will drop down to using the printers.def (and all + associated parameters). The <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>make_printerdef</B +> + tool will also remain for backwards compatibility but will + be removed in the next major release.</P ></LI ><LI ><P ->pr|My Printer printer name, alias used as comment</P +>If you install a Windows 9x driver for a printer + on your Samba host (in the printing TDB), this information will + take precedence and the three old printing parameters + will be ignored (including print driver location).</P ></LI ><LI ><P ->pr:sh:\ Same as pr:sh:cm= testing - :cm= \ - testing</P +>If you want to migrate an existing <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>printers.def</TT +> + file into the new setup, the current only solution is to use the Windows + NT APW to install the NT drivers and the 9x drivers. This can be scripted + using <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbclient</B +> and <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>rpcclient</B +>. See the + Imprints installation client at <A +HREF="http://imprints.sourceforge.net/" +TARGET="_top" +>http://imprints.sourceforge.net/</A +> + for an example. + </P ></LI -><LI +></UL +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" ><P ->pr:sh Same as pr:sh:cm= testing - :cm= testing</P -></LI -></OL ></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +WIDTH="100%" +BORDER="0" +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="25" +ALIGN="CENTER" +VALIGN="TOP" +><IMG +SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" +HSPACE="5" +ALT="Warning"></TD +><TH +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>Achtung!</B +></TH +></TR +><TR +><TD +> </TD +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +VALIGN="TOP" ><P ->Samba reads the printcap information when first started. If you make -changes in the printcap information, then you must do the following:</P +>The following <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> parameters are considered to +be deprecated and will be removed soon. Do not use them in new +installations</P ><P ></P -><OL -TYPE="1" +><UL ><LI ><P ->make sure that the print spooler is aware of these changes. -The LPRng system uses the 'lpc reread' command to do this.</P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer driver file (G)</I +></TT +> + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->make sure that the spool queues, etc., exist and have the -correct permissions. The LPRng system uses the 'checkpc -f' -command to do this.</P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer driver (S)</I +></TT +> + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->You now should send a SIGHUP signal to the smbd server to have -it reread the printcap information.</P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer driver location (S)</I +></TT +> + </P ></LI -></OL -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN2144" -></A ->14.4.5. Job sent, no output</H2 -><P ->This is the most frustrating part of printing. You may have sent the -job, verified that the job was forwarded, set up a wrapper around -the command to send the file, but there was no output from the printer.</P -><P ->First, check to make sure that the job REALLY is getting to the -right print queue. If you are using a BSD or LPRng print spooler, -you can temporarily stop the printing of jobs. Jobs can still be -submitted, but they will not be printed. Use:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> lpc -Pprinter stop</PRE -></P -><P ->Now submit a print job and then use 'lpq -Pprinter' to see if the -job is in the print queue. If it is not in the print queue then -you will have to find out why it is not being accepted for printing.</P -><P ->Next, you may want to check to see what the format of the job really -was. With the assistance of the system administrator you can view -the submitted jobs files. You may be surprised to find that these -are not in what you would expect to call a printable format. -You can use the UNIX 'file' utitily to determine what the job -format actually is:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> cd /var/spool/lpd/printer # spool directory of print jobs - ls # find job files - file dfA001myhost</PRE -></P -><P ->You should make sure that your printer supports this format OR that -your system administrator has installed a 'print filter' that will -convert the file to a format appropriate for your printer.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN2155" -></A ->14.4.6. Job sent, strange output</H2 -><P ->Once you have the job printing, you can then start worrying about -making it print nicely.</P -><P ->The most common problem is extra pages of output: banner pages -OR blank pages at the end.</P -><P ->If you are getting banner pages, check and make sure that the -printcap option or printer option is configured for no banners. -If you have a printcap, this is the :sh (suppress header or banner -page) option. You should have the following in your printer.</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> printer: ... :sh</PRE -></P -><P ->If you have this option and are still getting banner pages, there -is a strong chance that your printer is generating them for you -automatically. You should make sure that banner printing is disabled -for the printer. This usually requires using the printer setup software -or procedures supplied by the printer manufacturer.</P -><P ->If you get an extra page of output, this could be due to problems -with your job format, or if you are generating PostScript jobs, -incorrect setting on your printer driver on the MicroSoft client. -For example, under Win95 there is a option:</P -><P -><PRE -CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> Printers|Printer Name|(Right Click)Properties|Postscript|Advanced|</PRE -></P -><P ->that allows you to choose if a Ctrl-D is appended to all jobs. -This is a very bad thing to do, as most spooling systems will -automatically add a ^D to the end of the job if it is detected as -PostScript. The multiple ^D may cause an additional page of output.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN2167" -></A ->14.4.7. Raw PostScript printed</H2 -><P ->This is a problem that is usually caused by either the print spooling -system putting information at the start of the print job that makes -the printer think the job is a text file, or your printer simply -does not support PostScript. You may need to enable 'Automatic -Format Detection' on your printer.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN2170" -></A ->14.4.8. Advanced Printing</H2 -><P ->Note that you can do some pretty magic things by using your -imagination with the "print command" option and some shell scripts. -Doing print accounting is easy by passing the %U option to a print -command shell script. You could even make the print command detect -the type of output and its size and send it to an appropriate -printer.</P +></UL +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN2173" -></A ->14.4.9. Real debugging</H2 ><P ->If the above debug tips don't help, then maybe you need to bring in -the bug guns, system tracing. See Tracing.txt in this directory.</P -></DIV +>The have been two new parameters add in Samba 2.2.2 to for +better support of Samba 2.0.x backwards capability (<TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>disable +spoolss</I +></TT +>) and for using local printers drivers on Windows +NT/2000 clients (<TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>use client driver</I +></TT +>). Both of +these options are described in the smb.coinf(5) man page and are +disabled by default.</P ></DIV ></DIV ><DIV @@ -1380,7 +1184,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="msdfs.html" +HREF="unix-permissions.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -1398,7 +1202,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="securitylevels.html" +HREF="printingdebug.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -1408,21 +1212,17 @@ ACCESSKEY="N" WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ->Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</TD +>UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</TD ><TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p1346.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ->Security levels</TD +>Debugging Printing Problems</TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/printingdebug.html b/docs/htmldocs/printingdebug.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..abb83cb692 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/printingdebug.html @@ -0,0 +1,515 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<HTML +><HEAD +><TITLE +>Debugging Printing Problems</TITLE +><META +NAME="GENERATOR" +CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK +REL="HOME" +TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" +HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK +REL="PREVIOUS" +TITLE="Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x" +HREF="printing.html"><LINK +REL="NEXT" +TITLE="Security levels" +HREF="securitylevels.html"></HEAD +><BODY +CLASS="CHAPTER" +BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" +TEXT="#000000" +LINK="#0000FF" +VLINK="#840084" +ALINK="#0000FF" +><DIV +CLASS="NAVHEADER" +><TABLE +SUMMARY="Header navigation table" +WIDTH="100%" +BORDER="0" +CELLPADDING="0" +CELLSPACING="0" +><TR +><TH +COLSPAN="3" +ALIGN="center" +>SAMBA Project Documentation</TH +></TR +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="10%" +ALIGN="left" +VALIGN="bottom" +><A +HREF="printing.html" +ACCESSKEY="P" +>Prev</A +></TD +><TD +WIDTH="80%" +ALIGN="center" +VALIGN="bottom" +></TD +><TD +WIDTH="10%" +ALIGN="right" +VALIGN="bottom" +><A +HREF="securitylevels.html" +ACCESSKEY="N" +>Next</A +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +><HR +ALIGN="LEFT" +WIDTH="100%"></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="CHAPTER" +><H1 +><A +NAME="PRINTINGDEBUG" +></A +>Chapter 7. Debugging Printing Problems</H1 +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN986" +></A +>7.1. Introduction</H1 +><P +>This is a short description of how to debug printing problems with +Samba. This describes how to debug problems with printing from a SMB +client to a Samba server, not the other way around. For the reverse +see the examples/printing directory.</P +><P +>Ok, so you want to print to a Samba server from your PC. The first +thing you need to understand is that Samba does not actually do any +printing itself, it just acts as a middleman between your PC client +and your Unix printing subsystem. Samba receives the file from the PC +then passes the file to a external "print command". What print command +you use is up to you.</P +><P +>The whole things is controlled using options in smb.conf. The most +relevant options (which you should look up in the smb.conf man page) +are:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> [global] + print command - send a file to a spooler + lpq command - get spool queue status + lprm command - remove a job + [printers] + path = /var/spool/lpd/samba</PRE +></P +><P +>The following are nice to know about:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> queuepause command - stop a printer or print queue + queueresume command - start a printer or print queue</PRE +></P +><P +>Example:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> print command = /usr/bin/lpr -r -P%p %s + lpq command = /usr/bin/lpq -P%p %s + lprm command = /usr/bin/lprm -P%p %j + queuepause command = /usr/sbin/lpc -P%p stop + queuepause command = /usr/sbin/lpc -P%p start</PRE +></P +><P +>Samba should set reasonable defaults for these depending on your +system type, but it isn't clairvoyant. It is not uncommon that you +have to tweak these for local conditions. The commands should +always have fully specified pathnames, as the smdb may not have +the correct PATH values.</P +><P +>When you send a job to Samba to be printed, it will make a temporary +copy of it in the directory specified in the [printers] section. +and it should be periodically cleaned out. The lpr -r option +requests that the temporary copy be removed after printing; If +printing fails then you might find leftover files in this directory, +and it should be periodically cleaned out. Samba used the lpq +command to determine the "job number" assigned to your print job +by the spooler.</P +><P +>The %>letter< are "macros" that get dynamically replaced with appropriate +values when they are used. The %s gets replaced with the name of the spool +file that Samba creates and the %p gets replaced with the name of the +printer. The %j gets replaced with the "job number" which comes from +the lpq output.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1002" +></A +>7.2. Debugging printer problems</H1 +><P +>One way to debug printing problems is to start by replacing these +command with shell scripts that record the arguments and the contents +of the print file. A simple example of this kind of things might +be:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> print command = /tmp/saveprint %p %s + + #!/bin/saveprint + # we make sure that we are the right user + /usr/bin/id -p >/tmp/tmp.print + # we run the command and save the error messages + # replace the command with the one appropriate for your system + /usr/bin/lpr -r -P$1 $2 2>>&/tmp/tmp.print</PRE +></P +><P +>Then you print a file and try removing it. You may find that the +print queue needs to be stopped in order to see the queue status +and remove the job:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> h4: {42} % echo hi >/tmp/hi +h4: {43} % smbclient //localhost/lw4 +added interface ip=10.0.0.4 bcast=10.0.0.255 nmask=255.255.255.0 +Password: +Domain=[ASTART] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.0.7] +smb: \> print /tmp/hi +putting file /tmp/hi as hi-17534 (0.0 kb/s) (average 0.0 kb/s) +smb: \> queue +1049 3 hi-17534 +smb: \> cancel 1049 +Error cancelling job 1049 : code 0 +smb: \> cancel 1049 +Job 1049 cancelled +smb: \> queue +smb: \> exit</PRE +></P +><P +>The 'code 0' indicates that the job was removed. The comment +by the smbclient is a bit misleading on this. +You can observe the command output and then and look at the +/tmp/tmp.print file to see what the results are. You can quickly +find out if the problem is with your printing system. Often people +have problems with their /etc/printcap file or permissions on +various print queues.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1011" +></A +>7.3. What printers do I have?</H1 +><P +>You can use the 'testprns' program to check to see if the printer +name you are using is recognized by Samba. For example, you can +use:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> testprns printer /etc/printcap</PRE +></P +><P +>Samba can get its printcap information from a file or from a program. +You can try the following to see the format of the extracted +information:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> testprns -a printer /etc/printcap + + testprns -a printer '|/bin/cat printcap'</PRE +></P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1019" +></A +>7.4. Setting up printcap and print servers</H1 +><P +>You may need to set up some printcaps for your Samba system to use. +It is strongly recommended that you use the facilities provided by +the print spooler to set up queues and printcap information.</P +><P +>Samba requires either a printcap or program to deliver printcap +information. This printcap information has the format:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> name|alias1|alias2...:option=value:...</PRE +></P +><P +>For almost all printing systems, the printer 'name' must be composed +only of alphanumeric or underscore '_' characters. Some systems also +allow hyphens ('-') as well. An alias is an alternative name for the +printer, and an alias with a space in it is used as a 'comment' +about the printer. The printcap format optionally uses a \ at the end of lines +to extend the printcap to multiple lines.</P +><P +>Here are some examples of printcap files:</P +><P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +>pr just printer name</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>pr|alias printer name and alias</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>pr|My Printer printer name, alias used as comment</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>pr:sh:\ Same as pr:sh:cm= testing + :cm= \ + testing</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>pr:sh Same as pr:sh:cm= testing + :cm= testing</P +></LI +></OL +></P +><P +>Samba reads the printcap information when first started. If you make +changes in the printcap information, then you must do the following:</P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +>make sure that the print spooler is aware of these changes. +The LPRng system uses the 'lpc reread' command to do this.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>make sure that the spool queues, etc., exist and have the +correct permissions. The LPRng system uses the 'checkpc -f' +command to do this.</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>You now should send a SIGHUP signal to the smbd server to have +it reread the printcap information.</P +></LI +></OL +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1047" +></A +>7.5. Job sent, no output</H1 +><P +>This is the most frustrating part of printing. You may have sent the +job, verified that the job was forwarded, set up a wrapper around +the command to send the file, but there was no output from the printer.</P +><P +>First, check to make sure that the job REALLY is getting to the +right print queue. If you are using a BSD or LPRng print spooler, +you can temporarily stop the printing of jobs. Jobs can still be +submitted, but they will not be printed. Use:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> lpc -Pprinter stop</PRE +></P +><P +>Now submit a print job and then use 'lpq -Pprinter' to see if the +job is in the print queue. If it is not in the print queue then +you will have to find out why it is not being accepted for printing.</P +><P +>Next, you may want to check to see what the format of the job really +was. With the assistance of the system administrator you can view +the submitted jobs files. You may be surprised to find that these +are not in what you would expect to call a printable format. +You can use the UNIX 'file' utitily to determine what the job +format actually is:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> cd /var/spool/lpd/printer # spool directory of print jobs + ls # find job files + file dfA001myhost</PRE +></P +><P +>You should make sure that your printer supports this format OR that +your system administrator has installed a 'print filter' that will +convert the file to a format appropriate for your printer.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1058" +></A +>7.6. Job sent, strange output</H1 +><P +>Once you have the job printing, you can then start worrying about +making it print nicely.</P +><P +>The most common problem is extra pages of output: banner pages +OR blank pages at the end.</P +><P +>If you are getting banner pages, check and make sure that the +printcap option or printer option is configured for no banners. +If you have a printcap, this is the :sh (suppress header or banner +page) option. You should have the following in your printer.</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> printer: ... :sh</PRE +></P +><P +>If you have this option and are still getting banner pages, there +is a strong chance that your printer is generating them for you +automatically. You should make sure that banner printing is disabled +for the printer. This usually requires using the printer setup software +or procedures supplied by the printer manufacturer.</P +><P +>If you get an extra page of output, this could be due to problems +with your job format, or if you are generating PostScript jobs, +incorrect setting on your printer driver on the MicroSoft client. +For example, under Win95 there is a option:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> Printers|Printer Name|(Right Click)Properties|Postscript|Advanced|</PRE +></P +><P +>that allows you to choose if a Ctrl-D is appended to all jobs. +This is a very bad thing to do, as most spooling systems will +automatically add a ^D to the end of the job if it is detected as +PostScript. The multiple ^D may cause an additional page of output.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1070" +></A +>7.7. Raw PostScript printed</H1 +><P +>This is a problem that is usually caused by either the print spooling +system putting information at the start of the print job that makes +the printer think the job is a text file, or your printer simply +does not support PostScript. You may need to enable 'Automatic +Format Detection' on your printer.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1073" +></A +>7.8. Advanced Printing</H1 +><P +>Note that you can do some pretty magic things by using your +imagination with the "print command" option and some shell scripts. +Doing print accounting is easy by passing the %U option to a print +command shell script. You could even make the print command detect +the type of output and its size and send it to an appropriate +printer.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1076" +></A +>7.9. Real debugging</H1 +><P +>If the above debug tips don't help, then maybe you need to bring in +the bug guns, system tracing. See Tracing.txt in this directory.</P +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="NAVFOOTER" +><HR +ALIGN="LEFT" +WIDTH="100%"><TABLE +SUMMARY="Footer navigation table" +WIDTH="100%" +BORDER="0" +CELLPADDING="0" +CELLSPACING="0" +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="33%" +ALIGN="left" +VALIGN="top" +><A +HREF="printing.html" +ACCESSKEY="P" +>Prev</A +></TD +><TD +WIDTH="34%" +ALIGN="center" +VALIGN="top" +><A +HREF="samba-howto-collection.html" +ACCESSKEY="H" +>Home</A +></TD +><TD +WIDTH="33%" +ALIGN="right" +VALIGN="top" +><A +HREF="securitylevels.html" +ACCESSKEY="N" +>Next</A +></TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +WIDTH="33%" +ALIGN="left" +VALIGN="top" +>Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x</TD +><TD +WIDTH="34%" +ALIGN="center" +VALIGN="top" +> </TD +><TD +WIDTH="33%" +ALIGN="right" +VALIGN="top" +>Security levels</TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +></BODY +></HTML +>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/pwencrypt.html b/docs/htmldocs/pwencrypt.html deleted file mode 100644 index 81c709a4ff..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/pwencrypt.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,445 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> -<HTML -><HEAD -><TITLE ->LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba</TITLE -><META -NAME="GENERATOR" -CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK -REL="HOME" -TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" -HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="General installation" -HREF="p18.html"><LINK -REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide" -HREF="browsing-quick.html"><LINK -REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Type of installation" -HREF="p544.html"></HEAD -><BODY -CLASS="CHAPTER" -BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" -TEXT="#000000" -LINK="#0000FF" -VLINK="#840084" -ALINK="#0000FF" -><DIV -CLASS="NAVHEADER" -><TABLE -SUMMARY="Header navigation table" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -CELLPADDING="0" -CELLSPACING="0" -><TR -><TH -COLSPAN="3" -ALIGN="center" ->SAMBA Project Documentation</TH -></TR -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="10%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="bottom" -><A -HREF="browsing-quick.html" -ACCESSKEY="P" ->Prev</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="80%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="bottom" -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="10%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="bottom" -><A -HREF="p544.html" -ACCESSKEY="N" ->Next</A -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -><HR -ALIGN="LEFT" -WIDTH="100%"></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><H1 -><A -NAME="PWENCRYPT" -></A ->Chapter 5. LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN472" -></A ->5.1. Introduction</H1 -><P ->Newer windows clients send encrypted passwords over - the wire, instead of plain text passwords. The newest clients - will only send encrypted passwords and refuse to send plain text - passwords, unless their registry is tweaked.</P -><P ->These passwords can't be converted to unix style encrypted - passwords. Because of that you can't use the standard unix - user database, and you have to store the Lanman and NT hashes - somewhere else. For more information, see the documentation - about the <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->passdb backend = </B -> parameter. - </P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN477" -></A ->5.2. Important Notes About Security</H1 -><P ->The unix and SMB password encryption techniques seem similar - on the surface. This similarity is, however, only skin deep. The unix - scheme typically sends clear text passwords over the network when - logging in. This is bad. The SMB encryption scheme never sends the - cleartext password over the network but it does store the 16 byte - hashed values on disk. This is also bad. Why? Because the 16 byte hashed - values are a "password equivalent". You cannot derive the user's - password from them, but they could potentially be used in a modified - client to gain access to a server. This would require considerable - technical knowledge on behalf of the attacker but is perfectly possible. - You should thus treat the smbpasswd file as though it contained the - cleartext passwords of all your users. Its contents must be kept - secret, and the file should be protected accordingly.</P -><P ->Ideally we would like a password scheme which neither requires - plain text passwords on the net or on disk. Unfortunately this - is not available as Samba is stuck with being compatible with - other SMB systems (WinNT, WfWg, Win95 etc). </P -><DIV -CLASS="WARNING" -><P -></P -><TABLE -CLASS="WARNING" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="25" -ALIGN="CENTER" -VALIGN="TOP" -><IMG -SRC="/docbook-dsssl/warning.gif" -HSPACE="5" -ALT="Warning"></TD -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -VALIGN="TOP" -><P ->Note that Windows NT 4.0 Service pack 3 changed the - default for permissible authentication so that plaintext - passwords are <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->never</I -></SPAN -> sent over the wire. - The solution to this is either to switch to encrypted passwords - with Samba or edit the Windows NT registry to re-enable plaintext - passwords. See the document WinNT.txt for details on how to do - this.</P -><P ->Other Microsoft operating systems which also exhibit - this behavior includes</P -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P ->MS DOS Network client 3.0 with - the basic network redirector installed</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->Windows 95 with the network redirector - update installed</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->Windows 98 [se]</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->Windows 2000</P -></LI -></UL -><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note :</I -></SPAN ->All current release of - Microsoft SMB/CIFS clients support authentication via the - SMB Challenge/Response mechanism described here. Enabling - clear text authentication does not disable the ability - of the client to participate in encrypted authentication.</P -></TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN496" -></A ->5.2.1. Advantages of SMB Encryption</H2 -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P ->plain text passwords are not passed across - the network. Someone using a network sniffer cannot just - record passwords going to the SMB server.</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->WinNT doesn't like talking to a server - that isn't using SMB encrypted passwords. It will refuse - to browse the server if the server is also in user level - security mode. It will insist on prompting the user for the - password on each connection, which is very annoying. The - only things you can do to stop this is to use SMB encryption. - </P -></LI -></UL -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><H2 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN503" -></A ->5.2.2. Advantages of non-encrypted passwords</H2 -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P ->plain text passwords are not kept - on disk. </P -></LI -><LI -><P ->uses same password file as other unix - services such as login and ftp</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->you are probably already using other - services (such as telnet and ftp) which send plain text - passwords over the net, so sending them for SMB isn't - such a big deal.</P -></LI -></UL -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN512" -></A ->5.3. The smbpasswd Command</H1 -><P ->The smbpasswd command maintains the two 32 byte password fields - in the smbpasswd file. If you wish to make it similar to the unix - <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->passwd</B -> or <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->yppasswd</B -> programs, - install it in <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/usr/local/samba/bin/</TT -> (or your - main Samba binary directory).</P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbpasswd</B -> now works in a client-server mode - where it contacts the local smbd to change the user's password on its - behalf. This has enormous benefits - as follows.</P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbpasswd</B -> now has the capability - to change passwords on Windows NT servers (this only works when - the request is sent to the NT Primary Domain Controller if you - are changing an NT Domain user's password).</P -><P ->To run smbpasswd as a normal user just type :</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->$ </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B ->smbpasswd</B -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->Old SMB password: </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B -><type old value here - - or hit return if there was no old password></B -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->New SMB Password: </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B -><type new value> - </B -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->Repeat New SMB Password: </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B -><re-type new value - </B -></TT -></P -><P ->If the old value does not match the current value stored for - that user, or the two new values do not match each other, then the - password will not be changed.</P -><P ->If invoked by an ordinary user it will only allow the user - to change his or her own Samba password.</P -><P ->If run by the root user smbpasswd may take an optional - argument, specifying the user name whose SMB password you wish to - change. Note that when run as root smbpasswd does not prompt for - or check the old password value, thus allowing root to set passwords - for users who have forgotten their passwords.</P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbpasswd</B -> is designed to work in the same way - and be familiar to UNIX users who use the <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->passwd</B -> or - <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->yppasswd</B -> commands.</P -><P ->For more details on using <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbpasswd</B -> refer - to the man page which will always be the definitive reference.</P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="NAVFOOTER" -><HR -ALIGN="LEFT" -WIDTH="100%"><TABLE -SUMMARY="Footer navigation table" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -CELLPADDING="0" -CELLSPACING="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="browsing-quick.html" -ACCESSKEY="P" ->Prev</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="34%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="samba-howto-collection.html" -ACCESSKEY="H" ->Home</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p544.html" -ACCESSKEY="N" ->Next</A -></TD -></TR -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="top" ->Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</TD -><TD -WIDTH="34%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p18.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="top" ->Type of installation</TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV -></BODY -></HTML ->
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html index e695663c8a..3669e19b03 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html @@ -127,48 +127,20 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT ><DD ><P -><TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->debuglevel</I -></TT -> is an integer -from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is -not specified is zero.</P -><P ->The higher this value, the more detail will be -logged to the log files about the activities of the -server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious -warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for -day to day running - it generates a small amount of -information about operations carried out.</P -><P ->Levels above 1 will generate considerable -amounts of log data, and should only be used when -investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for -use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log -data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</P -><P ->Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel" -TARGET="_top" ->log -level</A -> parameter in the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html" -TARGET="_top" -><TT +>set the debuglevel. Debug level 0 is the lowest + and 100 being the highest. This should be set to 100 if you are + planning on submitting a bug report to the Samba team (see <TT CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf(5)</TT -></A -> file.</P +>BUGS.txt</TT +>). + </P ></DD ><DT >-h|--help</DT ><DD ><P ->Print a summary of command line options.</P +>Print a summary of command line options. + </P ></DD ><DT >-I IP-address</DT @@ -303,7 +275,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN107" +NAME="AEN101" ></A ><H2 >COMMANDS</H2 @@ -705,7 +677,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN227" +NAME="AEN221" ></A ><H2 >BUGS</H2 @@ -750,7 +722,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN237" +NAME="AEN231" ></A ><H2 >VERSION</H2 @@ -761,7 +733,7 @@ NAME="AEN237" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN240" +NAME="AEN234" ></A ><H2 >AUTHOR</H2 diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/samba-bdc.html b/docs/htmldocs/samba-bdc.html index 0561e84419..553e9d70d0 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/samba-bdc.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/samba-bdc.html @@ -9,15 +9,12 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Type of installation" -HREF="p544.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="How to Configure Samba as a NT4 Primary Domain Controller" +TITLE="How to Configure Samba 2.2 as a Primary Domain Controller" HREF="samba-pdc.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Samba as a ADS domain member" -HREF="ads.html"></HEAD +TITLE="Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory" +HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="CHAPTER" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -59,7 +56,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="ads.html" +HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -74,15 +71,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="SAMBA-BDC" ></A ->Chapter 7. How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain</H1 +>Chapter 12. How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1118" +NAME="AEN2148" ></A ->7.1. Prerequisite Reading</H1 +>12.1. Prerequisite Reading</H1 ><P >Before you continue reading in this chapter, please make sure that you are comfortable with configuring a Samba PDC @@ -97,9 +94,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1122" +NAME="AEN2152" ></A ->7.2. Background</H1 +>12.2. Background</H1 ><P >What is a Domain Controller? It is a machine that is able to answer logon requests from workstations in a Windows NT Domain. Whenever a @@ -142,9 +139,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1130" +NAME="AEN2160" ></A ->7.3. What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?</H1 +>12.3. What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?</H1 ><P >Every machine that is a Domain Controller for the domain SAMBA has to register the NetBIOS group name SAMBA#1c with the WINS server and/or @@ -159,9 +156,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1133" +NAME="AEN2163" ></A ->7.3.1. How does a Workstation find its domain controller?</H2 +>12.3.1. How does a Workstation find its domain controller?</H2 ><P >A NT workstation in the domain SAMBA that wants a local user to be authenticated has to find the domain controller for SAMBA. It does @@ -178,9 +175,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1136" +NAME="AEN2166" ></A ->7.3.2. When is the PDC needed?</H2 +>12.3.2. When is the PDC needed?</H2 ><P >Whenever a user wants to change his password, this has to be done on the PDC. To find the PDC, the workstation does a NetBIOS name query @@ -194,9 +191,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1139" +NAME="AEN2169" ></A ->7.4. Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller?</H1 +>12.4. Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller?</H1 ><P >With version 2.2, no. The native NT SAM replication protocols have not yet been fully implemented. The Samba Team is working on @@ -213,9 +210,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1143" +NAME="AEN2173" ></A ->7.5. How do I set up a Samba BDC?</H1 +>12.5. How do I set up a Samba BDC?</H1 ><P >Several things have to be done:</P ><P @@ -280,9 +277,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1160" +NAME="AEN2190" ></A ->7.5.1. How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?</H2 +>12.5.1. How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?</H2 ><P >Replication of the smbpasswd file is sensitive. It has to be done whenever changes to the SAM are made. Every user's password change is @@ -332,7 +329,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="ads.html" +HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -342,21 +339,17 @@ ACCESSKEY="N" WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ->How to Configure Samba as a NT4 Primary Domain Controller</TD +>How to Configure Samba 2.2 as a Primary Domain Controller</TD ><TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p544.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ->Samba as a ADS domain member</TD +>Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory</TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/samba-howto-collection.html b/docs/htmldocs/samba-howto-collection.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0c5e284757..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/samba-howto-collection.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1117 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> -<HTML -><HEAD -><TITLE ->SAMBA Project Documentation</TITLE -><META -NAME="GENERATOR" -CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK -REL="NEXT" -TITLE="General installation" -HREF="p18.html"></HEAD -><BODY -CLASS="BOOK" -BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" -TEXT="#000000" -LINK="#0000FF" -VLINK="#840084" -ALINK="#0000FF" -><DIV -CLASS="BOOK" -><A -NAME="SAMBA-HOWTO-COLLECTION" -></A -><DIV -CLASS="TITLEPAGE" -><H1 -CLASS="TITLE" -><A -NAME="SAMBA-HOWTO-COLLECTION" -></A ->SAMBA Project Documentation</H1 -><H3 -CLASS="AUTHOR" -><A -NAME="AEN4" -></A ->SAMBA Team</H3 -><HR></DIV -><H1 -><A -NAME="AEN8" -></A ->Abstract</H1 -><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Last Update</I -></SPAN -> : Thu Aug 15 12:48:45 CDT 2002</P -><P ->This book is a collection of HOWTOs added to Samba documentation over the years. -I try to ensure that all are current, but sometimes the is a larger job -than one person can maintain. The most recent version of this document -can be found at <A -HREF="http://www.samba.org/" -TARGET="_top" ->http://www.samba.org/</A -> -on the "Documentation" page. Please send updates to <A -HREF="mailto:jerry@samba.org" -TARGET="_top" ->jerry@samba.org</A ->.</P -><P ->This documentation is distributed under the GNU General Public License (GPL) -version 2. A copy of the license is included with the Samba source -distribution. A copy can be found on-line at <A -HREF="http://www.fsf.org/licenses/gpl.txt" -TARGET="_top" ->http://www.fsf.org/licenses/gpl.txt</A -></P -><P ->Cheers, jerry</P -><DIV -CLASS="TOC" -><DL -><DT -><B ->Table of Contents</B -></DT -><DT ->I. <A -HREF="p18.html" ->General installation</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->1. <A -HREF="install.html" ->How to Install and Test SAMBA</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->1.1. <A -HREF="install.html#AEN25" ->Read the man pages</A -></DT -><DT ->1.2. <A -HREF="install.html#AEN35" ->Building the Binaries</A -></DT -><DT ->1.3. <A -HREF="install.html#AEN63" ->The all important step</A -></DT -><DT ->1.4. <A -HREF="install.html#AEN67" ->Create the smb configuration file.</A -></DT -><DT ->1.5. <A -HREF="install.html#AEN81" ->Test your config file with - <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->testparm</B -></A -></DT -><DT ->1.6. <A -HREF="install.html#AEN89" ->Starting the smbd and nmbd</A -></DT -><DT ->1.7. <A -HREF="install.html#AEN144" ->Try listing the shares available on your - server</A -></DT -><DT ->1.8. <A -HREF="install.html#AEN153" ->Try connecting with the unix client</A -></DT -><DT ->1.9. <A -HREF="install.html#AEN169" ->Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT, - Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</A -></DT -><DT ->1.10. <A -HREF="install.html#AEN183" ->What If Things Don't Work?</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->2. <A -HREF="improved-browsing.html" ->Improved browsing in samba</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->2.1. <A -HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN228" ->Overview of browsing</A -></DT -><DT ->2.2. <A -HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN232" ->Browsing support in samba</A -></DT -><DT ->2.3. <A -HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN241" ->Problem resolution</A -></DT -><DT ->2.4. <A -HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN248" ->Browsing across subnets</A -></DT -><DT ->2.5. <A -HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN288" ->Setting up a WINS server</A -></DT -><DT ->2.6. <A -HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN307" ->Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</A -></DT -><DT ->2.7. <A -HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN325" ->Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</A -></DT -><DT ->2.8. <A -HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN335" ->Forcing samba to be the master</A -></DT -><DT ->2.9. <A -HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN344" ->Making samba the domain master</A -></DT -><DT ->2.10. <A -HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN362" ->Note about broadcast addresses</A -></DT -><DT ->2.11. <A -HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN365" ->Multiple interfaces</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->3. <A -HREF="oplocks.html" ->Oplocks</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->3.1. <A -HREF="oplocks.html#AEN377" ->What are oplocks?</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->4. <A -HREF="browsing-quick.html" ->Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->4.1. <A -HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN392" ->Discussion</A -></DT -><DT ->4.2. <A -HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN400" ->Use of the "Remote Announce" parameter</A -></DT -><DT ->4.3. <A -HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN414" ->Use of the "Remote Browse Sync" parameter</A -></DT -><DT ->4.4. <A -HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN419" ->Use of WINS</A -></DT -><DT ->4.5. <A -HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN430" ->Do NOT use more than one (1) protocol on MS Windows machines</A -></DT -><DT ->4.6. <A -HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN436" ->Name Resolution Order</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->5. <A -HREF="pwencrypt.html" ->LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->5.1. <A -HREF="pwencrypt.html#AEN472" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->5.2. <A -HREF="pwencrypt.html#AEN477" ->Important Notes About Security</A -></DT -><DT ->5.3. <A -HREF="pwencrypt.html#AEN512" ->The smbpasswd Command</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -></DL -></DD -><DT ->II. <A -HREF="p544.html" ->Type of installation</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->6. <A -HREF="samba-pdc.html" ->How to Configure Samba as a NT4 Primary Domain Controller</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->6.1. <A -HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN566" ->Prerequisite Reading</A -></DT -><DT ->6.2. <A -HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN572" ->Background</A -></DT -><DT ->6.3. <A -HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN611" ->Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</A -></DT -><DT ->6.4. <A -HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN654" ->Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients to the -Domain</A -></DT -><DT ->6.5. <A -HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN738" ->Common Problems and Errors</A -></DT -><DT ->6.6. <A -HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN786" ->System Policies and Profiles</A -></DT -><DT ->6.7. <A -HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN830" ->What other help can I get?</A -></DT -><DT ->6.8. <A -HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN944" ->Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</A -></DT -><DT ->6.9. <A -HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1082" ->DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control & Samba</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->7. <A -HREF="samba-bdc.html" ->How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->7.1. <A -HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1118" ->Prerequisite Reading</A -></DT -><DT ->7.2. <A -HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1122" ->Background</A -></DT -><DT ->7.3. <A -HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1130" ->What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?</A -></DT -><DT ->7.4. <A -HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1139" ->Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller?</A -></DT -><DT ->7.5. <A -HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1143" ->How do I set up a Samba BDC?</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->8. <A -HREF="ads.html" ->Samba as a ADS domain member</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->8.1. <A -HREF="ads.html#AEN1178" ->Installing the required packages for Debian</A -></DT -><DT ->8.2. <A -HREF="ads.html#AEN1184" ->Installing the required packages for RedHat</A -></DT -><DT ->8.3. <A -HREF="ads.html#AEN1193" ->Compile Samba</A -></DT -><DT ->8.4. <A -HREF="ads.html#AEN1205" ->Setup your /etc/krb5.conf</A -></DT -><DT ->8.5. <A -HREF="ads.html#AEN1215" ->Create the computer account</A -></DT -><DT ->8.6. <A -HREF="ads.html#AEN1231" ->Test your server setup</A -></DT -><DT ->8.7. <A -HREF="ads.html#AEN1236" ->Testing with smbclient</A -></DT -><DT ->8.8. <A -HREF="ads.html#AEN1239" ->Notes</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->9. <A -HREF="domain-security.html" ->Samba as a NT4 domain member</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->9.1. <A -HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1261" ->Joining an NT Domain with Samba 2.2</A -></DT -><DT ->9.2. <A -HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1325" ->Samba and Windows 2000 Domains</A -></DT -><DT ->9.3. <A -HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1330" ->Why is this better than security = server?</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -></DL -></DD -><DT ->III. <A -HREF="p1346.html" ->Optional configuration</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->10. <A -HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html" ->Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->10.1. <A -HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1362" ->Agenda</A -></DT -><DT ->10.2. <A -HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1384" ->Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</A -></DT -><DT ->10.3. <A -HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1447" ->Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</A -></DT -><DT ->10.4. <A -HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1492" ->How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and -dependable browsing using Samba</A -></DT -><DT ->10.5. <A -HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1502" ->MS Windows security options and how to configure -Samba for seemless integration</A -></DT -><DT ->10.6. <A -HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1572" ->Conclusions</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->11. <A -HREF="unix-permissions.html" ->UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->11.1. <A -HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1593" ->Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT - security dialogs</A -></DT -><DT ->11.2. <A -HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1602" ->How to view file security on a Samba share</A -></DT -><DT ->11.3. <A -HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1613" ->Viewing file ownership</A -></DT -><DT ->11.4. <A -HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1633" ->Viewing file or directory permissions</A -></DT -><DT ->11.5. <A -HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1669" ->Modifying file or directory permissions</A -></DT -><DT ->11.6. <A -HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1691" ->Interaction with the standard Samba create mask - parameters</A -></DT -><DT ->11.7. <A -HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1755" ->Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute - mapping</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->12. <A -HREF="pam.html" ->Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally -managed authentication</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->12.1. <A -HREF="pam.html#AEN1776" ->Samba and PAM</A -></DT -><DT ->12.2. <A -HREF="pam.html#AEN1820" ->Distributed Authentication</A -></DT -><DT ->12.3. <A -HREF="pam.html#AEN1827" ->PAM Configuration in smb.conf</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->13. <A -HREF="msdfs.html" ->Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->13.1. <A -HREF="msdfs.html#AEN1847" ->Instructions</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->14. <A -HREF="printing.html" ->Printing Support</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->14.1. <A -HREF="printing.html#AEN1908" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->14.2. <A -HREF="printing.html#AEN1930" ->Configuration</A -></DT -><DT ->14.3. <A -HREF="printing.html#AEN2038" ->The Imprints Toolset</A -></DT -><DT ->14.4. <A -HREF="printing.html#AEN2081" ->Diagnosis</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->15. <A -HREF="securitylevels.html" ->Security levels</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->15.1. <A -HREF="securitylevels.html#AEN2186" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->15.2. <A -HREF="securitylevels.html#AEN2197" ->More complete description of security levels</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->16. <A -HREF="winbind.html" ->Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->16.1. <A -HREF="winbind.html#AEN2249" ->Abstract</A -></DT -><DT ->16.2. <A -HREF="winbind.html#AEN2253" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->16.3. <A -HREF="winbind.html#AEN2266" ->What Winbind Provides</A -></DT -><DT ->16.4. <A -HREF="winbind.html#AEN2277" ->How Winbind Works</A -></DT -><DT ->16.5. <A -HREF="winbind.html#AEN2317" ->Installation and Configuration</A -></DT -><DT ->16.6. <A -HREF="winbind.html#AEN2566" ->Limitations</A -></DT -><DT ->16.7. <A -HREF="winbind.html#AEN2576" ->Conclusion</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->17. <A -HREF="pdb-mysql.html" ->Passdb MySQL plugin</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->17.1. <A -HREF="pdb-mysql.html#AEN2590" ->Building</A -></DT -><DT ->17.2. <A -HREF="pdb-mysql.html#AEN2596" ->Configuring</A -></DT -><DT ->17.3. <A -HREF="pdb-mysql.html#AEN2611" ->Using plaintext passwords or encrypted password</A -></DT -><DT ->17.4. <A -HREF="pdb-mysql.html#AEN2616" ->Getting non-column data from the table</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->18. <A -HREF="pdb-xml.html" ->Passdb XML plugin</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->18.1. <A -HREF="pdb-xml.html#AEN2635" ->Building</A -></DT -><DT ->18.2. <A -HREF="pdb-xml.html#AEN2641" ->Usage</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->19. <A -HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html" ->Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->19.1. <A -HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2664" ->Purpose</A -></DT -><DT ->19.2. <A -HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2684" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->19.3. <A -HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2713" ->Supported LDAP Servers</A -></DT -><DT ->19.4. <A -HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2718" ->Schema and Relationship to the RFC 2307 posixAccount</A -></DT -><DT ->19.5. <A -HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2730" ->Configuring Samba with LDAP</A -></DT -><DT ->19.6. <A -HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2777" ->Accounts and Groups management</A -></DT -><DT ->19.7. <A -HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2782" ->Security and sambaAccount</A -></DT -><DT ->19.8. <A -HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2802" ->LDAP specials attributes for sambaAccounts</A -></DT -><DT ->19.9. <A -HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2872" ->Example LDIF Entries for a sambaAccount</A -></DT -><DT ->19.10. <A -HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2880" ->Comments</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->20. <A -HREF="cvs-access.html" ->HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->20.1. <A -HREF="cvs-access.html#AEN2891" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->20.2. <A -HREF="cvs-access.html#AEN2896" ->CVS Access to samba.org</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->21. <A -HREF="groupmapping.html" ->Group mapping HOWTO</A -></DT -><DT ->22. <A -HREF="speed.html" ->Samba performance issues</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->22.1. <A -HREF="speed.html#AEN2982" ->Comparisons</A -></DT -><DT ->22.2. <A -HREF="speed.html#AEN2988" ->Oplocks</A -></DT -><DT ->22.3. <A -HREF="speed.html#AEN3008" ->Socket options</A -></DT -><DT ->22.4. <A -HREF="speed.html#AEN3015" ->Read size</A -></DT -><DT ->22.5. <A -HREF="speed.html#AEN3020" ->Max xmit</A -></DT -><DT ->22.6. <A -HREF="speed.html#AEN3025" ->Locking</A -></DT -><DT ->22.7. <A -HREF="speed.html#AEN3029" ->Share modes</A -></DT -><DT ->22.8. <A -HREF="speed.html#AEN3034" ->Log level</A -></DT -><DT ->22.9. <A -HREF="speed.html#AEN3037" ->Wide lines</A -></DT -><DT ->22.10. <A -HREF="speed.html#AEN3040" ->Read raw</A -></DT -><DT ->22.11. <A -HREF="speed.html#AEN3045" ->Write raw</A -></DT -><DT ->22.12. <A -HREF="speed.html#AEN3049" ->Read prediction</A -></DT -><DT ->22.13. <A -HREF="speed.html#AEN3056" ->Memory mapping</A -></DT -><DT ->22.14. <A -HREF="speed.html#AEN3061" ->Slow Clients</A -></DT -><DT ->22.15. <A -HREF="speed.html#AEN3065" ->Slow Logins</A -></DT -><DT ->22.16. <A -HREF="speed.html#AEN3068" ->Client tuning</A -></DT -><DT ->22.17. <A -HREF="speed.html#AEN3100" ->My Results</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -></DL -></DD -><DT ->IV. <A -HREF="p3106.html" ->Appendixes</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->23. <A -HREF="portability.html" ->Portability</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->23.1. <A -HREF="portability.html#AEN3115" ->HPUX</A -></DT -><DT ->23.2. <A -HREF="portability.html#AEN3121" ->SCO Unix</A -></DT -><DT ->23.3. <A -HREF="portability.html#AEN3125" ->DNIX</A -></DT -><DT ->23.4. <A -HREF="portability.html#AEN3154" ->RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->24. <A -HREF="other-clients.html" ->Samba and other CIFS clients</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->24.1. <A -HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3175" ->Macintosh clients?</A -></DT -><DT ->24.2. <A -HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3184" ->OS2 Client</A -></DT -><DT ->24.3. <A -HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3224" ->Windows for Workgroups</A -></DT -><DT ->24.4. <A -HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3245" ->Windows '95/'98</A -></DT -><DT ->24.5. <A -HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3261" ->Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->25. <A -HREF="bugreport.html" ->Reporting Bugs</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->25.1. <A -HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3285" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->25.2. <A -HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3295" ->General info</A -></DT -><DT ->25.3. <A -HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3301" ->Debug levels</A -></DT -><DT ->25.4. <A -HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3318" ->Internal errors</A -></DT -><DT ->25.5. <A -HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3328" ->Attaching to a running process</A -></DT -><DT ->25.6. <A -HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3331" ->Patches</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -><DT ->26. <A -HREF="diagnosis.html" ->Diagnosing your samba server</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT ->26.1. <A -HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3354" ->Introduction</A -></DT -><DT ->26.2. <A -HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3359" ->Assumptions</A -></DT -><DT ->26.3. <A -HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3369" ->Tests</A -></DT -><DT ->26.4. <A -HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3479" ->Still having troubles?</A -></DT -></DL -></DD -></DL -></DD -></DL -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="NAVFOOTER" -><HR -ALIGN="LEFT" -WIDTH="100%"><TABLE -SUMMARY="Footer navigation table" -WIDTH="100%" -BORDER="0" -CELLPADDING="0" -CELLSPACING="0" -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="top" -> </TD -><TD -WIDTH="34%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="top" -> </TD -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p18.html" -ACCESSKEY="N" ->Next</A -></TD -></TR -><TR -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="left" -VALIGN="top" -> </TD -><TD -WIDTH="34%" -ALIGN="center" -VALIGN="top" -> </TD -><TD -WIDTH="33%" -ALIGN="right" -VALIGN="top" ->General installation</TD -></TR -></TABLE -></DIV -></BODY -></HTML ->
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/samba-ldap-howto.html b/docs/htmldocs/samba-ldap-howto.html index df8f32fe32..cefde0356d 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/samba-ldap-howto.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/samba-ldap-howto.html @@ -9,15 +9,12 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Optional configuration" -HREF="p1346.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="Passdb XML plugin" -HREF="pdb-xml.html"><LINK +TITLE="How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain" +HREF="samba-bdc.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" -TITLE="HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS" -HREF="cvs-access.html"></HEAD +TITLE="Using samba 3.0 with ActiveDirectory support" +HREF="ads.html"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="CHAPTER" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -45,7 +42,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="pdb-xml.html" +HREF="samba-bdc.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -59,7 +56,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="cvs-access.html" +HREF="ads.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -74,15 +71,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="SAMBA-LDAP-HOWTO" ></A ->Chapter 19. Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory</H1 +>Chapter 13. Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2664" +NAME="AEN2211" ></A ->19.1. Purpose</H1 +>13.1. Purpose</H1 ><P >This document describes how to use an LDAP directory for storing Samba user account information traditionally stored in the smbpasswd(5) file. It is @@ -148,9 +145,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2684" +NAME="AEN2231" ></A ->19.2. Introduction</H1 +>13.2. Introduction</H1 ><P >Traditionally, when configuring <A HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" @@ -265,9 +262,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2713" +NAME="AEN2260" ></A ->19.3. Supported LDAP Servers</H1 +>13.3. Supported LDAP Servers</H1 ><P >The LDAP samdb code in 2.2.3 has been developed and tested using the OpenLDAP 2.0 server and client libraries. The same code should be able to work with @@ -290,9 +287,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2718" +NAME="AEN2265" ></A ->19.4. Schema and Relationship to the RFC 2307 posixAccount</H1 +>13.4. Schema and Relationship to the RFC 2307 posixAccount</H1 ><P >Samba 2.2.3 includes the necessary schema file for OpenLDAP 2.0 in <TT @@ -349,17 +346,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2730" +NAME="AEN2277" ></A ->19.5. Configuring Samba with LDAP</H1 +>13.5. Configuring Samba with LDAP</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2732" +NAME="AEN2279" ></A ->19.5.1. OpenLDAP configuration</H2 +>13.5.1. OpenLDAP configuration</H2 ><P >To include support for the sambaAccount object in an OpenLDAP directory server, first copy the samba.schema file to slapd's configuration directory.</P @@ -439,9 +436,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2749" +NAME="AEN2296" ></A ->19.5.2. Configuring Samba</H2 +>13.5.2. Configuring Samba</H2 ><P >The following parameters are available in smb.conf only with <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -559,9 +556,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2777" +NAME="AEN2324" ></A ->19.6. Accounts and Groups management</H1 +>13.6. Accounts and Groups management</H1 ><P >As users accounts are managed thru the sambaAccount objectclass, you should modify you existing administration tools to deal with sambaAccount attributes.</P @@ -584,9 +581,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2782" +NAME="AEN2329" ></A ->19.7. Security and sambaAccount</H1 +>13.7. Security and sambaAccount</H1 ><P >There are two important points to remember when discussing the security of sambaAccount entries in the directory.</P @@ -663,9 +660,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2802" +NAME="AEN2349" ></A ->19.8. LDAP specials attributes for sambaAccounts</H1 +>13.8. LDAP specials attributes for sambaAccounts</H1 ><P >The sambaAccount objectclass is composed of the following attributes:</P ><P @@ -874,9 +871,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2872" +NAME="AEN2419" ></A ->19.9. Example LDIF Entries for a sambaAccount</H1 +>13.9. Example LDIF Entries for a sambaAccount</H1 ><P >The following is a working LDIF with the inclusion of the posixAccount objectclass:</P ><P @@ -932,9 +929,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2880" +NAME="AEN2427" ></A ->19.10. Comments</H1 +>13.10. Comments</H1 ><P >Please mail all comments regarding this HOWTO to <A HREF="mailto:jerry@samba.org" @@ -960,7 +957,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="pdb-xml.html" +HREF="samba-bdc.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -978,7 +975,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="cvs-access.html" +HREF="ads.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -988,21 +985,17 @@ ACCESSKEY="N" WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ->Passdb XML plugin</TD +>How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain</TD ><TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p1346.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ->HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</TD +>Using samba 3.0 with ActiveDirectory support</TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/securitylevels.html b/docs/htmldocs/securitylevels.html index 6613e07d5d..b984426855 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/securitylevels.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/securitylevels.html @@ -9,15 +9,12 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Optional configuration" -HREF="p1346.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="Printing Support" -HREF="printing.html"><LINK +TITLE="Debugging Printing Problems" +HREF="printingdebug.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind" -HREF="winbind.html"></HEAD +TITLE="security = domain in Samba 2.x" +HREF="domain-security.html"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="CHAPTER" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -45,7 +42,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="printing.html" +HREF="printingdebug.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -59,7 +56,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="winbind.html" +HREF="domain-security.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -74,15 +71,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="SECURITYLEVELS" ></A ->Chapter 15. Security levels</H1 +>Chapter 8. Security levels</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2186" +NAME="AEN1089" ></A ->15.1. Introduction</H1 +>8.1. Introduction</H1 ><P >Samba supports the following options to the global smb.conf parameter</P ><P @@ -98,7 +95,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >security</I ></TT ></A -> = [share|user(default)|server|domain|ads]</PRE +> = [share|user(default)|domain|ads]</PRE ></P ><P >Please refer to the smb.conf man page for usage information and to the document @@ -126,9 +123,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2197" +NAME="AEN1100" ></A ->15.2. More complete description of security levels</H1 +>8.2. More complete description of security levels</H1 ><P >A SMB server tells the client at startup what "security level" it is running. There are two options "share level" and "user level". Which @@ -232,7 +229,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="printing.html" +HREF="printingdebug.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -250,7 +247,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="winbind.html" +HREF="domain-security.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -260,21 +257,17 @@ ACCESSKEY="N" WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ->Printing Support</TD +>Debugging Printing Problems</TD ><TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p1346.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ->Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</TD +>security = domain in Samba 2.x</TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html index d409469e7c..14820cb623 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html @@ -531,6 +531,31 @@ NAME="AEN112" CLASS="VARIABLELIST" ><DL ><DT +>%S</DT +><DD +><P +>the name of the current service, if any.</P +></DD +><DT +>%P</DT +><DD +><P +>the root directory of the current service, + if any.</P +></DD +><DT +>%u</DT +><DD +><P +>user name of the current service, if any.</P +></DD +><DT +>%g</DT +><DD +><P +>primary group name of %u.</P +></DD +><DT >%U</DT ><DD ><P @@ -544,6 +569,19 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" >primary group name of %U.</P ></DD ><DT +>%H</DT +><DD +><P +>the home directory of the user given + by %u.</P +></DD +><DT +>%v</DT +><DD +><P +>the Samba version.</P +></DD +><DT >%h</DT ><DD ><P @@ -576,6 +614,29 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" </P ></DD ><DT +>%N</DT +><DD +><P +>the name of your NIS home directory server. + This is obtained from your NIS auto.map entry. If you have + not compiled Samba with the <SPAN +CLASS="emphasis" +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>--with-automount</I +></SPAN +> + option then this value will be the same as %L.</P +></DD +><DT +>%p</DT +><DD +><P +>the path of the service's home directory, + obtained from your NIS auto.map entry. The NIS auto.map entry + is split up as "%N:%p".</P +></DD +><DT >%R</DT ><DD ><P @@ -619,12 +680,6 @@ TARGET="_top" >the current date and time.</P ></DD ><DT ->%D</DT -><DD -><P ->Name of the domain or workgroup of the current user.</P -></DD -><DT >%$(<TT CLASS="REPLACEABLE" ><I @@ -644,78 +699,13 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE" ></DL ></DIV ><P ->The following substitutes apply only to some configuration options(only those - that are used when a connection has been established):</P -><P -></P -><DIV -CLASS="VARIABLELIST" -><DL -><DT ->%S</DT -><DD -><P ->the name of the current service, if any.</P -></DD -><DT ->%P</DT -><DD -><P ->the root directory of the current service, - if any.</P -></DD -><DT ->%u</DT -><DD -><P ->user name of the current service, if any.</P -></DD -><DT ->%g</DT -><DD -><P ->primary group name of %u.</P -></DD -><DT ->%H</DT -><DD -><P ->the home directory of the user given - by %u.</P -></DD -><DT ->%N</DT -><DD -><P ->the name of your NIS home directory server. - This is obtained from your NIS auto.map entry. If you have - not compiled Samba with the <SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->--with-automount</I -></SPAN -> - option then this value will be the same as %L.</P -></DD -><DT ->%p</DT -><DD -><P ->the path of the service's home directory, - obtained from your NIS auto.map entry. The NIS auto.map entry - is split up as "%N:%p".</P -></DD -></DL -></DIV -><P >There are some quite creative things that can be done with these substitutions and other smb.conf options.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN205" +NAME="AEN203" ></A ><H2 >NAME MANGLING</H2 @@ -814,13 +804,13 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" ></DL ></DIV ><P ->By default, Samba 3.0 has the same semantics as a Windows +>By default, Samba 2.2 has the same semantics as a Windows NT server, in that it is case insensitive but case preserving.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN238" +NAME="AEN236" ></A ><H2 >NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</H2 @@ -898,7 +888,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN257" +NAME="AEN255" ></A ><H2 >COMPLETE LIST OF GLOBAL PARAMETERS</H2 @@ -1679,18 +1669,6 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><LI ><P ><A -HREF="#LDAPTRUSTIDS" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->ldap trust ids</I -></TT -></A -></P -></LI -><LI -><P -><A HREF="#LMANNOUNCE" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -3169,7 +3147,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1013" +NAME="AEN1007" ></A ><H2 >COMPLETE LIST OF SERVICE PARAMETERS</H2 @@ -4672,7 +4650,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1513" +NAME="AEN1507" ></A ><H2 >EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER</H2 @@ -5504,12 +5482,12 @@ NAME="ANNOUNCEVERSION" ><P >This specifies the major and minor version numbers that nmbd will use when announcing itself as a server. The default - is 4.9. Do not change this parameter unless you have a specific + is 4.2. Do not change this parameter unless you have a specific need to set a Samba server to be a downlevel server.</P ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->announce version = 4.9</B +>announce version = 4.5</B ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -5851,7 +5829,7 @@ TARGET="_top" request has a time limit associated with it.</P ><P >If this parameter is set and the lock range requested - cannot be immediately satisfied, samba will internally + cannot be immediately satisfied, Samba 2.2 will internally queue the lock request, and periodically attempt to obtain the lock until the timeout period expires.</P ><P @@ -5859,7 +5837,7 @@ TARGET="_top" CLASS="CONSTANT" >no</TT >, then - samba will behave as previous versions of Samba would and + Samba 2.2 will behave as previous versions of Samba would and will fail the lock request immediately if the lock range cannot be obtained.</P ><P @@ -5975,7 +5953,7 @@ NAME="CASESENSITIVE" ><DD ><P >See the discussion in the section <A -HREF="#AEN205" +HREF="#AEN203" >NAME MANGLING</A >.</P ><P @@ -6538,7 +6516,7 @@ NAME="DEBUGTIMESTAMP" >debug timestamp (G)</DT ><DD ><P ->Samba debug log messages are timestamped +>Samba 2.2 debug log messages are timestamped by default. If you are running at a high <A HREF="#DEBUGLEVEL" > <TT @@ -6626,7 +6604,7 @@ NAME="DEFAULTCASE" ><DD ><P >See the section on <A -HREF="#AEN205" +HREF="#AEN203" > NAME MANGLING</A >. Also note the <A HREF="#SHORTPRESERVECASE" @@ -8725,7 +8703,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > lp(1)</B >.</P ><P ->This parameter does not accept % macros, because +>This paramater does not accept % macros, because many parts of the system require this value to be constant for correct operation.</P ><P @@ -9994,54 +9972,40 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->Off</I +>On</I ></TT -> = Never use SSL when querying the directory.</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><TT +> = Always use SSL when contacting the + <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->Start_tls</I +>ldap server</I ></TT -> = Use the LDAPv3 StartTLS extended operation - (RFC2830) for communicating with the directory server.</P +>.</P ></LI ><LI ><P ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->On</I -></TT -> = - Use SSL on the ldaps port when contacting the - <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->ldap server</I +>Off</I ></TT ->. Only - available when the backwards-compatiblity <B -CLASS="COMMAND" -> --with-ldapsam</B -> option is specified - to configure. See <A -HREF="#PASSDBBACKEND" +> = Never use SSL when querying the directory.</P +></LI +><LI +><P ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->passdb backend</I +>Start_tls</I ></TT -></A -></P +> = Use the LDAPv3 StartTLS extended operation + (RFC2830) for communicating with the directory server.</P ></LI ></UL ><P >Default : <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->ldap ssl = start_tls</B +>ldap ssl = on</B ></P ></DD ><DT @@ -10051,14 +10015,6 @@ NAME="LDAPSUFFIX" >ldap suffix (G)</DT ><DD ><P ->Specifies where user and machine accounts are added to the tree. Can be overriden by <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->ldap user suffix</B -> and <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->ldap machine suffix</B ->. It also used as the base dn for all ldap searches. </P -><P >Default : <SPAN CLASS="emphasis" ><I @@ -10164,35 +10120,6 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></DD ><DT ><A -NAME="LDAPTRUSTIDS" -></A ->ldap trust ids (G)</DT -><DD -><P ->Normally, Samba validates each entry - in the LDAP server against getpwnam(). This allows - LDAP to be used for Samba with the unix system using - NIS (for example) and also ensures that Samba does not - present accounts that do not otherwise exist. </P -><P ->This option is used to disable this functionality, and - instead to rely on the presence of the appropriate - attributes in LDAP directly, which can result in a - significant performance boost in some situations. - Setting this option to yes effectivly assumes - that the local machine is running <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->nss_ldap</B -> against the - same LDAP server.</P -><P ->Default: <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->ldap trust ids = No</B -></P -></DD -><DT -><A NAME="LEVEL2OPLOCKS" ></A >level2 oplocks (S)</DT @@ -11541,7 +11468,7 @@ NAME="MANGLECASE" ><DD ><P >See the section on <A -HREF="#AEN205" +HREF="#AEN203" > NAME MANGLING</A ></P ><P @@ -11617,7 +11544,7 @@ NAME="MANGLEDNAMES" or whether non-DOS names should simply be ignored.</P ><P >See the section on <A -HREF="#AEN205" +HREF="#AEN203" > NAME MANGLING</A > for details on how to control the mangling process.</P ><P @@ -11704,39 +11631,17 @@ NAME="MANGLINGMETHOD" a better algorithm (generates less collisions) in the names. However, many Win32 applications store the mangled names and so changing to the new algorithm must not be done - lightly as these applications may break unless reinstalled.</P + lightly as these applications may break unless reinstalled. + New installations of Samba may set the default to hash2.</P ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->mangling method = hash2</B -></P -><P ->Example: <B -CLASS="COMMAND" >mangling method = hash</B ></P -></DD -><DT -><A -NAME="MANGLEPREFIX" -></A ->mangle prefix (G)</DT -><DD -><P -> controls the number of prefix - characters from the original name used when generating - the mangled names. A larger value will give a weaker - hash and therefore more name collisions. The minimum - value is 1 and the maximum value is 6.</P -><P ->Default: <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->mangle prefix = 1</B -></P ><P >Example: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->mangle prefix = 4</B +>mangling method = hash2</B ></P ></DD ><DT @@ -11791,7 +11696,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" >magic</I ></SPAN > character in <A -HREF="#AEN205" +HREF="#AEN203" >name mangling</A >. The default is a '~' but this may interfere with some software. Use this option to set @@ -13772,41 +13677,15 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >ldap://localhost</B >)</P ><P ->Note: In this module, any account - without a matching POSIX account is regarded - as 'non unix'. - </P -><P >See also <A HREF="#NONUNIXACCOUNTRANGE" > <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->non unix account - range</I +>non unix account range</I ></TT ></A ></P -><P ->LDAP connections should be secured where - possible. This may be done using either - Start-TLS (see <A -HREF="#LDAPSSL" -> <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->ldap ssl</I -></TT -></A ->) or by - specifying <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->ldaps://</I -></TT -> in - the URL argument. - </P ></LI ><LI ><P @@ -14902,7 +14781,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></P ><P >See the section on <A -HREF="#AEN205" +HREF="#AEN203" >NAME MANGLING</A > for a fuller discussion.</P @@ -16668,7 +16547,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" be used in granting access.</P ><P >See also the section <A -HREF="#AEN238" +HREF="#AEN236" > NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A >.</P ><P @@ -16761,7 +16640,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" > parameter for details on doing this.</P ><P >See also the section <A -HREF="#AEN238" +HREF="#AEN236" > NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A >.</P ><P @@ -16853,7 +16732,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" > parameter for details on doing this.</P ><P >See also the section <A -HREF="#AEN238" +HREF="#AEN236" > NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A >.</P ><P @@ -16992,7 +16871,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" Domain Controller. This issue will be addressed in a future release.</P ><P >See also the section <A -HREF="#AEN238" +HREF="#AEN236" > NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A >.</P ><P @@ -17264,7 +17143,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" names are lowered. </P ><P >See the section on <A -HREF="#AEN205" +HREF="#AEN203" > NAME MANGLING</A >.</P ><P @@ -18158,8 +18037,7 @@ NAME="UNICODE" ><DD ><P >Specifies whether Samba should try - to use unicode on the wire by default. Note: This does NOT - mean that samba will assume that the unix machine uses unicode! + to use unicode on the wire by default. </P ><P >Default: <B @@ -18183,11 +18061,6 @@ NAME="UNIXCHARSET" CLASS="COMMAND" >unix charset = ASCII</B ></P -><P ->Example: <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->unix charset = UTF8</B -></P ></DD ><DT ><A @@ -18554,7 +18427,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" search.</P ><P >See the section <A -HREF="#AEN238" +HREF="#AEN236" >NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A > for more information on how @@ -19890,7 +19763,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN6150" +NAME="AEN6113" ></A ><H2 >WARNINGS</H2 @@ -19920,18 +19793,18 @@ TARGET="_top" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN6156" +NAME="AEN6119" ></A ><H2 >VERSION</H2 ><P ->This man page is correct for version 3.0 of +>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of the Samba suite.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN6159" +NAME="AEN6122" ></A ><H2 >SEE ALSO</H2 @@ -20010,7 +19883,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN6179" +NAME="AEN6142" ></A ><H2 >AUTHOR</H2 diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html index ca8cafd312..1e251c2ca5 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ NAME="AEN8" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >smbclient</B -> {servicename} [password] [-b <buffer size>] [-d debuglevel] [-D Directory] [-U username] [-W workgroup] [-M <netbios name>] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-l logfile] [-L <netbios name>] [-I destinationIP] [-E] [-c <command string>] [-i scope] [-O <socket options>] [-p port] [-R <name resolve order>] [-s <smb config file>] [-T<c|x>IXFqgbNan]</P +> {servicename} [password] [-b <buffer size>] [-d debuglevel] [-D Directory] [-U username] [-W workgroup] [-M <netbios name>] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-l logfile] [-L <netbios name>] [-I destinationIP] [-E <terminal code>] [-c <command string>] [-i scope] [-O <socket options>] [-p port] [-R <name resolve order>] [-s <smb config file>] [-T<c|x>IXFqgbNan]</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.5.html index ac3ab94691..04fab30ed6 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.5.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.5.html @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ NAME="AEN73" ><H2 >VERSION</H2 ><P ->This man page is correct for version 3.0 of +>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of the Samba suite.</P ></DIV ><DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/speed.html b/docs/htmldocs/speed.html index 9df2a6d6af..047929af48 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/speed.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/speed.html @@ -9,15 +9,12 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Optional configuration" -HREF="p1346.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="Group mapping HOWTO" -HREF="groupmapping.html"><LINK +TITLE="Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide" +HREF="browsing-quick.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Appendixes" -HREF="p3106.html"></HEAD +TITLE="HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS" +HREF="cvs-access.html"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="CHAPTER" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -45,7 +42,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="groupmapping.html" +HREF="browsing-quick.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -59,7 +56,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="p3106.html" +HREF="cvs-access.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -74,15 +71,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="SPEED" ></A ->Chapter 22. Samba performance issues</H1 +>Chapter 17. Samba performance issues</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2982" +NAME="AEN2742" ></A ->22.1. Comparisons</H1 +>17.1. Comparisons</H1 ><P >The Samba server uses TCP to talk to the client. Thus if you are trying to see if it performs well you should really compare it to @@ -111,17 +108,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2988" +NAME="AEN2748" ></A ->22.2. Oplocks</H1 +>17.2. Oplocks</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2990" +NAME="AEN2750" ></A ->22.2.1. Overview</H2 +>17.2.1. Overview</H2 ><P >Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission from a server to locally cache file operations. If a server grants an oplock @@ -155,9 +152,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2998" +NAME="AEN2758" ></A ->22.2.2. Level2 Oplocks</H2 +>17.2.2. Level2 Oplocks</H2 ><P >With Samba 2.0.5 a new capability - level2 (read only) oplocks is supported (although the option is off by default - see the smb.conf @@ -179,9 +176,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN3004" +NAME="AEN2764" ></A ->22.2.3. Old 'fake oplocks' option - deprecated</H2 +>17.2.3. Old 'fake oplocks' option - deprecated</H2 ><P >Samba can also fake oplocks, by granting a oplock whenever a client asks for one. This is controlled using the smb.conf option "fake @@ -200,9 +197,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3008" +NAME="AEN2768" ></A ->22.3. Socket options</H1 +>17.3. Socket options</H1 ><P >There are a number of socket options that can greatly affect the performance of a TCP based server like Samba.</P @@ -228,9 +225,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3015" +NAME="AEN2775" ></A ->22.4. Read size</H1 +>17.4. Read size</H1 ><P >The option "read size" affects the overlap of disk reads/writes with network reads/writes. If the amount of data being transferred in @@ -254,9 +251,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3020" +NAME="AEN2780" ></A ->22.5. Max xmit</H1 +>17.5. Max xmit</H1 ><P >At startup the client and server negotiate a "maximum transmit" size, which limits the size of nearly all SMB commands. You can set the @@ -277,9 +274,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3025" +NAME="AEN2785" ></A ->22.6. Locking</H1 +>17.6. Locking</H1 ><P >By default Samba does not implement strict locking on each read/write call (although it did in previous versions). If you enable strict @@ -294,9 +291,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3029" +NAME="AEN2789" ></A ->22.7. Share modes</H1 +>17.7. Share modes</H1 ><P >Some people find that opening files is very slow. This is often because of the "share modes" code needed to fully implement the dos @@ -324,9 +321,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3034" +NAME="AEN2794" ></A ->22.8. Log level</H1 +>17.8. Log level</H1 ><P >If you set the log level (also known as "debug level") higher than 2 then you may suffer a large drop in performance. This is because the @@ -338,9 +335,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3037" +NAME="AEN2797" ></A ->22.9. Wide lines</H1 +>17.9. Wide lines</H1 ><P >The "wide links" option is now enabled by default, but if you disable it (for better security) then you may suffer a performance hit in @@ -352,9 +349,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3040" +NAME="AEN2800" ></A ->22.10. Read raw</H1 +>17.10. Read raw</H1 ><P >The "read raw" operation is designed to be an optimised, low-latency file read operation. A server may choose to not support it, @@ -374,9 +371,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3045" +NAME="AEN2805" ></A ->22.11. Write raw</H1 +>17.11. Write raw</H1 ><P >The "write raw" operation is designed to be an optimised, low-latency file write operation. A server may choose to not support it, @@ -391,9 +388,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3049" +NAME="AEN2809" ></A ->22.12. Read prediction</H1 +>17.12. Read prediction</H1 ><P >Samba can do read prediction on some of the SMB commands. Read prediction means that Samba reads some extra data on the last file it @@ -417,9 +414,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3056" +NAME="AEN2816" ></A ->22.13. Memory mapping</H1 +>17.13. Memory mapping</H1 ><P >Samba supports reading files via memory mapping them. One some machines this can give a large boost to performance, on others it @@ -438,9 +435,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3061" +NAME="AEN2821" ></A ->22.14. Slow Clients</H1 +>17.14. Slow Clients</H1 ><P >One person has reported that setting the protocol to COREPLUS rather than LANMAN2 gave a dramatic speed improvement (from 10k/s to 150k/s).</P @@ -455,9 +452,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3065" +NAME="AEN2825" ></A ->22.15. Slow Logins</H1 +>17.15. Slow Logins</H1 ><P >Slow logins are almost always due to the password checking time. Using the lowest practical "password level" will improve things a lot. You @@ -468,9 +465,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3068" +NAME="AEN2828" ></A ->22.16. Client tuning</H1 +>17.16. Client tuning</H1 ><P >Often a speed problem can be traced to the client. The client (for example Windows for Workgroups) can often be tuned for better TCP @@ -572,9 +569,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN3100" +NAME="AEN2860" ></A ->22.17. My Results</H1 +>17.17. My Results</H1 ><P >Some people want to see real numbers in a document like this, so here they are. I have a 486sx33 client running WfWg 3.11 with the 3.11b @@ -613,7 +610,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="groupmapping.html" +HREF="browsing-quick.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -631,7 +628,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="p3106.html" +HREF="cvs-access.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -641,21 +638,17 @@ ACCESSKEY="N" WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ->Group mapping HOWTO</TD +>Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</TD ><TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p1346.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ->Appendixes</TD +>HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/unix-permissions.html b/docs/htmldocs/unix-permissions.html index 153a0e82bc..9faf0eba28 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/unix-permissions.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/unix-permissions.html @@ -9,16 +9,12 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Optional configuration" -HREF="p1346.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba" -HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"><LINK +TITLE="Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba" +HREF="msdfs.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally -managed authentication" -HREF="pam.html"></HEAD +TITLE="Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x" +HREF="printing.html"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="CHAPTER" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -46,7 +42,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html" +HREF="msdfs.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -60,7 +56,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="pam.html" +HREF="printing.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -75,15 +71,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="UNIX-PERMISSIONS" ></A ->Chapter 11. UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</H1 +>Chapter 5. UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1593" +NAME="AEN580" ></A ->11.1. Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT +>5.1. Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT security dialogs</H1 ><P >New in the Samba 2.0.4 release is the ability for Windows @@ -120,9 +116,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1602" +NAME="AEN589" ></A ->11.2. How to view file security on a Samba share</H1 +>5.2. How to view file security on a Samba share</H1 ><P >From an NT 4.0 client, single-click with the right mouse button on any file or directory in a Samba mounted @@ -190,9 +186,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1613" +NAME="AEN600" ></A ->11.3. Viewing file ownership</H1 +>5.3. Viewing file ownership</H1 ><P >Clicking on the <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -284,9 +280,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1633" +NAME="AEN620" ></A ->11.4. Viewing file or directory permissions</H1 +>5.4. Viewing file or directory permissions</H1 ><P >The third button is the <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -346,9 +342,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1648" +NAME="AEN635" ></A ->11.4.1. File Permissions</H2 +>5.4.1. File Permissions</H2 ><P >The standard UNIX user/group/world triple and the corresponding "read", "write", "execute" permissions @@ -408,9 +404,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1662" +NAME="AEN649" ></A ->11.4.2. Directory Permissions</H2 +>5.4.2. Directory Permissions</H2 ><P >Directories on an NT NTFS file system have two different sets of permissions. The first set of permissions @@ -440,9 +436,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1669" +NAME="AEN656" ></A ->11.5. Modifying file or directory permissions</H1 +>5.5. Modifying file or directory permissions</H1 ><P >Modifying file and directory permissions is as simple as changing the displayed permissions in the dialog box, and @@ -538,9 +534,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1691" +NAME="AEN678" ></A ->11.6. Interaction with the standard Samba create mask +>5.6. Interaction with the standard Samba create mask parameters</H1 ><P >Note that with Samba 2.0.5 there are four new parameters @@ -815,9 +811,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1755" +NAME="AEN742" ></A ->11.7. Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute +>5.7. Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute mapping</H1 ><P >Samba maps some of the DOS attribute bits (such as "read @@ -874,7 +870,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html" +HREF="msdfs.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -892,7 +888,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="pam.html" +HREF="printing.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -902,22 +898,17 @@ ACCESSKEY="N" WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ->Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</TD +>Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</TD ><TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p1346.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ->Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally -managed authentication</TD +>Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x</TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/vfstest.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/vfstest.1.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3db7ff3d97..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/vfstest.1.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,496 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> -<HTML -><HEAD -><TITLE ->vfstest</TITLE -><META -NAME="GENERATOR" -CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"></HEAD -><BODY -CLASS="REFENTRY" -BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" -TEXT="#000000" -LINK="#0000FF" -VLINK="#840084" -ALINK="#0000FF" -><H1 -><A -NAME="VFSTEST" -></A ->vfstest</H1 -><DIV -CLASS="REFNAMEDIV" -><A -NAME="AEN5" -></A -><H2 ->Name</H2 ->vfstest -- tool for testing samba VFS modules </DIV -><DIV -CLASS="REFSYNOPSISDIV" -><A -NAME="AEN8" -></A -><H2 ->Synopsis</H2 -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->vfstest</B -> [-d debuglevel] [-c command] [-l logfile] [-h]</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="REFSECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN15" -></A -><H2 ->DESCRIPTION</H2 -><P ->This tool is part of the <A -HREF="samba.7.html" -TARGET="_top" -> Samba</A -> suite.</P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->vfstest</B -> is a small command line - utility that has the ability to test dso samba VFS modules. It gives the - user the ability to call the various VFS functions manually and - supports cascaded VFS modules. - </P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="REFSECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN21" -></A -><H2 ->OPTIONS</H2 -><P -></P -><DIV -CLASS="VARIABLELIST" -><DL -><DT ->-c|--command=command</DT -><DD -><P ->Execute the specified (colon-seperated) commands. - See below for the commands that are available. - </P -></DD -><DT ->-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT -><DD -><P -><TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->debuglevel</I -></TT -> is an integer -from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is -not specified is zero.</P -><P ->The higher this value, the more detail will be -logged to the log files about the activities of the -server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious -warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for -day to day running - it generates a small amount of -information about operations carried out.</P -><P ->Levels above 1 will generate considerable -amounts of log data, and should only be used when -investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for -use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log -data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</P -><P ->Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel" -TARGET="_top" ->log -level</A -> parameter in the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html" -TARGET="_top" -><TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf(5)</TT -></A -> file.</P -></DD -><DT ->-h|--help</DT -><DD -><P ->Print a summary of command line options.</P -></DD -><DT ->-l|--logfile=logbasename</DT -><DD -><P ->File name for log/debug files. The extension - <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->'.client'</TT -> will be appended. The log file is never removed - by the client. - </P -></DD -></DL -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="REFSECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN48" -></A -><H2 ->COMMANDS</H2 -><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->VFS COMMANDS</I -></SPAN -></P -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->load <module.so></B -> - Load specified VFS module </P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->populate <char> <size></B -> - Populate a data buffer with the specified data - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->showdata [<offset> <len>]</B -> - Show data currently in data buffer - </P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->connect</B -> - VFS connect()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->disconnect</B -> - VFS disconnect()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->disk_free</B -> - VFS disk_free()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->opendir</B -> - VFS opendir()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->readdir</B -> - VFS readdir()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->mkdir</B -> - VFS mkdir()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->rmdir</B -> - VFS rmdir()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->closedir</B -> - VFS closedir()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->open</B -> - VFS open()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->close</B -> - VFS close()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->read</B -> - VFS read()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->write</B -> - VFS write()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->lseek</B -> - VFS lseek()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->rename</B -> - VFS rename()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->fsync</B -> - VFS fsync()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->stat</B -> - VFS stat()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->fstat</B -> - VFS fstat()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->lstat</B -> - VFS lstat()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->unlink</B -> - VFS unlink()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->chmod</B -> - VFS chmod()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->fchmod</B -> - VFS fchmod()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->chown</B -> - VFS chown()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->fchown</B -> - VFS fchown()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->chdir</B -> - VFS chdir()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->getwd</B -> - VFS getwd()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->utime</B -> - VFS utime()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->ftruncate</B -> - VFS ftruncate()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->lock</B -> - VFS lock()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->symlink</B -> - VFS symlink()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->readlink</B -> - VFS readlink()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->link</B -> - VFS link()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->mknod</B -> - VFS mknod()</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->realpath</B -> - VFS realpath()</P -></LI -></UL -><P -><SPAN -CLASS="emphasis" -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->GENERAL COMMANDS</I -></SPAN -></P -><P -></P -><UL -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->conf <smb.conf></B -> - Load a different configuration file</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->help [<command>]</B -> - Get list of commands or info about specified command</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->debuglevel <level></B -> - Set debug level</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->freemem</B -> - Free memory currently in use</P -></LI -><LI -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->exit</B -> - Exit vfstest</P -></LI -></UL -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="REFSECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN179" -></A -><H2 ->VERSION</H2 -><P ->This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba - suite.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="REFSECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN182" -></A -><H2 ->AUTHOR</H2 -><P ->The original Samba software and related utilities - were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed - by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar - to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</P -><P ->The vfstest man page was written by Jelmer Vernooij.</P -></DIV -></BODY -></HTML ->
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/wbinfo.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/wbinfo.1.html index a8aa065eed..26e098868e 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/wbinfo.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/wbinfo.1.html @@ -37,12 +37,12 @@ NAME="AEN8" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >wbinfo</B -> [-u] [-g] [-i ip] [-N netbios-name] [-n name] [-s sid] [-U uid] [-G gid] [-S sid] [-Y sid] [-t] [-m] [-r user] [-a user%password] [-A user%password] [-p]</P +> [-u] [-g] [-h name] [-i ip] [-n name] [-s sid] [-U uid] [-G gid] [-S sid] [-Y sid] [-t] [-m] [-r user] [-a user%password] [-A user%password]</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN27" +NAME="AEN26" ></A ><H2 >DESCRIPTION</H2 @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN38" +NAME="AEN37" ></A ><H2 >OPTIONS</H2 @@ -123,13 +123,13 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >. </P ></DD ><DT ->-N name</DT +>-h name</DT ><DD ><P >The <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->-N</I +>-h</I ></TT > option queries <B @@ -146,13 +146,13 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" </P ></DD ><DT ->-I ip</DT +>-i ip</DT ><DD ><P >The <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->-I</I +>-i</I ></TT > option queries <B @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN120" +NAME="AEN119" ></A ><H2 >EXIT STATUS</H2 @@ -327,18 +327,18 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN125" +NAME="AEN124" ></A ><H2 >VERSION</H2 ><P ->This man page is correct for version 3.0 of +>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of the Samba suite.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN128" +NAME="AEN127" ></A ><H2 >SEE ALSO</H2 @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN133" +NAME="AEN132" ></A ><H2 >AUTHOR</H2 diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/wfw_slip.htm b/docs/htmldocs/wfw_slip.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5b4a0a5e53 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/wfw_slip.htm @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ +<HTML>
+<HEAD>
+<TITLE>Peter Karrer Announces SLIP for WFW</TITLE>
+</HEAD>
+<BODY>
+<H1><I>Winserve</I></H1>
+<HR>
+<H2><I>Peter Karrer Announces SLIP for WFW</I></H2>
+[NEW 03-22-95)
+<HR>
+<B>Hello,</B>
+<P>
+I've discovered a way to run WfW's TCP/IP-32 over a SLIP packet driver. This
+allows WfW users to do Windows networking over dialup lines just like it is
+possible with NT and the Windows 95 beta!
+<P>
+For instance, you can mount Microsoft's FTP server as a network drive in File
+Manager or connect to an MS Mail post office over the Internet. Of course,
+the usual Internet stuff works as well. Another interesting site is
+WINSERVE.001; check out www.winserve.com.
+<HR>
+This method should work with any class 1 (Ethernet II) packet driver. However,
+I'm not in a position to try anything else than SLIPPER/CSLIPPER.
+<HR>
+<H3>Files you need:</H3>
+<B>WFWT32.EXE:</B> ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/bussys/msclient/wfw/wfwt32.exe
+<P>
+ Microsoft's free TCP/IP for WfW. It's a self-extracting archive which
+ should be executed in an empty directory.
+<P>
+<B>SLIPPER.EXE:</B> ftp://biocserver.bioc.cwru.edu/pub/dos/slipper/slippr15.zip
+<P>
+ Peter Tattam's SLIP packet driver. CSLIPPER.EXE is a variant which supports
+ VJ header compression.
+<P>
+<B>PDETHER.EXE:</B> ftp://sjf-lwp.idz.sjf.novell.com/odi/pdether/pde105.zip
+<P>
+ Don Provan's ODI-over-Packet Driver shim. This *must* be version 1.05 (or
+ above).
+<P>
+<B>LSL.COM:</B>
+<P>
+ Novell's LAN Support Layer. If you're an owner of Windows 3.10, you'll
+ have it on one of your install disks. Use "expand a:lsl.co_ lsl.com" to
+ expand it. Microsoft has stopped bundling LSL.COM with WfW 3.11, though.
+ The newest version of LSL.COM can be downloaded as part of
+ ftp://ftp.novell.com/pub/netware/nwos/dosclnt12/vlms/vlmup2.exe.
+ However, it's not clear if this one may be legally used outside Netware
+ environments.
+<P>
+<B>NET.CFG:</B>
+<P>
+ A configuration file for LSL and PDETHER. It should contain the following
+ text:
+<P>
+<PRE>
+Link Support
+ Buffers 8 1600
+Link Driver PDETHER
+ Int 60
+ Frame Ethernet_II
+ Protocol IP 800 Ethernet_II
+ Protocol ARP 806 Ethernet_II
+ Protocol RARP 8035 Ethernet_II
+</PRE>
+<P>
+<B>DISCOMX.COM:</B>
+<P>
+ A little hack of mine to disable the COM port used by the SLIP packet driver.
+ Usage is e.g. "discomx 2" to disable COM2. This should be run before
+ starting WfW, otherwise you'll get "device conflict" messages. Here it is:
+<P><PRE>
+begin 644 discomx.com
+F,=N)V8H.@`"P(+^!`/.N3XH="=MT!DN`XP/1XS')!R:)CP`$S2``
+`
+end
+ </PRE>
+ (Save this text to disk as <I>filename</I>, then run "uudecode <I>filename</I>".
+ uudecode can be found, for instance, at
+ ftp://ftp.switch.ch/mirror/simtel/msdos/starter/uudecode.com )
+<P>
+<B>LMHOSTS:</B>
+ <P>
+ An optional file which should be stored in your Windows subdirectory. It is
+ used to map NetBIOS computer names to IP addresses. Example:
+<P>
+<PRE>
+198.105.232.1 ftp #PRE # ftp.microsoft.com
+204.118.34.11 winserve.001 #PRE # Winserve
+</PRE>
+<HR>
+<H3>How to install it:</H3>
+<P>
+<UL>
+<LI>Put the files mentioned above into a directory, e.g. C:\SLIP.
+<P>
+<LI>Put the following lines into AUTOEXEC.BAT:
+<P><PRE>
+ cd \slip
+ slipper com1 vec=60 baud=57600 ether (may vary with your modem setup)
+ lsl
+ pdether
+ discomx 1 (must correspond to SLIPPER's COM port)
+</PRE>
+ (If you use another vec= setting, you must update that in NET.CFG as well.)
+ Use CSLIPPER instead of SLIPPER if your SLIP provider supports VJC.
+<P>
+<LI>Start WfW.
+<UL>
+<LI>Under Windows Setup, choose "Change Network Settings".
+<LI>Select "Install Microsoft Windows Network".
+<LI>In "Drivers...", choose "Add Adapter"
+ and install the "IPXODI Support driver (Ethernet) [ODI/NDIS3]".
+<LI>In "Add Protocols...", select "Unlisted or Updated Protocol". When asked for a
+ driver disk, enter the directory where you expanded WFWT32.EXE.
+<LI>Configure TCP/IP (IP address, enable LMHOSTS lookup, try 204.118.34.11 as primary
+ WINS server). Remove all other protocols (NetBEUI, IPX/SPX).
+</UL>
+<P>
+<LI>Windows will probably update the first lines of AUTOEXEC.BAT with
+<P>
+<PRE>
+ c:\windows\net start
+ c:\windows\odihlp.exe.
+</PRE>
+ The "odihlp" line must be moved behind the "pdether" line.
+<P>
+<LI>Windows will also update NET.CFG with some "Frame" lines. These must
+ be removed (except "Frame Ethernet_II").
+<P>
+<LI>Somehow, you will have to dial in to your SLIP provider. I do it manually
+ before slipper (or cslipper) gets loaded, using a DOS-based terminal program.
+ But there are some automatic dialers around. I've seen recommendations for
+ ftp://mvmpc9.ciw.uni-karlsruhe.de/x-slip/slip_it.exe.
+<P>
+<LI>To connect to Microsoft's FTP server (or Winserve) go into File Manager,
+ choose "Connect Network drive" and enter "\\ftp" or "\\winserve.001" into
+ the "Path:" field.
+</UL>
+<HR>
+<H3>How it works:</H3>
+<P>
+Microsoft's TCP/IP-32 requires an NDIS3 interface. NDIS is Microsoft's way
+to interface with a network.
+<P>
+WfW also contains an NDIS3-over-ODI "shim", whose real mode component is
+ODIHLP.EXE. ODI is Novell's way to interface with a network.
+<P>
+SLIPPER is a Packet Driver (PD) for use over serial lines. PDs are everybody
+else's way to interface with a network. SLIPPER's "ether" option makes it
+look like an Ethernet PD to applications using it.
+<P>
+A "shim" is a program which simulates a network application programming
+interface on top of another.
+<P>
+There is no NDIS SLIP driver which would work with WfW.
+<P>
+There is no NDIS-over-PD shim.
+<P>
+However, there's an ODI-over-PD shim (PDETHER) and an NDIS-over-ODI shim
+(ODIHLP etc.)
+<P>
+OK, so let's do NDIS-over-ODI-over-PD!
+ <P>
+This should have worked all the time; however, a non-feature in PDETHER
+versions < 1.05 has prevented the method from functioning until now.
+<HR>
+<B>Questions, suggestions etc. please to
+<P>
+<PRE>
+Peter Karrer pkarrer@ife.ee.ethz.ch
+</PRE>
+</B>
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/winbind.html b/docs/htmldocs/winbind.html index 016d77cac1..cbec6e39a6 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/winbind.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/winbind.html @@ -9,15 +9,12 @@ CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK REL="HOME" TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation" HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK -REL="UP" -TITLE="Optional configuration" -HREF="p1346.html"><LINK REL="PREVIOUS" -TITLE="Security levels" -HREF="securitylevels.html"><LINK +TITLE="security = domain in Samba 2.x" +HREF="domain-security.html"><LINK REL="NEXT" -TITLE="Passdb MySQL plugin" -HREF="pdb-mysql.html"></HEAD +TITLE="How to Configure Samba 2.2 as a Primary Domain Controller" +HREF="samba-pdc.html"></HEAD ><BODY CLASS="CHAPTER" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" @@ -45,7 +42,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="securitylevels.html" +HREF="domain-security.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -59,7 +56,7 @@ WIDTH="10%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="bottom" ><A -HREF="pdb-mysql.html" +HREF="samba-pdc.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -74,15 +71,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER" ><A NAME="WINBIND" ></A ->Chapter 16. Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</H1 +>Chapter 10. Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2249" +NAME="AEN1255" ></A ->16.1. Abstract</H1 +>10.1. Abstract</H1 ><P >Integration of UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT through a unified logon has been considered a "holy grail" in heterogeneous @@ -107,9 +104,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2253" +NAME="AEN1259" ></A ->16.2. Introduction</H1 +>10.2. Introduction</H1 ><P >It is well known that UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT have different models for representing user and group information and @@ -161,9 +158,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2266" +NAME="AEN1272" ></A ->16.3. What Winbind Provides</H1 +>10.3. What Winbind Provides</H1 ><P >Winbind unifies UNIX and Windows NT account management by allowing a UNIX box to become a full member of a NT domain. Once @@ -203,9 +200,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2273" +NAME="AEN1279" ></A ->16.3.1. Target Uses</H2 +>10.3.1. Target Uses</H2 ><P >Winbind is targeted at organizations that have an existing NT based domain infrastructure into which they wish @@ -227,9 +224,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2277" +NAME="AEN1283" ></A ->16.4. How Winbind Works</H1 +>10.4. How Winbind Works</H1 ><P >The winbind system is designed around a client/server architecture. A long running <B @@ -247,9 +244,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2282" +NAME="AEN1288" ></A ->16.4.1. Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</H2 +>10.4.1. Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</H2 ><P >Over the last two years, efforts have been underway by various Samba Team members to decode various aspects of @@ -273,9 +270,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2286" +NAME="AEN1292" ></A ->16.4.2. Name Service Switch</H2 +>10.4.2. Name Service Switch</H2 ><P >The Name Service Switch, or NSS, is a feature that is present in many UNIX operating systems. It allows system @@ -353,9 +350,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2302" +NAME="AEN1308" ></A ->16.4.3. Pluggable Authentication Modules</H2 +>10.4.3. Pluggable Authentication Modules</H2 ><P >Pluggable Authentication Modules, also known as PAM, is a system for abstracting authentication and authorization @@ -402,9 +399,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2310" +NAME="AEN1316" ></A ->16.4.4. User and Group ID Allocation</H2 +>10.4.4. User and Group ID Allocation</H2 ><P >When a user or group is created under Windows NT is it allocated a numerical relative identifier (RID). This is @@ -428,9 +425,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2314" +NAME="AEN1320" ></A ->16.4.5. Result Caching</H2 +>10.4.5. Result Caching</H2 ><P >An active system can generate a lot of user and group name lookups. To reduce the network cost of these lookups winbind @@ -451,9 +448,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2317" +NAME="AEN1323" ></A ->16.5. Installation and Configuration</H1 +>10.5. Installation and Configuration</H1 ><P >Many thanks to John Trostel <A HREF="mailto:jtrostel@snapserver.com" @@ -478,9 +475,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2324" +NAME="AEN1330" ></A ->16.5.1. Introduction</H2 +>10.5.1. Introduction</H2 ><P >This HOWTO describes the procedures used to get winbind up and running on my RedHat 7.1 system. Winbind is capable of providing access @@ -537,9 +534,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2337" +NAME="AEN1343" ></A ->16.5.2. Requirements</H2 +>10.5.2. Requirements</H2 ><P >If you have a samba configuration file that you are currently using... <SPAN @@ -577,7 +574,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" > back to the original state they were in if you get frustrated with the way things are going. ;-)</P ><P ->The latest version of SAMBA (version 3.0 as of this writing), now +>The latest version of SAMBA (version 2.2.2 as of this writing), now includes a functioning winbindd daemon. Please refer to the <A HREF="http://samba.org/" @@ -607,9 +604,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN2351" +NAME="AEN1357" ></A ->16.5.3. Testing Things Out</H2 +>10.5.3. Testing Things Out</H2 ><P >Before starting, it is probably best to kill off all the SAMBA related daemons running on your server. Kill off all <B @@ -652,9 +649,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><H3 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2362" +NAME="AEN1368" ></A ->16.5.3.1. Configure and compile SAMBA</H3 +>10.5.3.1. Configure and compile SAMBA</H3 ><P >The configuration and compilation of SAMBA is pretty straightforward. The first three steps may not be necessary depending upon @@ -718,9 +715,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><H3 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2381" +NAME="AEN1387" ></A ->16.5.3.2. Configure <TT +>10.5.3.2. Configure <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >nsswitch.conf</TT > and the @@ -823,9 +820,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><H3 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2414" +NAME="AEN1420" ></A ->16.5.3.3. Configure smb.conf</H3 +>10.5.3.3. Configure smb.conf</H3 ><P >Several parameters are needed in the smb.conf file to control the behavior of <B @@ -898,9 +895,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><H3 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2430" +NAME="AEN1436" ></A ->16.5.3.4. Join the SAMBA server to the PDC domain</H3 +>10.5.3.4. Join the SAMBA server to the PDC domain</H3 ><P >Enter the following command to make the SAMBA server join the PDC domain, where <TT @@ -922,7 +919,7 @@ CLASS="PROMPT" >root#</TT > <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->/usr/local/samba/bin/net rpc join -S PDC -U Administrator</B +>/usr/local/samba/bin/net rpc join -s PDC -U Administrator</B ></P ><P >The proper response to the command should be: "Joined the domain @@ -944,9 +941,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><H3 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2441" +NAME="AEN1447" ></A ->16.5.3.5. Start up the winbindd daemon and test it!</H3 +>10.5.3.5. Start up the winbindd daemon and test it!</H3 ><P >Eventually, you will want to modify your smb startup script to automatically invoke the winbindd daemon when the other parts of @@ -1067,17 +1064,17 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><H3 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2477" +NAME="AEN1483" ></A ->16.5.3.6. Fix the init.d startup scripts</H3 +>10.5.3.6. Fix the init.d startup scripts</H3 ><DIV CLASS="SECT4" ><H4 CLASS="SECT4" ><A -NAME="AEN2479" +NAME="AEN1485" ></A ->16.5.3.6.1. Linux</H4 +>10.5.3.6.1. Linux</H4 ><P >The <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -1171,9 +1168,9 @@ CLASS="SECT4" ><H4 CLASS="SECT4" ><A -NAME="AEN2496" +NAME="AEN1502" ></A ->16.5.3.6.2. Solaris</H4 +>10.5.3.6.2. Solaris</H4 ><P >On solaris, you need to modify the <TT @@ -1242,9 +1239,9 @@ CLASS="SECT4" ><H4 CLASS="SECT4" ><A -NAME="AEN2503" +NAME="AEN1509" ></A ->16.5.3.6.3. Restarting</H4 +>10.5.3.6.3. Restarting</H4 ><P >If you restart the <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -1266,9 +1263,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3" ><H3 CLASS="SECT3" ><A -NAME="AEN2509" +NAME="AEN1515" ></A ->16.5.3.7. Configure Winbind and PAM</H3 +>10.5.3.7. Configure Winbind and PAM</H3 ><P >If you have made it this far, you know that winbindd and samba are working together. If you want to use winbind to provide authentication for other @@ -1324,9 +1321,9 @@ CLASS="SECT4" ><H4 CLASS="SECT4" ><A -NAME="AEN2526" +NAME="AEN1532" ></A ->16.5.3.7.1. Linux/FreeBSD-specific PAM configuration</H4 +>10.5.3.7.1. Linux/FreeBSD-specific PAM configuration</H4 ><P >The <TT CLASS="FILENAME" @@ -1453,9 +1450,9 @@ CLASS="SECT4" ><H4 CLASS="SECT4" ><A -NAME="AEN2559" +NAME="AEN1565" ></A ->16.5.3.7.2. Solaris-specific configuration</H4 +>10.5.3.7.2. Solaris-specific configuration</H4 ><P >The /etc/pam.conf needs to be changed. I changed this file so that my Domain users can logon both locally as well as telnet.The following are the changes @@ -1540,9 +1537,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2566" +NAME="AEN1572" ></A ->16.6. Limitations</H1 +>10.6. Limitations</H1 ><P >Winbind has a number of limitations in its current released version that we hope to overcome in future @@ -1581,9 +1578,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN2576" +NAME="AEN1582" ></A ->16.7. Conclusion</H1 +>10.7. Conclusion</H1 ><P >The winbind system, through the use of the Name Service Switch, Pluggable Authentication Modules, and appropriate @@ -1609,7 +1606,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="securitylevels.html" +HREF="domain-security.html" ACCESSKEY="P" >Prev</A ></TD @@ -1627,7 +1624,7 @@ WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ><A -HREF="pdb-mysql.html" +HREF="samba-pdc.html" ACCESSKEY="N" >Next</A ></TD @@ -1637,21 +1634,17 @@ ACCESSKEY="N" WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="left" VALIGN="top" ->Security levels</TD +>security = domain in Samba 2.x</TD ><TD WIDTH="34%" ALIGN="center" VALIGN="top" -><A -HREF="p1346.html" -ACCESSKEY="U" ->Up</A -></TD +> </TD ><TD WIDTH="33%" ALIGN="right" VALIGN="top" ->Passdb MySQL plugin</TD +>How to Configure Samba 2.2 as a Primary Domain Controller</TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/winbindd.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/winbindd.8.html index 09c3513c70..3aecf62509 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/winbindd.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/winbindd.8.html @@ -38,12 +38,12 @@ NAME="AEN8" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >winbindd</B -> [-i] [-B] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-n]</P +> [-i] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>]</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN16" +NAME="AEN14" ></A ><H2 >DESCRIPTION</H2 @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN59" +NAME="AEN57" ></A ><H2 >OPTIONS</H2 @@ -225,46 +225,13 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >winbindd</B > is required. </P ></DD -><DT ->-n</DT -><DD -><P ->Disable caching. This means winbindd will - always have to wait for a response from the domain controller - before it can respond to a client and this thus makes things - slower. The results will however be more accurate, since - results from the cache might not be up-to-date. This - might also temporarily hang winbindd if the DC doesn't respond. - </P -></DD -><DT ->-B</DT -><DD -><P ->Dual daemon mode. This means winbindd will run - as 2 threads. The first will answer all requests from the cache, - thus making responses to clients faster. The other will - update the cache for the query that the first has just responded. - Advantage of this is that responses are accurate and fast. - </P -></DD -><DT ->-s|--conf=smb.conf</DT -><DD -><P ->Specifies the location of the all-important - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf</TT -> file. </P -></DD ></DL ></DIV ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN85" +NAME="AEN70" ></A ><H2 >NAME AND ID RESOLUTION</H2 @@ -295,7 +262,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN91" +NAME="AEN76" ></A ><H2 >CONFIGURATION</H2 @@ -435,7 +402,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN133" +NAME="AEN118" ></A ><H2 >EXAMPLE SETUP</H2 @@ -586,7 +553,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN172" +NAME="AEN157" ></A ><H2 >NOTES</H2 @@ -644,7 +611,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN188" +NAME="AEN173" ></A ><H2 >SIGNALS</H2 @@ -695,7 +662,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN205" +NAME="AEN190" ></A ><H2 >FILES</H2 @@ -771,18 +738,18 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN234" +NAME="AEN219" ></A ><H2 >VERSION</H2 ><P ->This man page is correct for version 3.0 of +>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of the Samba suite.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN237" +NAME="AEN222" ></A ><H2 >SEE ALSO</H2 @@ -810,7 +777,7 @@ TARGET="_top" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN244" +NAME="AEN229" ></A ><H2 >AUTHOR</H2 |